Copyright: Copyright © Corel Corporation Limited. 1996, 1997.   Tuesday, August 12, 1997 15:50:21. All Rights Reserved.
Citation: Copyright © Corel Corporation Limited. 1996, 1997. %date. All Rights Reserved.


About Getting Information on Corel WordPerfect

Use About Corel WordPerfect to get information about the program and PerfectFit release versions, to quickly find your serial number and PIN number, and to see how much physical memory is installed in your computer.

To view product and license information

To edit your serial number and PIN


About Table Gridlines

Use table gridlines to display tables with dimmed, dotted lines and no fill style. Turn on table gridlines after you have created a table.

Table gridlines are useful to see your table structure when you have turned off the lines. They also speed up the display of your document when you have a number of tables or any heavily formatted tables. However, all tables will print with the lines and fill styles you have selected.

To display or hide table gridlines

Related Concepts


pixel

The smallest dot that can be represented on a computer screen or in a bitmap graphic.


About Macros

A macro is a file that you record and then play back to perform simple or complex tasks. You can record mouse selections and keystrokes, type text, or insert macro commands.

For example, you can record a macro that inserts the closing of a letter. Or you can record a macro that opens a file, moves the insertion point to a specified place, and prompts you to type information.

The simplest way to create a macro is to "record" the keystrokes in Corel WordPerfect. You can also write a macro if you want to include non-recordable tasks (for example, you can define a macro to play until a certain event happens).

To display in-depth information about the Macro feature, macro commands, and macro programming techniques, click Help Topics [image] Contents [image] double-click Macros [image] Macro Programming. If you do not have this macros Help file available, run the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 Setup, select the Custom install, and select WordPerfect Macro Help, one of the components of Corel WordPerfect 8.

To play a macro

To record a macro

To pause a macro you are playing or recording

To edit a macro

Related Concepts


To change how codes are deleted
To change how codes are deleted,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment [image] click Prompts.

2	To make sure you do not delete a code by accident, click Confirm deletion of codes.

3	To make sure you do not accidentally type text over a table formula, click Confirm deletion of table formulas.

Tips

When you select Confirm deletion of codes, you can delete a code if Reveal Codes is on. If it is not, you are prompted to confirm the deletion.

The Confirm deletion of table formulas option can be applied to a table or floating cell.

Related Topics

About Environment Settings


To specify document backup options
To specify document backup options,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files.

2	To make a backup copy of open documents at regular intervals, select Timed document backup, then set a time interval.

3	To keep a copy of the original document each time you save your changes, select Original document backup.

Tips

To display information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To break a link and keep the information in your document
To break a link and keep the information in your document,

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Select the link you want to remove.

3	Click Break Link.

Tips

You can also break a DDE link by deleting the DDE Link codes in Reveal Codes. The information remains in the document.

Related Topics

About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document


About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image

Corel WordPerfect includes tools that let you change the way a graphics image looks. These changes do not alter the original image. They apply only to how the image looks within the graphics box.

To edit the original image, right-click the image [image] click Edit Image.

To change how a graphics image looks

To rotate an image inside a graphics box

To move an image inside a graphics box

To change a graphic to its mirror image

To crop a graphics image using Zoom

To enlarge or reduce an image (Zoom)

To convert a color image to black and white

To adjust contrast in a graphics image

To adjust the brightness of a graphics image

To change the fill in a graphics image

To invert the colors in a graphics image

To create a drawing

To make precise changes to a graphics image

To restore an image to its original appearance

Related Concepts


About Importing Password-Protected Spreadsheet and Database Files

If you import or link to a password-protected Paradox database file, you are prompted for the password.

You must remove the password before you can import or link to it any other password-protected spreadsheet or database file.

Related Concepts


About Message Boxes

Click Help [image] Help Topics to access troubleshooting information or information about using the feature.


To change the line style, color, or fill of selected table cells
To change the line style, color, or fill of selected table cells,

1	Select the cells you want to change.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill.

3	Click Outside of Current Selection or Each Cell in Selection.

4	Click a line style on the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, Inside, or Outside palettes.

5	To turn off a line, click X on the appropriate line palette.

6	Click a color on the Cell lines Color palette.

7	Click a fill style on the Fill palette.

8	Click a color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

Tips

You can also right-click a cell, then click Borders/Fill.

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To delete a link and the linked information
To delete a link and the linked information,

1	Click the linked information (object) you want to remove.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

Tips

You can also delete the [Box:Linked Object] code in Reveal Codes to remove the information and the link.

Related Topics

About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document


About the Property Bar

Use the Property Bar to access frequently used features with the mouse. You can click a Property Bar button to access a drop-down list of features, or you can double-click a button to open the corresponding feature's dialog box.

The Property Bar can display buttons with images only, text only, or both images and text.

Place the mouse pointer over a button to see a description of what a particular Property Bar button does.

To display or hide the Property Bar

To add or delete buttons on the Property Bar

To change the appearance and location of a toolbar or Property Bar

To assign a macro to the Property Bar

Related Concepts


About Footnotes and Endnotes

You can create footnotes, which print at the bottom of the page, or endnotes, which print at the end of the document. To do this you insert a reference number in the text, and that number is linked to the corresponding text in the endnote or footnote. This means you can edit or add notes and Corel WordPerfect updates the notes and reference numbers for you.

Corel WordPerfect also formats footnotes on the page for you, so you don't have to decide how much text to type on the page and still leave room for the footnote.

To create a footnote

To create an endnote

To edit a footnote

To edit an endnote

To start new numbers for footnotes or endnotes

To change the location of endnotes

To change footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes

Related Concepts


To change the icon displayed for linked information
To change the icon displayed for linked information,

1	Click Edit [image] Paste Special.

2	Click Display object as icon in document, then click Change Icon.

3	Change the icon or the text for the specified information.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Inserting Information in a Specific Format


About Uppercase, Lowercase, and Initial Capitals

You can change the current word or selected text to all uppercase or lowercase letters, or to lowercase letters with initial caps.

Lowercase Exceptions

When you convert text to lowercase, the following words remain capitalized:

Words beginning with "I" ("I'm," "I'd," "I've," and so on).

The first word in each sentence

Initial Capitals Exceptions

When you convert text to initial capitals, the first letter of each word is capitalized except articles, prepositions, conjunctions, some pronouns, and other words. To specify additional capitalization exceptions, edit the wt80xx.icr file (where xx is a language code) in \Corel\Suite8\Programs.

To change text to uppercase, lowercase, or initial caps


About Cut, Copy, and Paste

Use Cut with Paste to move selected text or graphics. Use Copy with Paste to copy selected text or graphics and paste the copy in another place.

When you cut or copy information, it is stored in the Clipboard. You can paste it anywhere in the current document, in another document, or in another application. However, it is only available until you cut or copy something else or until you exit Windows.

Another quick way to move text or graphics is to drag them with the mouse.

To cut text or graphics and save to the Clipboard

To copy text and graphics to the Clipboard

To paste text in the same format as text at the insertion point

To paste text or graphics in a document

To add text to the end of the Clipboard contents

To drag and drop text within a document

To drag and drop text to another document

Related Concepts


About Selecting Text

When you need to move or change text, you can use the mouse to quickly select a block of text.

You can also use QuickSelect or the menus to select a word, sentence, paragraph, tabular column, rectangular block, or all of a document.

To select text

To select a word, sentence, or paragraph by clicking the mouse

To select a rectangular block of text

To select a tabular column

To use QuickSelect in a table

To drag and drop text within a document

To drag and drop text to another document

To change whether text is selected by word or by letter

Related Concepts


About Undo and Redo

Use Undo to reverse an editing action. Use Redo to reverse the last Undo action.

You can undo changes made to text, graphics, or tables. However, some actions, such as scrolling or saving a document, cannot be reversed using Undo.

Use Undo/Redo History to reverse up 300 actions in your document. You can save a history of those actions with a document so you can undo or redo actions after closing the document and then opening it again.

To reverse an editing action

To delete text and graphics

To list your previous editing actions

To save the Undo/Redo History with the document

To change the number of items in the Undo/Redo history

Related Concepts


About Changing the View of the Document

You can work with your documents in three view modes: Draft, Page, and Two Pages. In Draft and Page view, you can also use Zoom to change the display size of the text or graphics you are viewing.

Draft View

Draft view attempts to match the fonts you have chosen and displays the document close to the way it will look when printed. Draft view does not display certain document features such as footers, headers, and watermarks although they might exist in the document. Because not all features display, working in Draft view is often faster than working in Page view.

Page View

Page view displays a document the way it will look when printed. Page view displays fonts and appearance features, headers, footers, footnotes, watermarks, rotated text, and label arrangement.

Each time you begin a new page in Page View, Corel WordPerfect creates the entire page. This means that when you insert a hard page break, you can scroll to the bottom of the page even though it is blank.

Two Pages View

Two Pages view offers the same display features as Page View, but without zoom options. It displays two consecutive pages side by side in the same document window.

To change the view of the current document

To enlarge or reduce the page displayed in the window

To change the size of the default document display

Related Concepts


About Showing Format Symbols in a Document

Use Show Symbols to display a symbol wherever there is a space, a hard return, a tab, or an indent in your document. Symbols also display where you use center, flush right, soft hyphen, advance, or center page. Symbols do not print.

To specify which symbols (space, hard return) display on your screen

To display or hide symbols

Related Concepts


About Codes in a Document

Codes are inserted in your document nearly every time you use a Corel WordPerfect feature. For example, when you make text bold, codes surround the word in the Reveal Codes window.

When you use some features, existing codes change or are replaced by other codes. For example, paragraph format codes change when you use a format feature.

You can view, delete, move, and edit codes in the Reveal Codes window. For example, to delete a bold code, you can backspace over it or drag it out of the Reveal Codes window. You can view the contents of a code by positioning the insertion point to the left of the code or by double-clicking the code.

Use Find and Replace to find where specific codes are used, to replace all uses of one code with a different code, or to delete all uses of a code.

To display or hide the Reveal Codes window

To delete codes from your document

To change how codes are deleted

To change how codes are displayed in Reveal Codes

Related Concepts


About New Sort, Edit Sort, or Copy Sort

You can create a new sort definition, edit an existing sort definition, or copy an existing sort definition. If you want to change an existing sort definition but also keep the original definition, use Copy. You can also use the Extract records option to extract records that meet specified criteria.

To create a new sort definition

To edit a sort definition

To copy a sort definition

To sort text alphabetically or numerically

To select records that meet certain criteria (using Sort)

Related Concepts


About Adjusting Page Number Values

When you start a new chapter or section in a document, you can reset the current page, chapter, or volume number.

For example, you can set the chapter number to two and the first page of the new chapter to one.

To reset a page number

To reset a secondary page number

To reset a chapter number

To reset a volume number

To reset the method of numbering total pages

Related Concepts


About Font Code Pages

Different languages use different ASCII or ANSI character sets. To print a non-English alphabet font, you must specify the code page that corresponds to that font.

To use a non-Roman alphabet font

Related Concepts


About Adjusting the Leading Between Lines

You can adjust the amount of leading between lines of text in your document. Leading is the amount of space between the bottom of a line of text and the top of the next line of text.

To adjust the space between lines (leading)

Related Concepts


About Kerning

On the printed page, certain letter pairs appear to have more space between them than others because of the shape and slant of each letter. You can change the kerning between any two letters. Manual kerning adjusts the space only between the two letters on either side of the insertion point. Other occurrences of the letter pair are not affected.

Automatic kerning adjusts the distance between all occurrences of certain letter pairs depending on the font used.

Use Word Spacing and Letterspacing to change the spacing between all letters.

To change the kerning between two letters

To turn Automatic Kerning on or off

To change the amount of spacing between words or letters

Related Concepts


About Baseline Placement for Typesetting

The baseline is the invisible line that characters are aligned on. The exact placement of the baseline is important when all pages of a document need a consistent appearance.

Normally, the top of the first line of text (not the baseline) is even with the top margin. The first baseline is at the bottom of that text, and when different font sizes are used at the top of different pages, the position of the baseline varies from page to page.

When you want the first baseline to remain consistent through all pages of a document, you can set the first baseline at the top margin of the page.

To place the first baseline at the top margin of the page


About Adding the Date and Time in a Document

To add a date and time "stamp" to a document, you can insert the current date/time as text. This text stays the same unless you edit it.

To add the date/time and have it updated each time you open or print the document, you can insert a date code which displays the current date when you open or print the document.

You can choose from several date/time formats, or create a custom format.

To create a custom date/time format

To insert the date and time

To customize a date/time type for a table

The wrong date is displayed.

Related Concepts


About Inserting Filenames in a Document

You can insert the filename (or the path and filename) of the current document into text, headers, footers, and comments.

If the document has never been saved, a code will be inserted, but the filename (or path and filename) will not be displayed until you save the document.

To insert a document's filename in text

Related Concepts


About OLE Automation

You can include text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, video clips or any file type created by an OLE or DDE compliant application in your Corel WordPerfect documents. An OLE object can be linked or embedded, while DDE objects can only be linked.

When you link information, the information continues to reside in the source file. A copy of the same information exists in your Corel WordPerfect document. When you change the information in the source application, it automatically changes in the WordPerfect document. This way you can easily keep both files updated.

When you embed an object, you make a copy of the object and insert it in your document. You can edit the embedded object without changing the information in the original object.

Links are updated automatically unless you specify manual updating in Link Options. This is useful if you want more control over what information appears in your document.

You can double-click most objects to edit them within your Corel WordPerfect document.

Related Concepts


About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document

OLE Automation is a Windows 95 feature that lets products work together. With OLE automation, one application can access parts of another application. Corel WordPerfect 8 is OLE Automation-enabled.

Related Concepts


About Centering Text

Centering Text Horizontally

Centered text is aligned exactly between the left and right margins. You can center:

A single line of text

Selected text

All text from the insertion point forward

A single line of text with dot leaders from the margin to the beginning of the text

Part of a line of text, with text at the left margin on the same line

Centering Text Vertically

You can center text between the top and bottom margins of the current page only, or the current and succeeding pages. Headers, footers, and footnotes remain in their normal positions at the top and bottom of the page. Endnotes are centered with the text.

You can also add the Center Page button to your toolbar.

To center text with dot leaders

To center a line of text

To center several lines of text

To center text vertically

To center text at the insertion point

Related Concepts


About Right-Aligning Text

Flush Right aligns, or justifies, text at the right margin. You can turn on Flush Right and type the text, or you can select text and turn on Flush Right to align it. You can also move part of a line to the right margin, and you can insert dot leaders between text at the left margin and text that is flush right.

To right-align text with dot leaders

To right-align a line of text

Related Concepts


About DDE Execute

DDE Execute is a Windows feature that lets products work together. Products using DDE can trade information or one application can instruct another to perform specific tasks.

To use DDE Execute you need to refer to:

The Corel WordPerfect Macros Help file for information on the DDEInitiate(), DDEExecute(), and DDETerminate() programming commands.

The documentation for the other Windows application. The information you need includes the service (application) name, topic name, and list of commands the application will accept through DDE Execute.

Sending Commands to Other Windows Applications

Using DDE you can create Corel WordPerfect macros that send commands to control other applications running under Windows. For example, you can create a macro that launches a spreadsheet application, loads a file, and copies a range of cells to a table in Corel WordPerfect.

Sending Commands to Corel WordPerfect

Other applications can also use DDE Execute to control Corel WordPerfect. The application must first initiate a DDE conversation using the service (application) name of "WPWin8_Macros" and topic name of "Commands". Before terminating the conversation, the application can send DDE Execute strings made up of one or more WordPerfect macro commands. Note that Corel WordPerfect accepts only product commands, not programming commands. These product commands cannot contain variables or expressions. See the Corel WordPerfect Macros Help file for a list of product commands and descriptions.

Other applications can also send commands to Corel WordPerfect as a DDE Request item in order to receive a string representing the command's return value. The application must send the DDE Execute string or DDE Request  item in ANSI text format. Corel WordPerfect returns the DDE Request result as an ANSI text string. If either a DDE Execute string or a DDE Request item returns an error, the application can send a DDE Request on the item "LastCmdError" to find out what error occurred. This item will return an ANSI text string containing a three-digit errorcode and a description of the error.

DDE Execute Application Names, Services, and Topics

Application	Service, Topic
WPWin	WPWin8_Macros, PS3Commands
Envoy	Envoy, System
Presentations	WPPresentations, Command
Quattro Pro	QPW, <full path and filename of open notebook>
GroupWise	GroupWise, Command
Envoy acts as a server for DDE Execute, but not a client. This means that you can use DDE Execute in products to send commands to Envoy, but you cannot use DDE Execute in Envoy to send commands to other products.

Related Concepts


About Close and Exit

Use Close to exit the current document.

Use Exit to exit all open documents and then exit Corel WordPerfect.

When you close or exit a document, a message box prompts you to save any changes you have made to the document.

Corel WordPerfect can also make backup copies of your documents. This ensures that your work is saved if you mistakenly exit without saving a document.

To close the current document window

To exit Corel WordPerfect

To specify document backup options

Related Concepts


About Indent

Use Indent to move a complete paragraph one tab stop to the right. Use Hanging Indent to move all but the first line of a paragraph one tab stop to the right. Use Double Indent to move an entire paragraph in one tab stop from both the left and right margins. Use a Back Tab to move one line of text to the left one tab setting.

A hanging indent is often used to format bibliography entries. A double indent is often used to format lengthy quotations.

The width of each indent is determined by the current tab settings.

Tab Compared to Indent

A Tab moves just one line of text. An indent moves all the lines in a paragraph.

To indent the first line of every paragraph automatically

To use QuickIndent

To indent text

To indent text from both margins

To insert a hanging indent

To move text forward or backward using a tab

Related Concepts


About Justifying Text

Justification is the process of lining up text to the left or right on each line. You can align text on the left or right margins or center text between the margins.

There are two ways to spread out text between the margins. Full Justification adds space between words to spread text to both margins. All Justification adds space between words and letters. Use All Justification to space the letters of a short heading to both margins.

To justify text

To adjust spacing between words in fully justified text

Related Concepts


About Types of Graphics You Can Insert

You can insert any image, drawing, photograph, or chart into a graphic box. You can use the Clipart images that come with Corel WordPerfect, or you can create your own images using graphics programs, screen capture programs, and scanners. You can also place equations, tables, text, and OLE objects inside a graphic box.

WordPerfect includes a Scrapbook that lets you insert .WPG Clipart images into your document by clicking Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart. To insert photos, bitmaps, and other types of images, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

Once you have inserted a box, you can easily move and size it, change how text wraps around it, and add a caption to it.

To scan images into Corel WordPerfect

To insert clipart

To add text in a graphics box

To insert a chart

To link to an image on disk

Related Concepts


To join two tables
To join two tables,

1	If the two tables are separated by text, move the text so that the second table immediately follows the first table. Both tables need to have the same number of columns.

2	Click View [image] Reveal Codes, then delete all hard return codes and any other codes between the [Tbl Off] code of the first table and the [Tbl Def] code of the second table.

3	Click in the first table.

4	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Join [image] Table.

Tips

The second table acquires the format of the first table, except for any individually formatted cells.

About Joining and Splitting Tables


About Creating Equations

Create and edit mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions, then include them in your documents. An equation or expression can be composed of numbers, letters, commands, symbols, and mathematical functions.

Corel WordPerfect includes two Equation Editors: the new Corel WordPerfect 8 Equation Editor, and the old Equation Editor used in version 5.1 through 7. When you create an equation, the new Equation Editor is used by default. However, if you want to edit equations using previous versions of WordPerfect, use the old Equation Editor.

The Equation Editor does not solve equations for you. Rather, it creates graphic representations of equation and expressions.

About the Corel WordPerfect 8 Equation Editor

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor

To select which equation editor to use

Related Concepts


About Master Documents and Subdocuments

It is easier to maintain several small documents than one large document. For example, rather than writing a book in one document, you can create a separate document for each chapter.

A master document is a document that contains links to other documents called subdocuments.

From a master document, you can open, edit, and save subdocuments. You can also put introductory material, such as a title page and table of contents, in the master document. You can generate lists or indexes in the master document. For example, when the master document is expanded (all subdocuments are open) you generate the index from the index marks contained in the subdocuments. The index stays in the master document.

To add a subdocument to a master document

To open subdocuments in a master document

To close subdocuments in a master document

To remove a subdocument from a master document

Related Concepts


To specify where backup files are stored
To specify where backup files are stored,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files.

2	Specify the folder in which backup files are saved.

Tip

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


About Triggering Macros from Templates

You can play a macro as you use a template. To do this, record a template macro, then associate the macro with a trigger to start the macro.

For example, if you use a template to create letters, you can set a PRE PRINT trigger in the template that runs a spell-check macro. The macro then lets you spell-check your letters just before they print.

You can use the following macro triggers:

POST CLOSE

Runs a macro in the window that is active after you close another window.

POST NEW

Runs a macro after you open a window by clicking File [image] New or Open.

POST OPEN

Runs a macro after you open a window by clicking File [image] Open.

POST PRINT

Runs a macro after a print job is sent to the printer.

POST STARTUP

Runs a macro associated with the default template when you start Corel WordPerfect.

POST SWITCH DOC

Runs a macro in the current window after you switch from another window that has already been opened.

POST TABLES

Runs a macro after you create a table structure in the document but before you can enter any data in the table.

PRE CLOSE

Runs a macro before you close the current window by clicking File [image] Close.

PRE NEW

Runs a macro in the current window before you open another window by clicking File [image] Open or New.

PRE OPEN

Runs a macro in the current window before you open another window by clicking File [image] Open.

PRE PRINT

Runs a macro after you click File [image] Print but before the print job is generated.

PRE SWITCH DOC

Runs a macro in the current window before you switch to another window that has already been opened.

PRE TABLES

Runs a macro after you insert a table by clicking Insert [image] Table, but before the table structure is created in the current window.

To use a macro trigger in a template

To associate features with toolbars, menus, and keyboards

Related Concepts


To edit an equation
To edit an equation,

1	Double-click the equation.

2	Use Equation Editor to modify the equation.

3	To save your changes and return to the document, click File [image] Close.

Tips

To start Equation Editor, you can also right-click an equation, then click Edit Equation.

You cannot edit an equation that has been saved as a text file or as a graphic (.wpg image).

To see how the equation looks in the display window, click View [image] Redisplay.

Related Topics

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


About Equation Palettes

Use an equation palette to create or edit equations. Equation palettes contain common symbols used in equations. You can choose from eight palettes on the Equation Palette pop-up list.

Commands equation palette

Large equation palette

Symbols equation palette

Greek equation palette

Arrows equation palette

Sets equation palette

Other equation palette

Function equation palette

To select an equation palette

Related Concepts


To change the font appearance (bold, italic, etc.)
To change the font appearance (bold, italic, etc.),

1	To use bold, italic, or underline, click [image] [image] or [image] on the Property Bar.

2	To use double underline, outline, shadow, small cap, redline, or strikeout, click Format [image] Font, then select an option in the Appearance group box.

3	Type the text.

4	To turn off an appearance attribute, click the Property Bar button again, or deselect the option in the Font dialog box.

Tips

You can select the text first and then click the Property Bar button or the option in the Font dialog box.

To turn bold, italic, or underline on or off, you can also press Ctrl+B, Ctrl+I, or Ctrl+U.

To create hidden text, select the text first, then click Hidden in the Font dialog box.

You can add buttons to the toolbar for any of the font attributes or for the Font dialog box.

Related Topics

About Fonts


About Comparing Documents

You can compare the current version of a document with an earlier version to see what changes have been made. Deleted text is displayed as strikeout text. Added and moved text is displayed as redline text.

After comparing documents, you can restore the current document to the way it looked before the comparison. You can also remove the deleted (strikeout) text but retain the redline attribute for text that has been added or moved.

To compare a document with an earlier version

To remove document comparison markings

To change the printed appearance of redlined text

Related Concepts


About Toolbars and Menus

Use the toolbars and menus to access the features available in Corel WordPerfect. The toolbar, Property Bar, Ruler, and menu display at the top of the document window. The Application Bar displays at the bottom. QuickMenus display when you right-click an object.

You can choose from several standard toolbars, customize some of the toolbars and menus to create faster access for the features you use most, or turn them off so you can see more of your document.

The buttons available on the Property Bar change according to your mouse position. For example, different Property Bars exist for editing text, graphics, or tables. You can change which buttons appear on the Property Bar, but you cannot change the context in which a Property Bar appears. Other toolbars display only when you use a specific feature, such as when you are creating indexes, merge files, sound clips, or macros. To access feature toolbar buttons with the keyboard, press Alt+Shift+x, where x is the mnemonic on the button.

To see a description of a bar button or item, move the mouse pointer over the button to display a QuickTip. Right-click a bar to quickly display a list of available bars and editing options.

To select which toolbars display

To hide all toolbars and menus

Related Concepts


About the Ruler

Use the Ruler to change page format elements. You can drag the markers on the Ruler to change left and right margins, column width, table column width, and paragraph format.

Left/Right Margins

Drag the outside markers at the end of white space to change margins.

Paragraph Format

Drag the inside triangles at each end of white space to adjust paragraphs.

Column Width

Drag the column markers inside white space to change column width.

Table Column Width

Drag the table column markers inside white space to change table width.

Tab Settings

Drag the tab markers (triangles) to change tabs.

To display or hide the Ruler

To change tab settings using the Ruler or tab bar

To change side margins from the Ruler

To adjust column spacing

To adjust column widths

To specify an exact table column width

To change how the Ruler appears

Related Concepts


About the Application Bar

Use the Application Bar to display and access information about open documents and the state of Corel WordPerfect. When you open a document, a button appears on the Application Bar. You can use these buttons to quickly switch between the documents you have open, or to drag information from one document to another.

For example, you can select text in one document, drag it down to the Application Bar, and point to another document button. When that document displays, drag the selected text to its new position in the document.

You can specify what information appears on the Application Bar by changing its settings. Items you can use include the current font, date, time, and printer. The general status option displays information about the context of your insertion point and changes to display information about merges, macros, tables, columns, Insert/Typeover mode, or the style in effect at the insertion point.

With the Application Bar settings you can also arrange the options in the order you want them to appear, add or delete items, or change the font on the Application Bar. (Click Related Concepts below for information about changing settings.)

You can also quickly move items on the Application Bar by holding down the Alt key as you drag the item to a new position. For some items, you can change an icon to text, or text to an icon, by double-clicking the item.

To display or hide the Application Bar

To access information from the Application Bar

To add information to the Application Bar

Related Concepts


To display or hide graphics (lines, images, and boxes) in the window
To display or hide graphics (lines, images, and boxes) in the window,

1	Click View [image] Graphics.

Tips

Graphics are viewed when this option has a check mark next to it.

About Changing the View of the Document


About Importing and Linking Spreadsheet and Database Information

Use the Spreadsheet/Database option to import and link information from a spreadsheet file or a database file into a Corel WordPerfect document. You can import the information as a table, as text, or as a merge data file.

When you import a spreadsheet or database, the information is copied from the spreadsheet or database file one time only. When you link spreadsheet or database information, you can update the information in your document to keep it current with changes in the original file.

To create a link with other Windows applications such as graphics applications, use DDE and OLE links.

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

To import or link to a spreadsheet or database

To select specific database fields to import or link

To change a spreadsheet or database link

To update a spreadsheet or database link manually

To update a spreadsheet or database link when you open the document

To hide spreadsheet or database link icons

To link or embed selected information

Related Concepts


About Document and Application Windows

An application runs in a window. Documents are created in windows within the application.  Depending on available memory, you can run multiple applications and work on multiple documents. The following table lists keyboard shortcuts for using document and application windows.

Keystroke	Action
Alt+F4	Closes applications and dialog boxes
Ctrl+F4	Closes the current document window
Alt+Spacebar	Opens the application Control menu
Alt+-	Opens the document Control menu
Alt+Escape	Cycles through open applications and icons
Alt+Tab	Cycles through open applications
Ctrl+F6	Displays previous document
Ctrl+Shift+F6	Displays next document
Ctrl+Escape	Displays the Windows 95 Start menu
You can add toolbar buttons that perform many of these functions. Edit your toolbar and select buttons from the Window feature category. Available buttons let you move between windows, display multiple document windows, and move or size document and application windows.

To switch between documents

To display document windows side by side

To display document windows top to bottom

To display document windows overlapping each other

To minimize a document window

To maximize a document window

To restore a document window to its previous size

To size a document window

To move a document window

To close the current document window

Related Concepts


About Hiding Text

Use Hidden Text to conceal portions of your document. The hidden text appears only in Reveal Codes until you display it.

When text is hidden, it does not print as part of the document. For example, you might use hidden text to create a test with the answers concealed. You can print the tests, then display the hidden text (the answers) and print the same document as an answer key.

To create hidden text

To create hidden text from existing text

To convert hidden text to document text

To display hidden text

To hide hidden text

To print hidden text

Related Concepts


About QuickWords

There are two ways to type abbreviations that expand into longer text or text with formatting and graphics.

Use QuickWords for abbreviations that include formatting, such as columns, borders, graphic boxes, or various font attributes. These abbreviations automatically expand when you press Enter, Tab, or Spacebar. You can expand these abbreviations as formatted or plain text. Plain text includes tabs and hard returns but not font attributes or other formatting. You can use as many as two words in your abbreviation.

You can also expand abbreviations as you type them with QuickCorrect. You can define a few characters as a word to "correct" and QuickCorrect replaces them with a longer word or phrase. For more information, click Related Topics below.

To create QuickWords for text with formatting codes

To change the text a QuickWord represents

To expand QuickWords

To delete a QuickWord

To rename a QuickWord

Related Concepts


document template

A document with a set of predefined format elements and editing tools. Open a template file, use it to create a document, then save the file with a new name. A template can include styles, macros, toolbars, custom menus, keyboards, and so on.


About Advancing Text to a Different Position

Use Advance to place text a certain distance relative to the insertion point or to place text at a specific (or absolute) position on a page.

One common use of Advance is to print information on preprinted forms.

To advance a certain distance from the insertion point

To advance to an absolute position on the page

Related Concepts


About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks

You can mark a place in a document so you can return to that location quickly. You can create a number of bookmarks and locate them by name, or you can set a QuickMark. You can set only one QuickMark, and you are always returned to the place where it was set last when you use Find QuickMark.

You can also associate a bookmark with selected text. When you return to the bookmark, the text is selected again.

To create and insert a bookmark

To set a QuickMark

To find a bookmark

To find a QuickMark

To move a bookmark or QuickMark

To delete a bookmark or QuickMark

To rename a bookmark

To save your place in each document you save

To move the insertion point to a specific place using Go To


About Borders and Fill (Shading)

You can add borders around a paragraph, page, or column. You can also add shading, a pattern, or a gradient fill style to the space inside the borders.

You can also change the border for graphics boxes and drop caps. To edit borders or fills, use Graphic Styles.

To add a border to a graphics box

To add a border to a column

To add a border to a page

To add a border to a paragraph

To add shading to a column

To add shading to a page

To add shading to a paragraph

To edit the border of a graphics box

To edit the fill (shading) in a graphics box

To turn off a paragraph, column, or page border

Related Concepts


About Adding a Caption to a Graphics Box

You can add a caption to any graphics box. A caption identifies the graphic (such as a picture, chart, or table). Captions usually appear below the graphic and can be numbered.

Corel WordPerfect automatically numbers captions. Each box type has a sequence of numbers (for example, all figure boxes are numbered in sequence). This lets you generate lists of figures, charts, equations, or other graphics. You can delete caption numbers and can also change the numbering style.

You can change the position of captions, rotate them, adjust their size, and use text editing features such as fonts, line spacing, and cut and paste.

To change a graphics box caption's position

To edit the text of a graphics box caption

To add a caption to a graphic

To change a graphics box caption's width

To create multilevel numbering in captions

To rotate a graphics box caption

To change a graphics box caption's numbering style

Related Concepts


About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page

When you insert a graphics box, the box is attached to a place on a page. However, as you add or delete text, the box may move to a different page.

You determine how the box moves by where you attach it. You can make sure a box stays on the page where you put it. You can attach a box to a paragraph so it moves with the paragraph. You can also make it a character in a line so it moves with the text in the line.

It is easiest to move a graphics box by dragging it to a new place. You can also use measurements to place the box in an exact position.

To move a graphics box

To keep a graphics box on a page

To attach a box to a character

To attach a box to a page

To attach a box to a paragraph

To position a graphics box in columns precisely

Related Concepts


About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box

When you insert an image, two elements are placed in the document: a graphics box and the image inside the box. You can use Corel Presentations to edit the image itself, or you can edit the box in which the image is placed.

You can add special effects to the graphics box, such as borders and shading, captions, and box size and position. You can also change how text wraps around the box, change the content of the box, and use image tools to change how the image appears inside the box.

Once a box looks the way you want, use QuickFormat to copy the box's formatting to other graphics boxes.

To add a border to a graphics box

To wrap text around an image

To move a graphics box

To add a caption to a graphic

To change the contents of a graphics box

To size a graphics box

To size a graphics box with specific measurements

To keep an image from becoming distorted

To change the way a graphics box looks

Related Concepts


About Graphics Styles

Graphics are formatted with styles, which include the content and appearance of:

Boxes, including image boxes, text boxes, equation boxes, and so on

Borders for paragraphs, columns, and pages

Graphics lines

Background shading and patterns (fill)

You can use the styles included with Corel WordPerfect or create your own.

To create a new graphics style by copying an existing style

To rename a graphics style

To delete a graphics style

To restore a graphics style to its default appearance

To retrieve a graphics styles file

To save a graphics styles file

Related Concepts


About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings

You can customize a toolbar, Property Bar, keyboard, or menu to provide quick access to the features and macros you use most. Use Settings to select, create, edit, copy, rename, and delete toolbars, keyboards, and menus.

Note that when you edit Property Bars, you can add items to the bar but you cannot change the context in which it appears.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To specify toolbar, Property Bar, keyboard, or menu settings

To select a different toolbar, menu, or keyboard

To change the appearance and location of a toolbar or Property Bar

To create a toolbar, menu, or keyboard

To edit a toolbar, Property Bar, menu, or keyboard

To copy a toolbar, menu, or keyboard to another template

To delete a toolbar, menu, or keyboard

To rename a toolbar, menu, or keyboard

To associate a template with toolbars, menus, and keyboards

Related Concepts


About Calculating Tables

Use Calculate to calculate the formulas in the current table or in all the tables and floating cells throughout the entire document.

To calculate table formulas automatically

To calculate formulas in a table

To calculate all tables in a document

To quickly add values in a table

To get more information about table formula errors

To create a formula in a table or floating cell

Related Concepts


About Hiding All Toolbars and Menus

Use Hide Bars to remove the toolbar, Property Bar, Ruler, Application Bar, scroll bar, and menus from your document window. This also maximizes the document on the screen so you can view more of the document.

To hide all toolbars and menus

To restore the menus and toolbars

To select which toolbars display

Related Concepts


About Columns

Use Columns to divide text vertically on a page. You can use four types of columns.

Newspaper

Flows text down a column to the bottom of a page or column break, then continues it at the top of the next column to the right.

Balanced Newspaper

Adjusts newspaper columns so that columns are of equal length.

Parallel

Groups columns across the page in rows, or starts subsequent rows below the longest column of the previous row. Parallel columns are useful for scripts, charts, or lists.

Parallel with Block Protect

Keeps all rows of the columns together across page breaks.

To insert clipart

To start columns

To move the insertion point to the next column

To turn columns off

To adjust column spacing

To delete columns

To adjust column widths

To insert a vertical line between columns

To add a border to a column

To add shading to a column

To convert tabular or parallel columns to a table

Related Concepts


About Adding Comments in a Document

Add annotations to document text, footnotes, endnotes, and outlines with the Comment feature. Comments contain text and some formatting codes, such as fonts, justification, margins, and tabs.

By default, comments do not print with the document. However, they can be quickly converted to text in the document and then printed.

In Draft view, comments display as shaded text within the main text of your document. In Page view and Two Pages view, comments display as icons in the left margin. If you have specified user initials and a user color in Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment, each comment icon is a rectangular box containing those initials and that color. Otherwise, comment icons display as [image]. You can click a comment icon to display the comment text.

To add a comment to a document

To edit a comment

To delete a comment

To view a comment in Page or Two Pages view mode

To view information about a comment (author, creation date, etc.)

To hide comments

To convert text to a comment

To convert a comment to text

To print a comment

Related Concepts


About Counter Numbering

Corel WordPerfect uses several built-in counters to keep track of pages, paragraphs, lines, figures, and other numbered items in your document. When these predefined numbering styles do not meet your needs, you can use counters to define your own set of incrementing numbers.

There are three basic steps to using counters:

Create the counter style. For example, you can specify the level (such as I, i, or a) or numbering method (numbers, letters, or roman numerals).

Specify where you want the numbers to increase or decrease. This step usually involves setting the initial counter value to 0.

Specify where you want to display the numbers.

To create a counter for chapter titles

To create multilevel numbering in captions

To create a counter to number items in a document

To insert a counter number in your document

To decrease or increase the value of a counter

To set the value and numbering method for counters

Related Concepts


About Data Files for Merges

To create a merge, you merge a form document with a data source such as a data file, the Address Book, or keyboard input.

When you use the Address Book as your data source, you do not have to set up a data file. You can select records from the Address Book and merge them directly to letters, envelopes, labels, and so forth. Using the Address Book, you can use the same data source with other Corel WordPerfect features such as templates.

When you use a data file as your data source, you can create either a data text file or a data table file. No matter which one you choose, data file information is organized into records and fields. For example, a record may include a name, address, and related information. Each item within that record is a field. For example, the last name may be one field.

When you create a data text file, records and fields are marked by ENDFIELD and ENDRECORD codes. When you create a data table file, fields and records are arranged in columns and rows.

You can also retrieve files from other formats and use them as data files in Corel WordPerfect. You can retrieve a database file, a spreadsheet file, an ODBC data source, an ASCII delimited text file, or a data file in another format.

To merge using the Address Book

To create a data file for a merge

To change a table to a data text file for a merge

To change Address Books to merge data files

To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry

To edit a merge data text file manually

To edit a merge data file's field names

To edit fields in a data table

To edit records in a data table

Related Concepts


About Form Documents for Merges

When you use Merge, you usually create a form document to control the merged output. The form document can be made up of text, formatting, graphics, and merge codes.

This means that you create the form document just like you would a regular document. But instead of placing specific information in certain places, you insert a field or code which is replaced by information from the data source when you perform the merge.

After creating the form document, you merge it with a data source such as a data file, an address book, or keyboard input.

When you merge envelopes only, you do not need to create the form document.

To create a form document for a merge

To insert merge codes

To perform a keyboard merge

To merge using the Address Book

To merge envelopes

To merge labels

To merge into a table

To display or hide merge codes

To change a merge file into a regular document

Related Concepts


About Creating or Editing a List Definition

A list definition specifies the type of page numbering and style you want in the list.

To create a list definition

To edit a list definition

To change the page numbering format for a list

Related Concepts


To create a basic merge
To create a basic merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge.

2	To create a data file to use as your data source, click Create Data and create the file. If you want to use the Address Book click [image].

3	To create a form document for the merge, click Create Document and create the file.

4	After creating a data source and form document, click Merge on the Merge toolbar, then specify the location of the form file, data source, and output file.

5	To merge selected records only, click Select Records, then specify the records you want.

6	Specify other merge options, then click Merge.

Related Topics

About Merge


About QuickStyle

Use QuickStyle to create a paragraph style containing all the formatting codes and font attributes in an existing paragraph. You can also use QuickStyle to create a character style containing all the font attributes (such as Bold and 12pt) of text in your document.

To create a QuickStyle

Related Concepts


About Creating or Editing a Table of Authorities Definition

Use Create or Edit Table of Authorities to create or edit a table of authorities section definition. A table of authorities section definition specifies the type of page numbering, underlining, and style you want in each section of the table of authorities.

To create a table of authorities section definition

To edit a table of authorities section definition

Related Concepts


About Predefined Graphics Box Styles

There are fourteen predefined graphics box styles. These define the look of borders, background, corners, and color in different box types. These styles are described below.

Image

Used with clip art images, charts, logos, or drawings. It does not have borders so you can contour text around the image in the box.

Figure

Also used with images. However, it has a hairline border.

OLE 2.0 Box

Used with OLE objects (such as images). It does not have borders.

Watermark

Used to add a background image behind the text on the page. It has no borders.

Text Box

Used to separate text from the main document, such as for quotes and sidebars. It has thick borders on the top and bottom of the box.

Table

Used for tables, spreadsheets, statistical data, or text. It has thick borders on the top and bottom of the box.

Equation

Used with mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions. The box extends the full width of the page or column. It has no borders.

Inline Equation

Used to insert an equation or expression in a line of text. It has no borders and is anchored as a character.

Inline Text

Used to insert text (in a box) in another line of text. It has no borders and is anchored as a character.

Button

Used to create a box that looks like a raised button, similar to buttons in dialog boxes. It can contain text or graphics, and is often used to mark hyperlink jumps. It is anchored as a character.

User

Used for any graphic (clip art images, drawings, charts, text, equations, or tables). It has no borders.

Draw Object

Similar to Image box that wraps behind text (like a watermark) and no caption counter.

Draw Object Text

Similar to Draw Object with content set to text. This box is commonly used for grouping text with a draw object.

Sticky Note Text

Box that resembles a sticky note with a yellow background, covering everything beneath it.

To use a custom graphics box style

To create or edit a custom box style

Related Concepts


About the Color Palette

Use the color palette to create and select colors for fonts, highlighting, and graphics. Color printing requires a color printer. Black and white printers print colors in shades of gray.

Basic Palette Colors

The default color palette consists of 256 colors. You can edit, delete, or create new colors on the default palette.

Editing and Creating New Colors

Three methods of editing existing colors or creating new colors are available in the Model drop-down list: RGB, HLS, and CMYK. The method selected determines the options available in the Color model boxes.

Clicking different areas of the luminosity bar also changes the color appearance.

The resulting color is displayed in the Current color box.

 	To create colors with the color wheel

To create colors using color models (RGB, HLS, CYMK)

Related Concepts


About Indexes

Creating an index involves four tasks:

Mark the text with headings and optional subheadings

Mark where you want the index to appear and define how you want it to look

Generate the index to insert entries and page numbers where you defined the index

Edit the index

You can include concordance entries in your index.

You should make all but the final index editing changes by marking text and deleting codes rather than editing the generated index. Changes made to the generated index are not saved if you generate the index again.

You can add the Index and Index Define buttons to your toolbar.

To mark text for an index

To mark where you want an index and define how it looks

To generate an index

To create a concordance file for an index

To change the current index style

To change the page numbering format for an index

Related Concepts


About Index or Table of Contents Styles

Use Index or Table of Contents Styles to change the style used for index and table of contents entries.

To mark where you want an index and define how it looks

To change the current table of contents style

To change the current index style

Related Concepts


About Page Number Format

You can choose the style of page numbers you insert in your index, list, table of contents, or table of authorities.

To change the page numbering format for an index

To change the page numbering format for a table of authorities

To change the page numbering format for a table of contents

To change the page numbering format for a list

Related Concepts


About Selecting Specific Database Information to Link to or Import

Use Query if you are importing a database and you want to import or link to specific information.

For example, you can import all the records of people with the last name of Jones who live in the state of Arizona.

To select specific database fields to import or link

To use examples of selected records when merging

Related Concepts


About Defining a List or a Table of Authorities

Use Define List or Define Table of Authorities to choose a list or table of authorities section definition. A list definition specifies the type of page numbering and style you want in the list. A table of authorities section definition specifies the type of page numbering, underlining, and style you want in each section of the table of authorities.

You can also create, edit, delete, or retrieve a list or table of authorities section definition.

To change the page numbering format for a list

To change the current list style

To create a list definition

To change the page numbering format for a table of authorities

To change the current table of authorities style

To create a table of authorities section definition

Related Concepts


About Delay Codes

Use Delay Codes to insert codes that take effect after a specified number of pages. (If on page 3, you delay a code by two pages, the code takes effect on page 5.) You can delay any open code or a graphic.

For example, if you use letterhead for the first page of your document and use normal paper for the rest of the document, you can set the page size for all pages at the beginning of your document. After you set up the first page size, then you can place a second page size in Delay Codes.

To insert a delay code

To edit a delay code

To turn off a header, footer, watermark, or page number

Related Concepts


About Changing How the Document Displays

Use Display Settings to change how the document window looks on your screen.

For example, you can specify how items such as tables, graphics, and merge codes appear in the document window, and can specify whether scroll bars appear on the document window.

To turn off the shadow cursor

To change settings that affect the document window

To specify which symbols (space, hard return) display on your screen

To change the size of the default document display

To change how codes are displayed in Reveal Codes

To change how the Ruler appears

To change how merge codes appear

Related Concepts


About Character Maps for Non-Roman Languages

You can use a character map to reduce document size when you edit documents in non-Roman alphabets such as Greek, Cyrillic, or Hebrew. After you have installed a language module or Corel WordPerfect package for one of these languages, you can use Character Mapping to select that language as the character map for the current document.

To select a character map for all new documents, select the character map in the Current Document Style, or save the selection to the template you use for that language.

To select a document character map

To create the default format for the current document

To edit a WordPerfect template

Related Concepts


About Document Summary Settings

Use Document Summary Settings to create parts of the document summary automatically and to specify whether you are prompted to create a summary for each document.

You can also use existing document summaries to automatically create more descriptive filenames for your documents. Previous versions of DOS and some versions of Windows are limited to filenames with eight characters and a three-letter extension, such as "4QRPT.WPD". However, current versions of Windows allow longer filenames that can provide more information about a document such as "My 4th Quarter Report.wpd".

To rename a file using the descriptive filename

To automate parts of the document summary

Related Concepts


About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document

You can include text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, video clips or any file type created by an OLE or DDE compliant application in your Corel WordPerfect documents. An OLE object can be linked or embedded, while DDE objects can only be linked.

When you link information, the information continues to reside in the source file. A copy of the same information exists in your Corel WordPerfect document. When you change the information in the source application, it automatically changes in the WordPerfect document. This way you can easily keep both files updated.

When you embed an object, you make a copy of the object and insert it in your document. You can edit the embedded object without changing the information in the original object.

Links are updated automatically unless you specify manual updating in Link Options. This is useful if you want more control over what information appears in your document.

You can double-click most objects to edit them within your Corel WordPerfect document.

To link or embed selected information

To change the source of a linked object

To update the information in a linked object

To break a link and keep the information in your document

To delete a link and the linked information

Related Concepts


To create or edit a label definition
To create or edit a label definition,

1	Click Format [image] Labels [image] Create or Edit.

2	Type a description and select the type of labels (Laser or Tractor-fed).

3	To change the paper size, click Change. Select a paper size or specify the page dimensions, select a paper source, the font orientation, and, if needed, printing adjustments, then click OK.

4	Define how the labels are arranged on the paper by choosing from the other options on the dialog.

Tips

If you get an error message, you need to change some options. Make sure the label size multiplied by the labels per page does not exceed the label sheet size. Or, check to see if the distance between labels or top left label amounts are too big.

About Labels


About Font Mapping

Use font mapping to:

Change the fonts that are automatically substituted when you change font attributes, sizes, and character maps.

Display a document in a different font, style, or size than is used to print it.

Specify a replacement font when a certain font is not available on the printer.

Specify a code page for non-English alphabet fonts.

To change document font substitutions

To change display font settings

To use a non-Roman alphabet font

To change replacement font settings

Related Concepts


About Endnote Formatting Options

Use Endnote Options to change the format of the endnotes. For example, you can change the endnote number to a character, specify the format for the endnote number, or set the amount of space between endnotes.

To change the spacing between footnotes or endnotes

To change footnote or endnote numbers to characters

To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in document text

To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in the notes

Related Concepts


About Creating Envelopes

Use Envelope to create an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing addresses you specify. You can use the addresses in the Address Book.

To create an envelope, you must have a printer selected and an available envelope paper definition for that printer.

You can use Merge to create multiple envelopes with the same return address but different mailing addresses.

To create an envelope

To insert a POSTNET bar code on an envelope

To change the position of the addresses on an envelope

To create a non-standard envelope definition

Related Concepts


About Environment Settings

Use Environment Settings to make it easier to work in Corel WordPerfect. For example, you can change how the mouse selects text, how menus are displayed, when Corel WordPerfect beeps, or which equation editor opens by default.

To change the user information for comments and document summaries

To change the language Corel WordPerfect runs in

To specify when beeps should alert you to errors

To save how your workspace looks when you restart Corel WordPerfect

To change whether the menus display shortcut keys

To turn off QuickTips

To specify how often you are prompted to hyphenate words

To change how codes are deleted

To change whether text is selected by word or by letter

To save your place in each document you save

To activate all hyperlinks

To reformat documents for the default printer

To specify code page settings

Related Concepts


To use examples of selected records when merging
To use examples of selected records when merging,

When you select merge records, you can specify a single value, a list of values, or a range of values. You can also use values to exclude records, or use wildcard characters and logical operators to specify or exclude values.

Values	Example
Single Value	Utah
List of Values	Utah;Hawaii;California
Range of Values	Ohio-Utah
Exclude Values	!Utah (not Utah)
Zero or More Characters	U-* (from U to the end of the alphabet)
One Character Wildcard	J??n (4-letter words beginning with J, ending with n, with any two letters between)
About Selecting Merge Records


About Files Settings

Use Files Settings to specify where certain types of files are stored and to set backup options. The folders you specify in Files Settings can be added to Favorites so you can quickly locate files.

To check file location settings

To change the default labels file

To specify the default WordPerfect file format

To specify where documents are saved

To specify document backup options

To specify where backup files are stored

To specify where template files are stored

To specify where database files are located

To specify where spreadsheet files are located

To specify which folder macro files are stored in

To specify extensions for merge filenames

To specify where graphics files are located

Related Concepts


About Finding and Replacing Text and Codes

Use Find and Replace to find words, characters, or codes in a document. You can replace these items with other words, characters, or codes.

About Finding and Replacing Text

About Finding and Replacing Codes

About Customizing Find and Replace Options


About Codes (Macros and Find)

Use Codes with the Macro toolbar or the Template Macro toolbar to insert codes in a macro.

Use Codes with Find and Replace to find and replace codes regardless of the value the codes may contain. For example, if you search for a font size code, any font size code is found.

To find a code

To insert codes in a macro

Related Concepts


About Fonts

One way you can change the look of your document is to change the font. The font can differ either by typeface (such as Times Roman or Courier) or size.

When you want to change the size of your text, you can specify specific font sizes in points such as 11, 12, or 18. You can also specify a relative font size such as small, normal, or large. The new font size is calculated in relation to the current font size.

Corel WordPerfect 8 gives you quick access to the many fonts available to you. The QuickFonts button on the Property Bar allows one-click access to the fonts you use most. You can also access font face, font size, or appearance (such as bold, italic, and underline) using buttons on the default Property Bar.

To select a default font for the current document

To specify a default font for all new documents

To reuse recent font settings

To change text color

To change the font appearance (bold, italic, etc.)

To change the font size of text

Related Concepts


About Footnote Formatting Options

Use Footnote Options to change the format of the footnote. For example, you can change the footnote number to a character, change the location of the line between the document text and the footnotes, or print "continued..." messages for notes that span a page break.

To change footnote or endnote numbers to characters

To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in the notes

To specify where the footnotes should print on a page

To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in document text

To change the separator line between document text and footnotes

To change the spacing between footnotes or endnotes

To print "(continued...)" with footnotes that go onto another page

Related Concepts


About Forcing a Page Number

Use Force Page to make sure that a certain page in a document always has an odd or an even page number. You can also use Force Page to insert a new page.

To force a page to be odd or even

To start a new page

To turn off a header, footer, watermark, or page number

Related Concepts


About Using Formulas in Tables

Use the Table Formula feature bar to create and insert formulas into tables and floating cells.

To create a formula in a table or floating cell

To quickly add values in a table

To fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates

To get more information about table formula errors

To copy a table formula to a different cell

To calculate formulas in a table

Related Concepts


About Updating Lists, Links, Indexes, References, and Tables

Use Generate to update tables of contents, tables of authorities, lists, cross-references, indexes, and hyperlinks in your document. When you generate a list, generated table, or index, the old list, table, or index is deleted and replaced with the new one.

If you generate lists in a master document, you can include subdocuments or you can not generate or save them. Generating subdocuments can take extra time.

If you want to update hyperlinks, you can click Build hypertext links to create and generate any hyperlinks to any marked text.

To generate a list

To generate an index

To generate cross-references

To generate a table of contents

To generate a table of authorities

Related Concepts


About Custom Graphics Lines

Use the Create or Edit Graphics line dialog box to change a line's appearance or to set an exact position on the page for the line.

Create a graphics line with the look you want by customizing its appearance and placement. You can change the width, length, style, and color of a graphics line.

After you have created a custom line you can save the look of the line as a line style, then use it again.

To edit a graphics line

To create a custom graphics line

Related Concepts


About Style Setup

Use Style Setup to choose which styles are displayed in the Style List and where the styles you create are saved to.

To specify where styles are saved

To specify which styles to display in the Styles list

Related Concepts


About Headers and Footers

Use Header/Footer to print information, such as a chapter heading, a title, a date, a person's name, or a company name, at the top or bottom of each page or on alternating pages in a document.

You can use two different headers and two different footers at any place in your document. You can have several headers in a document, but only two headers can be active on a page.

To replace a header or footer, you must create a new Header A to replace Header A.  Likewise, only a Footer A can replace another Footer A, and so forth.

Corel WordPerfect includes the filestmp.wcm macro that puts the filename in a footer. To play the macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

To create a header or footer

To edit a header or footer

To delete a header or footer

To stop a header or footer from printing on the subsequent pages

To turn off a header, footer, watermark, or page number

To add the page number to a header or footer

To add a graphics line to a header or footer

To adjust the distance below a header or above a footer

To put a header, footer, or watermark on odd or even pages

To create a table header row

Related Concepts


To crop a graphics image using Zoom
To crop a graphics image using Zoom,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click Zoom, then click [image].

3	Place the pointer on the image until it changes to a magnifying glass.

4	Drag the magnifying glass pointer to frame the part of the image that you want to enlarge.

Tips

The area you frame fills the graphics box.

Click Zoom [image] 1:1 to restore the image to its original size.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


About Conversion Settings

Use Convert Settings to specify how graphics files, ASCII delimited text files, and WordPerfect 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite documents are imported into Corel WordPerfect 8.

Text Delimiters and Characters

Use the Delimiters option to specify which delimiters (characters or codes) are used to separate fields and records in ASCII text files. Use the Characters option to specify which characters should be stripped from the files during conversion.

Windows Metafile Options

Use these options to specify how to convert graphics in Windows metafile (.wmf) format. You can keep the graphic in .wmf format or convert it to .wpg (WordPerfect graphics) format.

Other Conversion Options

Click Options to specify other conversion settings. Code page settings define what characters are used for documents in different languages. Document settings define basic format elements for new documents that have been converted. WP 4.2 Fonts lists font conversion options for convert to or from WordPerfect 4.2 format. DCA/DisplayWrite Fonts list font conversion options for converting to or from DCA or DisplayWrite format.

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To specify code page settings

To specify font conversion settings

To specify document conversion settings

Related Concepts


About Inserting Merge Codes in a Document

As you create a merge data file or a form document, you can insert different merge commands to customize the merge.

These merge codes, or programming commands, can be as simple as a FIELD name or DATE code. When you insert a FIELD code, the information in the corresponding field in the data source is inserted during the merge.

You can also add control and flexibility to your merges by using a variety of other merge programming commands. For example, you can use the DOCUMENT command to retrieve a specific document into the merged file. Or you can insert a BEEP and a KEYBOARD command to have the computer beep and accept information you type from the keyboard.

Detailed information about how to use merge programming commands is found in the Merge Programming Commands Appendix in the Reference Center.

To insert merge codes

Merge Code Parameters

To perform a keyboard merge

To create a data file for a merge

To create a form document for a merge

Related Concepts


About Keeping Text Together

A printed document may have text that is badly divided across page breaks. For example, a heading may appear at the bottom of one page and the following text on the next page.

You can keep text together on a page in the following ways:

Keep the first or last line of a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph across a page break.

Keep a block of text from being split between two pages.

Keep a heading together with the following text by specifying a number of lines to keep together.

To prevent widows/orphans (single lines separated from a paragraph)

To keep text together on one page

To keep a selection of text from being divided across pages


About Labels Files

A label file contains a group of label definitions. Corel WordPerfect 8 includes a default label file with many standard label definitions. You can also create your own label files for the label definitions you use most.

To change the default labels file

To delete a label definition from a labels file

To create or edit a labels file

To select a labels file

Related Concepts


About Labels

Use Labels to create mailing labels, file folder labels, or disk labels. You can type the labels individually or use Merge to create labels from a list of addresses or data. Corel WordPerfect 8 includes many label definitions for the common Avery labels.

Label Definitions

The Labels feature lets you specify an exact label definition. The label definition formats the document so you can print on label sheets or rolls. You can use one of the Avery label definitions or create your own.

Physical Page and Logical Page

In Corel WordPerfect the entire sheet of labels is called a physical page. Each individual label is a logical page. Because each label is considered a separate page, formatting features that normally affect each physical page will affect each label.

To create labels

To insert addresses on labels

To turn off labels

To print individual labels

To create or edit a label definition

Related Concepts


About Changing Language Options

In the Language dialog box you can change the language of a document. This determines which dictionaries are used by the Language tools: Spell Checker, Thesaurus, Grammatik, and Hyphenation. You can also make a language change for only part of a document, such as a quotation in another language.

You can use the Language tools in other languages only if you have purchased an additional language module or if you have installed a Corel WordPerfect package in another language.

If you have text in another language but do not have that language module, you can disable the Language tools for that portion of the document.

Corel WordPerfect uses your Windows Regional Settings to determine most language-related formatting. You can change the default format for some features by editing the .LRS (language resource) file.

The Language feature also determines the language conventions used for QuickCorrect.

To select a language

Related Concepts


About Custom Find and Replace Options

There are several ways to customize how you find and replace text and codes. Use the Action and Options menus in the Find and Replace dialog box to do the following:

Change how Find searches for text: search forward or backward, search the entire document, search only selected text, and search only main document text or include headers and footers.

Find a word or phrase and have it selected.

Find the next occurrence of a word or phrase and have all text between the insertion point and that text selected.

Place the insertion point before or after the found word or code.

To find text and select it

To select all text between the insertion point and found text

To change how Find performs a search

To place the insertion point in front of text when it is found

Related Concepts


About Adjusting the Line Height

The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text. Ordinarily, it is set according to the font being used.

When you set line spacing, the current line height is multiplied by the number you specify and inserts that space between each line.

You can set the line height to a fixed distance regardless of the current font. This is useful when you want a specific amount of white space between lines of text no matter what fonts you are using throughout your document.

To change the spacing between lines of text

To change the line height to a fixed size

Related Concepts


About Hyphenating Text

Words that span the hyphenation zone wrap to the next line of text. Use Hyphenation to hyphenate (divide) words instead of letting them wrap.

To hyphenate text

To specify how often you are prompted to hyphenate words

Related Concepts


About Line Numbering

You can number the lines in a document and print each line number. You can also restart the numbers at the beginning of any paragraph in the document.

To number lines of text

To number lines in newspaper columns

Related Concepts


About Line Styles

Line styles define the look of border lines for a graphics box or horizontal or vertical graphics lines. You can edit existing line styles or create new styles. You can also save and retrieve line styles to a file to use them again.

To create or edit a custom line style

Related Concepts


About Spreadsheet/Database Link Options

Use Link Options to automatically update all spreadsheet and database links in the current document each time you open the document. You can also display or hide link icons.

To update a spreadsheet or database link when you open the document

To hide spreadsheet or database link icons

Related Concepts


About the Macro Toolbar

Use the Macro toolbar to create, edit, play, save, and compile macros and to insert macro commands.

When you create a template macro the same toolbar helps you create, edit, play, save, and compile macros associated with a template.

To get information on a specific toolbar button, press Shift+F1, then click the button.

To display the Macro toolbar

To record a macro

To remove the Macro toolbar

To pause a macro you are playing or recording

To edit a macro

Related Concepts


About Creating Charts

Create charts and graphs in a document with the Chart option. You can create the chart in Chart Editor or you can first create a table with the data. In addition, you can add a chart from another document using Insert Object (using an OLE link) or Insert Spreadsheet/Database.

When you create a chart in Corel WordPerfect, you switch to Corel Presentations, which provides a variety of editing tools and chart types (bar, line, pie, and so on).

Once you've added a chart to a document, you can easily edit and annotate it.

To create an organization chart

To insert a chart

To create a chart from a table

To import or link to a spreadsheet or database

To edit or annotate a chart or graph

To create a drawing

To update charts associated with tables

Related Concepts


About Margins

Use Margins to change document margins for a page or more. Use Paragraph Format to change margins for a few paragraphs only.

You can change margins multiple times in your document. Top and bottom margin settings affect the current page and subsequent pages until you change them again. Left and right margin settings affect the current paragraph and subsequent text until you change them again. You can also apply left and right margins to text you select.

To change margins for all new documents, use the Styles Editor.

To change margins using margin guidelines

To change side margins from the Ruler

To change margins

Related Concepts


About Creating Cross-References

Creating cross-references involves two tasks:

Mark the reference and target with the same target name.

When all the references and targets are marked, generate the cross-references.

You can create cross-references to pages, figures, and notes in your document. When page numbers, figure numbers, and endnote and footnote numbers change as you edit a document, the references are updated.

You can cross-reference a target with more than one type of reference (such as "see Illustration 2, page 9"). To do this, you would create one reference for the caption number and another reference for the page number. Both references must use the same target name. Mark the target only once.

You can also use multiple targets with one reference (such as "see pages 17 and 23"). Mark the reference, then mark each target separately, using the same target name. When you generate the document, each target is separated by a comma and a space.

To mark a cross-reference

To generate cross-references

To cross-reference a graphics box with a counter

Related Concepts


About Creating a List of Items in Your Document

To create a list you must do three things:

Mark the text to include in the list.

Define the way you want the list to look (called a list definition).

Generate the list.

Use the List toolbar to create a list that cross-references items such as figures, illustrations, and graphics boxes in a document.

To create a list of items in your document

To create a list definition

To edit a list definition

To retrieve a list definition

Related Concepts


About Creating a Table of Authorities

Use the Table of Authorities Property Bar to mark text for a table of authorities. A table of authorities lists where citations of specific cases and statutes appear in a legal brief. The table can be divided into one or more sections (such as cases, statutes, and regulations), and each section can have a different format. The authorities within each section are sorted alphanumerically.

Creating a Table of Authorities

Creating a table of authorities involves four tasks. First, design the order of sections in the table. Second, mark in the document text the authorities that you want to include. Third, define each section of the table (called a section definition). Fourth, generate the table.

Designing a Table of Authorities

In designing the table of authorities, you should decide how many sections to include and the order they will appear in. Some sections that are commonly included are Cases, Constitutional Provisions, Statutory Provisions, Regulatory Provisions, and Miscellaneous.

Marking Authorities

The first time you mark an authority, edit the text of the authority so it appears as you want it in the table. This first mark is called a full form. When you edit the full form you also create an abbreviated name for the authority, called the short form. After you have marked an authority once, you use the short form in all other marks for that authority.

To mark an authority for a table of authorities

To define and generate a table of authorities

To create a table of authorities section definition

Related Concepts


About Creating a Table of Authorities Full Form

Use Create Full Form to create a table of authorities full form the first time you mark an authority (citation of a case, statute, etc.). The full form is the full text of the authority as it will appear in the table of authorities. The full form also includes the short form (nickname) of the authority and the section in which the authority appears. You can edit the full form so that it appears exactly as you want it in the table.

The table of authorities short form is used to mark all occurrences of the authority after the first occurrence.

To mark an authority for a table of authorities

Related Concepts


About Creating a Table of Contents

Creating a table of contents involves three tasks:

Mark text to include in the table of contents.

Define the way you want the table of contents to look.

Generate the table of contents.

Use the Table of Contents toolbar to create and maintain a table of contents for your document. Your table of contents can have up to five levels of headings and subheadings, and you can choose from several numbering methods.

To mark text for a table of contents

To define and generate a table of contents

Related Concepts


About Merge

Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, contracts, phone lists, memos, or other documents.  To create a merge, you create a form document and then merge it with a data source such as a data file or address book, or you can add information from the keyboard.

The merge reproduces copies of the form document. Each copy contains specific information from a record in the data source.

For example, to write the same letter to a number of people without typing the original letter more than once, you can create a form document (letter) and merge it with a data file or Address Book. This creates a letter for each person on your mailing list. The text of the letter is the same on each copy, but the names and addresses are different.

You can have the merged letters open in a third document window or go directly to your printer or e-mail system.

To create a basic merge

To merge envelopes

To merge into a table

To create a data file for a merge

To merge using the Address Book

To create a form document for a merge

To perform a merge

Related Concepts


To edit fields in a data table
To edit fields in a data table,

1	Create or open a merge data table.

2	Click in the column where you want to add or delete a field.

 	3	Click Column on the Merge toolbar.

4	To delete the column, click Delete, then click OK.

5	To insert a column, click Insert. Type the name of the field you want to add, specify where to add the field, then click OK.

6	Type the field data in the new column, then save or merge the file.

Related Topics

About Editing a Merge File


To edit records in a data table
To edit records in a data table,

1	Create or open a merge data table.

2	Place the insertion point in the row where you want to add or delete a record.

3	Click Row on the Merge toolbar.

4	To delete the row, click Delete, then click OK.

5	To insert a row, click Insert. Specify where to add the row, then click OK.

6	Type the record data in the new row, then save or merge the file.

Related Topics

About Editing a Merge File


About Associating Merge Files

You can associate a form document with a data source when you create a merge. An association means that the name of the data source file is linked to a form document. When you merge that form document in the future, the associated data source is used.

You can associate a data source as you create a form document, or you can create or change the association later.

To associate a data source with a form document

To go to the associated form document

To associate a form document with a data file

To go to the associated data file

To create a data file for a merge

To create a form document for a merge

Related Concepts


About Keyboard Merges

You can create a keyboard merge by creating a form or data file containing the KEYBOARD merge command. When you perform the merge, this command pauses the merge and waits for you to enter information from the keyboard.

The Merge Keyboard toolbar includes options to help you direct the flow of the merge. (This toolbar appears only when a merge stops at a KEYBOARD command.) Click Continue after you have typed information at a prompt, so the merge will continue with the next record. Skip Record lets you skip the current record without input from the keyboard. Quit continues the merge but ignores all merge commands. Stop discontinues the merge at the current position.

To create a data file for a merge

To create a form document for a merge

To insert merge codes

To perform a keyboard merge

Related Concepts


About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables

You can name tables, floating cells, cells, ranges, columns, and rows. You can also edit, delete, or insert names, and go to a table element you have named.

You can type a name or use text from the current cell.

Name a table or table element to access it quickly. It can be easier to remember a name, such as "Balance," than to remember a table address.

You can reference table names within a table. You can also refer to a named element in another table or floating cell by naming both the table and the table element.

To name a table

To name table components and floating cells

To name table components using text in an existing cell

To go to a named table, table component, or floating cell

To edit the name of a table, floating cell, or table component

To delete a table component name

To create a formula in a table or floating cell


About New Documents

You can quickly open a blank document window to start a new document.

Every document you create is based on a template. Even a blank document is based on the default template (wp8xx.wpt, where xx is the language code). The default template includes format elements such as the margins, tab settings, and toolbar you see when you start Corel WordPerfect.

Corel WordPerfect also includes ready-made projects that you can open and use to create a wide range of documents, including letters, fax cover sheets, calendars, and business cards.

To open a new document window

To create a new document with a project or template

To switch between documents

Related Concepts


About Table Numeric Format (Currency, Percent, Dates, etc.)

Use Table Numeric Format to specify how numbers are used (as values or text), displayed, and printed in a table or floating cell.

To select a table numeric format

To customize a date/time type for a table

To customize a numeric type for a table

Related Concepts


About Other Codes (Line Format)

Use Other Codes to insert tab codes (with and without dot leaders), hyphenation codes, a hard space, codes to end centering or alignment, or a code to change the thousands separator character.

To insert hard tabs, hyphenation codes, and other special codes

Related Concepts


About Creating an Overstrike Character

Many symbols and international characters are provided in the Symbols dialog box. If you cannot find the character you need, you can combine existing characters to create mathematical symbols, language symbols, and other character combinations.

For example, you can combine the number 7 with a hyphen to create this character: .

To create an overstrike character

To edit an overstrike character

Related Concepts


About Startup Options

Startup options are commands you can use when you start Corel WordPerfect. Some of these options are for your convenience, but others can be necessary to run Corel WordPerfect on your particular system.

To start Corel WordPerfect with custom options


About Page Numbering

To number pages, select the page numbering format you want to use and specify where you want to put them on the page.

You can choose from several common page numbering formats or create a custom format of your own. Page numbers appear in the document window just as they appear in print.

To number pages in a document

To insert page, chapter, or volume numbers in document text

Related Concepts


About Changing Paragraph Format

Corel WordPerfect provides quick access to adjust the look of a paragraph. For example, you can change the way a paragraph is indented or aligned, add a border or shading (background), or insert a Drop Cap (a large first letter) to set off the paragraph.

Many formatting options are easily accessibly via the Property Bar. Right-click the paragraph to reveal the QuickMenu with additional options.

Use Paragraph Format to make format changes to all paragraphs in a document. You can indent the first line of every paragraph, insert additional space between paragraphs, and change the margins for only paragraphs (leaving the page margins the same).

Once you've made a paragraph look the way you want, you can save that look as a style and apply it to other paragraphs or use QuickFormat to "paint" the style to other paragraphs.

To copy the format of a heading

To indent text

To justify text

To add a border to a paragraph

To add shading to a paragraph

To save the format of a paragraph as a style

To indent the first line of every paragraph automatically

To adjust the margins for a paragraph

To insert additional space between paragraphs

Related Concepts


About Creating Reversed Text (White on Black)

You can create reversed text (white text or images on a black background) using the Shipping Macros toolbar. The Reverse Text button formats text with a light text color and dark background. You can choose the text color, background color, and darkness of the background shading.

This button runs the reverse.wcm macro (which is located in the default macros folder). You can have the reversed text formatted in a text box or as a paragraph style.

Another way to make reversed text is to create a graphics image. Use TextArt to apply color and shading to text, or use a graphics program to create an image with text and colors, and then import the image into the document.

To create reversed text (white on black)

To create a drawing

Related Concepts


About Inserting Information in a Specific Format

Use Paste Special to select a specific format when you paste information from the Clipboard into Corel WordPerfect. For example, you can copy text from another application in Rich Text Format or as simple text.

To get information on an option in the Paste Special dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To select the format for pasted information

Related Concepts


About Performing a Merge

After you have created a form document and a data source, you can perform a merge.

To do this, you must specify the location of the form file, the data source, and the output for the merge. You can also select all or part of the records from the data source that you want to merge.

Other options in the Perform Merge dialog box let you include envelopes in the merge, and change other options related to the merge.

To merge using the Address Book

To perform a keyboard merge

To merge to e-mail

To perform a merge

To change options for a merge

Related Concepts


About Positioning the Hyphen When Prompted for Hyphenation

When Hyphenation is on, it prompts you to hyphenate words that span the hyphenation zone. Use Position Hyphen to indicate how you want a word hyphenated.

For information about an option in the Position Hyphen dialog box, right-click the option.

Related Concepts


About Inserting a POSTNET Bar Code in a Document

You can include a POSTNET bar code with a mailing address on envelopes, labels, or letters.

The Bar Code feature converts ZIP Codes into POSTNET bar codes that meet U.S. Postal Service specifications. Note that POSTNET bar codes are valid only for mail sent to addresses in the United States.

To insert a POSTNET bar code in a document

To insert a POSTNET bar code on an envelope

Related Concepts


About Settings

Use Settings to customize your use of Corel WordPerfect. Set options that make your work more efficient, change how the document window looks, and set up specific tasks.

To change Corel WordPerfect settings

Related Concepts


About Printer Commands

Your printer documentation might contain information about printer commands to let you use the special functions of your printer. Use Printer Command to insert these commands into a document. Printer commands do not affect the formatting of a document on the screen. If you use printer commands, be sure to type the exact syntax and codes that are specified in your printer documentation.

Note that using printer commands can sometimes leave the printer in an unpredictable state.

Printer Command File

If you want to send several printer commands to the printer, you can create a file that contains the commands. You can then send that file to the printer instead of inserting each command into your document.

To insert printer commands into a document

To send a printer command file to a printer

When I added a printer command, my document printed wrong.

How do I restore my printer settings after I added a printer command?

Related Concepts


About Using QuickFormat to Copy Text Format

You can create a heading that you like and then quickly copy that look to other headings in your document or to text in other Corel WordPerfect documents using QuickFormat. You can copy the format of a word, selected text, or of an entire paragraph. You can also use QuickFormat to copy the formatting of graphics boxes, tables, and cells within tables.

QuickFormat can copy fonts, size, and text appearance attributes such as bold and italics. When using QuickFormat for paragraphs, you can also copy spacing, indentation, and borders.

QuickFormat automatically creates paragraph styles and links all text with the same QuickFormat look together. Changing text that has one QuickFormat style also changes all the other headings or paragraphs with that same QuickFormat style.

To copy the format of a character, word, or phrase

To copy the format of a heading

To edit a QuickFormat heading

To update QuickFormat headings automatically

To stop QuickFormat headings from automatically updating

Related Concepts


About Macro Location

Each template you use has its own set of template macros. You can use the template macros for your current template or the default template.

To specify which template a macro is played from

Related Concepts


About Matching Fonts When You Find or Replace Text

When you search for text, you can also search for specific font faces, styles, point sizes, and text formatting attributes. When these exact matches are found, you can replace them along with the text.

To find font faces, styles, or sizes without associated text, you must use Type [image] Specific Codes.

To find exact matches for a word

To find and replace exact matches for a word

Related Concepts


About Changing Graphics Box Caption Numbering Styles

Each graphics box style has a different caption numbering style, called a counter. To change the way captions are numbered for a box style, select a different counter.

To change a graphics box caption's numbering style

Related Concepts


About Selecting Merge Records

You can limit a merge to certain records in the data file. This is done either by marking a range of records that you want to merge, or by specifying conditions so that only the records that satisfy those conditions are merged.

When using the Address Book as your data source, you select records differently.

To perform a merge

To use examples of selected records when merging

To insert addresses from the Address Book

To specify conditions for a merge

To mark records for a merge

Related Concepts


About Sorting Words and Numbers

Use Sort to arrange text alphabetically or numerically, or to extract specific information from a list. You can sort lines of text, paragraphs, table rows, parallel columns, or merge data file records. For example, you can alphabetize a simple word list, sort a table of students according to their grades, or extract addresses with a certain ZIP Code from a list of addresses.

When you perform a sort, you are actually sorting records. You can sort any of the following record types: lines, paragraphs, merge records, parallel columns, and tables. Records are subdivided into smaller pieces for more flexibility for sorting. The subdivisions include fields, lines, words, columns, and cells.

Use sort keys to specify which part of the record to sort by. You assign a portion of the record to a sort key. You can sort first by one key, then another, then another. Sort keys are numbered from 1 to 9. Key 1 has first priority, key 2 has second priority, and so on. You can define keys as alphanumeric, numeric, ascending, or descending.

You can sort text in the current document or in a file on disk. You can display the sorted text on-screen, or you can save it to a file.

To sort text alphabetically or numerically

Related Concepts


About Sound Clips

Sound enhances a document with digital (.WAV) and MIDI sound files, which can include sound effects, music, and voice recordings. This sound capability lets you create multimedia documents for presentations, educational materials, or product tutorials. Or you can record dictation and include the sound file in a document, then listen to it later while you edit.

To use the full capability of the Sound feature, you must have a sound device (usually a card) installed in your computer. If you want to create your own sound files, you will also need a microphone or some other input device.

Depending on your hardware configuration, you can use two types of sound files with Corel WordPerfect: MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) or digital audio. With the proper hardware, you can create your own sound files. You can also purchase sound files, but before you purchase either MIDI or digital files, make sure the files are compatible with your sound device.

To record a sound clip

To play a sound clip

To add a sound clip to your document


About Finding Specific Codes

You can find and replace specific uses of codes. For example, you can find a font face in a specific size.

The codes you can search for when you use Type [image] Specific Codes are also available when you use Match [image] Codes, but Match [image] Codes does not let you search for specific values.

To find specific uses of a code

To find and replace specific uses of a code

Related Concepts


About Joining and Splitting Table Cells

Use Split to divide the current cell or a selection of cells. The current cell will divide in two, and each cell in the selection will divide in two. The new cells will have the same format as the original cell.

Use Join to combine the selected cells together. When you join cells, the formatting of the top left cell is used for all the joined cells.

To split table cells

To join table cells

Related Concepts


About Application Bar Settings

Use Application Bar Settings to specify what appears on the Application Bar.

The customized Application Bar appears the same way every time you open Corel WordPerfect until you change the Application Bar settings again.

To restore the default Application Bar

To remove information from the Application Bar

To change the font that appears on the Application Bar

To add information to the Application Bar

Related Concepts


To edit a style
To edit a style,

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Select the style in the style list, then click Edit.

3	Make any changes to the style.

4	Click OK to save the edited new style and display it in the style list.

5	To apply the edited style to selected text or text you are about to type, double-click the style.

Tips

Select items from the toolbar and menu in the Styles Editor to insert codes in the Contents box.

About the Styles Editor


About Saving and Retrieving Styles

You can save a list of styles in a separate file. You can then retrieve that style file into another document and apply the styles there.

You can also save and retrieve outline style files.

To save styles in a separate file

To retrieve styles that are saved in a file

Related Concepts


About the Styles Editor

Styles help you save time and quickly format documents. For example, rather than formatting each heading in your document, you can create one style and place it on all headings. Then, to change all the headings, you edit the style.

As you create and edit styles, you can apply many formatting features, include graphics, and add document structures like headers or columns. The Styles Editor has a toolbar and menu, like in the regular document window.

Every document has a default style that defines how the document looks. You can use this Current Document Style to select many kinds of formatting elements. Because these elements are in a style, you don't have to remember to include the format codes in the document.

To edit a style

To create a style

To create the default format for the current document

Related Concepts


About Dividing a Page

Use Divide Page (instead of the Labels feature) to create items such as programs, booklets, cards, and tickets.

Divide Page lets you create several logical pages on one physical page. With Divide Page you can use the standard paper definition, while with Labels you must select a label paper definition.

To divide pages

Related Concepts


About Table Functions (Absolute Value, Square Root, etc.)

Use Table Functions on the Table Formula feature bar to select and insert functions into the Formula Edit text box.

To create a formula in a table or floating cell

Related Concepts


About Editing a Table of Authorities Full Form

Use Edit Full Form to edit the full form of an authority (citation of a case, statute, etc.) so that it appears exactly as you want it in the table. The full form includes the full text of the authority, the short form (nickname) of the authority, and the section in which the authority appears.

To mark an authority for a table of authorities

Related Concepts


About List or Table of Authorities Style

Use List or Table of Authorities Style to change the style used for list and table of authorities entries.

To change the current list style

To change the current table of authorities style

Related Concepts


About Changing Tab Settings

You can change tab settings in your document to determine where the insertion point moves when you press Tab or Shift+Tab (Back Tab).

You can use the Ruler, the tab bar, or the Tab Set dialog box to change tab settings.

To change tab settings using the Ruler or tab bar

To change tab settings using the Tab Set dialog box

Related Concepts


About Changing the Look of Tables, Cells, Columns, and Rows

You can change the size and position of a table, the size of columns and rows, and the position of data in the table.  You can also add diagonal lines to cells, lock a cell so that no one can change the data in it, or specify that cell data be ignored during calculations.

About Table Cell Format

About Table Column Format

About Table Row Format

About Table Format

Related Concepts


Merge Code Parameters

Use Insert Merge Code Parameters to enter the correct parameters and arguments as required for the merge code.

Parameter	What you do
(expr), (subexpr)	Enter a number, string, variable, command, expression, or combination of these
(label)	Enter a unique name
(var)	Enter a unique variable name
(field)	Enter a unique name or field number
(filename)	Enter a filename, including the full path
(macroname)	Enter a unique macro name; the full path is optional and no .wcm extension is needed
(title)	Enter the title of the dialog box
(prompt), (message)	Enter information you want to display on the screen
(comment)	Enter a description of what the merge does; this does not display on screen
Related Topics

About Inserting Merge Codes in a Document


About Logging on to an SQL Database Server

Before you can import or link to data from an SQL database, you must first log on to the database server.

To log on to an SQL database server

Related Concepts


About Changing the Text Box Default Style

The Text Box style is a predefined box style. You can change the default look of this style by editing the box appearance (border lines, shading, position, and so on).

You can also use the Styles Editor to change the appearance of text in the text boxes (font, size, color, and so on).

To change how all new text boxes look

Related Concepts


To hide spreadsheet or database link icons
To hide spreadsheet or database link icons,

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Options.

2	Click to deselect Show link icons.

Tips

The link icons will not appear when you print, even if they display in the document windows.

About Spreadsheet/Database Link Options


About Watermarks

You can print a watermark (background image) behind the text on a page. You can use clip art images, an existing file, or text for the watermark. You can also adjust the shading (lightness) of the watermark.

To put an image behind the text using a watermark

To edit a watermark

To stop a watermark from printing on subsequent pages

To turn off a header, footer, watermark, or page number

To change a watermark's shading

To put a header, footer, or watermark on odd or even pages

To change a graphics image to a watermark

Related Concepts


sort keys

Sort keys define the order of priority in which a list is sorted. For example, when you sort a list of names, you can use two keys: key 1 sorts by last name, and key 2 sorts by first name. This way, if two last names are identical, the items would be sorted by first name. You can use as many as nine sort keys in a sort definition.


About Automatic Font Changes

When you change font settings, Corel WordPerfect automatically switches fonts. For example, if the current font is Courier 10-point and you select Bold, the Courier Bold 10-point font is substituted.

You can change the font substitutions for specific font attributes, styles, character sets, and print orientations, or restore the default settings.

To change document font substitutions

To change replacement font settings

Related Concepts


About Finding and Replacing Codes

Search for document codes with Find and Replace. You can find codes, find and delete them, or find and replace them with other codes.

You can find and replace codes regardless of the value the codes contain. For example, if you search for a font size code, any font size code is found.

You can also find and replace specific uses of codes. For example, you can find a font face in a specific size or a precise margin setting.

To find a code

To find specific uses of a code

To find and replace codes

To find and replace specific uses of a code

Related Concepts


About TextArt

Use TextArt to change words in your documents into designs. You can shape the image using patterns, colors, and other options, or you can select from a wide variety of predesigned shapes. Besides creating 2-D TextArt images, you can create 3-D TextArt images if you select the 3D TextArt component during a Custom install.

TextArt designs are graphic images. They are contained in a graphics box in Corel WordPerfect Suite products. They can also be used in any Windows application as an OLE object.

To create a TextArt image

Related Concepts


About Document Properties (Summary and Information)

You can create a summary of a document that identifies such information as the person who created the document and a description of the content. The summary is saved with the document but does not display or print with the document. You can view the summary in the Properties dialog box while viewing the document, or you can view the summary from the Windows Explorer. You can print summary information or save it as a separate file.

You can also view statistical information about the document, such as the number of words and sentences contained in it.

To create a document summary

To delete a document summary

To print a document summary

To save a document summary as a separate file

To customize the document summary fields

To get information about the current document

To automate parts of the document summary

Related Concepts


logical page

A defined area inside a physical page (the sheet of paper you print on). You can have several logical pages on one physical page.


physical page

The sheet of paper on which you print. The physical page can be divided into several logical pages.


OLE

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) lets you combine information created in different Windows applications into one document. You can include text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, or video clips in your Corel WordPerfect documents.

The information (or object) can be linked to so that information in your document updates when the source file changes, or it can be embedded or inserted as a one-time copy.

Corel WordPerfect also supports OLE Automation.


link

A connection between a source application and your document. When you change the information in the source application, the linked information updates automatically in your document.


About Template Macros

A template macro is a macro saved with a template. It can be played only from that template and is not listed with the macros in the default macros folder.

You can record, play, or edit a template macro. Template macros can be assigned to keystrokes, toolbars, or menus.

To play a template macro

To record a template macro

To edit a template macro

To pause a macro you are playing or recording

To assign a template macro to a keystroke

To assign a template macro to a menu

To assign a template macro to a toolbar

Related Concepts


range

A range is a rectangular group of cells. In a spreadsheet or table, a range is defined by an upper left cell and a lower right cell. A colon or period is used to separate the two cell addresses. For example, a range can be defined as A1:C5 or A1.C5.


link icons

Link icons are inserted when a spreadsheet or database is imported or linked. An icon appears where the link begins and ends. The icons display in the document window, but they are never printed.


About Tabs

Use the Tab key to indent a single line of text or to align columns of text.

When you add, delete, or move a tab setting, the change takes effect in the current paragraph and in subsequent text until you change the setting again. However, if you select text before changing the tab setting, the setting affects only the paragraph containing the text.

Instead of adding tabs to each line, use Indent to indent all lines of a paragraph. You can use Tables or Columns to enter information in columns and rows.

To move text forward or backward using a tab

To change tab settings using the Ruler or tab bar

To change tab settings using the Tab Set dialog box

To start columns

To insert hard tabs, hyphenation codes, and other special codes

Related Concepts


About the Additional Objects Template

The additional objects template is a second default template with objects such as keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles. You can use these objects in addition to or in place of those on your default template.

The additional objects are made available, but they do not overwrite the default template. However, you can choose to update the default template from the additional objects template (this option is found in Files Settings). A system administrator can check this box, then use a network template as an additional objects template and have it overwrite users' default templates.

If your default template is unavailable and no additional template is specified, Corel WordPerfect creates the standard system template upon startup.

To select an additional objects template

To specify where template files are stored

Related Concepts


About Hard and Soft Returns

As you type, Corel WordPerfect automatically inserts a soft return (a [SRt] code) at the end of each line. This wraps text to the next line.

When you press Enter to end a paragraph, a hard return (a [HRt] code) is inserted and a new line begins.

Hard and soft return codes are displayed in the Reveal Codes window. You can search for and replace [HRt] and [SRt] codes.

The distance between lines of text is the same, whether the lines end with [SRt] or [HRt]. However, you can increase the distance between paragraphs (lines ending with a [HRt] code) without changing the distance between lines of text within paragraphs (which end with a [SRt] code).

To insert additional space between paragraphs

To change the spacing between lines of text

To change the line height to a fixed size

To find and replace codes

Related Concepts


About Sending Mail

Send selected text or an entire document by e-mail, while you work in Corel WordPerfect.

Corel WordPerfect supports many mail systems using the MAPI or CMC standards, such as Novell GroupWise 4.1 and Digital Teamlinks. Products with a Designed for Windows 95 logo should support CMC mail enabling.

If you are not using Novell GroupWise 4.1 as a mail client, you must select a profile using your mail client before you can send mail from within Corel WordPerfect.

To mail the current document

To add your mail client to the Corel Settings Profile

To mail selected text from your current document

Related Concepts


record (merge)

A record is a series of related fields of information in a data source. A record can contain one field or many. In a text file, each record is separated by an ENDRECORD marker. In a table, each record is a row. In an address book, a record is a row of information (an entry).


field (merge)

A field is the smallest unit of information in a data file that can be referenced in a merge. A field can be one character or many. In a text file, each field is separated by an ENDFIELD marker. In a table file, each individual field is a cell, or a field group is a column.


data text file

A data file provides data to the form file during a merge. You can create a data file in either text or table format. When the data file is arranged in text format, information is separated into fields and records.


data table file

A data file provides data to the form file during a merge. You can create a data file in either text or table format. When the data file is arranged in table format, each column of the table contains a field. Each row contains a record.


form document

A form document is the pattern for merged documents. It controls the merge output when you merge it with a data file, an address book, or files in other formats. (In previous versions of Corel WordPerfect, a form document was known as a form file or primary merge file.)


associated merge files

You can associate a form file with a data source when you create a merge. An association means that the name of the data source file is linked to the form file. When you merge that form file in the future, the associated source file is used.


About Creating Your Own Numbering

You can create your own variation of one of the predefined numbering and heading styles, or you can create a new one that organizes text the way you want it.

When you click Outline/Bullets & Numbering, the first two numbering styles (Paragraph and Outline) and all of the Bullet styles use the same level styles. Legal and Legal 2 also use the same level styles. For these styles, changing a level style in one definition changes it for the others. For example, editing the Level 1 style for the Bullet outline also changes it for the Outline and Paragraph outlines. To avoid this, create a duplicate style for a level you want to edit.

To create or edit a numbering, bullet, or heading style

To delete a style

To retrieve styles that are saved in a file

To copy styles

Related Concepts


floating cell

A code in the text of a document that has the properties of a table cell. A floating cell can contain formulas, text, or numbers. Unlike a table cell, which is surrounded by table lines, a floating cell is used outside of tables. Floating cells refer to data in tables or in other floating cells. You can create a floating cell practically anywhere in a document, such as in a header or footer.

The information in the floating cell updates whenever you update the information it refers to. For example, you could create a floating cell in the text of a mortgage document. This floating cell could refer to a table that calculates the interest on home loans, so that the correct interest amount would be automatically entered into the mortgage document in place of the floating cell.


About Faxing Documents

To fax documents from Corel WordPerfect, you must have a fax modem and fax driver.

A fax driver is a software file that translates text characters into codes that the modem can send across phone lines. The name of the installed fax driver is included in the list of printers on the Print tab of the Print dialog box.

To install and select a fax driver

To fax a document

To check the status of a fax job currently in progress

To cancel or pause a fax

To restart a fax after it has been paused

Related Concepts


About Using the Address Book with Templates

When you create a new document with a template or project, you can access the Address Book for information about both the sender and recipient of the document. Information about you, the sender, is called Personal Information. When you create documents to send to other people, you can select their personal address information from the Address Book.

Use the Address Book as a central location to store addresses and personal information for all your projects and templates. The Address Book stores information like names, addresses, user IDs, account numbers, and anything else you want to keep track of.

To insert addresses from the Address Book

Related Concepts


About Macros Included with Corel WordPerfect

The following list describes several of the macros that are included with Corel WordPerfect. Many of the macros can be played by clicking buttons on the Shipping Macros toolbar, which you can display by right-clicking the toolbar and selecting Shipping Macros. All macros that have been installed can be played by clicking Tools [image] Macro or Template Macro [image] Play.

If a macro in this list is not found in your default macros directory, you can run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup to install all the macros. Select a Custom install, then look for Macros as one of the components under Corel WordPerfect.

To display in-depth information about the Macro feature, macro commands, and macro programming techniques, click Help [image] Help Topics [image] Contents [image] double-click Macros [image] Macro Programming.

ADRS2MRG.WCM

Copies the address book (for automated templates) into a merge data file.

ALLFONTS.WCM

Creates a document that lists every font available to the current printer and shows sample text in each font.

CHECKBOX.WCM

Inserts a check box in the document that you can click to add or remove a check mark.

CLOSEALL.WCM

Closes all open documents and prompts you to save the modified ones.

CTRLM.WCM

Activates the Macro Command Inserter.

CTRLSFTF.WCM

For the WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor, prompts for FROM and TO values.

CVTDOCS8.WCM

Lets you convert multiple documents from another document type to Corel WordPerfect 8 format.

ENDFOOT.WCM

Converts endnotes to footnotes in the document or in selected text.

EXPNDALL.WCM

Expands all abbreviations in the document at one time.

FILESTMP.WCM

Places the filename and path of the current document in a header or footer.

FLIPENV.WCM

Creates an envelope rotated 180 degrees (text is upside down). On printers with a large trailing margin, this lets you print the return address 0.25" from the edge.

FONTDN.WCM

Decreases the font size of the selected text by 2 points.

FONTUP.WCM

Increases the font size of the selected text by 2 points.

FOOTEND.WCM

Converts footnotes to endnotes in the document or in selected text.

GOTODOS.WCM

Opens a DOS window.

LINENUM.WCM

Places the insertion point at a specified line and character for troubleshooting macros.

LONGNAME.WCM

Changes the name of selected documents from the DOS (8.3) filename to a long filename based on the Document Summary description.

PARABRK.WCM

Inserts symbols or small graphics as paragraph breaks. The graphics are centered on the blank line between paragraphs.

PLEADING.WCM

Creates lines and numbers for pleading documents.

PROMPTS.WCM

Helps you create prompts for automated templates.

REVERSE.WCM

Creates white text on black background (or uses other color combinations) in selected text or table cells.

SAVEALL.WCM

Prompts you to save open documents.

SAVETOA.WCM

Saves the current document and makes a copy of it on the diskette in drive A.

TCONVERT.WCM

Converts Corel WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows templates that used the _AUTOFIL.WCM macro.

UAWP8EN.WCM

Used by the PerfectExpert. DO NOT delete this macro from the macros folder.

WATERMRK.WCM

Prompts for text or a graphic that will be placed in a watermark (centered vertically and horizontally on the page).

WP_ORG.WCM

Creates an organization chart in Corel WordPerfect.

WP_PR.WCM

Sends a Corel WordPerfect outline to Corel Presentations.

Related Concepts


About Templates and Projects

Every Corel WordPerfect document you create is based on a template, which is a document file with customized format, content, and features. The blank document you see when you open Corel WordPerfect is based on the default template (wp8xx.wpt, where xx is the language code).

Templates, QuickTasks, and coaches from previous versions of Corel WordPerfect have been combined into one feature called PerfectExpert. PerfectExpert includes predefined projects that help you create newsletters, meeting agendas, calendars, business cards, and other types of documents. You include templates in your list of projects.

Templates from earlier versions of Corel WordPerfect can be listed with your projects. You can create, edit, and use these templates without updating them. You can also group them in the categories for the PerfectExpert projects list.

About the PerfectExpert

To create a new document with a project or template

To create a custom WordPerfect template

To edit a WordPerfect template

To save a WordPerfect template

To create a project category

To display previously created templates

To specify personal information for templates

To associate features with toolbars, menus, and keyboards

To use a macro trigger in a template

To create a template prompt

Related Concepts


About QuickCorrect

Use QuickCorrect to automatically correct common typing mistakes, accelerate text entry, and begin bulleted, numbered, and alphabetical lists. For example, QuickCorrect can fix typing errors by replacing "teh" with "the" or an asterisk (*) with a bullet ( [image]). You can add and delete items from the QuickCorrect list to accommodate your typing style.

With QuickWords, you can type a few characters to represent  other information, such as an address or a company logo. QuickWords can include formatting (such as bold or italics) and graphics.

Use QuickLinks to create a hyperlink to an Internet address while you type.

QuickCorrect also provides easy formatting solutions such as fixing capitalization errors such as changing "dANIEL" to "Daniel", creating graphics lines (QuickLines), making quotation marks curly (SmartQuotes), and replacing numbers such as 1st and 2nd with superscript ordinal numbers (QuickOrdinals). These Format-As-You-Go options can be turned on or off.

To create QuickLinks to commonly used web documents

To turn QuickCorrect options on or off

To add a word to the QuickCorrect list

To change the appearance of quotation marks

To create a bulleted list using QuickBullets

To create a QuickWord for a word or phrase

To insert a horizontal line

To delete a QuickCorrect entry

Related Concepts


About Image Printing

Use Image Print Parameters to adjust how graphics images are printed. The adjustments you can make depend on the printer selected.

Dithering is a method of combining several differently colored pixels to create a new color. You can specify one of three color or gray-scale blending methods for an image.

Use Dither Source to specify where the bitmap or vector image is converted into the final format for printing. The image can be converted by Corel WordPerfect or the printer.

Halftone Options adjust the lines per inch (lpi) to increase or decrease the clarity of a halftone image. When you increase the lines per inch you increase image sharpness and reduce gray shading. You can also specify the line angle if you are using a PostScript printer.

To change the dither method used for printing graphics

To change a graphic's halftoning

To change the dither source used for printing graphics

Related Concepts


About Template Addresses

When you use a template or project that requires an address, the Corel Address Book displays. You then select an address from the Address Book, and that information is automatically inserted in the appropriate places in the template.

To insert addresses from the Address Book

To specify personal information for templates

Related Concepts


Upgrading

This upgrade table can assist you in moving from Microsoft Word to Corel WordPerfect 8. It lists the features in Corel WordPerfect 8 that have different names in Microsoft Word. Just locate a Word feature, then click the Corel WordPerfect feature name to the right to learn more about it.

MS Word Feature	Corel WordPerfect 8 Feature
Annotation	Comment
AutoCorrect	QuickCorrect
AutoShapes	Shapes
AutoText	QuickWords
Automatic Save	Backup
Break	New Page, New Column
Bullets and Numbers	Bulleted, Numbered, and Alphabetical Lists
Change Case	Convert Case
Character	Font Appearance
Charting	Chart
Compare Versions	Document Review
Create Envelope	Envelopes
Customize	Settings
Drawing	Draw
Find File	QuickFinder
Footers	Headers/Footers
Frame	Graphics
Full Screen	Hide Bars
Grammar	Grammatik
Grammar as you type	Grammar-As-You-Go
Headers	Headers/Footers
Hyperlink	Hyperlink
Indentation	Indent
Index and Tables	Reference
Keep Lines Together	Keep Text Together
Keep with Next	Conditional End of Page
Merge Documents or Mail Merge	Merge
Merge Cells	Join
Online Layout	Internet Publisher
Options	Settings
Page Alignment	Center Page
Paragraph Alignment	Justification
Protect Document	Keep Text Together
Right-Aligned Text	Flush Right
Sorting	Sort
Spelling	Spell Check
Spelling as you type	Spell-As-You-Go
Summary Info	Document Summary
Table AutoFormat	SpeedFormat
Tabs	Tab Set
Text Direction	Rotate Text
Track Changes	Document Review
Versions	Version Control
Vertical Alignment	Center Page
WordArt	TextArt
Word Count	Properties
Related Concepts


About Reinstalling or Removing Corel WordPerfect

Use the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup program to reinstall Corel WordPerfect or to add components that were not installed previously.

Use the Corel Remove program to remove Corel WordPerfect files and folders that were created during the installation process.

To reinstall or add components to Corel WordPerfect

To remove Corel WordPerfect from your computer

Related Concepts


About Saving Graphics Image Files Separately

After you use Corel Presentations to create a drawing or edit a Clipart image, you can save the image as a separate Corel WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG). You can then insert the saved graphics file into other documents or slide shows. You can also save a chart or a TextArt image as a separate Corel WordPerfect graphics (.WPG) file.

 	To save an image, chart, or TextArt as a WordPerfect graphic file

Related Concepts


To change a spreadsheet or database link
To change a spreadsheet or database link,

1	Click between the link icons.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Edit Link.

3	Change how the information appears in your document (as text, table, or merge data).

4	Change the filename, range of cells, fields you are linked to, or click Query to select specific database information.

Tip

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

About Importing and Linking Spreadsheet and Database Information


Letters

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including business and personal letters. Click File [image] New, then select a project. The PerfectExpert can help you create the formatting elements of the letter. You can create a letterhead, greeting, closing, date format, and so forth.

When you format your letters manually, here are some tools and ideas to help you out.

Start with document basics (margins, fonts)

Align dates and closing on a tab

Insert the current date or date code

Center a letter from top to bottom

Make text fit within specified pages

Number pages

Create business letters

Create a letterhead

Use the Address Book for addresses

Merge a form letter with different addresses

Related Concepts


Resumes

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including resumes. Click File [image] New, then select a resume project.

If you want to create your own resume, here are a few tools and ideas to get you started.

Check for spelling mistakes

Check to see if you are saying it right

Keep it all on one page

Include a header for additional pages

Create a matching cover letter

Quickly add a line across the page

Change text appearance (fonts)

Make all headings look the same (QuickFormat)

Center and align text where you want it

Related Concepts


Newsletters

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including newsletters. Click File [image] New, then select a newsletter project.

For more fun things to do with newsletters, try the following:

Shape and contour text with TextArt

Insert clip art images

Make text fit next to the image (Wrap Text)

Use Paste Special to retrieve unformatted text

Use QuickFormat for consistent headings

Add borders around text (add fill)

Add a drop shadow

Create text on its side (rotated)

Create a large first letter (Drop Cap)

Create white text on black background

Create newspaper columns

Create horizontal lines

Create a vertical line between columns

Create a table in columns

Create running titles (headers/footers)

Link a spreadsheet

Create charts and graphs

Create a published look

Related Concepts


Papers and Academic Documents

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including academic papers. Click File [image] New, then select a project that will help you build an exam, figure grades, make graph paper, or write papers and reports.

Some other tools and ideas you may find useful include the following:

Learn about document basics

Create a numbered outline

Stretch text to fit a specified number of pages

Create footnotes or endnotes

Number pages

Create headers or footers

Create a hanging indent for bibliography

Make headings look the same

Put data in a table

Insert an equation

Insert a graphics image

Create a table of contents

Create an index

Create a list of figures

Related Concepts


Awards and Certificates

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including awards and certificates. Click File [image] New, then select a project that will help you create an award or certificate.

To create your own certificates, try the following tools and ideas:

Create page and text borders

Add clip art images

Add a fancy border

Print the certificate sideways (landscape)

Move text close to image (Wrap Text)

Change the look of the box around an image

Create a watermark behind text

Shape and contour text (TextArt)

Create a table for detailed information

Print the table without lines showing

Enlarge the first letter (Drop Cap)

Create white text on black background

Related Concepts


About Folded and Bound Documents

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including folded and bound documents. Click File [image] New, then select a project that will help you create a brochure, greeting card, or thank you note.

You can arrange information on the page so that when you fold it, you can turn pages like a book. Some other tools and ideas you may find useful include the following:

Print several pages on one page (Subdivide Page)

Create headers and footers

Adjust for binding width and 2-sided printing

Learn more about 2-sided settings

Print as a booklet

Print sideways on the page (landscape)

Print chapters

Print volumes

Related Concepts


Fax Forms and Memos

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including fax cover sheets and memos. Click File [image] New, then select a project that will help you create a memo or send a fax.

To create your own fax cover sheets and memos, here are some tools and ideas to get you started.

Change tab settings to align headings

Place a date flush right

Insert the current date or data code

Add images

Create white text on black background

Shape and contour text (business logo)

Quickly add a line across the page

Create borders around text and page

Create a watermark image behind text

Related Concepts


Record-Keeping Forms

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including record-keeping forms. Click File [image] New, then select a project that will help you create a balance sheet, expense report, income statement, invoice, meeting agenda, press release, purchase order, or telephone message pad.

To create your own record-keeping forms, use the following tools and ideas:

Create a table

Create a header row

Adjust table columns

Adjust table rows

Make the table fancy (SpeedFormat)

Turn off or change table lines

Print a table without the lines showing

Work while table lines are hidden

Join cells to make one cell

Split one cell into two cells

Position information inside the table

Increment numbers (QuickFill)

Print the form sideways (landscape)

Make it fit on the page

Do math in a table

Turn your form into a template

Related Concepts


About Formatting the Look of a Document

Formatting refers to changing the appearance of a document, such as italicizing words, changing margins, and centering titles.

When you select text and apply a formatting option, the formatting affects only the selected text. If you do not select text, the formatting affects either the word, paragraph, or page at the insertion point, depending on the kind of formatting you use.

For example, if you apply italics (with no text selected), the word at the insertion point is italicized. If the insertion point is not in a word, the next text you type will be italicized.

If you change margins or line spacing (with no text selected), the change affects the entire paragraph at the insertion point and all subsequent text.

To change tab settings using the Ruler or tab bar

To change side margins from the Ruler

To indent text

To center text vertically

To change margins using margin guidelines

To change the spacing between lines of text

To select text

To center text at the insertion point

To center text with dot leaders

Related Concepts


About Tables

Use a table to quickly arrange columns of numbers and text. A table consists of rows and columns of cells that you fill in with text, numbers, or graphics.

Within each cell, text wraps within margins just as it does in a document window. The entire row expands to accommodate added text.

You can use tables to create office forms and calendars, to create side-by-side columns, and to align rows of text, numbers, and graphics.  You can change the arrangement and look of the table in many ways.  You can even create a table that links, calculates, or merges data.

You can also create one cell of a table within text, called a floating cell.

About Creating Tables and Floating Cells

About Changing the Look of a Table or Its Parts

About Linking, Calculating, and Merging Table Data

Related Concepts


About Graphics

You can easily insert drawings, pictures, and other items into a document.

When you insert an image into Corel WordPerfect, it is placed inside a box (sometimes called a frame). When you click an image, the box is selected, as indicated by sizing handles.

You can quickly change how the box looks (for example, change the border, shading, or placement on the page). You can change the appearance of the image by editing it with the WordPerfect image tools or by editing it in another graphics application.

You can also apply graphics box styles especially designed for equations, text boxes, decorative text, and borders, and customize these graphic box styles.

To scan images into Corel WordPerfect

To draw shapes in your document

To create a drawing

To add text in a graphics box

To insert a chart

To insert clipart

Related Concepts


To insert a chart
To insert a chart,

1	Click where you want to insert the chart.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Chart.

3	Edit the sample chart and data sheet.

4	Click outside the chart to return to the document editing window.

Tips

Corel WordPerfect uses Corel Presentations to edit the chart.

To create a chart using data stored in another file, such as a Corel Quattro Pro spreadsheet or a database, click Insert [image] Chart, then click Data [image] Import.

To insert a chart that already exists in another document, open the document in the application in which it was created (such as Corel Presentations or Corel Quattro Pro). Click the chart, then click Edit [image] Copy. Switch to your Corel WordPerfect document, then click Edit [image] Paste Special [image] OK.

About Creating Charts


About Merging Envelopes

You can create merged envelopes without creating a form document containing the envelope settings. This means that you can create envelopes as you merge another form document (such as a letter), or you can create merged envelopes from a blank document window.

An envelope is created for each record you have selected in the data source.

To merge using the Address Book

To merge envelopes

Related Concepts


About Merging Labels

When you create labels, you can either use Merge or insert information directly from the Address Book. In both cases, you must first create a document containing the label paper size information.

When you use the Address Book, first specify a label paper size and then go to the Address Book to insert names.

When you use Merge, first create a form document containing the label paper size and then merge the form document with a data source. Usually you create the data source first because you need to specify the corresponding field names in the form document.

To insert addresses from the Address Book

To create labels

To insert addresses on labels

To merge using the Address Book

To merge labels

Related Concepts


About Changing Windows Screen Colors

Use the Windows Display Properties dialog box to change the colors of your Corel WordPerfect title bars, dialog boxes, and document windows.

To change Windows screen colors

To change settings that affect the document window

Related Concepts


To create a list of items in your document
To create a list of items in your document,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List.

2	Specify the name of the list in the List text box.

3	Select a word or phrase in the document that you want to include as an entry in the list.

4	Click Mark.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each item you want to include in the list.

6	Click where you want the list to display in your document.

7	Click Define.

8	Click a list definition name, then click Insert.

9	Click Generate.

Tips

Click Create, Edit, or Retrieve in the Define List dialog box to create, edit, or retrieve a list definition.

Click Delete in the Define List dialog box to delete a list definition.

To start the list at the top of a new page, press Ctrl+Enter.

About Creating a List of Items in Your Document


About Filling In Forms at the Computer

You can create a file that prints information in the correct position when you print on a preprinted form.

For example, if you complete the same invoice form often, you can create a file that lets you enter information on screen. When you print the file, it enters information correctly on the form. To fill out the invoice, you retrieve the file and complete information as requested. Then you place the invoice form in the printer and print the file.

The following features can assist you in setting up such a file.

Use Advance to position the insertion point

Insert comments on screen as prompts

Create a table then print it without lines

Use a keyboard merge to fill in information

Related Concepts


About Document Basics

When you start Corel WordPerfect, notice the dotted lines in the blank document window. Use them to adjust page margins and column widths. Here are some more features and ideas to make your job easier.

Do basic formatting

Use the toolbar to work faster

Use the Ruler to specify tabs and indents

Make text fit on a specified number of pages

Use ready-made documents

Select text to make changes

Bold or italicize selected text

Change text fonts (appearance)

Move text and graphics with the mouse

Cut, copy, and paste text to other locations

Save documents

Open documents

Close and exit

Manage files

Print documents

Arrange, size, and switch document windows

Related Concepts


Example 1
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example 2
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example 3
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example 4
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example 5
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example 6
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example 7
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


About Styles

Styles provide an easy way to format similar types of text, such as headings and lists. Use a style repeatedly to save time and ensure that your document has a consistent format. If you change your mind about the format, you can edit the style to update all text to which the style has been applied.

For example, to format the headings in a report in a large font, create a style that contains the font size format, then apply it to each of the headings. If you later want the headings italicized, edit the style to add italics, and all the headings are updated at once.

There are five kinds of styles:

Character styles are useful for formatting text within a paragraph.

Automatic character styles are updated when you change the format of any text that uses the style.

Paragraph styles are useful for formatting entire paragraphs. Headings are formatted as paragraphs.

Automatic paragraph styles are updated when you change the format of a paragraph that uses the style. All other paragraphs with that format are updated as well.

Document (open) styles are useful for formatting all text from the insertion point to the end of the document.

Styles you create are saved with the current document. To use a style for other documents, you can save the style in a file, then retrieve it in another document. You can also copy a style to a template for use in other documents.

Many Corel WordPerfect features, such as footers, footnotes, and graphics boxes, are based on styles. These system styles are available for all Corel WordPerfect documents. You can edit system styles for the current document and for a template.

To create the default format for the current document

To create a style

To apply a style to text

To edit a style

To delete a style

To copy styles

To save the format of a paragraph as a style

To copy the box format to other boxes

To save styles in a separate file

To retrieve styles that are saved in a file

To view and edit system styles

To reset a system style to its default

Related Concepts


About Drop Caps

Drop caps are single letters that decorate text at the beginning of a line or paragraph. They are an effective way to draw a reader's attention to the beginning of a story or chapter. You can quickly insert a drop cap and easily customize it.

You can customize a drop cap to make it stand out. For example, you can change the drop cap's font, color, and height. You can add a border or shading. You can also have the drop cap include more than one character or use the first word of the paragraph as a drop cap.

To create a large letter at the beginning of a paragraph (drop cap)

To change the size font, position, and fill of a drop cap

To change the drop cap options


About Finding and Replacing Text

Search for any text, such as phrases, words, or individual characters in a document. You can replace some or all occurrences of the text with other text, or you can delete the text.

Use Type [image] Word Forms to search for different forms of a word, such as "talk," "talked," and "talking." You can replace these words with equivalent forms of another word, such as "speak," "spoke," and "speaking." Word Forms finds different verb tenses and plurals of nouns.

Use the Match menu to find precise matches of text. Whole Word search finds only complete words, not parts of words. You can match the case of text, and can find text with specific font styles. The Case and Font options are available on the Replace menu to use for replacement text.

To find words or characters

To find exact matches for a word

To find different forms of a word

To find and replace words or characters

To find and replace exact matches for a word

To find and replace different forms of a word

Related Concepts


About Making a Document Fit

Use Make It Fit to make a document fit a certain number of pages.

For example, you can take a resume that is more than one page and shrink it to fit the page.  Make It Fit can also expand a letter to fit the number of pages you want.

To fit a document on a certain number of pages


About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table

Use Table Borders/Fill to change the line style, color, and fill options of the current cell, a group of cells, or of the entire table. For example, you can choose a border for the entire table, add patterns or color to table cells, or print the table without lines.

If you format the lines differently in adjacent cells, click Apply often to check the results. Otherwise, you could end up with uneven lines.  For example, in the illustration below, the top line of cell A2 and the bottom line of cell B1 are both thick, which creates a stair-step effect instead of a straight line.

To change the line style, line color, or fill of a table cell

To change the line style, color, or fill of selected table cells

To change the line style, line color, or fill of all table cells

To add a border to a table

To select an alternating fill for a table

To set a standard look for all tables in a document

To add diagonal lines in a table cell

To quickly format a table with predefined styles (SpeedFormat)

Related Concepts


About Saving a Table Style as a Separate File

You can create your own table style and add it to the list of available SpeedFormat styles. By default, a style you create becomes part of the style list for the default template. If you want to use your table style with a different template or on a different computer, save it as a file after you create it.

To save a table style as a separate file

To retrieve table styles you have saved

Related Concepts


About Giving a Table a New Look (SpeedFormat)

You can quickly give your table a new look with line and fill styles. Use Table SpeedFormat to apply a business or decorative style to a table.

You can also create your own table style and add it to the list of available SpeedFormat styles. A style you create becomes part of the style list for the default template. If you want to use your table style with a different template or on a different computer, save it as a file after you create it.

To quickly format a table with predefined styles (SpeedFormat)

To save a table style to a specific template

To save a table style as a separate file

To rename a table style

To delete a table style

Related Concepts


About Scanning Images into Corel WordPerfect

Use Acquire Image to scan an image, such as a photograph or drawing, directly into Corel WordPerfect as a bitmap image. Use Select Image Source to select your image scanning device.

If you do not have an image scanner with a TWAIN-compatible driver connected to your computer, Acquire Image and Select Image Source will not appear on your Insert menu. Each scanner has different capabilities that affect how you can use it. See your scanner documentation for more information.

To scan images into Corel WordPerfect

To set up your scanner


key type

There are two sort key types: alphanumeric and numeric. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, then by individual numerals. A numeric key sorts by numbers only and sorts in numeric order. In an alphanumeric sort, 93 is sorted after 837. In a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


About Converting Code Pages

Use Code Page Settings to choose character sets for importing and exporting files in different languages.

A code page is a table in the DOS or Windows operating systems that defines which ASCII or ANSI character set is used in a document. Different ASCII or ANSI character sets are used for different languages. When you save a document, you can change the code page, and thus the character set, for the document.

To specify code page settings

Related Concepts


About Converting Documents

Use Conversion Settings to specify default options for converting text, graphics, and word processing files.

You can insert a Windows graphic (metafile) into Corel WordPerfect by pasting it from the Clipboard into a document or by inserting a .wmf file on disk into a figure box. When you do this, you can store the graphics image as a Windows .wmf file only, as a WordPerfect .wpg file only, or you can save the image in both formats.

To specify document conversion settings

To convert a file from a different format

Related Concepts


About Converting Fonts

When converting documents from other file formats, Corel WordPerfect attempts to match the fonts in the original document as closely as possible. The name of the original font displays on the Property Bar. Both the original font code and the match Corel WordPerfect provides are shown in Reveal Codes. You can provide conversion settings to specify conversion defaults for WordPerfect 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite fonts.

To specify font conversion settings

Related Concepts


About Template Objects

When you create a template, you can add the following "objects" (features) to the template: menus, toolbars, macros, QuickWords, styles, and keyboards.

You can also copy objects from other templates to the template you are creating.

Associating Template Objects

You can associate the toolbars, menus, and keyboards in your template with a Corel WordPerfect feature so they appear only when you use that feature. For example, in the standard template the Merge toolbar is associated with the Merge feature. It appears only when you work with a data or form file for a merge.

You can only associate macros with macro triggers, which play the macro as you use the template.

To copy objects to templates

To remove objects from a template you are editing

To associate a template with toolbars, menus, and keyboards

To associate features with toolbars, menus, and keyboards

To use a macro trigger in a template

Related Concepts


Sample Formulas for Tables

You can create different kinds of formulas as the following examples illustrate. Spaces are not needed between values, operators, and functions. Column and function letters can be uppercase or lowercase.

Sample Formula	What It Does
A1	Displays the value found in cell A1.
Wage*Time	Multiplies the value in the cell named "Wage" by the value in the cell named "Time."
LN(TABLE A.Data)	Displays the natural logarithm of the value in the cell named "Data" in the table named "Table A."
POWER(2,January.Week1)	Raises 2 to the power of the value in the cell intersection "January.Week1."
[C4]-D14	Subtracts the value in D14 from the value in the absolute cell address C4.
IF(ACOS(1)=0,1,0)	Displays a 1 if the condition ACOS(1)=0 is true or a 0 if the condition is false. This is an example of a nested function.
LEFT("New York",3)	Displays the first 3 characters ("New") in the text string "New York." All text strings require quotation marks.
SUM(A10:A18)/B1	Adds all values in the range of cells A10 through A18, then divides by the value in B1. A colon between two cell addresses creates a range of cells.
PMT(8.5%/12,-2000,18,3500,0)	Calculates the periodic payments on an investment with an interest rate of 8.5%, a present value of $2000, 18 periods, and a future value of $3500.
(hms(14,0)-hms(10,30))*120*24	Calculates the amount owed based on a start time (10:30AM), stop time (2:00PM), and hourly rate of $120. The difference between the start and stop times is calculated as a fraction of the day (24 hours).
To create a formula in a table or floating cell

Related Concepts


cell intersection

A cell intersection is a reference to a cell that uses the names or addresses of the intersecting table components (for example, column and row). The names or addresses are separated by a period (for example, if column B is named January and row 2 is named Week1, the cell intersection January.Week1 references cell B2).


relative and absolute cell addresses

The cell addresses you type into a formula (for example, C4-C12) are relative. When the formula is copied to a new cell, the cell addresses in the formula are updated to be in the same relative position to the new cell as those in the original formula were to the original cell.

For example, if you type the formula C4-C12 into cell C14, then copy it to cell D14, the formula D4-D12 is created.

Absolute cell addresses are not updated when they are copied. To specify an absolute cell address, enclose the cell address in brackets (for example, [C4]), or name the cell.

For example, if you type the formula [C4]-C12 into cell C14, then copy it to cell D14, the formula [C4]-D12 is created.

You can create mixed cell addresses with an absolute column letter and relative row number, or vice versa (for example, [C]4 or C[14]).


nested function

A function placed within another function.


About Arithmetic and Logical Operators in Table Formulas

Arithmetic Operators

Use the following arithmetic operators when you create formulas in tables and floating cells.

Operator	What It Does
+ (Addition)	Adds values.
- (Negation)	Makes values negative.
- (Subtraction)	Subtracts the value on the right from the value on the left.
* (Multiplication)	Multiplies values.
/ (Division)	Divides the value on the left by the value on the right.
% (Remainder)	Returns the remainder of the value on the left divided by the value on the right.
% (Percent)	Divides the value on the left of the operator by 100. Be sure that there is another operator or a separator following the Percent operator, or that it is the last operator in the formula. If a percent sign (%) is between two values, it becomes the Remainder operator.
^ (Power)	Raises the value on the left to the power indicated by the value on the right.
! (Factorial)	Calculates the factorial of the number preceding it. Do not place an equals sign (=) following the Factorial operator or it becomes the Not equal to operator.
Logical Operators

Logical operators compare two or more numeric or text values and return a result of 1 if the statement is true or 0 if the statement is false. Use the following logical operators for calculations in table or floating cells.

Operator	What It Means or Does
=	Equal to
>	Greater than
<	Less than
< > or !=	Not equal to
>=	Greater than or equal to
<=	Less than or equal to
&  (AND)	When placed between two or more logical statements, returns a 1 (true) if all the statements are true and a 0 (false) if any of the statements are false.
!  (NOT)	Inverts the meaning of a function or another operator.
|  (OR)	When placed between two or more logical statements, returns a 1 (true) if at least one of the statements is true. Returns a 0 (false) if all the statements are false.
^^ (XOR)	When placed between two or more logical statements, the EXclusive OR operator (XOR) returns a 1 (true) if one or the other but not both of the statements in the formula are true (or if an odd number of statements are true). It returns a 0 (false) if neither or both of the statements are true (or if an even number of the statements are true).
To create a formula in a table or floating cell

Related Concepts


To create a chart from a table
To create a chart from a table,

1	Create a table with the data to include in a chart, then click in the table.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Chart.

3	Use Chart Editor to change the chart type, add a legend, or edit the chart attributes (series color, chart frame, and so on).

4	Click outside the chart to return to the document window.

Tips

When you create a chart from a table, the two are associated. If you move the chart to a different place in your document, it maintains its association with the table.

Use the top row (Row 1) and the first column (Column A) in the table for data labels.

To change chart data and label names, return to the table and enter the changes in the table cells.

About Creating Charts


Business Letters

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including business correspondence. Click File [image] New, then select a project that will create the formatting of the letter.

In addition, when you write business letters, the following tools and ideas can be useful.

See ideas for creating basic letters

Create letterheads

Create headers/footers for subsequent pages

Create a watermark behind text

Create a bulleted list

Format paragraphs (indent, spacing)

Quickly create horizontal lines

Create a table

Make the table look good with SpeedFormat

Insert addresses on labels

Merge a form letter with addresses

Related Concepts


About QuickTips

QuickTips provide information about the icons and buttons on the toolbar, Property Bar, and Application Bar, and about options on the menu. QuickTips pop up in a small box next to the pointer when you point to the icon or button for a few seconds.

You can also view QuickTips on dialogs by clicking on the question mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box, then clicking on the option you want help on. You can also right-click the option.

To turn off QuickTips

Related Concepts


Headings

QuickFormat uses automatic paragraph styles to format headings. When you select Headings on the QuickFormat dialog box, you create an automatic paragraph style. The heading is applied at the insertion point, and you can then apply it to other headings.


To edit your serial number and PIN
To edit your serial number and PIN,

1	Click Help [image] About Corel WordPerfect [image] Edit Serial Number/PIN.

2	Type your serial number.

3	Type your Personal Identification Number (PIN).

About Getting Information on Corel WordPerfect


To display or hide table gridlines
To display or hide table gridlines,

1	Click View [image] Table Gridlines.

Tips

You will see table gridlines when this option has a check mark next to it.

To always display table gridlines, click Tools [image]  Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Table gridlines.

About Table Gridlines


To edit a table border style
To edit a table border style,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill [image] Table [image] Styles.

3	Click an existing style, then click Edit.

4	Unless you want All sides selected, click individual sides in the Select sides to modify group box.

5	Select any other available options.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click Borders/Fill.

Related Topics

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To change how a graphics image looks
To change how a graphics image looks,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Image Tools.

2	Select any options to change the image.

Tips

To get information on a dialog box option, click [image], then click the option.

To make precise changes to the image, click Edit Attributes.

To restore the image to its original appearance, click Reset Attributes.

To edit the image in Corel Presentations, double-click the image or right-click it and click Edit Contents.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To attach a box to a page
To attach a box to a page,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] click Position.

2	Select Page on the Attach Box To drop-down list.

3	To move the box from its anchor point, set horizontal and vertical measurements.

Tips

The box is tied to a position on a page. However, added text can push the graphic to the same location on the next page, unless you select the Box Stays on Page option.

Related Topics

About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page


To attach a box to a paragraph
To attach a box to a paragraph,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Position.

2	Select Paragraph on the Attach Box To drop-down list.

3	To move the box from its anchor point, set horizontal and vertical measurements.

Tips

If you use the mouse move the box, a guideline and a pushpin show the paragraph it is attached to.

Attach a graphics box to a paragraph when you want it to stay with the text that describes it.

Related Topics

About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page


To attach a box to a character
To attach a box to a character,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Position.

2	Select Character on the Attach Box To drop-down list.

3	Select a line position option (Top, Centered, Bottom, Content baseline, or Custom).

Tips

To prevent text on other lines from printing over the box, select Box changes text line height.

When you create equations, you can use the Custom option to precisely align the figures in the equation.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, right-click it.

About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page


To change a graphics box caption's position
To change a graphics box caption's position,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Caption.

2	Select any caption position options.

Tips

To get information on a dialog box option, click [image], then click the option.

About Adding a Caption to a Graphics Box


To change a graphics box caption's width
To change a graphics box caption's width,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Caption.

2	Select one of the caption width options.

Tips

To get information on a dialog box option, click [image], then click the option.

About Adding a Caption to a Graphics Box


To rotate a graphics box caption
To rotate a graphics box caption,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Caption.

2	Click a rotation option under Rotate Caption.

Tips

The example window shows where each option will place the text.

About Adding a Caption to a Graphics Box


To change a graphics box caption's numbering style
To change a graphics box caption's numbering style,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Caption.

2	Click Change in the Caption Numbering and Styles box.

3	Select a counter (numbering) style, then click Select.

Tips

The counter style you select numbers the caption in sequence with other graphics boxes using that counter.

Related Topics

About Changing Graphics Box Caption Numbering Styles


To set a standard look for all tables in a document
To set a standard look for all tables in a document,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill [image] Table.

3	Select any options to apply lines, fill, and a border to the table.

4	Click Default Settings.

Tips

The line, fill, and border settings you create will be the default for other tables in this and other documents that use the same template.

You can also right-click the table, then click Borders/Fill.

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To change the position of the contents inside a graphics box
To change the position of the contents inside a graphics box,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] click Content.

2	To shift the image position inside the box, click an option on the Horizontal or Vertical Position drop-down lists.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Types of Graphics You Can Insert


To open a document you recently edited
To open a document you recently edited,

1	Click File [image] select a filename.

Tips

You can also click File, then type the number to the left of the filename.

You can also click File [image] Open, click the arrow at the end of the File name text box, then select one of the last nine files you have opened.

About Opening Documents


To create colors using color models (RGB, HLS, CYMK)
To create colors using color models (RGB, HLS, CYMK),

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Text Color [image] More.

2	Click the square you want to replace on the color wheel.

3	Select a color model (RGB, HLS, or CMYK) from the Select Model drop-down list.

4	Adjust the values in the Color values text boxes until the color you want is shown in the Current Color box.

About the Color Palette


To adjust the border space for a graphics box
To adjust the border space for a graphics box,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] click Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	To change the space between the image and the edge of the border, set the Inside Spacing.

3	To change the space between the edge of the border and the text around it, set the Outside Spacing.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To change the drop shadow for a graphics border
To change the drop shadow for a graphics border,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] click Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	To change the color, select a color on the  color palette.

3	To change the width, select a width or set a numeric width.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To create colors with the color wheel
To create colors with the color wheel,

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Text Color [image] More.

2	Drag the pointer on the color wheel until the color you want appears in the Current color box, then release the mouse button.

3	Adjust the values in the Color values text boxes until the color you want is shown in the Current color box.

About the Color Palette


To display or hide the Property Bar
To display or hide the Property Bar,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars [image] Property Bar.

Tips

After it is displayed, you can right-click the Property Bar, then click Hide Property Bar.

About the Property Bar


To create a hyperlink in a Corel WordPerfect document
To create a hyperlink in a Corel WordPerfect document,

1	Select the words or symbols to use as the link.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Specify the URL you want to link to.

4	Click Make text appear as button to make the link to appear as a button rather than as highlighted text.

Tips

Use QuickLinks to set up frequently used links. For example, you might specify that typing the word @Corel automatically sets up a link to the Corel home page at http://www.corel.com.

Click Browse Web to launch a web browser such as Netscape Navigator. As you view web documents, the URL address is automatically placed in the Document text box. Close or minimize the web browser to return to the Hyperlink Properties dialog box.

If you type a URL address in the Document text box, then click Browse Web, the browser attempts to locate the document for you.

Related Topics

About Using Hyperlinks in Corel WordPerfect or Web Documents


To move the insertion point to the next column
To move the insertion point to the next column,

1	Click in the next column.

Tips

Press Ctrl+Enter to start inserting text in the next column.

Press Alt+Right Arrow or Left Arrow to move between created columns.

Press Alt+Home or Alt+End to move to the top or bottom of a column.

About Columns


To print individual labels
To print individual labels,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Multiple Pages.

2	In the Page(s)/Label(s) text box, type the number of each label or a range of labels.

3	Click Print.

Tips

Labels are numbered from left to right, top to bottom. For example, if you use labels with 3 columns, label 4 is the first label on the second row.

To print label 3, type 3. To print labels 3 and 8, type 3 8. To print label 3 through the end of the document, type 3-.

About Labels


To change footnote or endnote numbers to characters
To change footnote or endnote numbers to characters,

1	Click where you want the numbers changed to characters.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Options [image] Advanced.

3	Select Characters from the Method pop-up list.

4	Type the characters in the Characters text box.

5	To restart footnote numbering on every page, click Restart numbering on each page.

Tips

In the text box you can also press Ctrl+W, then specify any character in the Symbols sets.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in document text
To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in document text,

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Options [image] Advanced [image] In Text.

2	Make formatting changes to the style.

Tips

To get information about an option in the Styles Editor, click [image], then click the option.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To change the spacing between footnotes or endnotes
To change the spacing between footnotes or endnotes,

1	Click on the page where you want the change to take effect.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Options [image] Advanced.

3	Specify a new measurement in the Space text box.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To print "(continued...)" with footnotes that go onto another page
To print "(continued...)" with footnotes that go onto another page,

1	Click where you want the change to start.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote.

3	Click Options [image] Advanced, specify the length of the footnote to keep together on the first page, then click Insert (continued...) message.

About Footnote Formatting Options


To specify where the footnotes should print on a page
To specify where the footnotes should print on a page,

1	Click where you want the change to start.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Options [image] Advanced.

3	Select a Position option to indicate where to print footnotes (immediately below the last line of text, or at the bottom of the page).

About Footnote Formatting Options


To reset a system style to its default
To reset a system style to its default,

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Select a system style, then click Options [image] Reset [image] Yes.

Tips

When you reset a system style, any changes you made to it are removed.

About Styles


To change text to uppercase, lowercase, or initial caps
To change text to uppercase, lowercase, or initial caps,

1	Select the text or click the word you want to change.

2	Click Edit [image] Convert Case [image] Lowercase, Uppercase, or Initial Capitals.

Tips

You can also press Ctrl+K to switch the current word or selected text between uppercase and lowercase.

When you change selected text from uppercase to lowercase, the first letter in each sentence remains capitalized.

Initial Capitals leaves articles, prepositions, and conjunctions lowercase.

You can add Uppercase, Lowercase, Initial Capitals, and Case Toggle buttons to the toolbar. They are found in the Edit category of the Toolbar Editor.

About Uppercase, Lowercase, and Initial Capitals


To cut text or graphics and save to the Clipboard
To cut text or graphics and save to the Clipboard,

1	Select the text or graphics you want to cut.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

Related Topics

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To add text to the end of the Clipboard contents
To add text to the end of the Clipboard contents,

1	Select the text you want to append.

2	Click Edit [image] Append.

Tips

Paste the Clipboard contents into a document by clicking Edit [image] Paste or by pressing Ctrl+V.

The selection stays on the Clipboard until you use Cut or Copy to replace it with a new selection, or until you exit Windows.

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To reverse an editing action
To reverse an editing action,

1	Click Edit [image] Undo.

2	To reverse another action, click Undo again.

Tips

Use Redo to reverse the last Undo action.

If you want to undo a previous action, click Edit [image] Undo/Redo History to view all the last Undo/Redo items.

About Undo and Redo


To display or hide symbols
To display or hide symbols,

1	Click View [image] Show [image].

Tips

You can specify which symbols to display. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display. Select the Symbols tab, then select the symbols you want to display.

About Showing Format Symbols in a Document


To display or hide the Reveal Codes window
To display or hide the Reveal Codes window,

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

Tips

You can hide Reveal Codes by dragging the divider line to the top or bottom of the window. Or, you can right-click in the Reveal Codes window, then click Hide Reveal Codes.

If a code in your document is associated with a dialog box, you can open the dialog box by double-clicking on the code.

About Codes in a Document


To create a new sort definition
To create a new sort definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Sort [image] New.

2	Type a name in the Sort description text box.

3	Click a record type to sort by.

4	Click the sort type for the key you are defining.

5	Click the sort order for the key.

6	Specify any changes in the record subdivision text boxes (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

7	Click Add Key at End to define another key, then repeat steps 4-6.

8	To insert a key before a defined key, click the Key number, then click Insert Key Between. Repeat steps 4-6.

Tips

To sort by the last item in a list, specify a negative number (-1) in the appropriate record subdivision text box (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

You can also click Tools [image] Sort, click a Sort by option, then click Edit or Copy to edit or copy an existing sort definition.

To delete a Sort by option, click the option, then click Delete.

About New Sort, Edit Sort, or Copy Sort


To select records that meet certain criteria (using Sort)
To select records that meet certain criteria (using Sort),

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Specify the file you want to sort and the file where you want to output the sorted text.

3	Click New.

4	Specify a name in the Sort description text box.

5	Type selection statements in the Extract records text box. (For example, type key 1=Jones to select records containing "Jones". See Tips below for help.)

6	Specify any changes in the record subdivision text boxes (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

7	If you do not want to sort the records that will be extracted, click Extract records without sorting.

8	Click OK.

9	Click Options, then make sure Allow Undo after sorting is selected.

10	Click Sort to extract the records.

11	If the records were not extracted as you wanted them to be, click Edit [image] Undo.

Tips

Use Extract records to extract records that meet criteria that you specify, such as a list of individuals with the same ZIP code or postal code.

After you extract records, the original file remains unchanged. The output file contains only the files you specified.

To use only some of the records in a document, select those records first and then define the sort.

Use the following selection operators in your selection statement. You can also use parentheses to group parts of yourselection statement. Click a symbol below to see an example of how it is used.

Symbol	What It Does
|	Selects records that meet the conditions of either key.
&	Selects records that meet the conditions of both keys.
=	Selects records that have exactly the same information in an indicated key.
<>	Selects records that do not match the information for an indicated key.
>	Selects records that have information greater than the information for an indicated key.
<	Selects records that have information less than the information for an indicated key.
>=	Selects records that have information greater than or equal to the information for an indicated key.
<=	Selects records that have information less than or equal to the information for an indicated key.
key g	Selects records that contain the word you specify anywhere in the record (global search).
About New Sort, Edit Sort, or Copy Sort


To use a non-Roman alphabet font
To use a non-Roman alphabet font,

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Font Map [image] Code Pages.

2	Select the non-English alphabet font in the Printer font box.

3	Select the corresponding language code page in the Code page drop down list.

Tips

Edit the Code pages mapping table only if you are using a font that does not match your computer's code page.

About Font Code Pages


To adjust spacing between words in fully justified text
To adjust spacing between words in fully justified text,

1	Click where you want the setting to begin, or select the text you want the setting to affect.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/Letter Spacing.

3	Specify the lower limit in the Compressed To text box.

4	Specify the upper limit in the Expanded To text box.

Tips

If the lower limit is set at 60%, the space between words in justified text will be at least 60% of the original space. If the upper limit is set at 400%, the space between words will not be larger than 400% of the original space.

If words are too compressed, increase the lower limit. If they are spaced too far apart, decrease the upper limit.

If your printer cannot support this feature, any percentages you type will not affect your document.

About Spacing Words and Letters


To adjust the space between lines (leading)
To adjust the space between lines (leading),

1	Click in the paragraph where you want the setting to begin, or select text in the paragraphs you want to change.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/Letter Spacing.

3	Click Adjust Leading.

4	Specify the amount of space to increase or decrease between lines.

About Adjusting the Leading Between Lines


To turn Automatic Kerning on or off
To turn Automatic Kerning on or off,

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Click Automatic kerning.

About Kerning


To place the first baseline at the top margin of the page
To place the first baseline at the top margin of the page,

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Select Baseline placement for typesetting.

About Baseline Placement for Typesetting


To insert the date and time
To insert the date and time,

1	Click where you want to insert the date.

2	Click Insert [image] Date/Time.

3	Select the format of the date you want to insert.

4	If you want to date to be updated when you open or print the document, click Automatic Update.

5	Click Insert.

Tips

Instead of using the Date/Time dialog box, you can press Ctrl+D to insert the date as text. Press Ctrl+Shift+D to insert the date as a code that is updated when you open or print the document.

To edit the selected format, click New Format. Click the tabs at the top of the dialog box and double-click the codes you want to insert. You can also type or delete any punctuation, spaces, and text with the date.

About Adding the Date and Time in a Document


To insert a document's filename in text
To insert a document's filename in text,

1	Click where you want to insert the filename.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Filename.

 Tips

To insert the path and filename, click Insert [image] Other [image] Path and Filename.

If the document has never been saved, the filename will be displayed only after you save the document.

If you rename the document, the filename updates automatically.

You can also insert filenames into headers, footers, and comments.

To insert a header or footer with the current filename, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then double-click Filestmp. You can also add the Filestamp button [image] to your toolbar, or select it from the Shipping Macros toolbar.

About Inserting Filenames in a Document


To center a line of text
To center a line of text,

1	Click on the line where you want to type the centered text.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Center.

3	Type the text, then press Enter.

Tips

You can also turn on centering by right-clicking in the document window, then clicking Center.

To center existing text, select the text, then click Format [image] Line [image] Center. This is useful when you want to center only part of a line.

Related Topics

About Centering Text


To right-align a line of text
To right-align a line of text,

1	Click at the beginning of a line.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right.

3	Type the text.

Tips

When you press Enter, justification returns to left alignment.

To right-align more than one paragraph, click Format [image] Justification [image] Right.

To leave the beginning of a line of text at the left margin and right-align the rest, click where you want to change the justification, then follow step 2.

You can also turn on Flush Right by pressing Alt+F7, or by right-clicking in the document window, then clicking Flush Right.

Related Topics

About Right-Aligning Text


To close the current document window
To close the current document window,

1	Click File [image] Close.

Tips

You can also click [image] in the upper right corner of the document window.

If you have not changed the document since the last time you saved it, the document closes. If you have changed the document, you are prompted to save your work.

Click No to close the document without saving it.

Related Topics

About Close and Exit


To indent text
To indent text,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Indent.

2	Type the text you want to indent.

3	Press Enter to end the indentation.

Tips

You can also press F7.

About Indent


To join table cells
To join table cells,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Join [image] QuickJoin.

3	Select the cells you want to join.

Tips

You can also select the cells [image] right-click the selection [image] click Join Cells.

The formatting of the top left cell in the selection is used for all the joined cells.

About Joining and Splitting Table Cells


To split a table
To split a table,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to divide the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Split [image] Table.

3	Click View [image] Reveal Codes and move the insertion point between the [Tbl Off] code of the first table and the [Tbl Def] code of the second table, then press Enter a few times to separate the tables.

About Joining and Splitting Tables


To display document windows overlapping each other
To display document windows overlapping each other,

1	Click Window [image] Cascade.

Tips

You cannot cascade document windows that are minimized.

About Document and Application Windows


To display document windows side by side
To display document windows side by side,

1	Click Window [image] Tile Side by Side.

Related Topics

About Document and Application Windows


To select a table cell with a keystroke
To select a table cell with a keystroke,

1	Click in the cell.

2	Press Shift+F8.

Tips

You can also use QuickSelect to select a cell, row or column, or the entire table.

Related Topics

About Selecting Text


To add a subdocument to a master document
To add a subdocument to a master document,

1	Open or create the file you want to use as a master document.

2	Click where you want to insert a subdocument link.

3	Click File [image] Document [image] Subdocument.

4	Specify the filename of a document to link to, then click Include.

5	Repeat steps 2-4 above to add other subdocument links.

Tips

You can add the Subdocument button to your toolbar and click it to perform step 3.

In Page view and Two Pages view of a master document, subdocument links display as icons. In Draft view, they display as comments.

Master document formatting codes apply to subdocuments, except where different codes are found in a subdocument. Also, master document styles override subdocument styles.

About Master Documents and Subdocuments


To specify where documents are saved
To specify where documents are saved,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files.

2	Specify the folder in which new files are saved in the Default document folder text box.

Tips

To specify a default file type (filename extension) for documents you save, click Use default extension on open and save. The extension you specify is used as the default for files you save for the first time and for files you save with a different name or format.

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To specify where template files are stored
To specify where template files are stored,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Template.

2	Specify a folder in the Default template folder text box, Additional template folder text box, or both.

3	Specify a filename for the Default template.

4	Specify a name for an additional objects template file (optional).

Tips

The additional objects template acts as an alternative template that can provide objects (keyboards, menus, template macros, toolbars, and styles) in addition to or in place of those on your default template.

If you want your standard template to be replaced by the additional objects template, click Update default template from additional objects template.

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

If you type a template name that does not exist, Corel WordPerfect creates the new template based on wp8xx.wpt (where xx is the language code, such as ce for Canadian English). However, if you have specified an additional objects template, the new template is based on the additional objects template.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To specify where spreadsheet files are located
To specify where spreadsheet files are located,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Spreadsheet/Database.

2	Specify a folder in the Default spreadsheet folder text box, the Supplemental spreadsheet folder text box, or both.

Tips

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To specify where database files are located
To specify where database files are located,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Spreadsheet/Database.

2	Specify a folder in the Default database folder text box, Supplemental database folder text box, or both.

Tips

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To specify where graphics files are located
To specify where graphics files are located,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Graphic.

2	Specify a folder in the Default graphics folder text box, the Supplemental graphics folder text box, or the Default fancy borders folder text box.

Tips

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To specify which folder macro files are stored in
To specify which folder macro files are stored in,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Merge/Macro.

2	Specify a folder in the Default macro folder text box, Supplemental macro folder text box, or both.

Tips

To create Favorites shortcut folders to the folders you selected, click Update Favorites with changes.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To change settings that affect the document window
To change settings that affect the document window,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display.

2	Select the Show and Scroll bars options to change which items display in the document window.

3	Select the Shadow cursor options to change the appearance of the shadow cursor and change where it displays in the document window.

4	Select the Measurement options to specify which units of measure display in dialog boxes and on the Application Bar and Ruler.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

About Changing How the Document Displays


To change the view of the current document
To change the view of the current document,

1	Click View.

2	Click Draft, Page, or Two Pages.

About Changing the View of the Document


To change the size of the default document display
To change the size of the default document display,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click View/Zoom.

2	To change how the document displays, click Draft, Page, or Two Pages.

3	To enlarge or reduce the view size, click a predefined zoom percentage or specify a custom percentage in the Other text box.

Tips

Zoom is not available when you select Two Pages view.

Related Topics

About Changing How the Document Displays


To change how codes are displayed in Reveal Codes
To change how codes are displayed in Reveal Codes,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Reveal Codes.

2	Select any options you want to change.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

You can also right-click in the Reveal Codes window, then click Settings.

Related Topics

About Changing How the Document Displays


To change how the Ruler appears
To change how the Ruler appears,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Ruler.

2	Select any options you want to change.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

You can also right-click the Ruler, then click Settings.

Related Topics

About Changing How the Document Displays


To change how merge codes appear
To change how merge codes appear,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Merge.

2	Select any options you want to change.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

Related Topics

About Changing How the Document Displays


To adjust column spacing
To adjust column spacing,

1	Click Format [image] Columns.

2	Click in the Space between text box, then specify the default space between columns.

3	If you are using parallel columns, click in the Extra line spacing in parallel columns text box, then specify the number of lines between rows.

Tips

Drag the column margin guidelines to increase or decrease the width of columns.

Drag the column gutter (space between columns) to change the position of the spacing between columns.

You can also use the triangle markers on the Ruler to change the column width and spacing.

About Columns


To create an equation using the 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor
To create an equation using the 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor,

1	Click where you want the equation to appear.

2	Click Insert [image] Equation.

3	Type variables and insert commands and symbols from the equation palette.

4	To save the equation and return to the document, click File [image] Close.

Tips

To see how the equation looks in the display window, click View [image] Redisplay.

To move through the different panes in the Equation Editor, press Shift+F6.

Related Topics

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


To select an equation palette
To select an equation palette,

1	In Equation Editor, click the palette pop-up list in the top left corner.

2	Select an equation palette.

Tips

Available equation palettes include: Commands, Large, Symbols, Greek, Arrows, Sets, Other, and Function.

About Equation Palettes


To update the appearance of an equation in the display window
To update the appearance of an equation in the display window,

1	In Equation Editor, click View [image] Redisplay.

Tips

You can also press Ctrl+F3 in the document window.

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


To change the user information for comments and document summaries
To change the user information for comments and document summaries,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Type your name in the Name text box.

3	Type your initials in the Initials text box.

4	Click the User color button, then select a color for your comments.

About Environment Settings


To specify how often you are prompted to hyphenate words
To specify how often you are prompted to hyphenate words,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Prompts, then select a hyphenation prompt option.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

About Environment Settings


To specify when beeps should alert you to errors
To specify when beeps should alert you to errors,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Prompts, then select any of the beep options to activate them.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Environment Settings


To save how your workspace looks when you restart Corel WordPerfect
To save how your workspace looks when you restart Corel WordPerfect,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Interface, then click Always or Prompt on Exit.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

About Environment Settings


To change whether the menus display shortcut keys
To change whether the menus display shortcut keys,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Interface, then click Display shortcut keys.

About Environment Settings


To edit the border of a graphics box
To edit the border of a graphics box,

1	Right-click the image or box you want to edit.

2	Click Border/Fill.

3	Select a border pattern in the Available Border Styles list box.

4	To change the border color, select a color in the Color pop-up palette.

5	To change the line style, select a line pattern in the Line Style pop-up palette.

6	To change the shadow behind the box, select an example in the Drop Shadow pop-up palette.

7	To use rounded corners, click Rounded Corners.

Tips

You can click Advanced to adjust the spacing inside and outside the border, change the color and width of the drop shadow, and adjust the curve of rounded corners.

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To add text in a graphics box
To add text in a graphics box,

1	Click Insert [image] Text Box.

2	Type the text you want.

3	Click outside the text box to return to your document.

Tips

Click inside the text box to edit the text. To select the text box, click the border. Drag the box handles to size the box. Drag the border to move the text box. Right-click the border to display a QuickMenu with additional editing options.

To add a box around existing text, click on the text, then click Format. Click the menu option that matches how much text you want to surround with the box, Paragraph, Column or Page [image] click Border/Fill.

You can also cut text and paste it into a text box.

Related Topics

About Types of Graphics You Can Insert


To specify conditions for a merge
To specify conditions for a merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

2	Specify the location of the form document and data source, and where the merge output is saved.

3	Click Select Records, then click Specify Conditions.

4	To specify a range of records, click Record Number Range, then specify the beginning and end of the range.

5	To specify conditions, select a field from each Field drop-down list.

6	Type the selection criteria in the Condition text boxes.

7	For an example of selection criteria, click Example. For more examples, click More.

8	Click OK, then click Merge to perform the merge.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

About Selecting Merge Records


To mark records for a merge
To mark records for a merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

2	Specify the location of the form document and data source.

3	Click Select Records, then click Mark Records.

4	Specify the range of records you want to display in the Record list.

5	Specify the first field to display in the Record list.

6	Click Update Record List to reflect your display choices.

7	Select the records you want to mark, or click Mark all Records in List.

8	Click OK twice to perform the merge.

Tips

You can also click Merge on the toolbar to perform a merge.

To get information about an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

About Selecting Merge Records


To drag and drop text within a document
To drag and drop text within a document,

1	Select the text you want to move or copy.

2	Drag the selected text where you want it. To copy the text, press Ctrl while you release the mouse button.

Related Topics

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To compare a document with an earlier version
To compare a document with an earlier version,

1	Open the current version of the document you want to compare.

2	Click File [image] Document [image] Add Compare Markings.

3	Click an option to compare the documents by word, phrase, sentence, or paragraph.

4	To compare the current document with an earlier version on disk, click OK. To compare it with a document that has a different filename, specify the path and filename, then click OK.

Tips

Text that has been added or moved in the current document is displayed as redline text. Text that has been deleted is displayed as strikeout text.

To see the number of changes made in the current document, click View count of insertions/deletions/moves.

About Comparing Documents


To edit linked or embedded information
To edit linked or embedded information,

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] [object name] [image] Edit.

3	Make any changes, then click outside the object box to return to the document window.

Tips

You can double-click most objects to edit them. However, if you double-click a sound or video clip, the clip plays.

You can also right-click the object, then click [object name] [image] Edit.

About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document


To display or hide toolbars
To display or hide toolbars,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Place a check mark next to each toolbar you want to display. Remove the check mark next to each toolbar you want to hide.

Tips

You can also right-click a toolbar, then select the toolbar you want to display or hide from the QuickMenu.

About the Toolbar


To display or hide the Ruler
To display or hide the Ruler,

1	Click View [image] Ruler.

About the Ruler


To display or hide the Application Bar
To display or hide the Application Bar,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars [image] Application Bar.

About the Application Bar


To fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates
To fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates,

1	Select the cells that contain the incrementing or decrementing pattern of values.

2	Extend the selection to include the cells in which you want to continue the pattern.

3	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] QuickFill.

Tips

You can also click QuickFill on the Table Formula toolbar.

About Filling a Table with Incrementing Numbers or Dates


To quickly add values in a table
To quickly add values in a table,

1	Click in the table cell below or to the right of the cells whose total you want to calculate.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] QuickSum.

Tips

QuickSum calculates the sum of the values in cells above or to the left of the insertion point position and enters the sum in the selected cell.

You can also select a range of cells to calculate sums for each column and row in the selection. Be sure to include an empty cell in the selection at the end of each column or row.

If you place the insertion point in a cell instead of selecting a range of cells, the calculated sum overwrites any values, formulas, or text that existed in the cell.

You can also click QuickSum on the Table Formula toolbar.

About Using Formulas in Tables


To go to the associated data file
To go to the associated data file,

1	Create or open a form document.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Go to Data.

3	If there is no associated data source, you must select an existing data source or create a new one.

4	To select an existing data source, click Select, then specify the file.

5	To create a data file, click Create, type a filename, then finish creating the data file.

6	Click Go to Form on the toolbar to return to the associated form document, or click Merge to merge the files.

About Associating Merge Files


To go to the associated form document
To go to the associated form document,

1	Create or open a data file.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Go to Form.

3	If there is no associated form document, you must create an association by selecting an existing form document or creating a new one.

4	To select an existing form document, click Select, then specify the file.

5	To create a form document, click Create, then finish creating the document.

6	Click Go to Data on the toolbar to return to the associated data file, or click Merge to merge the files.

About Associating Merge Files


To create hidden text
To create hidden text,

1	Make sure Hidden Text is being displayed in the document.

2	Place the insertion point where you want the hidden text.

3	Click Format [image] Font [image] Hidden.

4	Type the text you want to hide, then press the right arrow key to turn off the hidden text.

Tips

Hidden text must be displayed for you to type new hidden text. If Hidden is dimmed on the font dialog box, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Hidden text to display hidden text in the document.

If you delete a Hide code when the hidden text is not displayed in the document window, you will delete the text. To restore the deleted code and the hidden text, click Edit [image] Undo.

About Hiding Text


To delete text and graphics
To delete text and graphics,

1	Select the text and graphics you want to delete.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

Tips

To delete text and add new text in its place, select the text you want to delete, then type new text.

Related Topics

About Undo and Redo


To create QuickWords for text with formatting codes
To create QuickWords for text with formatting codes,

1	Type and format the text you want to save as a QuickWord, then select it.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

3	Type a one- or two-word QuickWord.

4	Click Add Entry.

Tips

You can expand a QuickWord by typing the abbreviation in your document followed by pressing Enter, Tab, or the Spacebar.

Avoid common words when you create QuickWords. For example, if you make "the" an abbreviation for "theatric," the word "the" will expand whenever you type it. You may want to add a special character before your QuickWords, such as a & or *.

QuickWords are not case-sensitive. For example, typing "dkb" and "DKB" will insert the same QuickWord entry.

You can also use QuickCorrect to create abbreviations that expand as you type.

If you include a graphic with text in the expanded form, anchor it to a character or paragraph if the graphic might move or if you will use it more than once. If it is anchored to a page, the graphic will always stay on the same page regardless of where the accompanying text is.

About QuickWords


To advance to an absolute position on the page
To advance to an absolute position on the page,

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Advance.

2	Click From Left Edge of Page or From Top of Page, then specify a distance.

3	To place the advanced text below, rather than above, the position measured from the top margin of the page, deselect Text Above Position.

Tips

You cannot advance text past the end of the page.

You can delete an advance by removing the advance codes in the Reveal Codes window.

When you insert an Advance code from the top of the page, the distance is measured from the baseline of the first line of text. To measure the distance precisely from the top margin instead of the baseline, click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/Letter Spacing, then select Baseline placement for typesetters.

Related Topics

About Advancing Text to a Different Position


To set a QuickMark
To set a QuickMark,

1	Click where you want to insert the QuickMark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Set QuickMark.

Tips

You can also select Set QuickMark on file save to automatically insert a QuickMark at the insertion point whenever you save a document.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To add a caption to a graphic
To add a caption to a graphic,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Create Caption.

2	Type the caption text. You can delete the caption numbering.

Tips

When creating a caption, you can use other editing features. For example, you can change fonts, cut, copy, and paste text, and change line spacing.

About Adding a Caption to a Graphics Box


To change the contents of a graphics box
To change the contents of a graphics box,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] click Content.

2	To change to another content type, select an option on the Content drop-down list.

3	To change the image in the box, specify the filename of the new image.

4	To empty the box, select Empty on the Content drop-down list, then click Yes.

5	Select any position and rotation options.

Tips

To get information about an option, click [image], then click the option.

To edit the contents of the box, click Edit. This opens the appropriate editing tool.

You can also double-click the graphic to edit the contents.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


To size a graphics box
To size a graphics box,

1	Click the graphics box to select it.

2	Drag the sizing handles to change the size of the graphic box.

Tips

Be sure to place the pointer directly on a handle when you drag.

When you use the corner handles to resize a box, the size of the box adjusts to maintain the current height/width ratio of the box and also to maintain the original proportions of the image.

To change the height/width ratio of the box, use the middle handles to resize the box. For example, you can use the middle handles to change a rectangle to a square. As you resize the box, the image adjusts to fill the box and, consequently, the image may become distorted.

If you move or resize the box by mistake, click [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

About Types of Graphics You Can Insert


To create a bulleted list using QuickBullets
To create a bulleted list using QuickBullets,

1	At the beginning of a new line, type one of the following characters to produce the corresponding bullet (QuickBullet):

2	Press Tab or Indent.

3	Type the text, then press Enter to begin the next list item.

4	Continue to add items by pressing Enter, then typing text.

5	To end the list, press Enter [image] Backspace.

Tips

If you do not want one of these characters followed by a tab to begin a bulleted list, add it to the QuickCorrect list. Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect, then type the character in both the Replace and With text boxes.

You can also click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, then select a bullet style to start a bulleted list.

To change the level of a list item, click the item text, then click Promote or Demote on the Property Bar.

About Bulleted Lists


To calculate formulas in a table
To calculate formulas in a table,

1	Click in the table.

2	Click Table [image] Calculate [image] Calc Table.

Tips

To automatically calculate the table every time you change data in it, select Calculate Table.

About Calculating Tables


To get more information about table formula errors
To get more information about table formula errors,

1	Click the cell containing the error, then click Table [image] Formula Toolbar [image] View Error.

Tips

View Error displays a brief explanation of any ?? and ERR error symbols that appear in your table as you calculate formulas.

About Using Formulas in Tables


To center text vertically
To center text vertically,

1	Click on the page where you want to begin centering text between the top and bottom margins.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Center.

3	Click an option.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

To see how the text will look when printed, click View [image] Two Pages.

About Centering Text


To hide all toolbars and menus
To hide all toolbars and menus,

1	Click View [image] Hide Bars.

Tips

To access features when toolbars and menus are hidden, use the keyboard shortcuts for features or hold down Alt and press the mnemonic letter for menu options. For example, press Ctrl+O to open a new document, or press Alt+I to show the Insert menu.

Click the top of the screen (the mouse pointer changes to an arrow) to show and access a menu.

Press Escape to restore all bars.

Related Topics

About Hiding All Toolbars and Menus


To start columns
To start columns,

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph where you want columns to start.

2	Click [image].

3	Click the number of columns, or click Format.

Tips

You can also click Format [image] Columns, then specify the number of columns you want.

Click [image] in the Format dialog box to get information on an option.

About Columns


To add a comment to a document
To add a comment to a document,

1	Click where you want the comment.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Create.

3	Type the comment text, then click [image] to return to the main text of your document.

Tips

To include initials, a name, date, or time, click Initials, Name, [image], or Time on the Comment Property Bar.

Your initials and your name are available only if you have specified them using Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment.

In Page and Two Pages view, you can quickly access a comment by double-clicking its icon.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To convert a file from a different format
To convert a file from a different format,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Specify the file to open, then click OK.

3	Verify that the correct file format you are converting from displays in the Convert File Format dialog box.

Tips

If the format in the box is not the format you are converting from, select the correct format from the Convert File Format From drop-down list.

You can also convert a file format to Corel WordPerfect by clicking Insert, clicking File, then following steps 2 and 3 above.

About Converting Documents


To convert tabular or parallel columns to a table
To convert tabular or parallel columns to a table,

1	Select the tabular or parallel columns.

2	Click Insert [image] Table.

3	Click Tabular Column or Parallel Column.

Tips

Tables converted from tabular text may contain extra rows or cells. Use Join or Delete to remove the extra rows or cells.

About Tables


To copy a table formula to a different cell
To copy a table formula to a different cell,

1	Click in the cell that contains the formula to copy.

2	Click Table [image] Copy Formula.

3	Specify the cell to which you want to copy the formula in the To Cell text box, or click Down or Right, then specify the number of times to copy the formula down or to the right.

Tips

If the Table Formula toolbar is displayed, you can also click Copy Formula on the toolbar. To display the Table Formula toolbar, click Table [image] Formula Toolbar.

About Using Formulas in Tables


To create a counter to number items in a document
To create a counter to number items in a document,

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter [image] Create.

2	Type a name for the counter.

3	Select any options to define the counter.

4	Click OK to create the counter and insert it in the Counter List for that document.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Counter Numbering


To create a data file for a merge
To create a data file for a merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Create Data.

2	If data exists in the current document window, click Use file in active window to make your current document a merge file; or, click New Document Window to start with a blank document; then click OK.

3	If you want to create a data table file, click Format records in a table.

4	Type the name of a field, then click Add, for each field in your data file. When you have added all the fields, click OK.

5	Type the data for each record in the Quick Data Entry text boxes, pressing Enter to move to the next field. When a record is complete, press Enter to start a new record.

6	To add a line to a field, press Ctrl+Enter.

7	Click any other options to add or delete fields and records, find data in a record, and to edit field names.

8	Click Close when you have finished entering the records you want.

9	Click Yes to save the data file.

Tips

Instead of naming fields, you can number the fields. Leave the field name blank in the Name Fields dialog, then click OK.

Using many fields gives you more flexibility. For example, having a Greeting field separate from the Name field lets you personalize merged documents with a familiar name.

Related Topics

About Data Files for Merges


To create a form document for a merge
To create a form document for a merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Create Document.

2	If you have text in the current document, click Use file in active window to make your current document a merge file; or click New document window to start with a blank document; then click OK.

3	Select a data source to associate with the form document, or select No association, then click OK. (For a keyboard merge, click No association.)

4	If you want formatting and paper size to apply to all merged documents, click File [image] Document [image] Current Document Style. Enter formatting and paper size options, then click OK.

5	Type text and retrieve graphics into your form document.

6	Place the insertion point in your document where you want data to be filled in from your data source.

7	Click Insert Field on the Merge toolbar.

8	If you have not already done so, you can click OK to associate a data source and display the available fields.

9	Specify the field you want, then click Insert.

10	Move the insertion point in your document to position each field, then repeat step 9 for each field.

11	When you have inserted all the fields, click Close.

12	Select other options from the Merge toolbar, then save or merge the file.

Tips

If you want to associate a different data source for the merge, click Insert Field on the toolbar, click Data Source, and select the new data source.

Related Topics

About Form Documents for Merges


To create a QuickStyle
To create a QuickStyle,

1	Click in or select the text with the format you want.

2	Click Format [image] Styles [image] QuickStyle.

3	Type a name for the style.

4	Type a description of the style.

5	To base the style on the format of the current paragraph, click Paragraph (Auto).

6	To base the style on selected text, click Character.

About QuickStyle


To create a table
To create a table,

1	Click Insert [image] Table.

2	Specify the number of columns and rows for the table.

3	Click Create.

Tips

You can also click [image] on the toolbar, then drag to select the number of rows and columns for the table.

To move left or right to the next cell, press Alt+Right Arrow or Alt+Left Arrow. To move up or down to the next cell, press Alt+Up Arrow or Alt+Down Arrow.

To insert a tab, press Indent (F7).

About Creating Tables and Floating Cells


To create a table of authorities section definition
To create a table of authorities section definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities [image] Define.

2	Click Create.

3	Type a section name in the Name text box.

4	Click a numbering format on the Position pop-up list.

5	If you have used special numbering for total, volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers, click Page Numbering to customize the way page numbers appear.

6	Click Include underlining in generated table to allow underlining in authorities you mark to appear in the table.

7	Deselect Use Dash to show consecutive pages if you want page numbers printed out (4, 5, 6) instead of grouped (4-6).

8	Click Change to change the current style.

Tips

Click Use as Default to allow numbering, underlining, and dash selections to be used for all new table of authorities sections.

About Creating a Table of Authorities


To customize a date/time type for a table
To customize a date/time type for a table,

1	Click in the cell, column, or table where you want to customize the date and time format.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Numeric Format.

3	Click Cell, Column, or Table.

4	Click Date/Time, then click Custom.

5	Click a format on the Date/Time Formats drop-down list.

Tips

You can also right-click the table [image] click Numeric Format.

If you enter a two-digit year of 00 to 50, Corel WordPerfect assumes you mean the year 2000 to 2050.  If you enter a two-digit year of 51 to 99, Corel WordPerfect assumes you mean 1951 to 1999. Use four-digit years to specify other dates.

About Table Numeric Format (Currency, Percent, Dates, etc.)


To customize a numeric type for a table
To customize a numeric type for a table,

1	Click in the cell, column, or table where you want to customize a numeric type.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Numeric Format.

3	Click a numeric type (except Date/Time or Text).

4	Click Custom, then change any options.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

You can also right-click the table [image] click Numeric Format.

If you click the Text numeric type, the Custom button is dimmed.

About Table Numeric Format (Currency, Percent, Dates, etc.)


To change the current table of authorities style
To change the current table of authorities style,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities [image] Define.

2	Click a definition name.

3	Click Edit, then click Change.

4	Click a style on the Styles list, then click Select.

Tips

To create a new table of authorities style, click Create, type a name for the style, then use the Styles Editor.

To edit an existing style, click Edit, then use the Styles Editor.

Related Topics

About Styles


To select specific database fields to import or link
To select specific database fields to import or link,

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Import or Create Link.

2	Select a database format from the Data type pop-up list.

3	Select a format for the imported information from the Import as or Link as pop-up list.

4	Specify the filename of the database file you want to import or link.

5	Click Query.

6	Click a field, then type the search condition.

Tips

Linking allows you to update the database information when changes are made. Importing the information provides a one-time "snapshot" of the database information.

Click Example for more help about specifying conditions.

About Selecting Specific Database Information to Link to or Import


To define and generate a table of contents
To define and generate a table of contents,

1	Click where you want the table of contents.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Contents [image] Define.

3	Specify the Number of Levels (from 1 to 5) you want in the table of contents.

4	Specify a position for the page numbers for each level of the table of contents, then click OK.

5	Click Generate.

Tips

You need to mark text before you can generate a table of contents.

To customize page number appearance, use Page Numbering. This is useful when you have special numbering for total, volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers.

If your table of contents has more than one level and you want the last level indented evenly, click Display Last Level in Wrapped format.

If you are at the beginning of the document and want the table of contents generated on a separate page, press Ctrl+Enter to create a page break, then click on the new first page.

About Creating a Table of Contents


To insert a delay code
To insert a delay code,

1	Click on the page where you want to delay codes.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Delay Codes.

3	Specify the number of pages you want to delay the codes, then click OK.

4	Select font and formatting options to insert the codes you want to delay.

5	Click Close on the Delay Codes toolbar.

Tips

You cannot delay paired codes and line format codes as such Indent, Center, Flush Right, or Tab.

The delay code remains at the top of the document or follows a hard page break. A delay code appears as [Delay:#] where # is the number of pages the code is delayed.

About Delay Codes


To delete the contents of table cells
To delete the contents of table cells,

1	Click in the cell (or select the cells) with the contents you want to delete.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Delete.

3	Click Cell contents only to delete only the contents of the cells, or click Formulas only to delete the formulas without deleting the cell contents.

Tips

You can also select cells, rows, or columns, then press Delete or Backspace.

You can also right-click the table [image] click Delete, then specify the columns or rows to delete.

If you mistakenly delete the contents or formulas in a table, use Undo to restore it.

About Deleting Tables


To select a document character map
To select a document character map,

1	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Character Mapping.

2	Select the character map for the language you are currently using, then click Apply.

Tips

If the character map you want is not listed, you must purchase and install the corresponding language module.

About Character Maps for Non-Roman Languages


To automate parts of the document summary
To automate parts of the document summary,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Summary.

2	Type the text the document summary uses to identify a document subject in the Subject Search text box.

3	Type the default Descriptive Type for document summaries.

4	Click Create summary on save/exit to create the summary automatically.

5	To automatically create a descriptive name in the document summary, click When saving a document, use the filename for the descriptive name.

Tip

For example, if you make "RE:" the subject search text, the text immediately following RE: becomes the Subject when you extract information from your document.

You can also specify default Author and Typist names using Environment Settings.

Related Topics

About Document Summary Settings


To make precise changes to a graphics image
To make precise changes to a graphics image,

1	Right-click the graphics image.

2	Click Image Tools [image] Edit Attributes.

3	Select the options you want and specify values where applicable.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Image Settings lets you access all image options in one dialog box and use precise numeric values to adjust the settings.

To make the image background blend into the page, click Miscellaneous and select Use page background.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To update the information in a linked object
To update the information in a linked object,

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Select the link you want to update.

3	Click Update Now.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Click Automatic to have the link updated whenever you open the document.

Click Manual if you want more control over what information appears in your document. You must use Update Now to update the link manually.

About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document


To create a footnote
To create a footnote,

1	Click in the text where you want to insert the reference number for a new footnote.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote\Endnote [image] Footnote [image] Create.

3	Type the text of the footnote.

4	Click outside of the footnote or click [image] to return to the main text of your document.

Tips

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the footnote.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by clicking [image] on the Property Bar.

The superscript footnote number appears in the text of your document. The footnote appears at the bottom of the page.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To create or edit a labels file
To create or edit a labels file,

1	Click Format [image] Labels [image] Change [image] Create or Edit.

2	Specify the filename and description for the label file, then click OK.

3	If you are creating a label file, click Select to create new label definitions.

Tips

Each label file contains label definitions.  You cannot copy definitions to another label file; you must recreate a definition to add it to another file.

Corel WordPerfect adds a .lab file extension to the filename you specify.

About Labels Files


To create labels
To create labels,

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Select the type of labels to display: Laser, Tractor-Fed, or Both.

3	Select a label definition from the Labels list box.

4	Click Select.

5	Type the text of the label, then press Ctrl+Enter to move to the next label.

Tips

In Draft view, labels are displayed one above the other on your screen and are separated by a line to indicate a logical page break. To see the labels as they will be arranged when you print, click View [image] Page or Two Pages.

You can insert addresses from the Address Book by clicking Tools [image] Address Book.

About Labels


To edit the name of a table, floating cell, or table component
To edit the name of a table, floating cell, or table component,

1	Click in the table or floating cell.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Names.

3	Select the name of the table, floating cell, or table component you want to edit.

4	Click Edit.

5	Type a new name.

Tips

You can also open the Table Names in Current Document dialog box by clicking Names on the Table Formula toolbar.

A name can contain letters, numbers, spaces, and the symbols #, $, ?, @, or _, but the first character must be a letter, number or underscore (_).

While you are typing a name, you can press Ctrl+W to insert symbols. Note that most symbols in the ASCII character set are invalid.

You can also name a cell with the cell address.

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables


To mark an authority for a table of authorities
To mark an authority for a table of authorities,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities.

2	To mark an authority for the first time, select the text of the authority.

3	Click Create Full Form.

4	Select the section in which you want the authority to appear, or type a new section name.

5	Edit the text in the Short form text box, if you want to shorten the full name of the authority.

6	Click OK.

7	Edit the full form text so that it appears exactly as you want it in your table of authorities.

8	Click Close.

Tips

To mark other occurrences of an authority, click where you want to mark the authority, click the short form name on the Short form drop-down list, then click Mark. Click View [image] Reveal Codes to see the short form mark code.

To edit the full form of an authority any time, click Edit Full Form, click the authority, then click OK.

About Creating a Table of Authorities


To change the location of endnotes
To change the location of endnotes,

1	Click where you want to print the endnotes.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Endnote number [image] Endnote Placement.

3	If you want subsequent endnote numbers to start over at 1, click Insert endnotes at insertion point and restart numbering.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To create an envelope
To create an envelope,

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Use the current return address or select one from the Address Book by clicking [image].

3	Use the displayed mailing address or type a different one.

4	Click Print Envelope to print the envelope, or click Append to Doc to add the envelope to a new page at the end of the document.

About Creating Envelopes


To change the position of the addresses on an envelope
To change the position of the addresses on an envelope,

1	Click Format [image] Envelope [image] Options.

2	Specify a horizontal and vertical setting for the Return Address Position.

3	Specify a horizontal and vertical setting for the Mailing Address Position.

4	Finish creating the envelope, then click Print Envelope or Append to Doc.

About Creating Envelopes


To change whether text is selected by word or by letter
To change whether text is selected by word or by letter,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Select whole words instead of characters to select text letter by letter instead of word by word.

About Selecting Text


To change the equation font
To change the equation font,

1	Double-click an equation.

2	Click Font [image] Equation Font.

3	Select the options you want, then click OK.

4	To save your changes and return to the document, click File [image] Close.

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


To move an image inside a graphics box
To move an image inside a graphics box,

1	Right-click the graphic.

2	Click Image Tools [image] Move.

3	Point to the image and drag to move the image.

Tips

Click Edit Attributes to specify a precise horizontal and vertical position for the image. For example, specify .5 to move the image half its width. Positive values move the image to the right or up; negative values move it to the left or down.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To edit the fill (shading) in a graphics box
To edit the fill (shading) in a graphics box,

1	Right-click the box with the fill you want to change.

2	Click Border/Fill [image] Fill.

3	Select a pattern in the Available Fill Styles list box.

4	Select colors in the Foreground and Background pop-up palettes.

5	To use a gradient instead of a fill style, click Advanced and change any options.

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To find words or characters
To find words or characters,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

3	Click Find Next to search forward in the document, or click Find Prev to search backward in the document.

Tips

You can also press Ctrl+Alt+N to find the next occurrence of the current search text, or press Ctrl+Alt+P to find the previous occurrence.

Click the arrow button to the right of the Find text box to select a word or phrase you searched for previously.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Text and Codes


To insert codes in a macro
To insert codes in a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro Toolbar.

2	Click Codes.

3	Click Search, Merge, Date, or Other to list codes.

4	Select the code, then click Insert.

About Codes (Macros and Find)


To start new numbers for footnotes or endnotes
To start new numbers for footnotes or endnotes,

1	Click where you want to start renumbering footnotes or endnotes.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Options [image] Set Number.

3	Specify a new number.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in the notes
To change the number style for footnotes/endnotes in the notes,

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Options [image] Advanced [image] In Note.

2	Make formatting changes to the style.

Tips

To get information about an option in the Styles Editor, click [image], then click the option.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To force a page to be odd or even
To force a page to be odd or even,

1	Click on the page where you want to force the page break or page number.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Force Page.

3	Click Current page odd to force the page to have an odd number, or Current page even to force it to have an even number.

About Forcing a Page Number


To use QuickSelect in a table
To use QuickSelect in a table,

1	In the table, move the cursor until it changes to the selection arrow [image] or [image].

2	To select a cell, click once.

3	To select a column or row, double-click.

4	To select the entire table, triple-click.

Related Topics

About Selecting Text


To move the insertion point to a specific place using Go To
To move the insertion point to a specific place using Go To,

1	Click Edit [image] Go To.

2	Click an option to specify where you want the insertion point.

Tips

To get information on an option, right-click the option, or click [image], then click the option.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To create a custom graphics line
To create a custom graphics line,

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Custom Line.

2	Click Horizontal or Vertical in the Line type group box.

3	Change any of the line and position options.

Tips

To get information about an option, click [image], then click the option.

About Custom Graphics Lines


To specify which styles to display in the Styles list
To specify which styles to display in the Styles list,

1	Click Format [image] Styles [image] Options [image] Setup.

2	Select any options under Display styles from.

Tips

To save to the additional objects template, you must first specify which template is used for additional objects. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Template.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

Related Topics

About Style Setup


To add the page number to a header or footer
To add the page number to a header or footer,

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image]  Create or Edit.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert Page Number.

3	Click a numbering format.

Tips

You can add page, section, chapter, or volume numbers inside a header or footer.

About Headers and Footers


To adjust the distance below a header or above a footer
To adjust the distance below a header or above a footer,

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Create or Edit.

2	Click [image].

3	Specify the distance you want between document text and the header or footer.

Tips

You can also drag the header or footer guidelines up or down.

About Headers and Footers


To create a header or footer
To create a header or footer,

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Create.

2	Type the header or footer text as you would in a document using any Corel WordPerfect editing features.

3	Click below the header guideline to return to your document.

Tips

To add a date, click Insert [image] Date/Time.

To add the document's filename, click Insert [image] Other [image] Filename or Path and Filename

Headers and footers do not display in Draft view. To view the header or footer in the document window, click View [image] Page or View [image]  Two Pages.

Related Topics

About Headers and Footers


To import or link to a spreadsheet or database
To import or link to a spreadsheet or database,

1	Click where you want the spreadsheet or database information inserted.

2	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database.

3	Click Import to import the spreadsheet or database one time only, or click Create Link to update the information in your document as the spreadsheet or database changes.

4	Click to select Spreadsheet or a database format from the Data type pop-up list.

5	Click to select Table, Text, or Merge Data File from the Import as or Link as pop-up list.

6	In the Filename text box, specify the path and filename of the spreadsheet or database file you want to import or link to.

Tips

To import or link a specific part of the spreadsheet, you can indicate a range of cells in the Range text box. You can identify the range either by its cell address or by its name.

To import or link specific fields of a database, you can indicate which field or fields you want to import by deselecting any of the fields you do not want to import.

If you are importing or linking to an SQL database, you must log on to the database server.

Related Topics

About Importing and Linking Spreadsheet and Database Information


To insert columns or rows in a table
To insert columns or rows in a table,

1	Click in the table where you want to insert the columns or rows.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Insert.

3	Click Columns or Rows, then specify the number of columns or rows to insert.

4	Click Before or After to place the new columns or rows before or after the current insertion point position.

Tips

If you insert a column, you can click Keep Column Widths the Same to prevent the existing columns from changing width when the new column is added.

New columns or rows contain the same formatting as the column or row where the insertion point is located.

Related Topics

About Adding and Moving Parts of a Table


To insert merge codes
To insert merge codes,

1	As you create or edit a form or data file, click Merge Codes on the toolbar.

2	Select a merge code, then click Insert.

3	If prompted, enter parameters, then click OK.

4	Reposition the insertion point in your document, select another merge code, enter parameters (if needed), then click Insert.

5	Repeat step 4 as needed, then click Close.

6	Finish creating the form or data file, then save or merge the file.

Related Topics

About Inserting Merge Codes in a Document


To insert or link an object
To insert or link an object,

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Click Create new, then click the Object type (source application) you want to use.

3	Create a new object, then click outside the OLE box to return to the document window.

Tips

To insert or link an existing object, click Create from file, then specify a file.

If you click Create from file, click Link in the Insert Object dialog box to link the object file rather than embed it. When you link the file any changes you make to the source file will appear in the Corel WordPerfect document.

You can also drag a file from the Windows Explorer into a document, or drag an icon that represents a data file from the desktop into a document.

Related Topics

About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document


To change the level of an outline item
To change the level of an outline item,

1	Click the item you want to change.

2	Click [image] or [image] on the Property Bar, or press Shift+Tab or Tab.

Tips

To move text to a tab stop, use Indent or press Ctrl+Tab.

You can also add numbers without using Outline/Bullets & Numbering. Press Ctrl+Shift+F5 to insert an outline number.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


To record a sound clip
To record a sound clip,

1	Click Insert [image] Sound [image] Record.

2	Record the sound, using a microphone or other input device.

3	Save the sound by clicking File [image] Save As.

4	Close the Sound Recorder.

Tips

Sound is recorded by using the Windows Sound Recorder. Refer to your Windows documentation for more information.

About Sound Clips


To prevent widows/orphans (single lines separated from a paragraph)
To prevent widows/orphans (single lines separated from a paragraph),

1	Click where you want to begin keeping paragraphs together.

2	Click Format [image] Keep Text Together.

3	Click the first option (Prevent the first and last lines of paragraphs from being separated across pages).

About Keeping Text Together


To select a labels file
To select a labels file,

1	Click Format [image] Labels [image] Change.

2	Select a label file, then click Select.

Tips

You can now select labels from this label file.

Related Topics

About Labels Files


To select a language
To select a language,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to specify formatting conventions for another language.

2	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Settings.

3	Select a language in the list box.

4	If you want to disable the Spell Checker or Grammatik for this part of the document, click Disable writing tools.

About Changing Language Options


To change how Find performs a search
To change how Find performs a search,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Options.

2	Click any option to select or deselect it.

Tips

Begin Find at Top of Document searches from the beginning of the document regardless of where the insertion point is.

Wrap at Beg./End of Document searches the entire document, starting at the insertion point and moving forward or back. It then continues at the end or beginning of the document and continues to the insertion point.

Limit Find Within Selection searches only within the text you have selected.

Include Headers, Footers, Etc. in Find searches for text or codes in the body of the document and all other substructures (such as headers, footers, endnotes, and equations).

Limit Number of Changes replaces text or codes as many times as you specify, then stops after the last replacement.

About Custom Find and Replace Options


To change the line height to a fixed size
To change the line height to a fixed size,

1	Click in the paragraph where you want the setting to begin, or select text in the paragraphs you want to change.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Height.

3	Click Fixed, then specify a new height.

About Adjusting the Line Height


To hyphenate text
To hyphenate text,

1	Click in the paragraph where you want to begin hyphenation.

2	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Hyphenation.

3	Click Turn hyphenation on.

4	To change the size of the hyphenation zone, specify new percentages in the Percent left and Percent right text boxes.

Tips

Increase the hyphenation zone percentages to hyphenate fewer words in your document; decrease the percentages to hyphenate more words.

If hyphenation is on before you adjust the zone percentages, you may be prompted to re-hyphenate some words in the current document.

About Hyphenating Text


To number lines of text
To number lines of text,

1	Click the paragraph where you want line numbering to begin.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Numbering.

3	Select Turn line numbering on.

4	Change any available options.

Tips

Line numbering begins with the first line in the current paragraph.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

You can also add the Line Numbering button to the toolbar. Right-click the toolbar, click Edit, select Format on the Feature Categories list, then click Line Numbering in the Features list.

About Line Numbering


To change the separator line between document text and footnotes
To change the separator line between document text and footnotes,

1	Click on the page where you want the change to take effect.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Footnote Number [image] Options [image] Separator.

3	Change any of the Line Separator options.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Footnote Formatting Options


To change the spacing between lines of text
To change the spacing between lines of text,

1	Click where you want to change the line spacing, or select the text you want to change.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Spacing.

3	Specify the number by which you want to multiply the current line height.

Tips

You can also change the line height or advance text one direction or another.

Related Topics


To update a spreadsheet or database link when you open the document
To update a spreadsheet or database link when you open the document,

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Options.

2	Click Update when document opens.

About Spreadsheet/Database Link Options


To change the source of a linked object
To change the source of a linked object,

1	Click Edit [image] Links.

2	Select the object you want to change from the Links list box, then click Change Source.

3	For an OLE link, select the filename you want to link to.

4	For a DDE link, change the Link Name, Application, Topic/Filename, or Item.

Tips

Most objects are inserted as OLE links. Whether an object is inserted as an OLE or DDE link depends on the source application and the format you selected when you inserted the object.

About Inserting or Linking Objects to a Document


To invert the colors in a graphics image
To invert the colors in a graphics image,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click Invert Colors to change the image colors to their complementary colors.

Tips

Click Invert Colors again to return the colors to their original value.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To edit or annotate a chart or graph
To edit or annotate a chart or graph,

1	Right-click the chart, then click Chart Object.

2	To keep the chart in the document and edit it (in-place editing), click Edit.

3	To open the chart full-screen and edit it, click Open.

4	To add comments (draw lines and add text) to the drawing or chart, click Annotate.

Tips

For in-place editing, you can also double-click the chart.

For full-screen editing, you can hold down the Alt key while double-clicking the chart.

About Creating Charts


To change the kerning between two letters
To change the kerning between two letters,

1	Click between the two letters you want to kern.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Manual Kerning.

3	Select a unit of measure in the drop-down list.

4	Specify an amount to add to or subtract from the space between the letters.

Tips

Negative numbers bring the letters closer together. Positive numbers push the letters further apart.

About Kerning


To change margins
To change margins,

1	Click in the paragraph or page where you want the margin changes to start, or select the text where you want to change margins.

2	Click Format [image] Margins.

3	Specify new settings for Left, Right, Top, or Bottom margins.

Tips

You can type a margin as a fraction (such as 1 1/3) and it will convert to a decimal.

To specify a measurement in a unit other than inches, change the unit of measurement in Display Settings. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] Display.

About Margins


To mark a cross-reference
To mark a cross-reference,

1	Click where you want to create a reference.

2	Type any introductory text (such as "See page").

3	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-Reference.

4	Click a reference type on the Reference drop-down list.

5	Type a target name in the Target text box, or select a target from the drop-down list.

6	Click Mark Reference.

7	Move the insertion point to the target.

8	Make sure the correct target name displays in the Target drop-down list.

9	Click Mark Target.

Tips

The target name must be the same for the reference and the corresponding target.

A question mark (?) appears where you have marked the reference until you use Generate. When you generate, the reference number is inserted or updated.

If you build hyperlinks when you generate cross-references, you can click the reference number to jump to the reference.

You can use only one counter for each target name.

Related Topics

About Creating Cross-References


To mark text for an index
To mark text for an index,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

2	Click where you want to mark text with an index entry.

3	To create a new heading, select the word(s) in the Heading text box, then type the new heading. To use an existing heading, select an entry in the Heading drop-down list.

4	If necessary, repeat step 3 in the Subheading text box.

5	Click Mark.

Tips

You can also select text in the document, then click the Heading or Subheading text box to enter it there.

You can add the Index button to your toolbar.

You cannot edit items in the Heading or Subheading text boxes. To remove an item, drag all index codes that use it out of Reveal Codes, then restart Corel WordPerfect.

About Marking Text for an Index


To mark text for a table of contents
To mark text for a table of contents,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Contents.

2	Select the word or phrase you want to include as a table of contents entry.

3	Click Mark X, where X is the level you want for the entry.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each entry you want to mark.

Tips

After marking text, you need to define and generate the table of contents.

About Creating a Table of Contents


To associate a data source with a form document
To associate a data source with a form document,

1	Open the form document.

2	Click Go to Data on the Merge toolbar.

3	To select an existing data file, click Select, then specify the file.

4	To create a data file, click Create, type a filename, then finish creating the data file.

Tips

You can also change the association from the Insert Field dialog. From any form document, click Insert Field, click Data Source, then specify the file.

About Associating Merge Files


To perform a keyboard merge
To perform a keyboard merge,

1	Create a form or data file containing the KEYBOARD merge command.

2	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

3	Specify the form document and data source locations for the merge. Select an Output option, then click Merge.

4	When the merge pauses at the KEYBOARD command, type the information as described by the prompt, then click Continue on the toolbar.

5	Click other merge options on the toolbar to skip records, quit, or stop the merge.

Tips

When you click Quit, the merge continues but ignores all merge commands. When you click Stop, the merge stops at the current position.

About Keyboard Merges


To name table components and floating cells
To name table components and floating cells,

1	Click in the cell, column, row, or floating cell you want to name, or select a range of cells you want to name.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Names [image] Create.

3	Click Cell/Range, Row, or Column, then type a name in the text box.

Tips

A name can contain letters, numbers, spaces, and the symbols #, $, ?, @, or _, but the first character must be a letter, number, or underscore (_).

While you are typing a name, you can press Ctrl+W to insert symbols. Note that most symbols in the ASCII character set are invalid.

You can also name a cell with the cell address.

To insert a name into the Formula Edit text box, click Names on the Table Formula toolbar, click the name, then click Insert.

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables


To open a new document window
To open a new document window,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select a project to build. Or, to create a blank document, click [Corel WordPerfect 8] in the drop-down list, then double-click [WordPerfect Document].

Tips

To create a blank document, you can also click [image] on the toolbar or press Ctrl+N.

Related Topics

About New Documents


To select a table numeric format
To select a table numeric format,

1	Click in a cell, column, table, or floating cell.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Numeric Format.

3	Click Cell, Column, or Table.

4	To apply the numeric type you have already defined for the current column to the current cell, be sure Use same format as column is checked on the Cell tab.

5	Click a numeric type. To get information about each numeric type, click [image], then click the type.

6	To specify that a numeric type will be used for all new tables you create, click Use as Default.

About Table Numeric Format (Currency, Percent, Dates, etc.)


To convert a color image to black and white
To convert a color image to black and white,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Select a gray value from the BW threshold palette.

Tips

Any colors darker than the threshold become solid black. Any colors lighter than the threshold becomes solid white. For example, you can use the color threshold to turn reds and purples to black and yellows to white.

To specify a precise threshold value, click Edit Attributes [image] B&W attributes. Select Black and White, then set a threshold value. Higher numbers produce a darker image.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To insert hard tabs, hyphenation codes, and other special codes
To insert hard tabs, hyphenation codes, and other special codes,

1	Click Format [image] Line [image] Other Codes.

2	Click an option, then click Insert.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

About Other Codes (Line Format)


To create or edit a numbering, bullet, or heading style
To create or edit a numbering, bullet, or heading style,

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

2	Click Create, or select the numbering or heading type you want to change, then click Edit.

3	Make any changes in the dialog box.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

You can create your own numbering or heading style right in your document. If you start typing an outline (for example, type 1., press Tab, type text, then press Enter), Corel WordPerfect recognizes the text as an outline and turns on Outline/Bullets & Numbering to help you finish the outline and the new numbering style. If you click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, you will see the numbering type you have created in the first box under Description. The new style will be available each time you open the current document.

You can use a numbering or heading style you have created in other documents by copying it to a template. Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, select the type you have created, then click Options [image] Copy [image] Template.

About Creating Your Own Numbering


To create an overstrike character
To create an overstrike character,

1	Click where you want the overstrike character.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Overstrike.

3	To add font attributes (such as Bold or Large), click the arrow button next to the text box and select an attribute.

4	Type the characters you want printed as an overstrike, without spaces. The order is not important.

Tips

You can define a macro that creates an overstrike character you use frequently.

If you want to use symbols as part of the overstrike character, click in the text box, press Ctrl+W, then insert a character.

About Creating an Overstrike Character


To start Corel WordPerfect with custom options
To start Corel WordPerfect with custom options,

1	On the Windows Taskbar, click Start [image] Run.

2	Type wpwin followed by a space, then type the startup options you want. For example, to use the /nb option, type wpwin /nb.

:

Opens Corel WordPerfect 8 without displaying the startup screen.

/d-path

Redirects the overflow files and temporary buffer files to the specified folder (for example, /d-c:\temp).

/DM=90

Reduces the size of the text displayed onscreen to 90% of  true WYSIWYG. This can fix some display problems such as  normal text appearing bolded or words appearing as if they  run together.

filename

Opens the specified file from the documents folder that is specified in Files Settings (for example, Rachel.ltr).

filename /bk-bookmark name

Opens the specified file and moves to the specified bookmark (for example, Rachel.ltr /bk-Opening).

/l-language code

Identifies which entry in the Language Resource File (wp.lrs) and which language .dll WordPerfect uses (for example, /l-DK).

/m-macroname

Starts the specified macro when Corel WordPerfect opens (for example, /m-C:\Suite8\Macros\WPWin\heading1.wcm).

/mt-macroname

Starts the specified macro from the default template when Corel WordPerfect opens (for example, /mt-heading2.wcm).

/nb

Turns off original document backup.

/recover

Rebuilds table information in the prefix of the document upon retrieval.

/u-name

Identifies the user initials for use on your network (for example, /u-ETH). This lets multiple users run WordPerfect on a network, although this option is not necessary for correct network operation.

Tips

To always start Corel WordPerfect with the same startup options, edit Properties for Corel WordPerfect on the Windows Start menu. Or, if you have a Corel WordPerfect icon on the desktop, right-click the icon, click Properties [image] Shortcut, then specify the startup options on the command line in the Target text box.

When you use more than one startup option, add a space between options.

About Startup Options


To number pages in a document
To number pages in a document,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	From the Position drop-down list, select a page position for the numbers.

3	In the Page numbering format box, click the format you want to use.

Tips

The sample facing pages show where the page numbers will be placed and how they will look in print.

Use Custom Format to create a new page numbering format.

Use Set Value to change the page number on the current page.

About Page Numbering


To adjust contrast in a graphics image
To adjust contrast in a graphics image,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click Contrast, then select the contrast you want.

Tips

To specify a precise contrast value, click Edit Attributes [image] Color Attributes, then specify a number between -1 (no contrast) and 1 (highest contrast).

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To select the format for pasted information
To select the format for pasted information,

1	Open the application and file you want to copy from.

2	Select the information you want to copy to the Corel WordPerfect document, then copy it to the Clipboard.

3	Switch to WordPerfect.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste Special.

5	Click Paste, then select a format from the list box.

Related Topics

About Inserting Information in a Specific Format


To perform a merge
To perform a merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

2	Click Form document and select File on Disk, Current Document, or Clipboard. If you select File on Disk, specify the file location.

3	Click Data Source and select File on Disk, Address Book, ODBC, Clipboard, or None (for a keyboard merge). If you select File on Disk, specify the file location.

4	If you select Address Book, click the address book drop-down list and select a specific address book. Or, if you want to merge only selected records in one or more Address Books, click Select Records.

5	If you want to merge only selected records in another data source, click Select Records.

6	Click Output and specify where you want the merged file to go: Current Document, New Document, Printer, E-mail, or File on Disk. If you select File on Disk, specify the file location.

7	Click Merge to complete the merge.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

About Performing a Merge


To change options for a merge
To change options for a merge,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

2	Specify the locations for the form and data files, then click Options.

3	Select any options. When you have finished, click OK, then complete the merge.

Tips

To display information about an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To reset all options to the default, click Reset in the Perform Merge dialog box.

Related Topics

About Performing a Merge


To put a header, footer, or watermark on odd or even pages
To put a header, footer, or watermark on odd or even pages,

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer or Watermark [image] Create or Edit.

2	Click [image], then click Odd Pages or Even Pages.

3	Click [image] on the Header/Footer Property Bar to return to your document.

Tips

Use this feature for a document that is printed on both sides of the page and bound. Set the headers and footers to alternate so the information is on the outside of the page, not on the bound side.

About Headers and Footers


To record a macro
To record a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

2	Type a filename for the macro, then click Record.

3	Use Corel WordPerfect as you normally would to perform the task you want to record.

4	To stop recording the macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

Tips

The macro records both keyboard and mouse actions you make. However, you must use the keyboard instead of the mouse to position the insertion point in the document window.

If you don't need to use the macro again after you exit Corel WordPerfect, you can record a QuickMacro. Click Related Topics below for more information.

If you record a macro and want to make changes to it, you can edit the macro.

Related Topics

About Macros


To divide a word when hyphenating
To divide a word when hyphenating,

1	Click where you want the word divided.

2	Click Insert Hyphen, Insert Space, or Hyphenation SRt.

Tips

To not divide the word, click Ignore Word or Suspend Hyphenation.

To display information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Hyphenating Text


To insert a POSTNET bar code on an envelope
To insert a POSTNET bar code on an envelope,

1	Click Format [image] Envelope.

2	Select an envelope size from the Envelope Definitions drop-down list.

3	Type the return address and mailing address, including the ZIP Code.

4	Click Options, select Position bar code above address, or Position bar code below address, then click OK.

Tips

POSTNET bar codes are valid only for mail sent to addresses in the United States.

Click Append to Doc to insert the address and bar code at the end of the document.

About Inserting a POSTNET Bar Code in a Document


To change Corel WordPerfect settings
To change Corel WordPerfect settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Double-click an icon to change your settings for that feature group.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Settings


To insert printer commands into a document
To insert printer commands into a document,

1	Click where you want to insert the printer command.

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Printer Command.

3	In the Command text box, type the printer command to insert into the document.

4	To insert a code that pauses the printer at the current insertion point position, select Pause printer.

Tips

Type printer commands using the syntax documented in your printer manual. To include a decimal value for a control code or character, enclose that value in angle brackets (such as <27> for ESC).

About Printer Commands


To adjust the brightness of a graphics image
To adjust the brightness of a graphics image,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Select a value from the Brightness palette.

Tips

To specify a precise brightness value, click Edit Attributes [image] Color Attributes, then specify a value from -1 (black) to 1 (white).

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To select a default font for the current document
To select a default font for the current document,

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Default Font.

2	Select the font face, size, and style you want to use in the current document.

Tips

To apply these settings to all documents created with the current printer, select Use as default. To apply these settings to the current document only, deselect Use as default.

Related Topics

About Document Default Fonts


About Using Quick Data Entry to Create a Merge Data File

Use Quick Data Entry as you are creating a data file to easily enter data after you specify the field names or numbers.

To enter data after a data file has been created, retrieve the data file, then click Quick Entry on the Merge toolbar. You can use Quick Entry to edit data files in text or table format.

To create a data file for a merge

To edit a merge data file's field names

To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry

Related Concepts


To copy the format of a character, word, or phrase
To copy the format of a character, word, or phrase,

1	Select the text or click in the word or phrase.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Selected characters.

3	Drag the QuickFormat paintbrush pointer over the text you want to format.

4	You can also turn off QuickFormat by clicking Format [image] QuickFormat.

Tips

You can also click [image] to turn QuickFormat on or off.

About Using QuickFormat to Copy Text Format


To restore an image to its original appearance
To restore an image to its original appearance,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click Reset Attributes.

Tips

When you reset the image you undo any attribute, color, fill, or positioning changes you have made with the Image Tools palette.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To change the fill in a graphics image
To change the fill in a graphics image,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Select a fill attribute (normal, transparent, or white) from the Fill palette.

Tips

Making the image transparent lets text or a background display through the image.

Making the image white displays an outline (line drawing) of the image.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To change the printed appearance of redlined text
To change the printed appearance of redlined text,

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Redline Method.

2	Click an appearance option.

3	To use the method as the default for all document comparisons, click Use as Default.

Tips

If you need help on an option, right click the option.

If you select a margin method and want to change the redline character from a vertical bar (|) to something else, type a different character in the Redline character text box. To insert a non-keyboard character, press Ctrl+W to open the Symbols dialog box, select a character, then click Insert and close.

About Comparing Documents


To remove document comparison markings
To remove document comparison markings,

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Remove Compare Markings.

2	To restore the current document to the way it looked before the comparison, click Remove redline markings and strikeout text.

3	To keep the markings for added and moved text but remove deleted text, click Remove strikeout text only.

About Comparing Documents


To repeat a task
To repeat a task,

1	Click where you want the repeated action to begin.

2	Click Edit [image] Repeat Next Action.

3	Specify the number of times to repeat the action, then click OK.

4	Choose a command or macro, or press the keystroke that you want to repeat.

Tips

You can repeat any letter, number or symbol, arrow keys, Delete, the spacebar, Page Up and Page Down, macros, or any toolbar or Property Bar button that activates a feature with a single click.

Click Use as Default to specify the new number as the default.


To rotate text in a text box
To rotate text in a text box,

1	Right-click the text box [image] click Content.

2	Click an angle of rotation (90, 180, or 270).

Tips

To edit text after you rotate it in a text box, right-click the box, click Content, then click Edit. The text displays in a separate editing window. When you have finished editing the text, click Close on the Text Box toolbar.

Related Topics

About Printing Sideways (Landscape/Rotate Text)


To save selected text as a new file
To save selected text as a new file,

1	Select the text.

2	Click File [image] Save or Save As.

3	Click Selected text, then click OK.

4	Specify a filename.

Tips

If you want to save the entire document, click Entire File.

You can also select a graphics image and save it as a new file.

Related Topics

About Save and Save As


To specify which template a macro is played from
To specify which template a macro is played from,

1	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Play [image] Location

2	Select the template where you want the macros to be located.

3	To save all new macros in this template, click Use as Default.

Tips

To use the macros for the current template, select Current Template.

You can also specify the macro location when you edit or record a template macro.

To use the macros for the default template (wp8xx.wpt, where xx is the language code), click Default Template.

About Macro Location


To find and replace exact matches for a word
To find and replace exact matches for a word,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

2	Type the word in the Find text box.

3	Click Match, then click Whole Word, Case, or Font.

4	Select any options for matching the word.

5	Type the replacement text in the Replace with text box.

6	Click the Replace menu, then click Case or Font and select any other options.

7	To replace all matches of the word, click Replace All. To choose which matches you want to replace, click Find Next or Find Prev, then click Replace only for the matches you want to replace.

Tips

When you select a Whole Word match, the replacement occurs only when the text is a word, not part of a word. For example, to change "low" to "short," select Whole Word so that words such as "allow" are not changed.

Case finds only text that matches the upper- and lowercase letters you type. If you type "Olympic" and select Case, you will not find "olympic."

Font finds text with specific font face, style, size, and format attributes (such as Underline or Small). You can then replace those fonts with other fonts and attributes.

Related Topics

About Matching Fonts When You Find or Replace Text


To set the value and numbering method for counters
To set the value and numbering method for counters,

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

2	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

3	Click Value, then specify a new value.

4	To change the numbering method, select a method from the Numbering method drop-down list.

About Counter Numbering


To sort text alphabetically or numerically
To sort text alphabetically or numerically,

1	Select the text you want to sort.

2	Click Tools [image] Sort.

3	Specify the file you want to sort and the file where you want to output the sorted text.

4	Click a Sort by option to indicate how you want to sort the text.

5	Click Options, then make sure Allow Undo after sorting is checked.

6	Click Sort.

7	If your text did not sort the way you wanted it to, click Edit [image] Undo.

Tips

If you do not select text in step 1, the entire document is sorted.

If a predefined sort does not meet your needs, create a sort definition. Click New, then specify a description for your sort. Define your own sort using key definitions, then click OK to return to the Sort dialog box. (Click Related Topics below for more information.)

When you create a new sort definition, it is saved in the Sort by list box.

To sort uppercase before lowercase (such as "Apple" before "apple"), click Options [image] Uppercase sorts before lowercase.

To sort dates, divide the month, day, and year with forward slashes or hyphens (7/09/96 or 7-09-96), then define a key for each part of the date.

Related Topics

About Sorting Words and Numbers


To add a sound clip to your document
To add a sound clip to your document,

1	Click Insert [image] Sound [image] Insert.

2	Type a name or brief description of the sound clip in the Name text box.

3	Specify the filename of the sound file.

4	Select where you want the sound file stored.

Tips

Select Link to file on disk to store the sound file as a separate file, not part of the document. Select Store in document to save the sound file as part of the document, which makes the document size larger.

About Sound Clips


To split table cells
To split table cells,

1	Click in a cell.

2	Click [image] to split a row or [image] to split a column.

3	Click where you want the row or column split.

Tips

The new cells will have the same format as the original cell.

You can also right-click a cell [image] click Split Cell, then specify how many Columns or Rows you want to create.

About Joining and Splitting Table Cells


To change the font that appears on the Application Bar
To change the font that appears on the Application Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Application Bar.

2	Click the font size you want to use for Application Bar text.

Tips

If Small is dimmed, the system font is already as small as it can be.

The font face is based on the Windows system font.

About Application Bar Settings


To add information to the Application Bar
To add information to the Application Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Application Bar.

2	Select the items you want to display on the Application Bar.

About Application Bar Settings


To create the default format for the current document
To create the default format for the current document,

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Current Document Style.

2	Use the Styles Editor to specify formatting options.

3	To use the formatting for all new documents created when the current printer is selected, click Use as default.

Tips

The Current Document Style contains formatting for the current document. Any format changes you make in the document override the formatting in this style.

If you use the same tab, margin, justification, headers, footers, or column settings for most of your documents, specify these settings in the Current Document Style and select Use as default.

You can change the Current Document Style at any time from anywhere in your document.

Related Topics

About the Styles Editor


To retrieve styles that are saved in a file
To retrieve styles that are saved in a file,

1	Click Format [image] Styles [image] Options [image] Retrieve.

2	Specify the filename of the styles file.

3	Click User or System styles, or Both.

Tips

When you retrieve a styles file, the styles in that file are saved with the current document.

User styles are styles you have created. System styles are styles provided with Corel WordPerfect, such as line and box styles.

About Saving and Retrieving Styles


To copy styles
To copy styles,

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Select the style you want to copy.

3	Click Options, then click Copy.

4	Click the location you want to copy the style to.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

If you copy to the current document, you must specify a new name for the style.

About Styles


To delete a style
To delete a style,

1	Click Format [image] Styles.

2	Select the style you want to delete.

3	Click Options, then click Delete.

4	Click Include Codes to delete all occurrences of the style from the document.

Tips

When you want to leave the style's formatting codes in your document, click Leave Codes.

To remove a style from a section of text, drag the style out of Reveal Codes.

You cannot delete a system style, but you can edit it.

About Styles


To create a style
To create a style,

1	Click Format [image] Styles [image] Create.

2	Type a short name for the style in the Style name text box.

3	Type a longer phrase to help you identify the style in the Description text box.

4	Select a style type from the Type pop-up list.

5	Add codes and text in the Contents box. You can select items from the Styles Editor toolbar and menu, press keystrokes, and type text.

6	Click OK to create the new style and display it in the style list.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

Give each style a unique name. Note that if you combine documents that both contain a style with the same name, one style is used and the other deleted in the new document.

To display the codes you insert in the Contents box, select Reveal Codes.

If you want certain codes to take effect when a Paragraph or Character style ends, click Show Off Codes, then insert those codes below the comment code in the Contents box.

If you want another style to take effect when a Paragraph or Character style ends, select Enter key will chain to. The style you select takes effect when you press Enter.

About the Styles Editor


To divide pages
To divide pages,

1	Click on the first page that you want to divide.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Page Setup [image] Divide Page.

3	Specify the number of columns and rows of logical pages on each physical page.

Tips

To start a new logical page, click Insert [image] New Page or press Ctrl+Enter.

To move to a specific logical page, click Edit [image] Go To, or press Ctrl+G, and specify the logical page.

About Dividing a Page


To turn off a header, footer, watermark, or page number
To turn off a header, footer, watermark, or page number,

1	Click on the page where you want to use Suppress.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Suppress.

3	Click the items you want to suppress or click All to select all of them.

Tips

To suppress the current page number style and still print a number on the page, click Print page number at bottom center on current page.

If you want to move codes down a specified number of pages before they take effect, use Delay Codes.

About Delay Codes


To insert a table function
To insert a table function,

1	Click in a table or floating cell.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Formula Toolbar [image] Functions.

3	Click a function and click Insert.

4	Replace the argument keywords with data, names, or cell or range addresses, or nest other functions within the function. You can also include other formula functions outside of the function.

5	Click [image] to accept and insert the function into the table or floating cell, or click [image] to cancel the changes you made to the function.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click Formula Toolbar.

In the Table Functions dialog box, you can begin typing the first few letters of a function to quickly select it.

When you insert or cancel a formula, Formula Edit mode is turned off.

Related Topics

About Table Functions (Absolute Value, Square Root, etc.)


To change the current list style
To change the current list style,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List [image] Define.

2	Click a definition name.

3	Click Edit, then click Change.

4	Click a style on the Styles list, then click Select.

Tips

To create a new list style, click Create, type a name for the style, then use the Styles Editor.

To edit an existing style, click Edit, then use the Styles Editor.

Related Topics

About the Styles Editor


To change tab settings using the Tab Set dialog box
To change tab settings using the Tab Set dialog box,

1	Click in the paragraph where the change begins.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab Set.

3	Click Left margin (relative) or Left edge of paper (absolute) to specify where tab settings are positioned from.

4	Specify a Position, then click Set for each new setting.

5	To set evenly spaced tabs, specify a Position for the setting on the left, click Repeat every, then specify the distance you want between settings.

6	To change the tab type, click a type on the Type pop-up list.

Tips

To clear a single tab setting, specify its Position, then click Clear. To clear all tab settings, click Clear All.

To change the tab settings for one paragraph, select the paragraph first.

To return to default tab settings, click Default.

Dot tabs include dot leaders that extend from the insertion point to the next tab setting.

When you specify a position for a tab setting, you can type either decimals or fractions.

You can also open the dialog box by double-clicking a tab marker on the Ruler or tab bar, by right-clicking the Ruler and then clicking Tab Set, or by double-clicking any tab code in Reveal Codes.

When you change a tab setting, [image] appears in the far left margin. Click [image] to display a tab bar right above the insertion point. With the tab bar you can see exactly where the settings are and change them easily. If you do not want to display [image], click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] deselect Tab Bar Icons.

About Tabs


To delete the contents or structure of an entire table
To delete the contents or structure of an entire table,

1	Select the entire table.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

3	Click Entire table, Table contents only, Formulas only, or Table structure.

Tips

If you delete the table structure, you might need to insert new tab stops to align columns if you want to keep the text in tabular columns.

If you mistakenly delete table structure or table contents, immediately click Edit [image] Undo.

You can also use Delete Table to convert a table into a data text file for use in a merge. If you want the first row to be converted to a merge record, click Convert to Merge Data File.

If you want the first row to be converted to field names, click Convert to Merge Data File (use text in first row as field names).

About Deleting Tables


To create a custom WordPerfect template
To create a custom WordPerfect template,

1	Click File [image] New [image] Options [image] Create WP Template.

2	Create the template as you would any other Corel WordPerfect document.

3	To save the template, click File [image] Save As.

4	Type a description (this displays in the list of projects and templates).

5	Type a name for the template (used for the filename).

6	Select a template group (project category), from which you can select the template.

7	Click OK, then click [image] on the Template toolbar.

About Templates and Projects


To change a graphic to its mirror image
To change a graphic to its mirror image,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click a Flip button to flip the image on its vertical or horizontal axis.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To log on to an SQL database server
To log on to an SQL database server,

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Import or Create Link.

2	Select an SQL database, then click Log On.

3	Specify the Server Name, Database, or File Path and Dictionary Path.

4	Type a User ID and Password if required, then click Log On.

About Logging on to an SQL Database Server


To play a sound clip
To play a sound clip,

1	Click Insert [image] Sound.

2	Select a sound clip from the Sound clips in document list.

3	Click Play.

Tips

You can also click [image] in the left margin of the document.

You can play, replay, rewind, stop, or fast forward the sound clip.

About Sound Clips


To update a spreadsheet or database link manually
To update a spreadsheet or database link manually,

1	Click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Update.

2	Click Yes.

Related Topics

About Importing and Linking Spreadsheet and Database Information


To check file location settings
To check file location settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files.

2	Click View All from any tab.

About Files Settings


To edit a watermark
To edit a watermark,

1	Click on a page with the watermark.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark [image] Edit.

3	Use the Watermark Property Bar to edit the watermark.

4	Click [image] to return to main document text.

Tips

When you use clipart as a watermark, you can edit it with the graphics image tools. Right-click the clipart, then click Image Tools. You can add borders or backgrounds, rotate, mirror, or enlarge the watermark image.

To see what the watermark looks like in your document, click View [image] Page or Two Pages.

To edit other watermarks in the document, click [image] or [image] on the Property Bar to move to the previous or next watermark.

About Watermarks


To put an image behind the text using a watermark
To put an image behind the text using a watermark,

1	Click on the page where you want the watermark to begin.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Click Watermark A or Watermark B, then click Create.

4	Click [image], then specify the pages where you want the watermark to appear.

5	Click [image], then specify the filename of the image you want.

6	Click [image] to return to your document.

Tips

To begin creating a watermark, you can also right-click the top or bottom margin, then click Watermark.

Corel WordPerfect includes several graphics to use as watermarks, such as "Confidential" and "Draft." They are found in Corel\Suite8\Graphics\Clipart.

You can type text, insert graphics, or insert a text file to use as the watermark.

A macro included with Corel WordPerfect guides you through creating a watermark, prompting you for text or an image and letting you change the appearance. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, select watermrk.wcm, then click Play.

You cannot see the watermark in Draft view. Click View [image] Page or Two Pages.

About Watermarks


To change the amount of spacing between words or letters
To change the amount of spacing between words or letters,

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Select and modify any of the options at the top of the dialog box.

Tips

You can specify a percent of the optimal distance between words or letters by typing a number greater than 100 to increase the distance, or less than 100 to decrease the distance.

You can use Set Pitch to specify the number of characters you want per inch.

Your changes affect selected text or text from the insertion point forward.

About Spacing Words and Letters


To wrap text around an image
To wrap text around an image,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Wrap.

2	Select a wrapping type option.

3	Select an option from the Wrap text around box.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Contouring text eliminates white space. Box lines are removed and text wraps around the image, unless the box has rounded corners or top and bottom lines.

Related Topics

About Types of Graphics You Can Insert


To enlarge or reduce the page displayed in the window
To enlarge or reduce the page displayed in the window,

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	Specify a zoom percentage or a zoom option.

Tips

You can also select Margin width, Page width, Full page, or Other.

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Changing the View of the Document


To adjust the size of an equation in the display window
To adjust the size of an equation in the display window,

1	In Equation Editor, click View [image] Zoom Display.

2	Specify a zoom percentage.

Tips

Your changes don't affect the printed equation.

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


To change replacement font settings
To change replacement font settings,

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Font Map [image] Automatic Font Change.

2	Select the font you want to replace in the Face list box.

3	To change settings for font sizes and styles click Map individual styles.

4	To change relative sizes, appearance attributes, character sets, or print orientations, select an option in the Automatic font change list box.

5	Select the replacement font settings in the corresponding Face list box.

Tips

To restore the default settings, click Automatic selection.

Related Topics

About Automatic Font Changes


To change display font settings
To change display font settings,

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Font Map [image] Display.

2	In the Printer font box select a printer font.

3	In the Display font box select a font to use on-screen when the printer font is used.

Tips

If the current font is a printer font, you can replace it with a graphics font (ATM, TrueType, etc.), which might produce a sharper display resolution.

To restore the default display font settings, click Automatic selection.

Related Topics

About Font Mapping


To change document font substitutions
To change document font substitutions,

1	Click Format [image] Font [image] Font Map [image] Document.

2	In the Document font box, select the font and size you want to specify a substitute for.

3	In the Printer font box, select the font face, style, and size to use instead of the document font.

Tips

To restore the default settings, click Automatic selection.

Related Topics

About Font Mapping


To place the insertion point in front of text when it is found
To place the insertion point in front of text when it is found,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Action [image] Position Before.

Tips

Click Position After to place the insertion point after the text when it is found.

About Custom Find and Replace Options


To convert a comment to text
To convert a comment to text,

1	Click after the comment you want to convert to text.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Convert to Text.

Tips

If you have multiple comments in your document, use Reveal Codes (Alt+F3) to find the code for the comment you want to convert.

In Page or Two Pages View, you can also click the comment icon, then right-click the comment and click Convert to Text.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To get information about the current document
To get information about the current document,

1	Open the document or select the text for which you want information.

2	Click File [image] Properties [image] Information.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To record a template macro
To record a template macro,

1	Open the template you want to attach the macro to.

2	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Record.

3	Type the name of the macro.

4	Click Location [image] Current Template or Default Template [image] OK.

5	Click Record.

6	Use Corel WordPerfect features to perform the task you want to record.

7	To stop recording the macro, click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Record.

About Template Macros


To move text forward or backward using a tab
To move text forward or backward using a tab,

1	Press Tab to move the insertion point and any subsequent text to the next tab setting.

2	To move left one tab setting, press Shift+Tab.

Tips

In a table, Tab and Shift+Tab move the insertion point to the next or previous cell. To insert forward or backward tabs in a table, press Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl+Shift+Tab.

To set a tab for use one time only, click Format [image] Line [image] Other Codes. Hard tabs are not affected by tab settings or margin changes, and they do not change tab settings.

About Tabs


To change the font size of text
To change the font size of text,

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Select a font size in the Font size list box.

3	To use a size proportional to the current size, select an option on the Relative size pop-up list.

Tips

To change the size of existing text, select the text first. The change affects only the selection.

If you select a scalable font, you can type almost any size in the Font size text box (such as 13.5).

You can add the Font Down and Font Up buttons to the toolbar to increase or decrease point size by 2 points. (These buttons play the fontdn.wcm and fontup.wcm macros.) Five relative size buttons (Fine, Small, etc.) can also be added to the toolbar.

To change the default font size for the document, click File  [image] Document [image] Default Font.

To change the default font size for all documents created with the current printer selection, click File [image] Print [image] Details [image] Default Font.

About Font Sizes


To select an additional objects template
To select an additional objects template,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Template.

2	Specify the path of the Additional template folder.

3	Specify the name of the Additional objects template.

4	To replace the default template, select Update default template from additional objects template.

Tips

The additional objects template does not normally replace the default template. One example of replacing the default template is when there are many users on a network that use the same template objects. The system administrator can select this option and create a network additional objects template that replaces every user's default template.

Related Topics

About the Additional Objects Template


To start a new paragraph
To start a new paragraph,

1	Press Enter.

Related Topics

About Hard and Soft Returns


To mail the current document
To mail the current document,

1	Click File [image] Send to [image] Mail Recipient.

2	Set mail options according to your mail system.

3	Send the mail. You may need to switch back to Corel WordPerfect to return to your document window.

About Sending Mail


To move a document window
To move a document window,

1	Drag the title bar (the bar at the top of the window that displays the document name) to move the document window to a new location.

Tips

You can also click Move on the Control menu, use arrow keys to move the window, then press Enter to anchor it. You can access the Control menu by clicking [image] in the upper left corner of the document window.

You cannot move a maximized document window. Click [image] in the upper right corner of the document window to restore the window to its most recent size.

About Document and Application Windows


To minimize a document window
To minimize a document window,

1	Click the Minimize button [image] in the upper right corner of a document window.

Tips

You can also click Minimize from the document Control menu. To access the Control menu, click [image] in the upper left corner of the document window.

About Document and Application Windows


About Cross-Referencing Graphics Boxes with Counters

Use Counter to select a counter to cross-reference. You must set up a counter in the document to be able to cross-reference it. Use the five predefined counters for graphics and equation boxes or any counters you have created.

You cannot create a reference mark for more than one type of counter using the same name  target name .

To cross-reference a graphics box with a counter

To create a counter to number items in a document

Related Concepts


To install and select a fax driver
To install and select a fax driver,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Details.

2	Select a fax driver from the Current printer drop-down list.

Tips

All printer and fax drivers installed with Windows are displayed in this list.

After you select a fax driver, click the Print tab, then click Properties to specify how and where your fax will be sent.

About Faxing Documents


To hide or show outline symbols in the left margin
To hide or show outline symbols in the left margin,

1	Click anywhere in the list or outline.

2	Click [image].

Tips

The symbols on the left side of the screen indicate the level of an item or body text. They do not print.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


To change the dither method used for printing graphics
To change the dither method used for printing graphics,

1	Right-click the graphic.

2	Click Image Tools [image] Edit Attributes [image] Print Parameters.

3	Click a method in the Dither Method group box.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

The Dither Method options you can use depend on which printer driver is selected.

The printer's resolution determines the accuracy of a printed halftone image. Increasing the printer resolution will improve how an image looks when printed.

Click Default to apply settings to all graphics images.

About Image Printing


To change the dither source used for printing graphics
To change the dither source used for printing graphics,

1	Right-click a graphics image.

2	Click Image Tools [image] Edit Attributes [image] Print Parameters.

3	Select a dither source option.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

The Dither Source options you can use depend on which printer driver is selected.

Click Default to apply settings to all graphics images.

The printer's resolution determines the accuracy of a printed halftone image. Increasing the printer resolution will improve how an image looks when printed.

About Image Printing


To change a graphic's halftoning
To change a graphic's halftoning,

1	Right-click the graphics image.

2	Click Image Tools [image] Edit Attributes [image] Print Parameters.

3	If you are using a PostScript printer, click Angle and specify a number to adjust the pattern orientation of a printed halftone image.

4	To increase or decrease the clarity of the image, click Lines Per Inch and specify a number.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Either option may be unavailable, depending on the printer driver selected.

Click Default to apply the settings to all graphics images.

About Image Printing


To change the appearance of quotation marks
To change the appearance of quotation marks,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] SmartQuotes tab.

2	Select the characters you want in the Open and Close drop-down lists for Single and Double SmartQuotes.

3	Select Use double quotation marks as you type and Use single quotation marks as you type.

4	To use straight quotes with numbers, select Use straight quotes after numbers.

Tips

You can change the quote character used. Delete the character displayed in the Open or Close text box, press Ctrl+W, select a WordPerfect symbol, then click Insert and Close.

About QuickCorrect


To specify personal information for templates
To specify personal information for templates,

1	Click File [image] New [image] Options.

2	Click Personal Information.

3	Select your address entry from the Address Book.

Tips

When you use any project or template that requires personal information, you are prompted to select or create an Address Book entry. When you do this, the information becomes the default for all projects and templates until you select a new personal information entry.

Related Topics

About Template Addresses


To remove Corel WordPerfect from your computer
To remove Corel WordPerfect from your computer,

1	On the Windows Taskbar, click Start [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Setup & Notes [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 Uninstall.

2	Double-click Add/Remove Programs, click WordPerfect 8, click Add/Remove, then follow the instructions on the screen.

About Reinstalling or Removing Corel WordPerfect


To paste text in the same format as text at the insertion point
To paste text in the same format as text at the insertion point,

1	Select the text that you want to cut or copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut or Copy.

3	Click where you want to paste the text.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste or press Ctrl+Shift+V.

Tips

The pasted text appears in the font style and size, text color, and any attributes (such as bold or italics) of the text at the insertion point.

If you pasted the text on a blank line in your document, the text appears in the default font style, color, and size.

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To insert the text of a file into your document
To insert the text of a file into your document,

1	Click where you want to insert the file into the document.

2	Click Insert [image] File.

3	Specify a filename, then click Insert.

Tips

You can insert Corel WordPerfect documents or import other file types such as graphics or spreadsheets.

Related Topics


To merge into a table
To merge into a table,

1	In a new document window, click Tools [image] Merge [image] Create Document.

2	Specify the data source you want to associate, or click No association, then click OK.

3	Create a two-row table with as many columns as you want, then type a heading in each cell of the first row.

4	Right-click the table and click Format [image] Table. Make sure Insert new rows automatically is selected, then click OK.

5	Place the insertion point in the first cell of the second row.

6	Click Insert Field on the Merge toolbar, select the field that matches the heading for that column, then click Insert.

7	Press Tab to move to the next cell, select a field name, then click Insert.

8	Repeat steps 6-7 until you insert all the fields you want, then click Close.

9	Place the insertion point at the end of the last cell in the second row, then click Merge Codes on the toolbar.

10	Select REPEATROW from the Merge codes list, then click Insert.

11	Click Close, then perform the merge.

Tips

The table expands one row for each record in the data file.

Related Topics

About Merge


To insert clipart
To insert clipart,

1	Click where you want to insert the image.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart.

3	Browse through the folders in the Scrapbook until you find the image you want to insert.

4	Drag the image from the Scrapbook into your document.

5	Use the handles on the image box to size it.

6	Drag the box to move it.

7	Click outside the box to deselect it and return to the document.

Tips

You can also drag the mouse across a blank area in the document to create a box, then click Clipart on the Quickmenu.

To add a caption to the image or edit the image in another way, click box, then select an option from the Property Bar. You can also right-click the box and select an option from the QuickMenu.

Thousands of Clipart images are provided with Corel WordPerfect, only some of which are copied to the hard drive. The rest of the Clipart images, drawings, and photos are located on the Applications CD. If you want to insert one of the images on CD, place the Corel WordPerfect Suite CD in the CD-ROM drive, then click the CD Clipart tab in the Scrapbook.

Images in the Scrapbook have a WordPerfect Graphics format with a .WPG extension. If you want to insert other types of images such as .BMP, .JPG, and .PCX, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File. In the Insert Image dialog box, you can click the For Type drop-down list and select other Clipart image formats. Corel WordPerfect can automatically convert images in many standard formats, including .BMP, .EPS, .PCX, and .TIF.

About Scrapbook

Related Topics

About Types of Graphics You Can Insert


To specify extensions for merge filenames
To specify extensions for merge filenames,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Merge/Macro.

2	Click Use default form file extension, then type the extension you want. The default is .frm.

3	Click Use default data file extension, then type the extension you want. The default is .dat.

Tips

Merge files are saved to the default document folder (click the Document tab to change this default).

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To merge envelopes
To merge envelopes,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

2	Specify the location of the form document, data source, and the output (merged) file.

3	To merge selected records only, click Select Records, then specify the records.

4	Click Envelopes and specify a return address.

5	Click the Mailing Addresses text box (bottom half), then click Field.

6	Specify a field, then click Insert and Close.

7	To insert additional fields, place the insertion point, click Field, specify the field, then click Insert and Close.

8	To save the address field arrangement, click Add. The arrangement will be added to the Mailing addresses drop-down list.

9	Use the current envelope definition, or specify a different one.

10	To change address positions or include a POSTNET bar code, click Options, select the options you want, then click OK.

11	Click OK to save the envelope format for the merge.

12	Click Merge to start the merge.

Tips

If you are merging envelopes only, click Current Document for the form file location. The current document should be a blank document window. After you perform the merge, the merged envelopes are placed after the current blank page. Delete the blank page if needed.

If you are merging another document, such as a letter, the envelopes are placed at the end of the merged file.

After you create an envelope format, click Reset in thePerform Merge dialog box to reset envelope options to no envelopes (and clear the form and data options).

Related Topics

About Merging Envelopes


To move a graphics box
To move a graphics box,

1	Click the graphics box to select it.

2	Drag the box to a new location.

Tips

If the box is attached to a paragraph, a guideline and a pushpin show which paragraph it will attach to.

If the box is attached as a character, the black vertical line next to the box shows where it will move.

You can also cut and paste the box.

If you move or resize the box by mistake, click [image] on the toolbar.

Related Topics

About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page


To add a border to a column
To add a border to a column,

1	Click in the column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns [image] Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style.

4	To apply the border only to the selected column, select Apply border to current column group only.

Tips

You can change the color, line style, or drop shadow for the border.

If you deselect Apply border to current column group only, the border surrounds all columns on the current page and all subsequent pages in the document.

Related Topics

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To add a border to a page
To add a border to a page,

1	Click on the page.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Border/Fill.

3	Select Line or Fancy from the Border Type drop-down list.

4	Select the border.

5	To apply the border only to the current page, select Apply border to current page only.

Tips

You can also select any amount of text on the page(s) to add a border around the text. Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Border/Fill.

If you deselect Apply border to current page only, the border will surround the current page and all subsequent pages in the document.

Fancy borders are retrieved from the default Fancy Borders folder, as specified in Files Settings. Click Browse to look for fancy borders located in other folders.

After you put a fancy border on a page, you can type text on the page as you usually would. However, the border doesn't change page margins. If you don't want to type over the border, you may need to move the margins within the border.

For line borders, you can change the color, line style, or drop shadow. You can also round the corners.

Related Topics

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To add a border to a paragraph
To add a border to a paragraph,

1	Click in the paragraph or select text in several paragraphs.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style.

4	To apply the border only to the selected paragraph, click Apply border to current paragraph only.

 Tips

If you deselect Apply border to current paragraph only, the border surrounds the current paragraph and all subsequent paragraphs in the document.

Related Topics

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To edit a footnote
To edit a footnote,

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote.

2	Type the number of the footnote, then click Edit.

3	Edit the text of the footnote.

4	Click [image] to return to the main text of your document.

Tips

If you are using Page view, you can also click on the text of the footnote to edit it.

To display the Footnote Property Bar, click inside the footnote.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by clicking [image] on the Footnote Property Bar.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To change text color
To change text color,

1	Click in the document where you want to change the text color.

2	Click Format [image] Font.

3	Click the Text Color pop-up list, then select a color from the color palette.

4	To change the intensity of the color, adjust the shading.

Tips

Select text first to change the color of an existing block of text.

About Fonts


To create a large letter at the beginning of a paragraph (drop cap)
To create a large letter at the beginning of a paragraph (drop cap),

1	Click in the paragraph where you want the drop cap to appear.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Drop Cap.

3	Click a button on the Property Bar to change the size, position, and style of the drop cap.

Tips

Drop Cap always formats the first letter of the sentence. You don't need to select the letter.

To create a drop cap on a blank line, click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Drop Cap, then begin typing.

To turn off a drop cap, click at the beginning of the paragraph, then click [image] [image]  [image].

Related Topics

About Drop Caps


To find different forms of a word
To find different forms of a word,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Type [image] Word Forms.

2	Type the word in the Find text box.

3	Click Find Next to search forward in the document, or click Find Prev to search backward.

Tips

For example, you can search for the word forms of "go" to find "goes," going," "gone," and "went."

Word Forms does not find contractions (such as "shouldn't" and "isn't").

To select a word or phrase you searched for previously, click the arrow button to the right of the Find text box.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Text


To fit a document on a certain number of pages
To fit a document on a certain number of pages,

1	Click Format [image] Make It Fit.

2	In the Desired number of filled pages box, type the number of pages you want the document to fill.

3	Select the format items you want to adjust.

4	Click Make It Fit.

Tips

The number of pages you set must be within 50 percent of the document's current size.

About Making a Document Fit


To change the size font, position, and fill of a drop cap
To change the size font, position, and fill of a drop cap,

1	Click before the drop cap at the beginning of the paragraph

2	Click the buttons on the Property Bar to adjust the size, position, or font of the drop cap and to add a border or fill, or change other format options.

Tips

To set an exact line height for the drop cap, click [image] , then click the number of lines.

To move the surrounding text down, click [image]  [image] then click the icon that specifies the number of lines to move the text down.

To move the drop cap into the margin, click [image]  [image] Margin. You can also click Other, then specify how much of the drop cap you want moved into the margin.

When you click Font, you must specify a scalable font.

To create a reversed drop cap, change the font color to white and use a 100% fill style with a black foreground color.

About Drop Caps


To select tables, rows, and columns using Row/Col indicators
To select tables, rows, and columns using Row/Col indicators,

1	Click in a table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Row/Col Indicators.

3	To select a row, click the row indicator next to the row (for example, 1, 2, and so on).

4	To select a column, click the column indicator above the column (for example, A, B, and so on).

5	To select the entire table, click the rectangle in the top left corner of the row and column indicators (the cursor becomes a double-headed corner arrow).

Tips

You can also click the Row/Col Indicators button on the Table Formula toolbar. To display row and column indicators automatically each time you display the Table Formula toolbar, don't turn off the indicators before you close the toolbar.

To turn off row and column indicators, click Table [image] Row/Col Indicators.

You can also select a table by clicking Edit [image] Select [image] Table.

Related Topics

About Selecting Text


To save a table style to a specific template
To save a table style to a specific template,

1	Format a table with the text formatting, lines, borders, and fill you want for your table style.

2	Click in the table.

3	Click Table [image] SpeedFormat [image] Options [image] Setup.

4	Select the template where you want to save the table style, then click OK.

5	Click Create, then type a name for the style you have created.

Tips

If you want the to save the table style as a file separate from a template, click Options [image] Save As.

About Table Style Settings


To quickly format a table with predefined styles (SpeedFormat)
To quickly format a table with predefined styles (SpeedFormat),

1	Click in the table.

2	Click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Click a table style in the Available styles scroll box.

4	Select any options in the dialog box.

5	Click Apply.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click SpeedFormat.

If you have styles saved in different locations, click Options [image] Setup, then click the location of the styles you want to use.

About Giving a Table a New Look (SpeedFormat)


To list your previous editing actions
To list your previous editing actions,

1	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo History.

2	To undo or redo the last editing action, click Undo or Redo.

3	To undo or redo two or more actions at once, select the last item, then click Undo or Redo.

Tips

When you select one item, all the actions previous to your selected item are also selected and will be undone or redone.

About Undo and Redo


To set up your scanner
To set up your scanner,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Select Image Source.

2	Click the image scanner you are using, then click Select.

Tips

The dialog box will vary depending on the scanner you are using. Click Help in the dialog box or see your scanner documentation for more information about the different options.

About Scanning Images into Corel WordPerfect


To scan images into Corel WordPerfect
To scan images into Corel WordPerfect,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Acquire Image.

2	See your scanner software documentation for instructions on manipulating the image and pasting it into Corel WordPerfect.

Tips

The image is stored in Corel WordPerfect as a bitmap that you can edit. When you double-click the image, either Corel Presentations or your scanner software will open so you can edit the bitmap.

About Scanning Images into Corel WordPerfect


To specify code page settings
To specify code page settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Convert.

2	Click Options [image] Code Pages.

3	Select a code page from the DOS and Windows Code Page options.

4	To change code pages for files you convert, select a code page for the Input File and Output File.

Related Topics

About Converting Code Pages


To specify document conversion settings
To specify document conversion settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Convert.

2	Click Options [image] Document.

3	Select or change any conversion options.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

About Converting Documents


To specify font conversion settings
To specify font conversion settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Convert [image] click Options.

2	Click WP 4.2 Fonts or DCA/DisplayWrite Fonts.

3	To change a font on the list, select the font and click Edit.

4	Specify the font number, typeface, and pitch you want (specify points and pitch for DCA or DisplayWrite fonts).

Related Topics

About Converting Fonts


To create a project category
To create a project category,

1	Click File [image] New [image] Options [image] Create Category.

2	Type the name of the category.

Tips

After you create the category you can copy projects and templates to it. Select the project or template, click Options [image] Copy Project, then select the category.

If you create a folder in the \Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates folder, it appears as a category. Any template files you move to that folder are listed in the category.

About Templates and Projects


To delete or rename a project category
To delete or rename a project category,

1	Click File [image] New [image] Options [image] Remove Category or Rename Category.

Tips

When you delete a category, the projects and templates in it are not deleted. They are saved in the [Deleted Projects] category and can then be moved to other categories.

About Templates and Projects


To create a template prompt
To create a template prompt,

1	On the Template toolbar, click Build Prompts.

2	Click Add, then type the prompt.

3	To add a prompt that inserts an item into the template from the address book (such as a name or address), click Link to Address Book Field, then click the item you want to insert.

4	Click OK to add the prompt to the list.

Tips

To insert the prompt in the template, click where you want the prompt, select the prompt in the list, then click Paste.

When you use the template file, the prompts display in the Template Information list in the order they appear in the Template Prompts list. To move a prompt up or down, select the prompt, then click Move Up or Move Down.

For the Prompt Builder to work, you must have the prompts.wcm macro in your macros folder.

About Templates and Projects


To copy objects to templates
To copy objects to templates,

1	On the Template toolbar, click Copy/Remove Object.

2	Specify a template to copy from.

3	Select an Object Type (such as toolbar, macro, or style).

4	Select the objects you want to copy.

5	Click Copy or Copy All.

Tips

Unless you specify a different template, the toolbars, macros, keyboards, styles, and menus are copied from the standard template.

Only template macros that you have created in that template or copied to the template appear in the macros list.

About Template Objects


To associate features with toolbars, menus, and keyboards
To associate features with toolbars, menus, and keyboards,

1	On the Template toolbar, click Associate.

2	Select a feature in the list.

3	From the Toolbars, Menus, or Keyboards lists, click the items to associate with that feature.

Tips

Only objects that you have created in your template or copied to it appear in the list.

An item that is associated with a feature appears in the template when you use that feature.

Related Topics

About Template Objects


To create a formula in a table or floating cell
To create a formula in a table or floating cell,

1	Click in the table cell or floating cell.

2	On the Tables toolbar, click Table [image] Formula Toolbar.

3	Click in the Formula Edit text box, to the right of [image].

4	Type cell addresses, operators, and values in the Formula Edit text box (for example, A1+B5+C4).

5	To insert a predefined table function, click Functions on the Table Formula toolbar, click a function, click Insert, then define any arguments in that function.

6	To insert the name of a table or floating cell, click Names on the Formula Bar, click a name, then click Insert.

7	Click [image] to insert the formula into the cell, or click [image] to cancel the formula or changes you have made to it.

Tips

When you insert or cancel a formula, Formula Edit mode is turned off.

You can avoid typing text over your formulas and deleting them accidentally when Formula Edit mode is on. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment [image] click Prompts [image] Confirm deletion of table formulas.

You can also click in a cell or select a range of cells to insert cell addresses in the Formula Edit text box.

You can also right-click the table, then click Formula Toolbar.

You can type formulas directly into table cells or floating cells without using the Table Formula toolbar if you precede the initial symbols, functions, or numbers with + or =. Formulas you type are calculated when you move the insertion point out of the cell that contains the formula.

Related Topics

About Arithmetic and Logical Operators in Table Formulas


To pause a macro you are playing or recording
To pause a macro you are playing or recording,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.

Tips

To continue playing or recording the macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause again, or click [image].

About Macros


To customize the page numbering format
To customize the page numbering format,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Custom Format.

2	In the Edit custom format and text box, type any text and insert any number codes from the list boxes.

3	Click OK to add the new format to the Page numbering format list.

4	Click OK to use the new format from that page forward in your document.

Tips

The preview line just below the text box shows how the new format will look on the printed page.

The last five custom page numbering formats appear at the top of the Page numbering format list so you can quickly apply them.

You can delete the custom page numbering formats you create. However, you cannot delete page numbering formats provided by Corel WordPerfect.

About Custom Page Numbering Formats


To insert a POSTNET bar code in a document
To insert a POSTNET bar code in a document,

1	Click in the document where you want the bar code to appear.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Bar Code.

3	Type a ZIP Code in the Bar code digits text box.

Tips

POSTNET bar codes are valid only for mail sent to addresses in the United States.

About Inserting a POSTNET Bar Code in a Document


To expand QuickWords
To expand QuickWords,

1	Type the abbreviation in the document where you want the expanded word to appear.

2	Press Enter or insert a space.

Tips

If you do not want to expand QuickWords when you type them, click Tools [image] QuickWords [image] Expand QuickWords when you type them. You can also expand a QuickWord by pressing Ctrl+Shift+A. To expand all QuickWords in the current document, click Tools [image] Macros [image] Play, then double-click expndall.wcm.

You can also use QuickCorrect to create abbreviations that expand automatically as you type.

About QuickWords


To delete a QuickWord
To delete a QuickWord,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

2	Select a QuickWord, then click Delete Entry.

About QuickWords


To rename a QuickWord
To rename a QuickWord,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

2	Select a QuickWord, then click Options [image] Rename entry.

3	Type the new name.

Tips

QuickWords are not case sensitive. Abc, ABC, and abc are treated as the same QuickWord.

About QuickWords


To change the text a QuickWord represents
To change the text a QuickWord represents,

1	Select the text you want the QuickWord to represent.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

3	Select the QuickWord you want to change, then click Options [image] Replace entry [image] Yes.

About QuickWords


To change the page numbering format for a table of contents
To change the page numbering format for a table of contents,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Contents [image] Define [image] Page Numbering.

2	Click Custom page number format, then type any text and insert any number codes.

Tips

To use the same type of numbers as in the document, click Document page number format.

About Creating a Table of Contents


To change the page numbering format for a list
To change the page numbering format for a list,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List [image] Define [image] Create [image] Page Numbering.

2	Click Custom page number format.

3	Type any text and insert any number codes you want in the text box.

Tips

To use the same type of numbers as in the document, click Document page number format.

You can also change page numbering when you edit the list definition.

About Creating a List of Items in Your Document


To change the page numbering format for a table of authorities
To change the page numbering format for a table of authorities,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities [image] Define [image] Create [image] Page Numbering.

2	Click Custom page number format.

3	Type any text and insert any number codes in the text box.

Tips

To use the same type of numbers as in the document, click Document page number format.

You can also change page numbering when you edit a table of authorities section definition.

About Creating a Table of Authorities


To insert the total page number format into document text
To insert the total page number format into document text,

1	Click where you want to insert the format you are using to number pages.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

3	Click the page numbering format you want to use.

4	Click Insert page number format in text.

Tips

The numbers in the format are updated as pages change.

To reset the value of a number (for example, change 2 to 4), use Set Value.

About Page Number Format


To specify toolbar, Property Bar, keyboard, or menu settings
To specify toolbar, Property Bar, keyboard, or menu settings,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Modify any options.

Tips

To get information on an option, right-click the option.

You can also right-click a menu, toolbar, or Property Bar then click Settings.

You can change how a Property Bar looks, but you cannot change the context in which a Property Bar appears. For example, you cannot specify that the Graphics Property Bar also appears when you are editing text.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


To create a QuickWord for a word or phrase
To create a QuickWord for a word or phrase,

1	Select the word or phrase.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

3	Type the word you want to represent the word or phrase.

4	Click Add Entry.

Tips

Specify a word or characters that are not normally typed for the QuickWord, such as \companyaddress for your company's name and contact information.

About QuickCorrect Abbreviations


To remove information from the Application Bar
To remove information from the Application Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Application Bar.

2	Deselect the items you want to remove from the Application Bar.

About Application Bar Settings


To restore the default Application Bar
To restore the default Application Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Application Bar.

2	Click Reset.

About Application Bar Settings


menu

The area at the top of a window containing headings for pull-down menu items.


To select a different toolbar, menu, or keyboard
To select a different toolbar, menu, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	To select toolbars, click the toolbars you want to display. (You can display more than one.)

3	To select a menu, click Menus, click the menu you want to use, then click Select.

4	To select a keyboard, click Keyboards, click the keyboard you want to use, then click Select.

5	When you have made your selections, click Close.

Tips

You can change how a Property Bar looks, but you cannot change the context in which a Property Bar appears. For example, you cannot specify that the Graphics Property Bar also appears when you are editing text.

To quickly change back to the default WordPerfect 8 menu and the default keyboard, press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Backspace. You can also add the Reset Keyboard/Menu button [image] to the toolbar to do this.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


To edit an overstrike character
To edit an overstrike character,

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Overstrike.

2	If necessary, click Previous or Next until the overstrike character displays.

3	Add or delete any characters in the text box.

4	To add attributes, click the arrow button, then select the attribute.

Tips

To restore the original overstrike character in the text box, click Reset.

The Previous and Next buttons show only the overstrike characters in the active document.

You can also double-click an overstrike code in Reveal Codes to open the Overstrike dialog box.

About Creating an Overstrike Character


To center text at the insertion point
To center text at the insertion point,

1	Tab or space to the position on the line where you want to center text.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Center.

3	Type the text, then press Enter.

Tips

You can also press Shift+F7 to center text, or add the Center button to your toolbar.

Related Topics

About Centering Text


To center text with dot leaders
To center text with dot leaders,

1	Click on a blank line.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Center.

3	Repeat step 2.

4	Type the text.

5	Press Enter to end centering.

Tips

You can also press Shift+F7 twice or perform this step twice: right-click in the document window, then click Center.

To continue the dot leaders from the end of the text to the right margin, type the text, then click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right with Dot Leaders.

About Aligning Text with Dots


To right-align text with dot leaders
To right-align text with dot leaders,

1	Click at the beginning of a line.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right with Dot Leaders.

3	Type the text.

4	Press Enter to end right alignment.

Tips

To leave the beginning of a line of text at the left margin and right-align the rest with dot leaders, click where you want to change the justification, then follow step 2.

You can also insert dot leaders by pressing Alt+F7 twice.

About Aligning Text with Dots


To justify text
To justify text,

1	Click where you want the justification to begin.

2	Click Format [image] Justification.

3	Click the Justification type you want.

4	Type the text.

Tips

To justify existing text, select the text, then click a Justification option.

To justify the paragraph at the insertion point, right-click the text [image] click a Justification option.

Justification does not affect the way a table is positioned on a page, but you can use it to align text inside table cells.

When you use Full or All Justification, spacing between words is expanded or compressed so that the text fills a line. To change the amount of spacing between words, use Word Spacing Justification Limits.

About Justifying Text


To specify which symbols (space, hard return) display on your screen
To specify which symbols (space, hard return) display on your screen,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Symbols.

2	Select the symbols you want to see in the document window.

3	To display the symbols each time you start Corel WordPerfect, click Show symbols on new and current document.

Related Topics

About Showing Format Symbols in a Document


To find a code
To find a code,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Match [image] Codes.

2	Select the code you want to find, then click Insert & Close.

3	Click Find Next to search forward in the document, or click Find Prev to search backward.

Tips

Click Codes on the Match and Replace menus to find and replace codes regardless of the value they contain. For example, if you search for a font size code, any font size code is found.

Click Type [image] Specific Codes to find and replace specific uses of codes. For example, you can find a font face in a specific size or a precise margin setting.

The specific codes you can search for are also available in Match Codes, but Match Codes does not let you search for specific values.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Codes


To keep a selection of text from being divided across pages
To keep a selection of text from being divided across pages,

1	Select the text you want to protect.

2	Click Format [image] Keep Text Together.

3	Click Keep selected text together on same page.

Tips

This option is commonly used to keep a selection of text or a table or chart together within a paragraph or page. The third option (Number of lines to keep together) is commonly used to keep a heading and the first few lines of a paragraph together.

If you protect consecutive blocks of text, make sure they are separated by at least one soft or hard return. Otherwise they are treated as one large block.

About Keeping Text Together


To keep text together on one page
To keep text together on one page,

1	Click where you want to begin keeping text together.

2	Click Format [image] Keep Text Together.

3	Click Number of lines to keep together, then specify the number of lines, including any blank lines.

Tips

This option is commonly used to keep a heading and the first few lines of a paragraph together. Use the second option (Keep selected text together on same page) to keep a selection of text or a table or chart together within a paragraph or page.

Another way to keep text on a page is to use Make It Fit.

About Keeping Text Together


kerning

The process of adjusting space between letter pairs to improve their appearance. On the printed page, certain letter pairs appear to have more space between them than others because of the shape and slant of each letter.


To number lines in newspaper columns
To number lines in newspaper columns,

1	Click where you want line numbering to begin in the column.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Numbering.

3	Click Turn line numbering on.

4	Click Number all newspaper columns.

5	Click Outside left margin, then specify the distance between the line numbers and the left edge of text in each column.

6	Change any other options.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

The distance you set in step 5 must be less than the space between the columns. Otherwise, the line numbers might overlap the column text.

About Line Numbering


line height

The distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.  Line height is set according to the font being used.


leading

The amount of white space between the bottom of one line of text and top of the next line of text.


To open subdocuments in a master document
To open subdocuments in a master document,

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Expand Master.

2	By default, all subdocuments are selected. Click checkboxes to deselect the subdocuments you do not want to open.

3	If some documents are not selected and you want to open all subdocuments, click Mark [image] Mark All.

4	To deselect all subdocuments, click Mark [image] Clear All.

Tips

You can also add the Master Document Expand button to your toolbar.

When you print a master document, any open subdocuments are printed.

When you open, close, and save subdocuments in a master document, its styles are saved with the subdocuments.

About Master Documents and Subdocuments


To close subdocuments in a master document
To close subdocuments in a master document,

1	Click File [image] Document [image] Condense Master.

2	To save and close all subdocuments, click OK.

3	To leave one or more subdocuments open, or to close subdocuments without saving changes, select the appropriate filename.

Tips

Each subdocument is listed twice: once to close and once to save. By default all are selected to save and close.

Subdocument changes are saved only when you save the subdocument. If you save a master document without saving the subdocument first, your subdocument changes will be lost.

You should close and save any subdocuments you have changed before you close the master document. Otherwise you may have two versions of a document with the same filename (one a regular document, the other a subdocument).

You can also add the Master Document Condense button to your toolbar.

About Master Documents and Subdocuments


To advance a certain distance from the insertion point
To advance a certain distance from the insertion point,

1	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Advance.

2	Select Left from Insertion Point, Right from Insertion Point, Up from Insertion Point, or Down from Insertion Point.

3	Specify a position in the Horizontal or Vertical Distance text box.

Tips

You cannot advance text past the end of the page.

You can delete an advance by removing the advance code in the Reveal Codes window.

About Advancing Text to a Different Position


To create a document summary
To create a document summary,

1	Open the document for which you want to create a summary.

2	Click File [image] Properties [image] Options [image] Extract Information From Document.

3	Type or edit information in any of the fields.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To print a document summary
To print a document summary,

1	Click File [image] Properties [image] Options [image] Print Summary.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To save a document summary as a separate file
To save a document summary as a separate file,

1	Click File [image] Properties [image] Options [image] Save Summary As New Document.

2	Specify a filename for the file.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To delete a document summary
To delete a document summary,

1	Click File [image] Properties [image] Options [image] Delete Summary From Document.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To customize the document summary fields
To customize the document summary fields,

1	Click File [image] Properties [image] Setup.

2	Click fields in the Select fields list to include (or remove) them in the Fields to display list.

3	Drag the fields in the Fields to display list to change their order.

Tips

Click Use As Default if you want the customized fields to become the default document summary configuration for all documents.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To insert a counter number in your document
To insert a counter number in your document,

1	Click where you want to display the first counter number.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

3	Click the counter in the Counter list.

4	Click Display in Document.

About Counter Numbering


To decrease or increase the value of a counter
To decrease or increase the value of a counter,

1	Click where you want to increase or decrease the counter number.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

4	Click Increase and Display or Decrease and Display.

About Counter Numbering


To edit a delay code
To edit a delay code,

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Double-click the delay code you want to edit.

3	Click the type of code to edit on the Delay Codes toolbar.

4	Make any changes, then click Close on the toolbar.

About Delay Codes


hyphenation zone

A narrow area surrounding the right margin of a document. Hyphenation divides words that span the hyphenation zone. You can move the boundaries of the hyphenation zone to hyphenate more or fewer words.


To change the boundaries of the hyphenation zone
To change the boundaries of the hyphenation zone,

1	Click where you want to change the hyphenation zone.

2	Click Tools [image] Language [image] Hyphenation.

3	Specify new percentages in the text boxes.

Tips

Increase the percentages to hyphenate fewer words in your document; decrease the percentages to hyphenate more words.

About Hyphenating Text


To restore the last Undo action
To restore the last Undo action,

1	Click Edit [image] Redo.

About Undo and Redo


address book

The Address Book is a standalone application that lets you keep all address information in one place. The Address Book can store names, addresses, user IDs, and related information to use on envelopes, labels, letters, templates, mass mailings (merge), and e-mail (with a modem or network connection). You can also dial phone and fax numbers from the Address Book.


data source

A data source supplies information to a form document during a merge. You can use a Corel WordPerfect data file or address book as a data source. You can also use keyboard input, an ODBC data source, a database file from another application, a spreadsheet file, an ASCII Delimited Text file, or a data file in another word processing format.


data file

A Corel WordPerfect data file supplies information to the form document during a merge. You can arrange the information in either a text or table format. (In previous versions of Corel WordPerfect, a data file was known as a secondary merge file.)


To save an equation as a text file
To save an equation as a text file,

1	In the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor, click File [image] Save As.

2	Select WordPerfect Compound File or WordPerfect 5.1/5.2 in the File type drop-down list.

3	Specify a path and filename. The file is saved with the default file extension .eqn.

Tips

To save only a portion of an equation, select that portion of the equation before you click File [image] Save As.

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


To delete codes from your document
To delete codes from your document,

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Place the insertion point on the immediate left or right of the code you want to delete.

3	Press Delete to delete the code to the right of the insertion point, or press Backspace to delete the code to the left of the insertion point.

Tips

You can also delete a code by dragging it out of the Reveal Codes window.

About Codes in a Document


To save an equation as a graphics file
To save an equation as a graphics file,

1	In the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor, click File [image] Save As.

2	Select WordPerfect Graphics 6/7/8 or WordPerfect Graphics 5 from the File Type drop-down list.

3	Specify a path and a filename. The file is saved with the default .wpg extension.

Tips

If you save an equation as a graphic (.wpg file), you will not be able to edit the equation again in the Equation Editor.

About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor


About Custom Page Numbering Formats

Corel WordPerfect 8 provides several standard ways of numbering pages. These are called page numbering formats. You can select and use them to number the pages in a document.

You can also create custom page numbering formats. For example, you can have page numbers include the name of the document they are numbering, as in "Salary Report, Page 1."

To customize the page numbering format

To delete a custom page numbering format

To insert numbers in a custom page numbering format

Related Concepts


To insert numbers in a custom page numbering format
To insert numbers in a custom page numbering format,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Custom Format.

2	In the Edit custom format and text box, click where you want to insert the number.

3	Select a numbering style for the kind of numbering you want (page, chapter, etc.), then click Insert.

Tips

The number is inserted as a code. For example, the [Pg#] code is inserted for a page number.

The preview line just below the text box shows how the number will look when it is printed.

For each custom format you create, you can choose only one type of number from each list box.

About Custom Page Numbering Formats


To reset a page number
To reset a page number,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value.

2	Type a new page number and change any other options.

Tips

Page numbering starts with the new page number from that point forward in the document.

Always keep the number the same ensures that the page number does not change when pages are added or deleted. For example, keep the number the same for the first page of a new chapter that should always be page 1.

Let the number change as pages are added or deleted when you insert unnumbered pages (charts or pictures) and you want page numbering to account for them. For example, if you are on page 4 and set the number to 6, that page will always be two numbers higher than the last numbered page.

About Adjusting Page Number Values


To reset the method of numbering total pages
To reset the method of numbering total pages,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Insert Page Number [image] Value/Adjust [image] Total Pages.

2	Select a page number method.

Tips

The Total Pages method applies from that point forward in the document.

About Adjusting Page Number Values


To reset a chapter number
To reset a chapter number,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value [image] Chapter.

2	Type a new chapter number and change any other options.

Tips

The chapter number applies from that point forward in the document until you change it again.

Always keep the number the same ensures that the number stays the same even when pages or chapters are added or deleted. For example, keep the number the same when you want that chapter to always be chapter 1.

If you want the number to change as you edit the document, select Let number change as chapters are added or deleted.

About Adjusting Page Number Values


To reset a volume number
To reset a volume number,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value [image] Volume.

2	Type a new number and change any other options.

Tips

The volume number applies from that point forward in the document (until you change it again).

Always keep number the same ensures that the volume number stays the same, even when pages or volumes are added or deleted. For example, keep the number the same when you want that volume to always be volume one.

Let number change as volumes are added or deleted when you want the number to account for other volumes you might add.

About Adjusting Page Number Values


To reset a secondary page number
To reset a secondary page number,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value [image] Secondary.

2	Type a new number and change any other options.

Tips

Always keep number the same ensures that the number stays the same even when pages are added or deleted.

Let the number change as pages are added or deleted when you insert unnumbered pages (charts or pictures) and you want secondary page numbering to account for them. For example, if you are on secondary page 4 and set the number to 6, that page will always be two numbers higher than the last numbered secondary page.

About Adjusting Page Number Values


To insert page, chapter, or volume numbers in document text
To insert page, chapter, or volume numbers in document text,

1	Click where you want to insert the number in your document.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Insert page number format in text.

Tips

The current value for the number displays at the insertion point in the document.

The page number is updated as pages change.

To reset the value of a number (for example, change 2 to 4), use Set Value.

Related Topics

About Page Numbering


To display document windows top to bottom
To display document windows top to bottom,

1	Click Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom.

Related Topics

About Document and Application Windows


To maximize a document window
To maximize a document window,

1	To maximize a document window, click [image] in the upper right corner of the document window.

2	To maximize a minimized document, click [image] on the minimized title bar.

About Document and Application Windows


To size a document window
To size a document window,

1	Open the Control menu by clicking [image] in the upper left corner of the document window.

2	Click Size. If Size is dimmed, first click Restore.

3	Move the four-headed arrow over the edge of the document window until it changes to a two-headed arrow.

4	Drag to enlarge or reduce the document window.

Tips

You can also use arrow keys to size the window, then press Enter to anchor it.

You can drag the corner of a window to change the size in two directions at once.

About Document and Application Windows


To restore a document window to its previous size
To restore a document window to its previous size,

1	To restore a maximized document window to its most recent size, click [image] in the upper right corner of the document window.

2	To restore a minimized document to its most recent size, click [image] on the minimized title bar.

Tips

You can also click Restore on the document Control menu to restore a document window (minimized or maximized) to its most recent size. To use the Control menu, click [image] in the upper left corner of the document window.

About Document and Application Windows


To paste text or graphics in a document
To paste text or graphics in a document,

1	Click where you want to insert the information.

2	Click Edit [image] Paste or press Ctrl+V.

Tips

You can also right-click in the document window, then click Paste.

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To change the drop cap options
To change the drop cap options,

1	Click before the drop cap at the beginning of the paragraph.

2	Click buttons on the Drop Cap Property Bar.

3	Select any options.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Drop Caps


To create hidden text from existing text
To create hidden text from existing text,

1	Select the text you want to hide.

2	Click Format [image] Font [image] Hidden.

Tips

If you delete a Hide code when the hidden text is not displayed in the document window, you will delete the text. To restore the deleted code, which includes the hidden text, click Edit [image] Undo.

Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Hidden text to display hidden text in the document window.

About Hiding Text


To convert hidden text to document text
To convert hidden text to document text,

1	Make sure Hidden is being displayed in the document window.

2	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

3	Drag the hidden text code out of the Reveal Codes window.

Tips

If you delete a Hide code when the hidden text is not displayed in the document window, you will delete the text. To restore the deleted code, which includes the hidden text, click Edit [image] Undo.

If the hidden text is not visible in the document window, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Hidden text.

About Hiding Text


To drag and drop text to another document
To drag and drop text to another document,

1	Arrange two or more documents on your screen so you can see them at the same time by clicking Window [image] Tile.

2	Select the text you want to move.

3	Drag the selected text to the other document.

Tips

To copy the text to the insertion point location, press Ctrl while you release the mouse button.

To drag and drop between open documents, select the text, then drag and drop on a filename on the Application Bar.

Related Topics

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To find and replace words or characters
To find and replace words or characters,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

3	Type the replacement text in the Replace With text box.

4	To replace all occurrences of the text, click Replace All. To replace certain occurrences of the text, click Find Next or Find Prev, then click Replace for only those occurrences.

Tips

To delete all occurrences of text, type the text in the Find text box and leave the Replace with text box empty.

To select a word or phrase you searched for previously, click the arrow button to the right of the Find and Replace With text boxes.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Text


To create and insert a bookmark
To create and insert a bookmark,

1	Click where you want to insert a bookmark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Create.

3	Type a bookmark name.

Tips

If you do not type a bookmark name, a QuickMark is inserted.

To mark text and have it selected each time you find the bookmark, select the text before step 2 and click Selected Bookmark.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To rename a bookmark
To rename a bookmark,

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Select a bookmark, then click Rename.

3	Type a new name.

Tips

A QuickMark cannot be renamed.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To find a QuickMark
To find a QuickMark,

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark [image] Find QuickMark.

Tips

To automatically go to the QuickMark when you open the document, select Go to QuickMark on file open.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To find a bookmark
To find a bookmark,

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Select the name of the bookmark, then click Go To.

Tips

Click Go To & Select to move the insertion point to the selected bookmark and select the text again.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To move a bookmark or QuickMark
To move a bookmark or QuickMark,

1	Click where you want the bookmark.

2	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

3	Select the name of the bookmark or QuickMark.

4	Click Move.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To delete a bookmark or QuickMark
To delete a bookmark or QuickMark,

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Select a bookmark or QuickMark, then click Delete.

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To find specific uses of a code
To find specific uses of a code,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Type [image] Specific Codes.

2	Select a code, then click OK.

3	Specify a value for the code.

4	Click Find Next to search forward in the document, or click Find Prev to search backward.

Tips

The contents of the Find and Replace dialog change depending on the specific code you select.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Codes


To find and replace specific uses of a code
To find and replace specific uses of a code,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Type [image] Specific Codes.

2	Select a code, then click OK.

3	Specify a value for the code.

4	Specify a value in the Replace with text box or list.

5	To replace all occurrences of the code, click Replace All. To replace certain occurrences of the code, click Find Next or Find Prev, then click Replace only for those occurrences.

Tips

The contents of the Find and Replace dialog change depending on the specific code you select.

To delete the specific code, select Replace with Nothing.

Related Topics

About Finding Specific Codes


To find and replace codes
To find and replace codes,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Match [image] Codes.

2	Select a code, then click Insert.

3	Click the Replace with text box, click the replacement code you want in the Codes dialog box, then click Insert & Close.

4	To replace all occurrences of the code, click Replace All. To replace certain occurrences of the code, click Find Next or Find Prev, then click Replace only for those occurrences.

Tips

The Codes option is on both the Match and Replace menus. The list of codes changes depending on whether you are matching a code (using the Find text box) or replacing a code (using the Replace with text box).

To delete the code you are searching for, leave the Replace with text box empty.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Codes


To find and replace different forms of a word
To find and replace different forms of a word,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Type [image] Word Forms.

2	Type the word in the Find text box.

3	Type the replacement word in the Replace with text box.

4	Select any other options.

5	To replace all occurrences and forms of the word, click Replace All. To replace certain occurrences of the word, click Find Next or Find Prev, then click Replace only for those occurrences.

Tips

To delete all occurrences of the word forms, type the word in the Find text box and leave the Replace with text box empty.

To select a word or phrase you searched for previously, click the arrow button to the right of the Find and Replace With text boxes.

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Text


To merge using the Address Book
To merge using the Address Book,

1	Create a form document.

2	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

3	Click Form Document, then select File on Disk, Current Document, or Clipboard. If you select File on Disk, specify the file location.

4	Click Data Source and select Address Book.

5	On the address book drop-down list, select a specific address book. Or click Select Records if you want to merge only selected records in one or more address books.

6	Click Output and specify where you want the merged file to go: Current Document, New Document, Printer, File on Disk, or E-mail.

7	Click Merge to complete the merge.

Tips

If you have selected records in the Address Book before starting the merge, those are the records that will merge unless you specify others.

Related Topics

About Merging with the Address Book


To delete a comment
To delete a comment,

1	Right-click the comment or comment icon, then click Delete.

Tips

You can also click the comment code in the Reveal Codes window, then press Delete. Or you can drag the comment code out of the Reveal Codes window.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To convert text to a comment
To convert text to a comment,

1	Select the text to convert.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Create.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To hide comments
To hide comments,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Document [image] Comments.

Tips

To display comments again, repeat the step above.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To print a comment
To print a comment,

1	Click immediately after the comment.

2	Click Insert [image] Comment [image] Edit.

3	Click File [image] Print.

Tips

Any comments that have been converted to document text will print when the document is printed.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To edit a comment
To edit a comment,

1	Double-click the shaded comment box or the comment icon.

2	Make any editing changes, then click [image] to return to the main document text.

Tips

If you have multiple comments in your document, use Reveal Codes (Alt+F3) to locate the code for the comment you want to edit.

To include your initials, name, the date, or the time, click Initials, Name, [image], or Time on the Comment Property Bar.

Your initials and name are available only if you have specified using Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment.

Click [image] or [image] to quickly edit other comments in the document.

About Adding Comments in a Document


About Creating Internet Documents

Most documents published on the Internet are written in HyperText Markup Language (HTML). By publishing your Corel WordPerfect document to HTML, you are assured that anyone with an HTML browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Explorer can read your document. You can also publish to Corel Barista to preserve your document's original formatting while still allowing anyone with a Java-enabled browser to read it, just as they do other HTML documents.

The Corel WordPerfect Internet Publisher automatically converts WordPerfect formatting into HTML format, so you don't need to know HTML to create documents suitable for a local Intranet or for the Internet. You can start a new document or format an existing document as a web document. Corel WordPerfect codes that have no HTML equivalents are modified or deleted from the document.

Internet Publisher supports most HTML 2.0 and 3.2 tags. You can insert browser-specific HTML tags defined for Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Explorer using Custom HTML.

To create a web document

To format the current document as a web document

To change a web document to Corel WordPerfect format

Related Concepts


About the Internet Publisher

Use Internet Publisher to:

Create and edit documents specially formatted to convert to HTML so you can publish them to an Internet server or to a local Intranet server.

Launch Netscape Navigator or your registered browser software to browse existing Internet documents.

Internet Publisher supports HTML 2.0 and 3.2. It also supports some browser-specific tags such as the Netscape Navigator blinking text <BLINK> and columns <MULTICOL> tags. You can insert HTML tags defined for later versions of HTML or defined for a specific browser using Custom HTML.

Tips

To make a document available on the World Wide Web you need access to an Internet server. See your network administrator or Internet service provider for assistance.

To create a web document

To browse the World Wide Web

To publish a web document to HTML

Related Concepts


To change a watermark's shading
To change a watermark's shading,

1	Click on a page with the watermark.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Click Watermark A or B, then click Edit.

4	Click [image].

5	Specify a percentage in the Text shading or Image shading box.

Tips

The higher the percentage, the darker the watermark.

If you are using Page or Two Pages view, you can see the watermark. Click View [image]  Page or Two Pages.

About Watermarks


To stop a watermark from printing on subsequent pages
To stop a watermark from printing on subsequent pages,

1	Click the page where you want the watermark to stop.

2	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

3	Click the watermark you want to discontinue (A or B), then click Discontinue.

Tips

The watermark will not print from that page forward in your document.

About Watermarks


To link or embed selected information
To link or embed selected information,

1	Open the source application and file that contains the information you want.

2	Select the information you want to appear in the Corel WordPerfect document, then copy it to the Clipboard.

3	Switch to Corel WordPerfect and click where you want to insert the information.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste Special.

5	Click Paste Link to link the information to your document, then select the format you want to use.

6	Click Paste to embed the information, then select the format that names application you are copying from.

Tips

If Paste Link is dimmed, the source application does not support linking and embedding, or the application is not registered properly with Windows. In this case, you can only insert a copy of the information.

Check the Result group box to make sure the Paste format you selected will embed rather than copy the information. If the information will be embedded, the result group box will say the information can be "activated" by the source application.

Related Topics

About Inserting Information in a Specific Format


To exit Corel WordPerfect
To exit Corel WordPerfect,

1	Click File [image] Exit.

Tips

If you have not changed any open documents since the last time you saved them, the documents close. If you have changed any documents, you are prompted to save your work.

Click No to continue exiting without saving the documents.

Related Topics

About Close and Exit


To edit a hyperlink
To edit a hyperlink,

1	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink [image] Deactivate.

2	Click the link button or the text link you want to edit.

3	Click Edit.

4	Make any editing changes.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Deactivate turns off the links. You cannot select an active link using the mouse; doing so will perform the link.

If the insertion point is not positioned on a link when you click Edit, Corel WordPerfect searches backward and then forward for a link to edit.

About Using Hyperlinks in Corel WordPerfect or Web Documents


To move to a hyperlink
To move to a hyperlink,

1	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

2	Select an option on the Hypertext Property Bar.

Tips

Choose from the following options: Perform, Back, Previous, Next.

About Using Hyperlinks in Corel WordPerfect or Web Documents


To access information from the Application Bar
To access information from the Application Bar,

1	To enter the current date and time in your document, click [image] and [image].

2	Click other buttons, such as Insert/Typeover [image] , Caps [image] , and Shadow Cursor [image] , to turn these options on or off.

3	To select a block of text, double-click on Select.

4	Double-click on other buttons to display the corresponding dialog box.

Tips

If the Application Bar is not displayed, click View [image] Toolbar [image] Application Bar.

Use Application Bar settings to add or delete items from the Application Bar.

About the Application Bar


To move the toolbar
To move the toolbar,

1	Point to a blank area of the toolbar.

2	Drag the toolbar to a new location.

Tips

Toward the center of the window, the toolbar changes to a palette (smaller rectangle). At any edge of the window, the toolbar rectangle elongates to fit the window height or width.

About the Toolbar


Web / Browser
browser

A browser is a program such as Netscape Navigator that you use to navigate the World Wide Web. Browsers control how various document elements such as fonts, bullets, headings, and paragraphs, are displayed.


To change the number of items in the Undo/Redo history
To change the number of items in the Undo/Redo history,

1	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo History [image] Options.

2	Specify the amount in the Number of Undo/Redo items text box.

Related Topics

About Undo and Redo


To create a web document
To create a web document,

1	Open the Corel WordPerfect document you want to format for the web, or open a blank document window.

2	Click  [image] .

3	Add and format the text, graphics, hyperlinks, and so on.

4	Click  [image] .

5	Specify a path and type a filename.

Tips

You can also click File [image]  Internet Publisher [image]  New Web Document to start a new web document.

You can also click File [image]  Internet Publisher [image]  Publish to HTML to save the document in HTML.

Click File [image]  New [image]  Web Publishing to create a web page using a professionally-designed PerfectExpert Project.

About Creating Internet Documents


To create a title for a web document
To create a title for a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click File [image] Properties [image] Title.

2	Type a title in the Custom title text box, or click First heading to use the first heading in your web document as the title.

Tips

Click the Advanced tab to specify a <BASE> tag and type a URL. The base URL is the location of a document when it is published to HTML. If you move the document, browsers use the base URL to find document images, sound clips, and other resources to display with the document.

When you create a document title in Internet Publisher you can also insert HTML head tags. Type these document information tags in the Meta info text box. For example, you can specify tags such as <ISINDEX> to identify the document as one readers can perform keyword searches on or tags such as <META NAME="Index Type" CONTENT="Captain Eddy's Space Camp">.

To get information on an option in this dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

About HTML Document Properties


To create a heading in a web document
To create a heading in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click [image].

2	Select a heading level.

3	Type the heading text.

Tips

You can also click Format [image]  Font, then specify a heading level and appearance options.

About Creating Internet Documents


To create a bulleted or numbered list in a web document
To create a bulleted or numbered list in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

2	Select a list type, then click OK.

3	Type the list text.

Tips

To end the list, click Format [image] Font, then select a new heading or paragraph type.

You can also add numbers without using the Outline feature bar. Press Ctrl+Shift+F5 to insert an outline number.

About Web Document Lists, Bullets, and Numbers


To change text color in a web document
To change text color in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Properties [image] Text/Background Colors tab.

2	Select a color from the Regular text palette.

Tips

Click Use browser setting to use the body text, hypertext link, and background colors specified by the browser.

About HTML Document Properties


To create a hyperlink to a local web document
To create a hyperlink to a local web document,

1	Select the words or symbols to use as the link.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Specify the path and filename you want to link to.

4	Click Make text appear as button to make the link to appear as a button rather than as highlighted text.

Tips

Use QuickLinks to set up frequently used links. For example, you might specify that typing the word @Corel automatically sets up a link to the Corel home page at http://www.corel.com.

To create a link to an existing hyperlink destination in an HTML document, type the anchor name in the Bookmark text box exactly as it appears in the Source view of the document. Anchor names are case sensitive.

To create a link to a bookmark in a non-HTML document, click a name on the Bookmark drop-down list.

Related Topics

About Web Document Hypertext


To publish a web document to HTML
To publish a web document to HTML,

1	In the Web Editor, click File [image] Internet Publisher.

2	Click Publish to HTML.

3	Specify a path and type a filename.

Tips

You can also click [image] in the Web Editor, then specify a path and filename.

Related Topics

About Publishing to HTML


To format the current document as a web document
To format the current document as a web document,

1	Click [image].

Tips

You can also click File [image]  Internet Publisher [image]  Format as Web Document.

Formatting a document as a web document deletes Corel WordPerfect codes that have no HTML equivalents and displays the document in the Web Editor.

In the Web Editor the document is similar to the way it will look when published to HTML and viewed by a browser such as Netscape Navigator.

Publishing to HTML creates a copy of the web document in HTML format.

Related Topics

About Creating Internet Documents


To turn table borders on or off in a web document
To turn table borders on or off in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Table [image] Borders.

About Web Document Tables


Web / HTML tags
HTML tags

HTML tags identify document elements such as headings, paragraphs, lists, and images. Most elements require beginning and closing tags, such as <TITLE>Dorothy's Home Page</TITLE>. The slash denotes a closing tag. Browser settings specify exactly how the elements display in the browser window.

When using the Netscape Navigator you can display a document's HTML tags by clicking View [image] Source.


About Using Hyperlinks in Corel WordPerfect or Web Documents

Use Hyperlinks to add links to information within the current document and between documents. You can specify how the hyperlinks look in the document, and you can link to local WordPerfect documents, HTML, or Corel Barista documents stored on the Internet, local Intranet or network.

Hyperlinks allow you to dynamically cross-reference an online document. For example, if you want to cross-reference to another chapter, add a hyperlink so the reader can click to jump to that chapter automatically rather than scrolling to it.

You can specify that when you type text that begins with "www," "ftp," "http," or "mailto," the QuickLinks feature automatically converts it to an Internet link. You can even modify QuickLinks to convert the link to  more meaningful terms. For example, when you type "www.corel.com," QuickLinks can replace the visible text with "Corel" and create a link to the Corel home page at URL http://www.corel.com.

To create a hyperlink in a Corel WordPerfect document

To create a hyperlink to a local web document

To create a hyperlink that plays a macro

To edit a hyperlink

To move to a hyperlink

To activate all hyperlinks

To edit the hyperlink style

Related Concepts


To edit the hyperlink style
To edit the hyperlink style,

1	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink [image] Style.

2	Select new format settings.

Tips

By default, hyperlinks display as green underlined text just as they do in the Windows Help system.

Changing the hyperlink style changes how all hyperlink text appear in the current document. Changing the style does not change the appearance of hyperlink buttons.

About Using Hyperlinks in Corel WordPerfect or Web Documents


Perform

Jump to the bookmark or document you are linked to, or play the macro you are linked to.


Back

Move back to the link from the bookmark or document.


Previous

Move to the previous hyperlink in the current document.


Next

Move to the next hyperlink in the current document.


To browse the World Wide Web
To browse the World Wide Web,

1	File [image]  Internet Publisher [image]  Browse the Web.

Tips

In Internet Publisher, click [image].

Corel WordPerfect is designed to work with Netscape Navigator or your registered browser. You must have a modem and account with an Internet service provider to access the Internet, or a network connection with access to the Internet.

If you are editing a WordPerfect document that contains a hyperlink to an Internet document, click the link to launch your browser and view the document.

You can also click File [image]  Open, then specify a URL. You can view the web page in the Open dialog box or click Open to edit the page using the Internet Publisher.

Related Topics

About Web Browsers


Commands equation palette

Displays formatting commands that are represented by keywords. All commands have some formatting function, such as drawing a line or arranging variables.


To insert a hanging indent
To insert a hanging indent,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Hanging Indent.

2	Type the text you want to indent.

3	Press Enter to end the indentation.

About Indent


To indent text from both margins
To indent text from both margins,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Double Indent.

2	Type the text you want to indent.

3	Press Enter to stop indenting text.

Tips

Double Indent moves an entire paragraph in one tab stop from the left margin and an equal distance from the right margin.

To double-indent an existing paragraph, triple-click to select the paragraph, then click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Double Indent.

About Indent


Large equation palette

Displays large and small mathematical, scientific, bracket, and brace symbols.


Symbols equation palette

Displays commonly used symbols.


Greek equation palette

Displays uppercase and lowercase Greek characters and some variants.


Arrows equation palette

Displays arrow styles and hollow and solid figures such as triangles, squares, and circles.


Sets equation palette

Displays set symbols, relational operators, and some Fraktur and hollow letters. Some symbols have a keyword that can be typed in the window.


Other equation palette

Displays diacritical marks and orientations of ellipses.


Function equation palette

Displays mathematical functions such as cos, sin, and log. All functions can be typed from the keyboard.


To mark where you want an index and define how it looks
To mark where you want an index and define how it looks,

1	Click where you want the index to appear.

2	Type a title for the index, then press Enter one or more times to add extra spacing.

3	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index [image] Define.

4	Select a page number position style from the Position pop-up list.

5	To use a different page numbering format for the index than you use for the document, click Page Numbering [image] Custom page number format, then add codes, text, spaces, or punctuation.

6	Select any other options.

Tips

After you have marked text with headings and subheadings, and defined the index, click Generate on the Index toolbar to create the index.

You can add the Index Define button to your toolbar.

About Indexes


To generate an index
To generate an index,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index [image] Generate.

Tips

You must mark text with index headings and subheadings, and define the index before generating.

About Indexes


About Language Conversion Settings

Use Language to select the default language for text and word processing files that you convert from other formats. File conversion uses the formatting conventions of the language you specify, and for some languages it uses a different character map.

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

To specify document conversion settings

To specify code page settings

Related Concepts


To change the page numbering format for an index
To change the page numbering format for an index,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index.

2	Click Define, then click Page Numbering.

3	Click Custom page number format.

4	Select an option from the Insert drop-down list to add it to the format.

5	Type any text, spaces, or punctuation you want to include with the numbers. For example, to separate the chapter and page numbers with a colon, the text box contents should be: [Chpt#]:[Page#].

About Indexes


To create a concordance file for an index
To create a concordance file for an index,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Type a word or phrase to include in the concordance file, then press Enter.

3	Repeat step 2 for each word and phrase in the concordance.

4	Click File [image] Save As, then type a filename.

5	Open the document you want to create a concordance for.

6	Click where you want the concordance to appear, type a title for the concordance (or index), then press Enter one or more times to add blank lines.

7	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index [image] Define.

8	Specify the concordance filename, then click OK.

9	Click Generate.

Tips

If you have marked index headings and subheadings, they will be included in your concordance.

Concordance entries in the generated index use the capitalization in the concordance file, not the capitalization in the document being indexed. For example, if the concordance file contains "Word" and the document contains both "word" and "Word", both occurrences will appear in the index or concordance under the heading "Word".

About Concordance Files for Indexes


To change the current index style
To change the current index style,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index [image] Define.

2	Click Change.

3	Select Heading or Subheading in the Level list box.

4	Select a style.

Tips

To create a new index style, click Create, type a name for the style, then use the Styles Editor.

To edit an existing style, click Edit, then use the Styles Editor.

Related Topics

About the Styles Editor


To play a macro
To play a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Specify the path and filename of the macro.

3	Click Play.

Tips

You can also click Tools [image] Macro, then click a macro name to play it. The last four macros you played are listed on this menu.

Related Topics

About Macros


To edit a macro
To edit a macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Select the macro and click Edit.

3	Add, edit, or delete macro commands.

4	To save your changes, click Save & Compile on the Macro toolbar.

5	To close the macro, click Options [image] Close Macro on the Macro toolbar.

Tips

For easy access to macro commands, click Commands on the Macro toolbar. Select a command, then click Insert.

When you click Save & Compile, the macro compiler evaluates the macro to make sure it is playable. If there are syntax errors, a message displays with the information. You need to correct the error, then click Save & Compile again.

For details about individual macro commands, click Help Topics [image] Contents [image] double-click Macros [image] click Macro Programming.

About Macros


To save styles in a separate file
To save styles in a separate file,

1	Click Format [image] Styles [image] Options [image] Save As.

2	Specify a filename for the styles file.

3	Select the type of styles to save: User, System, or Both.

Tips

User styles are styles you have created. System styles are styles provided with Corel WordPerfect, such as line and box styles.

The file is saved to the default template folder. If none is specified, Corel WordPerfect saves the styles where your Windows files are stored.

Related Topics

About Saving and Retrieving Styles


To insert codes in a template macro
To insert codes in a template macro,

1	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Template Macro Toolbar.

2	Click Codes.

3	Click Search, Merge, Date, or Other to list macro codes.

4	Select a code, then click Insert.

About Codes (Macros and Find)


To play a template macro
To play a template macro,

1	Open the template the macro is attached to.

2	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Play.

3	Click Location [image] Current Template or Default Template [image] OK.

4	Select the macro.

5	Click Play.

About Template Macros


To edit a template macro
To edit a template macro,

1	Open the template the macro is attached to.

2	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Edit.

3	Click Location [image] Current Template or Default Template [image] OK.

4	Select the macro.

5	Click Edit.

6	Add, edit or delete macro commands.

7	To save your changes, click Save & Compile on the Macro toolbar.

8	To close the macro, click Options [image] Close Macro on the Macro toolbar.

Tips

For easy access to macro commands, click Commands on the Macro toolbar. Select a command, then click Insert.

About Template Macros


To adjust column widths
To adjust column widths,

1	Click Format [image] Columns.

2	Click Column 1, then type the width.

3	Click Space, then specify the amount of space between column 1 and column 2.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until to specify the width and spacing for additional columns.

5	To keep the width of the column or space regardless of width or margin changes in other columns, click Fixed.

Tips

Drag the column margin guidelines to increase or decrease the width of columns.

Drag the column gutter (space between columns) to change the position of the spacing between columns.

You can also use the triangle markers on the Ruler to change the column width and spacing.

About Columns


To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry
To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry,

1	Create or open a data file.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Quick Entry.

3	To add new records, click New Record and type the data for each field. Press Enter to move to the next field or to create another record.

4	To view records in order, click First, Previous, Next, or Last.

5	To find a particular record, click Find and specify the text to match. Click Find Next or Find Prev to move to the next record containing that text.

6	To change field names, click Field Names. Type a name, then click Add, Add Before, or Replace to position the new field name.

7	To edit fields containing bold, italics, or other such formatting, click Allow editing of dimmed fields [image] OK, then edit the fields.

Tips

To get information about an option in the dialog box, right-click the option.

Related Topics

About Editing a Merge File


To display the Macro toolbar
To display the Macro toolbar,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro Toolbar.

Related Topics

About the Macro Toolbar


To turn columns off
To turn columns off,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to turn columns off.

2	Click Format [image] Columns [image] Discontinue.

About Columns


To delete columns
To delete columns,

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Click on the column definition code (for example, [Col Def:Newspaper,Total:2]).

3	Press Delete.

Tips

You can also delete columns by dragging the column definition code out of the Reveal Codes window.

About Columns


To add a table in a column
To add a table in a column,

1	In a column, place the insertion point where you want to insert the table.

2	Click Insert [image] Table.

3	Specify the number of table columns and rows, then click OK.

Tips

If you want the table to span several columns on the page, place the table in a Graphics Table Box.

Newspaper and Parallel columns are easier to put tables in than Balanced Newspaper columns.

About Columns


To delete a QuickCorrect entry
To delete a QuickCorrect entry,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Select a word in the list box, then click Delete Entry.

Tips

To turn off QuickCorrect, deselect Replace words as you type.

About Correcting Common Typing Mistakes with QuickCorrect


About Correcting Common Typing Mistakes with QuickCorrect

The list of QuickCorrect words included with Corel WordPerfect contains commonly misspelled words linked to the correct spelling. For example, QuickCorrect automatically replaces "adn" with "and". You can add and delete words from the list.

When QuickCorrect determines that a misspelled word has only one possible correction, it will correct the error automatically if you select Correct other mis-typed words when possible.

To turn on or off automatic correction

To turn QuickCorrect options on or off

Related Concepts


To merge labels
To merge labels,

1	In a new document window, click Tools [image] Merge [image] Create Document.

2	Specify a data source, or select No association, then click OK.

3	Click Format [image] Labels.

4	Click the type of labels you want to display: Laser printed, Tractor-fed, or Both.

5	In the Labels list, click a label definition, then click Select.

6	Click in the first label where you want to insert a field.

7	Click Insert Field on the Merge toolbar, specify the field you want, then click Insert.

8	Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each field.

9	When you have finished inserting fields, click Close.

10	Select other options from the Merge toolbar, then save or merge the file.

Tips

Before you insert fields you can make or change the data source association. Click Insert Field on the toolbar, then click Data Source.

You can also create labels using the Address Book. Open a new document, specify the label paper size, then click Tools [image] Address Book. Select the addresses, then click Insert.

Related Topics

About Merging Labels


To create an endnote
To create an endnote,

1	Click in the text where you want to insert the reference number for a new endnote.

2	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Endnote [image] Create.

3	Type the text of the endnote.

4	Click outside of the endnote or click [image] to return to the main text of your document.

Tips

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the endnote.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by clicking the Note Number button.

The superscript endnote number appears in the text of your document. Endnotes appear at the end of the document or at the place you specify.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To edit an endnote
To edit an endnote,

1	Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Endnote Number.

2	Type the number of the endnote, then click Edit.

3	Edit the text of the endnote.

4	Click [image] to return to the main text in your document.

Tips

If you are using Page view, you can also click on the text of the endnote to edit it.

To display the Endnote Property Bar, click inside the endnote.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by clicking [image].

About Footnotes and Endnotes


To change side margins from the Ruler
To change side margins from the Ruler,

1	Click where you want to change the margins, or select several lines of text to change the margins for part of the document.

2	Click View [image] Ruler.

3	Drag a margin marker to a new position.

Tips

While you are dragging a margin marker, you can return it to its original position. Drag the mouse pointer to the top of the document window, then release it.

To set margins using exact measurements, right-click the Ruler, then click Margins.

About Margins


To change margins using margin guidelines
To change margins using margin guidelines,

1	Click where you want to change side margins.

2	Drag the dotted margin guidelines in the document window to increase or decrease top, bottom, or side margins.

Tips

To change margins for the entire document, go to page 1 and drag the guidelines in the white space outside the margins.

To change margins for a portion of text, select the text first.

If the margin guidelines do not display, click View [image] Guidelines [image] Margins.

About Margins


To add a word to the QuickCorrect list
To add a word to the QuickCorrect list,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Type the misspelled word in the Replace text box.

3	Type the correctly spelled word in the With text box, then click Add Entry.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

You can also add a QuickCorrect entry for a pair of words, such as "byt he" being replaced by "by the."

About QuickCorrect


To turn QuickCorrect options on or off
To turn QuickCorrect options on or off,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	To turn off QuickCorrect spelling and abbreviations, deselect Replace words as you type.

3	To turn off other QuickCorrect options, click Format-As-You-Go (or click one of the other tabs), then deselect any option.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About QuickCorrect


To associate a form document with a data file
To associate a form document with a data file,

1	Open the data file.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Go to Form.

3	To select an existing form document, click Select, then specify the file.

4	To create a form document, click Create, then finish creating the form document.

About Associating Merge Files


About QuickCorrect Abbreviations

You can create QuickCorrect abbreviations to speed up text entry. QuickCorrect can use abbreviations as small as a single letter to replace single words, multiple words, or phrases that include formatting such as tabs, indents, and hard returns. For example, you can define the abbreviation "govt" so that QuickCorrect inserts "government" as you type.

QuickCorrect abbreviations are case-sensitive if you use all capital letters. For example, if you add "wm" for "William," then type "WM", QuickCorrect inserts "WILLIAM." QuickCorrect also recognizes possessive forms of abbreviated words. If you add "wm" as a QuickCorrect abbreviation for "William," then type "wm's", QuickCorrect replaces it with "William's" in the document.

You can also use QuickWords to expand abbreviations while you type.

To create a QuickWord for a graphic or logo

To add a word to the QuickCorrect list

To create a QuickWord for a word or phrase

To delete a QuickCorrect entry

Related Concepts


To create numbered paragraphs
To create numbered paragraphs,

1	Type a number followed by a period, hyphen, or close parenthesis, then press Tab. For Roman numerals, use I for uppercase or i for lowercase.

2	Type the paragraphs, pressing Enter after each one.

3	To end paragraph numbering, press Enter [image] Backspace.

Tips

You can also click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, then click the numbering type you want.

To number existing paragraphs, select the paragraphs, click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, then click the numbering type you want.

Press F7 to insert an indent after the paragraph number, press Ctrl+Tab to insert a tab, or press Ctrl+Shift+Tab to insert a back tab.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


To name table components using text in an existing cell
To name table components using text in an existing cell,

1	Click in the cell containing the text you want to use to name the table component. Or, if you want to name several adjacent columns, rows, or cells simultaneously, select the cells containing the text you want to use.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Names.

3	Click Create.

4	Click Use Text in Current Cell to Name.

5	Click Column, Row, Next cell to right, or Next cell down.

Tips

An example of selecting cells is if you select cells A1 and B1. When you click Column under Use Text from Current Cell to Name, column A will be named with the text in cell A1, and column B will be named with the text in cell B1.

You can also open the Table Names in Current Document dialog box by clicking Names on the Table Formula toolbar.

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables


About Superscript and Subscript

Superscript text uses a small font size and is placed above the baseline. Using QuickCorrect, ordinal numbers such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc. are automatically superscripted:

Subscript text uses a small font size and is placed below the baseline.

To create subscript or superscript text

Related Concepts


To go to a named table, table component, or floating cell
To go to a named table, table component, or floating cell,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Names.

3	Click the name of the table, floating cell, or table component you want to go to.

4	Click Go To.

Tips

You can also open the Table Names in Current Document dialog box by clicking Names on the Table Formula toolbar.

You can also click Edit [image] Go To, then click the table and named structure to go to.

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables


To edit a merge data text file manually
To edit a merge data text file manually,

1	Open the data text file and change the existing text without altering any of the merge codes (such as ENDFIELD).

2	To add a field, type the text you want, then click End Field.

3	To mark the end of a record, click End Record.

4	To update field names that appear in the Quick Data Entry dialog box, save the file or press Ctrl+Home.

Tips

To remove extra fields or records, delete the text, the ENDFIELD or ENDRECORD code, and the hard page at the end of the record.

You can insert or edit other merge codes as you edit the data file.

Related Topics

About Editing a Merge File


To calculate all tables in a document
To calculate all tables in a document,

1	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Calculate [image] Calc Document.

Tips

You can also click Calculate on the Table Formula toolbar.

Click Calculate tables in document to automatically calculate tables and floating cells in the entire document.

About Calculating Tables


To calculate table formulas automatically
To calculate table formulas automatically,

1	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Calculate.

2	Click Calculate table or Calculate tables in document.

Tips

Calculate table affects the table or floating cell the insertion point is in.

Calculate tables in document affects all tables and floating cells in your document.

Automatic calculation occurs each time you move the insertion point out of a cell or insert a formula using the Table Formula toolbar.

About Calculating Tables


To update charts associated with tables
To update charts associated with tables,

1	Click in a table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Calculate [image] Calculate table or Calculate tables in document.

3	Select Update associated charts.

Tips

Charts are updated every time tables are automatically calculated.

To manually update charts associated with tables, automatic calculation must be Off. Right-click the chart and click Update Chart from Table.

About Creating Charts


To edit a header or footer
To edit a header or footer,

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Edit.

2	Edit the header or footer text as you would in a document, using any Corel WordPerfect editing features.

Tips

You can also click anywhere inside the header or footer to edit the text.

To move to other headers or footers in the document, click [image] or [image] on the Property Bar.

About Headers and Footers


To stop a header or footer from printing on the subsequent pages
To stop a header or footer from printing on the subsequent pages,

1	Click on the page where you want to stop the header or footer.

2	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Discontinue.

Tips

Use Delay Codes or Suppress to keep headers or footers from appearing on a title page, a copyright page, or any other single page in your document.

Related Topics

About Headers and Footers


To delete a header or footer
To delete a header or footer,

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Drag the [Header A] or [Header B] code or the [Footer A] or [Footer B] code out of the Reveal Codes window.

Tips

You can also click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Edit and delete all the contents of the Header or Footer. This also removes the code from Reveal Codes.

If you delete a header or footer by mistake, you can restore it by clicking Edit [image] Undo.

About Headers and Footers


Troubleshooting Headers or Footers

What do you want help with?

My page numbers print on top of my headers and footers.

Why can't I see my headers or footers?

When I adjust page margins, shouldn't headers and footers adjust too?

Why did the top margin move after I added a header?

I don't want the header or footer to appear on the first page.

Why didn't the header or footer print?

When I edit a header, the shadow cursor doesn't show in the document.

My header and footer font isn't the same as the document's.

The header or footer doesn't appear on the first page.

Why are my headers printing on top of each other?

Related Concepts


To add a graphics line to a header or footer
To add a graphics line to a header or footer,

1	Click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Create or Edit.

2	Click [image].

Tips

You can also add a graphics line by clicking Insert [image] Shape [image] Horizontal Line or Vertical Line.

Related Topics

About Headers and Footers


To create a non-standard envelope definition
To create a non-standard envelope definition,

1	Click Format [image] Envelope [image] Create New Definition.

2	Type a name in the Name text box.

3	Select a paper size from the Size drop-down list, or specify the size you want.

4	Specify settings for paper source, printing adjustments, font orientation, and paper feed.

About Creating Envelopes


To change the line style, line color, or fill of a table cell
To change the line style, line color, or fill of a table cell,

1	Click in a cell that contains lines or fill you want to change.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill.

3	Click a line style on the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, or Outside palettes.

4	To turn off a line, click X on the appropriate line palette.

5	Click a color on the cell lines Color palette.

6	Select a fill style on the Cell fill palette.

7	Click a color on the Foreground or Background palettes.

Tips

You can also right-click a cell, then click Borders/Fill.

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To change the line style, line color, or fill of all table cells
To change the line style, line color, or fill of all table cells,

1	Click in the table you want to change.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Lines/Fill [image] Table.

3	Click a line style on the Line palette.

4	Click a color on the Color palette in the Default cell lines group box.

5	Click a fill style on the Pattern palette in the Fill group box.

6	Click a color on the Foreground and Background palettes.

Tips

You can also right-click a table, then click Borders/Fill.

Click Styles to create your own line style.

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To add a border to a table
To add a border to a table,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill [image] Table.

3	Select a border style on the Border palette.

4	Select a color on the Color palette in the Table border group box.

Tips

Click Custom to create your own border style without changing an existing border style.

Related Topics

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To select an alternating fill for a table
To select an alternating fill for a table,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill [image] Table.

3	Click Rows, Columns, or Both on the Type pop-up list in the Alternating fill group box.

4	Select a fill style on the Pattern palettes in both the Fill and Alternating fill group boxes.

5	Select a color on the Foreground and Background palettes in both the Fill and Alternating Fill group boxes.

6	Specify the number of columns or rows for each fill style in the Span count text boxes in both the Fill and Alternating fill group boxes.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click Borders/Fill.

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To open the Web Editor
To open the Web Editor,

1	Click File [image] Internet Publisher.

2	Click New Web Document.

3	Double-click a web template name.

Tips

The Web Editor opens when you retrieve an existing HTML document or a Corel WordPerfect document formatted for the web.

You can also click File [image]  New [image]  Web Publishing, then double-click a web template to start a new document.

Click File [image]  Open, then specify a URL to retrieve an HTML document that exists on an Internet site.

About Creating Internet Documents


To change the colors of hyperlinks viewed by a browser
To change the colors of hyperlinks viewed by a browser,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Text/Background Colors.

2	Select the colors you want from the Hypertext color palettes.

Tips

Corel WordPerfect hyperlinks change to blue when you format a document as a web document.

Click Use browser setting to use the body text, hypertext link, and background colors specified in your browser when you publish the web document.

Not all browsers support color and not all browsers that do support color support Active and Visited link colors.

To get information about the options in this tab, click [image], then click the option.

About HTML Document Properties


To specify the background color of a web document
To specify the background color of a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Text/Background Colors tab.

2	Select a color from the Background Color palette.

Tips

You can also specify a wallpaper image as the web document background.

Click Use browser setting to use the body text, hypertext link, and background colors specified in your browser when you publish the web document.

About HTML Document Properties


To update QuickFormat headings automatically
To update QuickFormat headings automatically,

1	Click a heading that has the QuickFormat style you want to update.

2	Change the format of the heading.

Tips

The headings that you format with QuickFormat are linked together. When you change a heading that has one QuickFormat style all the other headings with the same style are updated.

About Using QuickFormat to Copy Text Format


To stop QuickFormat headings from automatically updating
To stop QuickFormat headings from automatically updating,

1	Click a heading that has the QuickFormat style you want to discontinue.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Discontinue.

3	Click All Associated Headings to discontinue automatic updates on all headings with that QuickFormat style.

Tips

You can also click Current Heading to discontinue automatic updating for the heading at the insertion point.

About Using QuickFormat to Copy Text Format


To copy the format of a heading
To copy the format of a heading,

1	Click in the heading or select the heading.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Headings.

3	Click the QuickFormat paint roller pointer in the headings that you want to format.

4	To turn off QuickFormat, right-click the document, then click QuickFormat.

Tips

The heading you copy must end with a hard return.

You can also click [image] to turn QuickFormat on or off.

About Using QuickFormat to Copy Text Format


To save your place in each document you save
To save your place in each document you save,

1	Click Tools [image] Bookmark.

2	Click Set QuickMark on file save.

3	To automatically return to that location when you open the file again, click Go to QuickMark on file open.

Tips

This option places a QuickMark (a generic bookmark) at the insertion point in your document every time you save it. You can then quickly return to that location when you reopen the document.

To get information on an option in the dialog box, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

Related Topics

About Marking a Place in a Document Using Bookmarks


To activate all hyperlinks
To activate all hyperlinks,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	To activate all hyperlinks in the documents you create, select Activate hyperlinks on open.

Related Topics

About Environment Settings


To change the language Corel WordPerfect runs in
To change the language Corel WordPerfect runs in,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Interface, then select a language from the On-screen text language list.

Tip

Additional languages are available only if you have purchased and installed another language version of Corel WordPerfect.

About Environment Settings


To insert addresses from the Address Book
To insert addresses from the Address Book,

1	Click where you want to insert one or more addresses.

2	Click Tools [image] Address Book.

3	Click the tab of the address book you want.

4	To select one entry, click the entry.

5	To select multiple entries, press Ctrl while clicking entries.

6	Click Insert.

Tips

Click [image] for more information about the Address Book.

Related Topics

About Merging with the Address Book


To specify wallpaper for a web document
To specify wallpaper for a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Text/Background Colors tab.

2	Click the background wallpaper browse button to select a graphics file (.BMP, .GIF, .JPG).

Tips

You cannot use a .wpg file as web document wallpaper.

A Watermark in a Corel WordPerfect document is similar to web document wallpaper in that it appears behind the actual document content.

About HTML Document Properties


To change a table to a data text file for a merge
To change a table to a data text file for a merge,

1	Select the entire table, then press Delete or Backspace.

2	If you want the first row to be converted to a record, click Convert contents to merge data file.

3	If you want the first row to be converted to field names, select Convert contents to merge data file (use text in first row as field names).

Related Topics

About Data Files for Merges


To create a new document with a project or template
To create a new document with a project or template,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select a category from the drop-down list, select a project or template, then click Create.

3	For some templates, you are prompted to enter information.

4	Edit and save the document.

Tips

Store the names and addresses of people you frequently write to in the Address Book, then use the Address Book to insert that information in a template.

When you select an Address Book entry for personal information, that information becomes the default for all templates until you select a new personal information entry. To change entries, click File [image] New [image] Options [image] Personal Information.

In a template that prompts you for information, you can change the information by editing the text. You can also add a toolbar button that lets you fill in the information again. When you do this, the original information is deleted.

About Templates and Projects


To change tab settings using the Ruler or tab bar
To change tab settings using the Ruler or tab bar,

1	Click View [image] Ruler.

2	To delete a tab setting, drag the tab marker (triangle) off the bar.

3	To move a setting, drag the marker.

4	To add a setting, click the bar where you want the setting.

Tips

When you change a tab setting, [image] appears in the far left margin. Click [image] to display a tab bar right above the insertion point. Using the tab bar you can see exactly where the settings are and change them easily. To not display [image], click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] deselect Tab bar icons.

If you drag a tab over another tab, the original tab is deleted.

To select multiple tabs on a bar, hold down Shift while you drag across them. You can then delete them or drag them to a new position. To copy them to another position, hold down Ctrl+Shift while you drag the selection.

To clear multiple tab settings on a bar, right-click a tab marker, then click Clear All Tabs.

To change the type of an existing tab setting, right-click the tab marker, click a type, then click the tab you want to change. For example, you can add dot leaders to a tab setting this way.

About Tabs


To insert a file into a template
To insert a file into a template,

1	On the Template toolbar, click [image].

2	Select a file, then click Insert.

Tips

The file includes all the associated template objects.

Related Topics

About Templates and Projects


To edit a WordPerfect template
To edit a WordPerfect template,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select a category from the drop-down list, then select a template.

3	Click Options [image] Edit WP Template.

4	Make any changes to the template.

5	To save the changes, click File [image] Save or Save As.

6	Type a description (this displays in the list of projects and templates).

7	Type the name for the template (or type a different name to save a second template).

8	Select a template group (project category), from which you can select the template.

9	Click OK. If you are prompted, click Yes to overwrite the original.

10	Click [image] on the Template toolbar to close the template.

About Templates and Projects


Troubleshooting Envelopes

What do you want help with?

I get prompted to feed envelopes, but I have envelopes in the tray.

My printer wrinkles the envelope.

The address isn't printing in the right place in the upper corner.

I need a different size of envelope.

Related Concepts


About HTML Tags

Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags contain information that browsers interpret to display documents. Internet Publisher automatically converts Corel WordPerfect formatting to HTML tags so you do not need to know HTML to publish documents to the World Wide Web.

HTML tags are enclosed in angle brackets (<...>). Most tags are paired. The forward slash marks a closing tag. For example, <h1> and </h1> tags surround the text of a first level heading. In the Netscape Navigator you can see the tags of an HTML document by clicking View [image] Source.

Internet Publisher supports HTML 2.0 and 3.2, and some Netscape extensions such as blinking text, inserted text, columns, and forms. You can insert tags defined for specific browsers, tags defined for later versions of HTML, or script tags using Custom HTML.

Corel WordPerfect includes the HTML 2.0 and 3.2 DTDs on the Suite CD. Using these DTDs you can also create HTML documents using the SGML Editor so you can have precise control over document markup.

To browse the World Wide Web

To add custom HTML tags to a web document

To specify a base URL for a web document

Related Concepts


To remove objects from a template you are editing
To remove objects from a template you are editing,

1	On the Template toolbar, click Copy/Remove Object.

2	Select an object type (such as toolbar, macro, or style).

3	Select the object or objects you want to remove.

4	Click Remove or Remove All.

Tips

You cannot remove objects associated with the main document window.

About Template Objects


To fax a document
To fax a document,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	If the current printer is not a fax driver, click Print, then select the fax driver from the Current printer drop-down list.

3	Click Print.

About Faxing Documents


To check the status of a fax job currently in progress
To check the status of a fax job currently in progress,

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click Status to view the Print History and Status dialog box.

Tips

Fax and print jobs appear in the order they were sent, with the current job at the top of the list.

About Faxing Documents


To cancel or pause a fax
To cancel or pause a fax,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Status [image] Document menu [image] Pause Printing or Cancel Printing.

2	Confirm that the document currently faxing is the one you want to pause or cancel.

3	Click the Document menu, then click Pause Printing or Cancel Printing.

Tips

If another document is currently printing, click the document you want to pause or cancel, then complete step 3.

About Faxing Documents


To restart a fax after it has been paused
To restart a fax after it has been paused,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Status.

2	Click the Document menu, then click Pause Printing to deselect it.

Tips

This restarts the fax job where it left off.

About Faxing Documents


Why can't I fax from Corel WordPerfect?

You must have a fax modem, a Windows fax program (such as Microsoft Fax for Windows) and a fax driver installed to send a fax from within Corel WordPerfect. Consult the documentation included with your fax program or with Windows for instructions on how to install and set up the fax program.

If you installed a fax driver, but you still receive an error message, one of the files needed to fax might be missing or damaged. Reinstall the fax driver.

To use the fax driver with Corel WordPerfect, click File [image] Print, then select the fax driver.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Fax


To select text
To select text,

1	Click where you want to start selecting text.

2	Press the left mouse button, drag across the text, then release the mouse button.

Tips

To cancel a selection, click anywhere outside the selection.

You don't need to select a word to bold, italicize, or underline it, or to mark it for a table of contents. Click anywhere in the word, then make the change.

Text is selected word by word. To select character by character, press Alt before you drag. You can also click Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment [image] Select whole words instead of characters (to deselect that option).

You can also click Edit [image] Select, then click an option.

You can also right-click in the margin to the left of the text, then click the item.

About Selecting Text


To delete a label definition from a labels file
To delete a label definition from a labels file,

1	Click Format [image] Labels.

2	Select the type of labels to display in the Labels list (Laser, Tractor-Fed, or Both).

3	Select the label definition you want to delete, then click Delete.

Tips

If you delete a label definition from a labels file, you cannot recover it. If you delete a definition from the default labels file, you need to reinstall Corel WordPerfect to use the definition again.

About Labels Files


To turn off labels
To turn off labels,

1	Click Format [image] Labels [image] Off.

Tips

When you turn off labels before filling an entire page, blank labels are added to complete the page. For example, if you type twenty-one labels on a thirty-label page, nine blank labels are added.

About Labels


Troubleshooting Labels

What do you want help with?

I can't print tractor-fed labels in the right position.

When creating a new label format, I get a message "margins overlap."

Why doesn't the text print on the edge of some labels?

Related Concepts


To mail selected text from your current document
To mail selected text from your current document,

1	Select the text.

2	Click File [image] Send to [image] Mail.

3	Set mail options according to your mail system.

4	Send the mail. You may need to switch back to Corel WordPerfect to return to your document window.

About Sending Mail


Troubleshooting Mail

What do you want help with?

What do I need to send documents by e-mail?

Why can't I send mail from Corel WordPerfect?

Related Concepts


To select a tabular column
To select a tabular column,

1	Select the text from the first character in the first tabular column to the last character in the last column.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Tabular Column.

Tips

You can use Cut, Copy, and Paste to move or copy the column.

About Selecting Text


To select a rectangular block of text
To select a rectangular block of text,

1	Drag from the upper left corner to the lower left corner of the block.

2	Click Edit [image] Select [image] Rectangle.

Tips

The on-screen block does not become a rectangle until you perform step 2.

If you want the on-screen block to always stay a rectangle, click in the upper left corner of the block, press Shift, then use the right mouse button to drag across text.

You can use Edit [image] Cut, Copy, and Paste to move or copy the block.

About Selecting Text


tabular column

A vertical section of text that is lined up using Tab or Indent. Text aligns at the tab stop for each column.


To switch between documents
To switch between documents,

1	Click the document name on the Application Bar.

Tips

You can also click the Window menu, then click a filename.

If you cascade or tile document windows, click on any window or title bar you can see on screen to make it active.

Related Topics

About Document and Application Windows


To select a word, sentence, or paragraph by clicking the mouse
To select a word, sentence, or paragraph by clicking the mouse,

1	To select a word, double-click the word.

2	To select a sentence, click three times anywhere in the sentence, or click once in the left margin.

3	To select a paragraph, click four times anywhere in the paragraph, or double-click in the left margin.

Tips

You can also right-click in the margin to the left of the text, then click a Select option.

About Selecting Text


About How Corel WordPerfect Features Convert to HTML

In the Web Editor, only features that have HTML equivalents are available. Corel WordPerfect features that have no HTML equivalent are disabled in the interface. When you format an existing WordPerfect document for publishing to the Web, WordPerfect codes that have no HTML equivalents are deleted from the document or modified to an HTML equivalent.

The following features are not supported in HTML documents.

Drop caps

Fill (shading)

Headers and footers

Margins (left or right)

Page numbering

Tabs and indents

Vertical lines

Watermarks

The following features are converted to another code for use in HTML.

Footnotes are converted to endnotes

The following features are modified to convert to HTML.

Bullet and Numbered Lists

Fonts

Hyperlinks

Images and sound clips

Paragraph styles

Table of Contents

To format the current document as a web document

Related Concepts


To start renumbering anywhere in a numbered list or outline
To start renumbering anywhere in a numbered list or outline,

1	Click where you want to start renumbering.

2	Click [image], then specify the new number.

Tips

Type Arabic numerals separated by commas, spaces, or periods. For example, if you want to start at V.B.3, type 5.2.3.

If you want this number and subsequent numbers to update when you edit outline numbers earlier in the document, type question marks to hold all places except for the last one. For example, type ?.?.3.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


About Outlines, Bullets, and Numbered Lists

Use Outline/Bullets & Numbering to organize text as you draft a document using numbers, bullets, or headings.

For example, you can use a traditional outline to sort your ideas with numbers as you write, then replace the outline numbers with headings. You can also create an outline from existing text.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists

About Bulleted Lists

About Web Document Lists, Bullets, and Numbers

To replace one outline or list style with another

Related Concepts


When I added a printer command, my document printed wrong.

Corel WordPerfect does not check that printer commands are valid. You will know a command in the document or printer command file is invalid or incorrect only if the document fails to print correctly.

If the text within a printer command is printed, this means that the printer does not recognize it as a printer command. Check your printer manual to be sure you have entered the command correctly.

Troubleshooting Printing


To delete a table style
To delete a table style,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Click the table style you want to delete in the Available styles scroll box.

4	Click Options [image] Delete [image] Yes.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click SpeedFormat.

You cannot delete system table styles.

About Saving a Table Style as a Separate File


To rename a table style
To rename a table style,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Click the table style you want to rename in the Available styles scroll box.

4	Click Options [image] Rename.

5	Type a new name.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click SpeedFormat.

You cannot rename system table styles.

About Saving a Table Style as a Separate File


To save a table style as a separate file
To save a table style as a separate file,

1	Click in a table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] SpeedFormat [image] Options [image] Save As.

3	Specify a path and filename.

Tips

Saving table styles as files is useful if you plan to use the table styles with a different template or on a different computer.

You can also right-click the table, then click SpeedFormat.

About Saving a Table Style as a Separate File


To retrieve table styles you have saved
To retrieve table styles you have saved,

1	Click in a table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] SpeedFormat [image] Options [image] Retrieve.

3	Specify a path and filename.

Tips

You can retrieve any user-defined table style that has been saved as a file.

You can also right-click the table, then click SpeedFormat.

Related Topics

About Saving a Table Style as a Separate File


To specify a base URL for a web document
To specify a base URL for a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Advanced tab.

3	Type the URL in the Base URL text box.

Tips

If you copy or move a web document that references images, sound clips, or other documents, the base URL directs browsers to the graphics folder specified in the original location.

About HTML Document Properties


To add or delete buttons on the Property Bar
To add or delete buttons on the Property Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Property Bar.

2	To change how buttons display on the Property Bar, select a font face and size and an appearance option.

3	Click Edit.

4	To add a button for a Corel WordPerfect feature, click Feature categories, click a category and feature, then click Add Button.

5	To add a button for Keystrokes, click Keystrokes, type the keystrokes the button will play, then click Add Script.

6	To add a button to run a program, click Programs, then click Add Program to specify the file.

7	To add a button to run a macro, click Macros, then Click Add Template Macro or Add Macro. Specify the macro.

Tips

You can also right-click the Property Bar, then click Edit.

To add a space between buttons, drag a separator [image] onto the Property Bar.

To move an existing button on the Property Bar, drag it to a new position.

To delete a button or separator, drag it off the Property Bar.

You can also add a feature button by clicking the feature on the pull-down menus.

You can drag buttons back and forth between the Property Bar and the toolbar.

If you add more buttons than will fit on the Property Bar you will not be able to use them. You can't scroll through buttons on the Property Bar.

About the Property Bar


To create a table border style
To create a table border style,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill [image] Table [image] Styles [image] Create.

3	Type a name for the style in the Style name text box.

4	Unless you want all lines selected, click individual sides in the Select sides to modify group box.

5	Click a line style and color, then click a shadow position, color, and width.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click Borders/Fill.

Related Topics

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To use a macro trigger in a template
To use a macro trigger in a template,

1	As you create or edit a template, click Associate on the Template toolbar.

2	Click Triggers.

3	Select a trigger from the list.

4	From the Macros drop-down list, select the macro you want to associate with that trigger.

Tips

Only template macros that you have created in that template or copied to that template appear in the Macros drop-down list.

For a list of the triggers and their functions, see About Triggering Macros from Templates.

About Triggering Macros from Templates


About Merging with the Address Book

Instead of creating a data file to merge with your form file, you can use the Address Book as a data source. You can retrieve multiple addresses from one or more address books that you create.

The Address Book also works with templates, labels, and envelopes, so you can store all your addresses in one location. Plus, you can merge to letters, envelopes, labels, or whatever form file you create.

To insert addresses on labels

To insert addresses from the Address Book

To merge envelopes

To merge using the Address Book

Related Concepts


About QuickMenus

A QuickMenu is a useful pop-up menu that provides options specific to a certain object in the document or document window. Right-click an object (such as a paragraph, graphic, or toolbar) to display the QuickMenu for that particular object.

For example, right-click the top margin to display a QuickMenu that lets you insert headers, footers, and watermarks. Or, right-click a graphic to display tools for changing how the graphic appears in your document.

To use a QuickMenu to edit or format


To use a QuickMenu to edit or format
To use a QuickMenu to edit or format,

1	Right-click the text or format element.

2	Select any option.

Tips

To close the menu without making a selection, click outside the QuickMenu.

About QuickMenus


rectangular block

A selection of text in columns that are separated by spaces rather than tabs. With Corel WordPerfect you can select a rectangular block, including the spaces, and then move the column and keep it intact.


target

The place in the document (such as a page, a chapter, or a figure) where you tell the reader to look.


reference

The place in a document where you direct the reader to another part of the document.


target name

A name that ties the reference and target together, enabling Corel WordPerfect to place the target page number in the reference when you generate the document. The target name must be the same for both the reference and the target. It is not printed in the document.


To cross-reference a graphics box with a counter
To cross-reference a graphics box with a counter,

1	Create a counter in each caption of graphics boxes of the same type.

2	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-Reference.

3	Click where you want to create a reference.

4	Type any introductory text (such as "See Figure").

5	Click Reference [image] Counter, click the graphics box counter type you want to reference, then click OK.

6	Type a target name in the Target text box or select a target from the drop-down list.

7	Click Mark Reference.

8	Right-click the graphics box you want to reference, then click Edit Caption.

9	Place the insertion point immediately after the counter (figure) number. This is the target.

10	Type the target name in the Target text box or select a target name from the drop-down list.

11	Click Mark Target.

12	Click outside the graphics box.

13	After marking all the references and targets, click Generate.

Tips

If you select a graphics box type that does not match the box type you are cross-referencing, the reference will not be inserted or updated when you generate.

Related Topics

About Cross-Referencing Graphics Boxes with Counters


To create a list definition
To create a list definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List [image] Define.

2	Click Create.

3	Type a name in the List text box.

4	Click a numbering format on the Position drop-down list.

5	If you have used special numbering for total, volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers, click Page Numbering to customize the way page numbers appear.

6	Click Change to change the current style.

Tips

You don't need to mark captions for figure, table, text, equation, or user-defined boxes in your document. Click a box type on the List box captions automatically list if you want a list of captions for graphics and other types of boxes.

Related Topics

About Creating a List of Items in Your Document


To retrieve a list definition
To retrieve a list definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List [image] Define [image] Retrieve.

2	Type the filename of a document with the list definitions, then click OK.

3	Click the definitions you want to retrieve.

Related Topics

About Defining a List or a Table of Authorities


To retrieve a table of authorities section definition
To retrieve a table of authorities section definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities [image] Define [image] Retrieve.

2	Type the filename of a document with the list definitions, then click OK.

3	Click the definitions you want to retrieve.

Related Topics

About Creating a Table of Authorities


About Retrieving List or Table of Authorities Section Definitions

You can retrieve list or table of authorities section definitions from another document. A list definition specifies the type of page numbering and style you want in the list. A table of authorities section definition specifies the type of page numbering, underlining, and style you want in each section of the table of authorities.

To retrieve a table of authorities section definition

To retrieve a list definition

Related Concepts


To define and generate a table of authorities
To define and generate a table of authorities,

1	Click where you want a table of authorities section to appear.

2	Type a heading (such as Cases or Constitutional Provisions), then press Enter a few times to add spacing.

3	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities.

4	Click Define.

5	Click a section definition name, then click Insert.

6	Follow steps 1-5 for each section you want in the table.

7	Click Generate.

Tips

To start the table of authorities at the top of a new page, press Ctrl+Enter.

To restart page numbers after the table of authorities, set a new number for the page following the table.

Click Create, Edit, or Retrieve in the Define Table of Authorities dialog box to create, edit, or retrieve a table of authorities section definition.

Click Delete in the Define Table of Authorities dialog box to delete a table of authorities section definition.

Generate creates entries in the table for short form marks that have no associated full form. These entries are marked with an asterisk (*).

About Creating a Table of Authorities


To adjust table column widths automatically
To adjust table column widths automatically,

1	Right-click the table [image] click Size Column to Fit.

Tips

This option adjusts a table column to the width of the widest text in the column cells.

Related Topics

About Table Column Format


To adjust unequal table columns to have equal widths
To adjust unequal table columns to have equal widths,

1	Select two or more cells from adjacent columns.

2	Click [image].

Related Topics

About Table Column Format


About the Table Tools Palette

Use the Table Tools palette to change line styles and fill, change numeric format, insert and delete cells, join and split cells, adjust columns widths, and open the Table Format dialog box.

To access a Table Tools palette, right-click the table [image] click Table Tools. You can leave the Table Tools palette displayed while you edit the table. You can drag the palette to the side so it does not cover the table.

Related Concepts


To cut or copy table rows or columns
To cut or copy table rows or columns,

1	Select cells, rows, columns, or table contents.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut or Copy.

3	Click Selection to cut or copy a selection.

4	Click Row or Column to cut or copy the rows or columns.

5	To copy one cell, click Cell, then click To Clipboard, or click Down or Right and specify how many cells down or to the right you want to copy the cell.

6	If you are moving or copying, click where you want to paste the selection, row, column, or cell, then click Edit [image] Paste.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click Cut, Copy, or Paste.

If you copy or cut items from one table and then paste them into another, table formatting (such as line and fill styles, numeric formats, and text appearance) is also pasted.

About Adding and Moving Parts of a Table


To change table text alignment
To change table text alignment,

1	Click in a table.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Format.

3	Click Cell, Column, or Table.

4	Click and modify any alignment options.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Select several cells to change the text alignment for those cells at the same time.

About Table Format


To line up numbers on the decimal point in tables
To line up numbers on the decimal point in tables,

1	Right-click the table [image] click Format.

2	Click Column or Table.

3	Click a decimal alignment option.

4	Specify a number of digits in the Digits after decimal text box, or specify a measurement in the From right margin text box.

Tips

Select several cells to change decimal placement for those cells at the same time.

About Table Numeric Format (Currency, Percent, Dates, etc.)


To add diagonal lines in a table cell
To add diagonal lines in a table cell,

1	Click in a table cell or select several cells.

2	Right-click [image] click Format [image] Cell tab.

3	Click Upper Right to Lower Left, Upper Left to Lower Right, or Both.

Tips

Diagonal lines divide the cell visually, but do not split the cell in two. You can place data on both sides of the line in the cell.

The line style and color of the diagonal line depends on the line style and color of the table lines. Diagonal lines cannot be drawn in some line styles, such as double lines.

Related Topics

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To rotate table cell contents
To rotate table cell contents,

1	Click in the table cell.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Format [image] Cell.

3	Click the Rotate pop-up list, then select 90 Degrees, 180 Degrees, or 270 Degrees.

Tips

Rotation moves the text in a counterclockwise direction.

When text is rotated, it is placed in a text box. Be careful not to drag the text box out of the table cell. To edit the text after rotating it, click the cell, right-click the selected text box, then click Content [image] Edit.

About Table Cell Format


To lock table cells
To lock table cells,

1	Right-click the table [image] click Format [image] Cell.

2	Click Lock cell to prevent changes.

Tips

Lock prevents information in a cell from being changed.

To temporarily disable all locked cells in a table, click the table, then click Table [image] Format [image] Table [image] Disable locks in all cells. Edit the information in a locked cell, then click Table [image] Format [image] Table and deselect Disable locks in all cells.

Select several cells to lock those cells at the same time.

Related Topics

About Table Cell Format


To ignore a cell during calculations
To ignore a cell during calculations,

1	Select a cell.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Format [image] Cell.

3	Click Ignore cell When calculating.

Tips

Select several cells to ignore all selected cells.

About Table Cell Format


To create a table header row
To create a table header row,

1	Click in a row, or select several rows.

2	Right-click [image] click Format [image] Row.

3	Click Header row.

Tips

Header rows appear at the top of the page each time the table spans a page break.

Related Topics

About Table Row Format


To allow a table row to continue across pages
To allow a table row to continue across pages,

1	Click in the row, or select several rows.

2	Right-click [image] click Format [image] Row.

3	Select Divide row across pages.

Tips

Use this option to let part of a row move to the next page, instead of moving the entire row to a new page.

Related Topics

About Table Row Format


To change table row height and text lines per row
To change table row height and text lines per row,

1	Click in a row, or select several rows.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Format [image] Row.

3	Click Single line only or Multiple lines.

4	Click Automatic to use a height based on text height, or click Fixed, then specify a measurement.

Tips

When you specify a fixed row height, the row will stay at that height, no matter how much text is inserted in any cell on the row.

You can also drag the top or bottom line of a row to change its height. Move the mouse pointer over the line until it looks like a double arrow, then drag.

About Table Row Format


To adjust the white space around text in a cell
To adjust the white space around text in a cell,

1	Click in a column or row, or select several columns or rows.

2	Right-click [image] click Format.

3	Click Column, Row, or Table.

4	If you clicked Column or Table, specify a measurement in the Left and Right text boxes under Inside margins in column.

5	If you clicked Row, specify a measurement in the Top or Bottom text boxes under Row margins.

Tips

Row margin settings affect the top and bottom width of white space in the current row. Column margin settings on the Column tab affect the left and right width of white space in the current column. Column margin settings on the Table tab affect the left and right width of white space in every cell in the table.

About Table Format


To specify an exact table column width
To specify an exact table column width,

1	Click in a column, or select several columns.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Format.

3	Click Column or Table.

4	Specify a measurement in the Width text box under Column Width.

Tips

Click Always keep width the same to keep the current column width the same regardless of changes in other column widths or in left and right column margin settings.

You can also drag the table guidelines to change the column width.

You can also click where you want to change the column width, then press Ctrl+< or Ctrl+> repeatedly to decrease or increase it.

If the Ruler is displayed, drag the triangle markers on it to change the column width.

To quickly change column widths using the keyboard, press Ctrl+, (comma) to make the column narrower and Ctrl+. (period) to make the column wider.

About Table Column Format


To change how many rows and columns appear in an existing table
To change how many rows and columns appear in an existing table,

1	Click in the table.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Format [image] Table.

3	Specify the number of Columns and Rows under Table size.

Related Topics

About Table Format


To specify a table's horizontal position
To specify a table's horizontal position,

1	Click in the table.

2	Right-click the table [image] click Format [image] Table.

3	Click Left, Right, Center, or Full under Table position on page, or click From Left Edge, then specify a measurement.

Tips

If the table isn't sized to fit the page margins, you can drag it to a new position.

If the table isn't sized to fit the page margins, the table size remains unchanged when the margins change. To specify that a table resizes with the margins, click Full.

Related Topics

About Table Format


About Entering a Formula in a Cell

You can type formulas directly into table cells or floating cells without using the Table Formula toolbar if you precede the initial symbols, functions, or numbers with + or =. Formulas you type are calculated when you move the insertion point out of the cell that contains the formula.

It is best to type formulas directly only if you know how to use functions and you remember the names you want to reference in formulas.

Corel WordPerfect does not recognize formulas for cells in which the numeric type is set to Text.

To create a formula in a table or floating cell

Related Concepts


To create a numbered list using QuickNumbers
To create a numbered list using QuickNumbers,

1	At the beginning of a new line, type a number followed by a period, close parenthesis, or hyphen.

2	Press Tab or Indent, then type text.

3	Continue to add items by pressing Enter, then typing text.

4	Press Enter [image] Backspace to end the list.

Tips

When you follow the steps above, you create your own numbering style for the document. If you click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, you will see the numbering type you have created in the first box under Description. The new style will be available each time you open the current document.

You can insert numbers without tabs or levels anywhere in your document by pressing Ctrl+Shift+F5. This is useful, for example, when you want to number items within a paragraph.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


To create monospaced text in a web document
To create monospaced text in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Font.

2	Select Monospaced and a heading level or paragraph type, then click OK.

3	Type the text.

Related Topics

About Monospaced and Preformatted Text in Web Documents


About Web Document URLs

A Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the Internet address of a document or document resource (such as an image, sound clip, or hyperlink destination). In Netscape Navigator URLs appear in the Location text field.

On the World Wide Web a URL usually begins with http://www and is followed by the name of the file server, the folder, and filename of the document. For example, the Smithsonian Institution URL is http://www.si.edu.

Web documents typically consist of HTML formatted files. Images and sound clips are located in separate files and have their own URLs. The URLs of hyperlink destinations (known as bookmarks in a standard Corel WordPerfect document) are enclosed in anchor tags such as <a href="http://www.corel.com/"></a>

To see the URL of an HTML document on your hard disk or a local network server, open Netscape Navigator, then click File [image] Open Page, then open the document. The URL is displayed in the Location text field.

To create a hyperlink to a local web document

To create a hyperlink to an Internet document

To specify a base URL for a web document

Related Concepts


About Web Browsers

Browsers are programs that allow you to view documents published to the World Wide Web when you are connected through an Internet access provider.

Using the browser you can view documents on the World Wide Web and follow hyperlinks to jump from one document, or place in a document, to another.

Browsers specify font typefaces and sizes, heading attributes, and other formatting styles. Documents may look different when viewed by different browsers.

To view documents on the World Wide Web, you need:

A computer configured for a TCP/IP network.

An installed modem or other network connection.

An account with an Internet service provider through your modem or network.

To browse the World Wide Web

To go to the Corel Web Site

Related Concepts


About Publishing to HTML

When you publish to HTML, a copy of the current document is recreated in HTML format. Corel WordPerfect automatically converts WordPerfect formatting into HTML tags. WordPerfect codes that have no HTML equivalents are modified or deleted from the document.

The default name of the new HTML document is the name of the current WordPerfect document with a .htm extension. A copy of the graphics images are saved in the folder you specify. You can also specify the server folder name so graphics are still available when you place the document on a web server.

You can insert graphics in any format Corel WordPerfect supports. Any non-.GIF images are converted to .JPEG images automatically when you save the document to HTML.

You can distribute HTML documents through e-mail, or place them on an Internet or Intranet server. Talk to your system administrator or Internet service provider for more information about copying HTML documents to the server.

To view a web document before publishing to HTML

To publish a web document to HTML

Related Concepts


To create preformatted text for an HTML document
To create preformatted text for an HTML document,

1	In the Internet Publisher, click Format [image] Font.

2	Select Preformatted Text and a paragraph style, then click OK.

3	Type the paragraph text.

Tips

You can also click Font/Size on the Property Bar, then click Preformatted Text.

Related Topics

About Monospaced and Preformatted Text in Web Documents


About Monospaced and Preformatted Text in Web Documents

Use Monospaced to create text in a font such as Courier, where each character is the same width.

Use Preformatted Text to keep spacing and line breaks the same as in the original when viewed by browsers. The text is displayed in a monospaced font.

To create monospaced text in a web document

To insert a line break in a web document

To create preformatted text for an HTML document

Related Concepts


lines

Each line ends with a hard return. A line can be divided into fields and words.


paragraphs

Each paragraph ends with two or more hard returns. A paragraph can be divided into fields, lines, and words.


merge records

Each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD code. A merge record can be divided into fields, lines, and words.


parallel columns

Each parallel column ends at the end of the column row. A parallel column can be divided into columns, lines, and words.


tables

Each table record is a row of cells. A table record can be divided into columns, lines, and words.


To reuse recent font settings
To reuse recent font settings,

1	Select the text you want to apply the font settings to.

2	Click [image] on the Property Bar and select a font.

Tips

To apply the font settings to the current word only, click anywhere in the word, click [image], then select a font.

About QuickFonts


fields (sort)

In ordinary text, each line is a field. Tabs and indents divide a single line into two or more fields. In merge records, fields end with the ENDFIELD code.


lines

Each line ends with a hard return (or a soft return when sorting a paragraph).


word

Characters divided by spaces or by other separators such as forward slashes (/), and hard hyphens.


columns

Each record is a parallel column row or table column. Parallel columns are divided by hard page breaks and are numbered from left to right. Table columns are vertical rows of cells.


cells

Table rows are divided into cells. Cells are numbered from left to right, starting with cell 1.


About Web Document Fonts

The web browser you use specifies what font typeface appears in the HTML documents you view and what appearance attribute document elements such as headings use. When you create a web document you can specify what HTML font style you want to apply to your text, such as Normal or Heading 1.

To comply with HTML specifications, several Corel WordPerfect attributes are modified or deleted when converting a document to HTML.

Bold, italic, underline, color, subscript, and superscript are retained.

Redline and strikeout are retained, though some browsers may not support these attributes.

Shadow is retained and converted to the blink tag when published to HTML. (Blink is supported by Netscape Navigator, but is not supported by all browsers.)

Corel WordPerfect hyperlinks are retained, but display in blue (rather than green) in web documents.

Double underline is deleted.

To change text color in a web document

To create blinking text in a web document

To change the colors of hyperlinks viewed by a browser

Related Concepts


About QuickFonts

Use QuickFonts to change the current font to a recently used font setting. When you click [image] on the toolbar, your last ten font settings are displayed. Settings include font face, size, and appearance attributes such as bold or italic.

To reuse recent font settings

Related Concepts


To edit a sort definition
To edit a sort definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click a Sort by option, then click Edit.

3	Type a new name in the Sort description text box.

4	Click a record type to Sort by.

5	Click the sort Type for the key you are defining.

6	Click the Sort Order for the key.

7	Specify any changes in the record subdivision text boxes (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

8	Click Add Key at End to define another key, then repeat steps 4-6.

9	To insert a key before a defined key, click the Key number, then click Insert Key Between. Repeat steps 4-6.

Tips

To sort by the last item in a list, specify a negative number (-1) in the appropriate record subdivision text box (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

To delete a defined sort, click a Sort by option, then click Delete.

About New Sort, Edit Sort, or Copy Sort


To copy a sort definition
To copy a sort definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click a defined sort, then click Copy.

3	Type a new name in the Sort description text box.

4	Click a record type to Sort By.

5	Click the sort Type for the key you are defining.

6	Click the Sort order for the key.

7	Specify any changes in the record subdivision text boxes (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

8	Click Add Key at End to define another key, then repeat steps 4-6.

9	To insert a key before a defined key, click the Key number, then click Insert Key Between. Repeat steps 4-6.

Tips

To sort by the last item in a list, specify a negative number (-1) in the appropriate record subdivision text box (Field, Line, Word, Column, or Cell).

To delete a defined sort, click a Sort by option, then click Delete.

About New Sort, Edit Sort, or Copy Sort


To insert a line break in a web document
To insert a line break in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Insert [image] Line Break.

Tips

You can also press Ctrl+Shift+L.

Use a line break to end one line and begin another without ending the paragraph.

About Creating Internet Documents


Example of |

key 1=Smith | key 3=Nevada

Selects records that include "Smith" for key 1 or "Nevada" for key 3.


Example of &

key 1=Smith & key 3=Nevada

Selects records for every record with "Smith" in "Nevada."


Example of =

key 4=84057

Selects only those records with a value of 84057 in key 4.


Example of <>

key 3<>Nevada

Selects all records that do not have "Nevada" for key 3.


Example of >

key 3>Nevada

Selects records for words in key 3 that occur later in the alphabet, such as "Ohio" and "Tennessee," but not "California" and "Arizona".


Example of <

key 4<84601

Selects records with values in key 4 less than "84601" (such as "43230" and "43236" but not "98765").


Example of >=

key 4>=84601

Selects records with values in key 4 greater than or equal to "84601".


Example of <=

key 3<=Nevada

Selects records with words in key 3 that occur earlier in the alphabet (such as "Louisiana" and "California").


key g

key g=Hawaii

Selects records that have "Hawaii" anywhere in the record.


Web / URL
URL

A Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the Internet equivalent of a path and filename. In Netscape Navigator the URL of the current document is displayed in the Location text box.

World Wide Web URLs usually begin with http://www followed by the file server name, directory path, and filename. For example, the URL of the Smithsonian Institution is http://www.si.edu.


To add custom HTML tags to a web document
To add custom HTML tags to a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Custom HTML.

2	Type the HTML tag.

3	To end the tag, press Right-arrow.

About HTML Tags


About Web Document Paragraph Styles

To comply with HTML specifications, some Corel WordPerfect formats change when you convert documents to HTML. For example, tab and indent codes become spaces, and inserting a hard return creates a double-spaced blank line between paragraphs.

The Internet Publisher does not include WordPerfect styles, but it does include font tagging for specific paragraph styles in HTML documents.

Normal, for normal body text

Address, to display information about the document authors

Indented Quotation, to indents text both right and left for block quotations

Preformatted Text, to display text in a monospaced font and preserve display spaces and line breaks exactly in the browser.

To insert a line break in a web document

To create preformatted text for an HTML document

To create a bulleted or numbered list in a web document

To create monospaced text in a web document

Related Concepts


To insert addresses on labels
To insert addresses on labels,

1	Open a new document.

2	Click Format [image] Labels.

3	Specify a label definition, then click Select.

4	Click Tools, then click Address Book.

5	Select the addresses, then click Insert.

Tips

If you want to create labels containing text in addition to the address, you can use Merge.

Related Topics

About Merging Labels


To view a web document before publishing to HTML
To view a web document before publishing to HTML,

1	In the Web Editor, click View [image] View in Web Browser.

Tips

You can also click [image].

Related Topics

About Web Browsers


To copy text and graphics to the Clipboard
To copy text and graphics to the Clipboard,

1	Select the text or graphics you want to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

Related Topics

About Cut, Copy, and Paste


To insert a horizontal line
To insert a horizontal line,

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Horizontal Line.

Tips

To change the appearance or placement of the line, right-click the line and click Edit Horizontal Line.

Use QuickLines to insert a line between the left and right margins. At the beginning of a line, type four hyphens (----) for a single line or four equal signs (====) for a double line, then press Enter.

Related Topics

About Graphics Lines


To insert a vertical line
To insert a vertical line,

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Vertical Line.

Tips

To change the appearance or placement of the line, right-click the line, then click Edit Vertical Line.

Related Topics

About Graphics Lines


To edit a graphics line
To edit a graphics line,

1	Click the line to select it.

2	Select an option from the Property Bar.

Tips

To edit a line using the Edit Graphics Line dialog box, right-click it [image] click Edit Horizontal Line (or Edit Vertical Line).

If a graphics line is difficult to see, click View [image] Zoom to magnify it.

If you have overlapping lines, you can also click View [image] Reveal Codes, then double-click the graphics line code to change a specific line.

Related Topics

About Line Styles


To create or edit a custom line style
To create or edit a custom line style,

1	Click Insert [image] Shape [image] Custom Line [image] Line Styles.

2	To create a new style, click Create.

3	To edit a line style, select the style and click Edit.

4	Change the line style options.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

About Customizing Graphics Styles


About Graphics Lines

Graphics lines separate text or graphics on a page to make your document visually appealing and easier to read. You can insert two types of lines: a line shape that you draw (similar to a rectangle or polygon) and predefined horizontal and vertical lines.

Horizontal Line and Vertical Line insert predefined lines that extend between margins. You can move or edit a line to change the width, length, style, color, and spacing.

Create a line with a unique look with Custom Line. You can save a custom graphics line as a style to use it several times or in other documents.

To draw shapes in your document

To edit a graphics line

To insert a horizontal line

To insert a vertical line

To create a custom graphics line

To move or size a graphics line using the mouse

To cut, copy, or paste a graphics line

To delete a graphics line

Related Concepts


To delete a graphics line
To delete a graphics line,

1	Select the graphics line.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

Tips

You can also right-click a graphics line, then click Delete.

Related Topics

About Graphics Lines


To cut, copy, or paste a graphics line
To cut, copy, or paste a graphics line,

1	Select the graphics line.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut or Copy.

3	Click where you want to paste the graphics line.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Tips

You can also right-click a graphics line, then click Cut, Copy, or Paste.

Related Topics

About Graphics Lines


To move or size a graphics line using the mouse
To move or size a graphics line using the mouse,

1	Select the graphics line.

2	Drag the line to a new location on the page or in another document.

3	Drag one of the sizing handles to enlarge or reduce the line length or width.

Tips

To use precise measurements in moving or sizing the line, right-click the line and click Edit Line.

Related Topics

About Graphics Lines


About Address Format in the Address Book

You can insert an address in the format provided, or you can specify a different format. When you select a format from the Address Book, you do not need to format the address in your document.

To create an address format in the Address Book

To change an address format in the Address Book

To insert addresses from the Address Book

To insert addresses on labels

Related Concepts


To change an address format in the Address Book
To change an address format in the Address Book,

1	Click Tools [image] Address Book [image] Format.

2	Click a format to select it, then click OK.

Tips

To delete a format, select the format and click Delete.

About Address Format in the Address Book


To create an address format in the Address Book
To create an address format in the Address Book,

1	Click Tools [image] Address Book [image] Format [image] Custom.

2	Click in the Format box where you want to insert a field (part of the address).

3	Click a field, then click Insert.

4	Repeat steps 2-3 to place each field, then click OK.

5	Type the name of the new format, then click OK.

6	To use the format, make sure it is selected, then click OK.

About Address Format in the Address Book


About Web Document Lists, Bullets, and Numbers

Three types of lists are available for documents created in the Internet Publisher: numbered lists, bulleted lists, and definition lists. The browser determines the size and shape of the bullets in a list and how the list appears in the browser.

Lists created using the Outline/Bullets & Numbers feature retain the bullets or numbers you assigned when the document is converted to HTML.

Lists created with the QuickBullets feature (in which you type a number or an asterisk [*], press Tab, then press Enter to automatically insert the next number or bullet) are reformatted as an HTML unordered list and do not keep the numbers or special bullets you specified.

To create a definition list in a web document

To create a bulleted or numbered list in a web document

Related Concepts


About HTML Document Properties

Use HTML Document Properties to add a document title. Browsers display document titles rather than filenames in the title bar area. Internet Publisher automatically inserts the <TITLE> tag when you publish a document to HTML. If you do not specify a title, the first occurrence of the highest heading level in the document is used.

Click the Text/Background tab to change the colors of web document text, background, and hyperlinks. In the Web Editor, hyperlinks are displayed in the Hypertext link color whether they have been visited or not. When viewed in a browser, the link color changes briefly to the Active hypertext link color when the link is clicked. When the jump has been made, the link changes to the Visited hypertext link color.

You can also specify a wallpaper image or a pattern as the background instead of a solid color. The wallpaper you specify for your web document is displayed in the Web Editor, except in Draft view. It is not displayed behind boxes. Wallpaper does not scale when you change the magnification of the document window using the Zoom feature. Wallpaper images using 256 or fewer colors are converted to GIF file format. Images using more than 256 colors are converted to JPEG file format. Only bitmap images can be converted for use as wallpaper.

Click the Summary tab to create a summary of your web document that identifies such information as the person who created the document and a description of the content. The summary is saved with the web document but does not display or print with the web document.

Click the Information tab to view statistical information about the web document, such as number of words and sentences contained in it.

Click the Advanced tab to specify additional document information that is not displayed in the document. For example, you can specify a base URL and other document information tags such as ISINDEX, LINK, NEXTID, and META.

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

To create a title for a web document

To specify wallpaper for a web document

To specify the background color of a web document

To create a heading in a web document

To specify a base URL for a web document

To change text color in a web document

To change the colors of hyperlinks viewed by a browser

Related Concepts


To create a definition list in a web document
To create a definition list in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

2	Select Definition List, then click OK.

3	Type the name of the list item, then press Enter.

4	Press Tab, then type the paragraphs that follow the list item name.

5	Press Enter.

6	To create the next list item name, press Shift+Tab, then type the name.

Tips

To end the list, press Enter, then press Backspace.

Related Topics

About Web Document Lists, Bullets, and Numbers


About Web Document Tables

In web documents, table borders are either on or off. Customized table border lines are converted to standard borders. Fill (shading) is supported.

To turn table borders on or off in a web document


To turn off a paragraph, column, or page border
To turn off a paragraph, column, or page border,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph or Column or Page [image] Border/Fill [image] Discontinue.

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To add shading to a page
To add shading to a page,

1	Click in the page.

2	Click Format [image] Page [image] Border/Fill.

3	Click the Fill tab, then select a fill style.

Tips

You can change the foreground and background colors and the pattern.

Click the Advanced tab to select a linear, circular, or rectangular gradient fill.

Related Topics

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To add shading to a column
To add shading to a column,

1	Click in the column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns [image] Border/Fill.

3	Click the Fill tab, then select a fill style.

Tips

You can change the foreground and background colors and the pattern.

Click the Advanced tab to select a linear, circular, or rectangular gradient fill.

Related Topics

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


About Border/Fill Advanced Options

Use the Border/Fill Advanced Options to change the format of border or fill elements. You can change a drop shadow, a gradient fill, the radius of rounded corners, and the spacing between the image or text and the border.

To change how round or square a text border appears

To change the drop shadow for a paragraph, column, or page border

To change the border space for a paragraph, column, or page border

To change the drop shadow for a graphics border

To change the gradient for a paragraph, column, or page fill

To change the gradient for a graphics box fill

To adjust the border space for a graphics box

To change the rounded corner radius of a graphics box border

Related Concepts


To change the gradient for a graphics box fill
To change the gradient for a graphics box fill,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	To change the type of gradient used for the fill, select a type from the Gradient drop-down list.

3	To change the vertical and horizontal placement of the shadows within the gradient, or to rotate the gradient, select an amount for the Vertical Offset, Horizontal Offset, or Rotation Angle text boxes.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To change the rounded corner radius of a graphics box border
To change the rounded corner radius of a graphics box border,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	Specify a number in the Amount text box.

Tips

An amount of 0" makes the corners square.  As the number increases the corner becomes more rounded.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To play a QuickMacro
To play a QuickMacro,

1	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Play [image] Play (without entering a macro name).

Tips

QuickMacros are deleted when you exit Corel WordPerfect.

About QuickMacros


To restore a graphics style to its default appearance
To restore a graphics style to its default appearance,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box [image] Styles.

2	Select the style.

3	Click Options [image] Reset.

Tips

System styles are the styles provided for each type of graphic. Resetting a style returns it to the way it was when you first installed Corel WordPerfect.

About Graphics Styles


About Web Document Hypertext

Use hyperlinks to jump to bookmarks in Corel WordPerfect, Envoy, and HTML documents on a local web, or to HTML documents or document anchors on the World Wide Web.

You create and edit hyperlinks in web documents the same way you do in other WordPerfect documents. When you publish to HTML, bookmarks convert to named HTML anchors. Anchors identify link destinations and image locations in World Wide Web documents.

In the Web Editor you can specify different colors to reflect the status of hyperlinks. The link briefly changes to a different color when it is clicked (an active hyperlink), and changes to another color when the link has been completed (visited hyperlink). Browser settings determine whether the visited color is permanent or returns to the normal hyperlink color after a specified period of time.

Browsers usually cannot play Corel WordPerfect macros, therefore hyperlinks to macros are not recommended in web documents.

To create a hyperlink to an Internet document

To change the colors of hyperlinks viewed by a browser

To create a hyperlink in a Corel WordPerfect document

To create a hyperlink to a local web document

Related Concepts


To change the border space for a paragraph, column, or page border
To change the border space for a paragraph, column, or page border,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph or Column or Page [image] Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	To change the space between the text and the edge of the border, set the Inside Spacing.

3	To change the space between the edge of the border and the text around it, set the Outside Spacing.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To change the drop shadow for a paragraph, column, or page border
To change the drop shadow for a paragraph, column, or page border,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph or Column or Page [image] Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	To change the color, select a color in the color palette.

3	To change the width, select a width or specify a numeric width.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To change the gradient for a paragraph, column, or page fill
To change the gradient for a paragraph, column, or page fill,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph or Column or Page [image] Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	To change the type of gradient used for the fill, select a type from the Gradient drop-down list.

3	To change the vertical and horizontal placement of the shadows within the gradient, or to rotate the gradient, select an amount for the Vertical Offset, Horizontal Offset, and Rotation Angle text boxes.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


To change how round or square a text border appears
To change how round or square a text border appears,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph or Column or Page [image] Border/Fill [image] Advanced.

2	Specify a number in the Corner radius text box.

Tips

The number 0 specifies square corners.  As the number increases, the text border becomes more rounded.

About Border/Fill Advanced Options


About QuickMacros

To create a macro quickly that you don't need to save, create a QuickMacro. You don't name or save a QuickMacro, but the recorded tasks are stored in memory.

Only one QuickMacro can exist at a time, and it is deleted when you exit Corel WordPerfect. You can't edit it or save it to a template. When you record a new QuickMacro, any existing QuickMacro is replaced.

You can add the QuickMacro Play and QuickMacro Record buttons to a toolbar.

To record a QuickMacro

To play a QuickMacro

Related Concepts


To record a QuickMacro
To record a QuickMacro,

1	Click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Record [image] Record (without entering a macro name).

2	Use Corel WordPerfect as you normally would to perform the task you are recording.

3	To stop recording the macro, click Tools [image] Template Macro [image] Record.

Tips

Corel WordPerfect records both keyboard and mouse actions you make. However, you must use the keyboard instead of the mouse to position the insertion point in the document window.

About QuickMacros


To assign a macro to a keystroke
To assign a macro to a keystroke,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Keyboards.

2	Select a keyboard and click Edit.

3	Select a key to assign the macro to.

4	Click Macros [image] Assign Macro to Key.

5	Specify a macro file, then click Select.

6	Click Yes or No to indicate whether to save the macro with its full path.

Tips

To create a keyboard with the same initial settings as an existing keyboard, select the keyboard and click Create.

If you save a macro file without its full path, Corel WordPerfect searches for the macro in the default folder (as specified in Files Settings).

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


To assign a macro to a menu
To assign a macro to a menu,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Menus.

2	Select a menu, then click Edit.

3	Click Macros [image] Add Macro.

4	Specify the macro filename, then click Select.

5	Click Yes or No to indicate whether to save the macro with its full path.

6	Drag the menu item representing the macro to position it on the menu.

Tips

You can right-click the menu, then click Settings [image] Edit, to edit the current menu.

Double-click the menu item to edit its name and the help prompt.

To create a menu with the same initial settings as an existing menu, select the menu and click Create.

If you save a macro file without its full path, Corel WordPerfect searches for the macro in the default folder (specified in Files Settings).

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


To assign a macro to a toolbar button
To assign a macro to a toolbar button,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Select a toolbar, then click Edit.

3	Click Macros [image] Add Macro.

4	Specify the macro filename, then click Select.

5	Drag the button representing the macro to position it on the toolbar.

Tips

You can right-click the toolbar, then click Edit, to edit the current toolbar.

Double-click the button representing the macro to customize the button text, help prompt, image, and properties.

There is a predefined toolbar with buttons for some of the macros included with Corel WordPerfect. Right-click the toolbar and select Shipping Macros to display it.

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


To assign a macro to the Property Bar
To assign a macro to the Property Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image]  click Property Bar [image] Edit.

2	Click Macros [image] Add Macro.

3	Specify the macro filename, then click Select.

4	Drag the button representing the macro to position it on the Property Bar.

Tips

You can right-click the Property Bar, then click Edit, to edit the current Property Bar.

Double-click the button to customize the button text, help prompt, image, and properties.

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


About Highlighting Text

Highlighting puts a bar of transparent color over text.

You can change the highlight color and use several colors in the same document. This is particularly useful for shared documents. Each person working on the document can have his or her own highlight color.

You can hide highlighting without removing the highlight codes, then redisplay it later.

If your printer supports color printing, the highlight colors will print. Black and white printers print the colors in gray. If you have hidden highlighting it does not print.

To highlight text

To hide or display highlighting

To remove highlighting

To change the highlight color

Related Concepts


To highlight text
To highlight text,

1	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] On.

2	Select the text you want to highlight.

3	Repeat step 1 to turn off Highlight.

Tips

You can also click [image] on the toolbar.

When Highlight is on, the mouse pointer changes to a highlighting pen.

About Highlighting Text


To change the highlight color
To change the highlight color,

1	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] Color.

2	Click [image] and select a highlight color.

3	To change the intensity of the color, adjust the shading.

Tips

To change the highlight color that has already been applied to text, follow the steps above, click OK, select the text, then click [image] on the toolbar.

About Highlighting Text


To hide or display highlighting
To hide or display highlighting,

1	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] Print/Show.

Tips

To display highlighting, repeat the procedure.

By default, Print/Show is on. Deselecting it hides highlighting but does not remove the codes. When you print the document, the highlighting will not be printed.

About Highlighting Text


To remove highlighting
To remove highlighting,

1	Select all text containing highlighting that you want to remove.

2	Click Tools [image] Highlight [image] Remove.

Tips

To quickly remove a single section of highlighting, click anywhere in the section, then click [image] on the toolbar.

To remove highlighting from selected text within a highlighted section, select the text, then click [image].

About Highlighting Text


To delete a graphics box
To delete a graphics box,

1	Select the box.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

Tips

To restore a graphics box after you have deleted it, click Edit [image] Undo.

About Types of Graphics You Can Insert


To create reversed text (white on black)
To create reversed text (white on black),

1	Select the text you want to reverse.

2	Right-click the toolbar [image] click Shipping Macros.

3	Click [image].

4	Select a text color, a fill style, and a fill color.

5	To create a text box with the reversed text, select Place selected text in text box.

6	To create a paragraph fill for the background, select Apply attributes to whole paragraph.

Tips

If you create a text box, right-click the text box to change its appearance.

If you create a paragraph fill, click the paragraph [image] click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Border/Fill to change its appearance.

About Creating Reversed Text (White on Black)


About Publishing to Envoy

You can distribute Corel WordPerfect documents electronically in Envoy format so they can be viewed without using WordPerfect. Recipients of an Envoy document can view, annotate, and print it with the same appearance as the original.

When you publish a document to Envoy, a copy of the original is created in Envoy format (.EVY) and displayed in the Envoy Viewer. You can also display an Envoy document in a browser that has the Envoy plug-in installed.

You can distribute Envoy documents on disk or through e-mail. If you have installed Envoy 7 you can create an Envoy Distributable Viewer disk. (The viewer is also available on the Corel WordPerfect Documentation home page on the World Wide Web.)

In Envoy you can import a WordPerfect or Envoy document and save it as a runtime file. You can then distribute it on disk, by e-mail, or on a web server. The runtime viewer does not include all of the Envoy Viewer features.

For more information, open Envoy, then click Help [image] Help Topics.

To publish a Corel WordPerfect document to Envoy

To go to the Corel Web Site

Related Concepts


To publish a Corel WordPerfect document to Envoy
To publish a Corel WordPerfect document to Envoy,

1	Open a Corel WordPerfect document.

2	Click File [image] Send to [image] Envoy.

3	Click Open in the Envoy Viewer.

Tips

Publish to Envoy converts the document to Envoy format (.EVY) and opens it in the Envoy Viewer.

About Publishing to Envoy


To delete the structure of a table column or row
To delete the structure of a table column or row,

1	Click in the row or column (or select the rows or columns) you want to delete.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Delete.

3	Click Columns or Rows and specify the number of columns or rows you want to delete.

Tips

If you mistakenly delete part of a table, use Undo to restore it.

If you have selected cells, rows, or columns, you can also press Delete or Backspace, or right-click the selection and click Delete.

About Deleting Tables


To assign a template macro to a keystroke
To assign a template macro to a keystroke,

1	Open the template to which the macro is attached.

2	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Keyboards.

3	Select a keyboard and click Edit.

4	Select a key to assign the template macro to.

5	Click Macros [image] Assign Template Macro to Key.

6	Click Location [image] Current Template or Default Template [image] OK.

7	Select the template macro [image] click Select.

Tips

Keyboards can be associated with a specific template.

To create a keyboard with the same initial settings as an existing keyboard, select the keyboard, then click Create.

Related Topics

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


To edit a table of authorities section definition
To edit a table of authorities section definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities [image] Define.

2	Select the section name, then click Edit.

3	Type a section name in the Name text box.

4	Click a numbering format on the Position pop-up list.

5	If you have used special numbering for total, volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers, click Page Numbering to customize how page numbers appear.

6	To allow underlining in authorities you mark to appear in the table, click Include underlining in generated table.

7	If you want page numbers printed out (4, 5, 6) instead of grouped (4-6), deselect Use dash to show consecutive pages.

8	To change the current table of authorities style, click Change.

Tips

Click Use as Default to use the numbering, underlining, and dash selections for all new table of authorities sections.

Related Topics

About Creating a Table of Authorities


To assign a template macro to a menu
To assign a template macro to a menu,

1	Open the template the macro is attached to.

2	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Menus.

3	Select a menu, then click Edit.

4	Click Macros [image] Add Template Macro.

5	Click Location [image] Current Template or Default Template [image] OK.

6	Select the template macro, then click Select.

7	Drag the menu item representing the template macro to position it on the menu.

Tips

You can right-click the menu, then click Settings [image] Edit, to edit the current menu.

Double-click the menu item to edit the menu item name and the help prompt.

Menus can be associated with specific templates.

To create a menu with the same initial settings as an existing menu, select the menu, then click Create.

Related Topics

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


To assign a template macro to a toolbar
To assign a template macro to a toolbar,

1	Open the template the macro is attached to.

2	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

3	Select a toolbar to edit, then click Edit.

4	Click Macros [image] Add Template Macro.

5	Click Location [image] Current Template or Default Template [image] OK.

6	Select the template macro, then click Select.

7	Drag the button representing the template macro to position it on the toolbar.

Tips

You can right-click the toolbar, then click Edit, to edit the current toolbar.

Double-click the button representing the template macro to customize the button text, help prompt, image, and properties.

Toolbars can be associated with specific templates. Click Related Topics below for more information.

Related Topics

About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke


Troubleshooting Toolbars and Menus

What do you want help with?

Why can't I see the new button I added?

I can't find the menu items or icon listed in the Help steps.

Where is my Ruler?

Related Concepts


To specify a default font for all new documents
To specify a default font for all new documents,

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Details [image] Default Font.

2	Select the Font Face, Size, and Style to use as the default for the current printer.

Tips

The font settings you select in the Printer Default Font dialog box affect all documents created when that printer is selected. However, if you change font settings in a document, those changes take precedence over the Printer Default Font.

Related Topics

About Fonts


About Reviewing a Document

You can forward a Corel WordPerfect document to others, then have them edit it and return it to you.

You can save the document to a disk and then give it to other reviewers. The reviewers can use Review Document to mark the editing changes they insert.

When the document is returned to you, use Review Document to examine the changes others have made. Each person's changes are marked in a different color. You can display the document with or without the markings.

Using Document Review, you can move from change to change and accept or reject each one. You can also accept or reject all changes.

To review a document as an author

To review a document as a reviewer

Related Concepts


To review a document as a reviewer
To review a document as a reviewer,

1	Open the document, then click File [image] Document [image] Review [image] Reviewer.

2	If necessary, type your name and initials, then click OK.

3	To choose the color your changes appear in, click Set Color, then select a color from the color palette.

4	Edit the document.

5	Save the document.

Tips

With the exception of Sort, you can use any Corel WordPerfect feature to edit the document. Only text editing changes are marked with a color.

You can edit additions that others have made. However, you cannot edit or undelete previous deletions.

To see the edited text in the document without any color markings, click [image].

The Other user colors box lists the names of the reviewers and the color used for each one.

About Reviewing a Document


To review a document as an author
To review a document as an author,

1	Open the document, then click File [image] Document [image] Review [image] Author.

2	Use the document review buttons to look at the reviewer markings and accept or reject the changes to the document.

3	Click File [image] Save to save the document with the changes you want.

Tips

The Other user colors box lists the names of the reviewers and the color used for each one.

When you open the document, the first change is highlighted. Use the buttons to move from change to change and accept or reject each one. You can also accept or reject all changes.

To see the edited text in the document without any color markings, click [image].

About Reviewing a Document


To create or edit a custom border style
To create or edit a custom border style,

1	Click Format [image] Graphics Styles [image] Border.

2	To create a new style, click Create.

3	To edit a style, select the style from the Styles list box, then click Edit.

4	Select and modify any options for the style.

Tips

To edit a style, select the style and click Edit.

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Customizing Graphics Styles


To create or edit a custom box style
To create or edit a custom box style,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box [image] Style.

2	To create a new style, click Create.

3	To edit a style, select the style from the Styles list box, then click Edit.

4	Select and modify any options for the style.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Customizing Graphics Styles


To create or edit a custom fill style
To create or edit a custom fill style,

1	Click Format [image] Graphics Styles [image] Fill.

2	To create a new style, click Create.

3	To edit a style, select the style and click Edit.

4	Select and modify any options for the fill style.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Customizing Graphics Styles


About Customizing Graphics Styles

You can create your own graphics styles or edit existing styles, and save those styles to use again. Border, line, and fill styles can be used with table, paragraph, column, or page borders, and with drop cap borders.

To use a custom graphics box style

To create or edit a custom box style

To create or edit a custom border style

To create or edit a custom fill style

To create or edit a custom line style

To change how all new text boxes look

Related Concepts


To create a new graphics style by copying an existing style
To create a new graphics style by copying an existing style,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box [image] Styles.

2	Click a style type.

3	Select the style to copy, click Options, then click Copy.

4	Type a name for the new style, then click OK.

5	Select the new style, click Edit, and modify any options for the style you just copied.

Tips

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

About Graphics Styles


To delete a graphics style
To delete a graphics style,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box [image] Styles.

2	Click a style type.

3	Select the style.

4	Click Options [image] Delete.

Tips

You can delete only graphics styles that you have created.

About Graphics Styles


To rename a graphics style
To rename a graphics style,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box [image] Styles.

2	Click a style type.

3	Select the style.

4	Click Options [image] Rename.

Tips

You can rename only graphics styles that you have created.

About Graphics Styles


To retrieve a graphics styles file
To retrieve a graphics styles file,

1	Click Format [image] Graphics Styles.

2	Click a style type to indicate the kind of styles you want to retrieve.

3	Click Options [image] Retrieve.

4	In the Filename text box, specify the name of the file that contains the styles you want, then click OK.

5	Click whether you want to retrieve the User or System styles in the file, or Both.

Tips

User styles are styles you have created. System styles are styles provided with Corel WordPerfect, such as line and box styles.

When you retrieve a graphics styles file, those styles are attached to the current document. You can then apply them to the graphics in the document.

About Graphics Styles


To save a graphics styles file
To save a graphics styles file,

1	Click Format [image] Graphics Styles.

2	Click a style type.

3	Click Options [image] Save.

4	Specify a name for the styles file in the Filename text box.

5	Click whether you want to save User or System styles, or Both.

Tips

User styles are styles you have created. System styles are styles provided with Corel WordPerfect, such as line and box styles.

The file is saved to the default template folder. If none is specified, Corel WordPerfect saves the styles where your Windows files are stored.

About Graphics Styles


To use a custom graphics box style
To use a custom graphics box style,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box.

2	Select a box style, then click OK to insert the box.

3	Create the box contents.

Tips

You can also apply a box style to an existing box. Right-click the box, click Styles, and select a box style.

The text at the bottom of the Custom Box dialog describes each box style as you select it. To change any of these defaults for a style, click Styles, select the style, then click Edit.

To get information on a dialog box option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

About Customizing Graphics Styles


To add shading to a paragraph
To add shading to a paragraph,

1	Click in the paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Border/Fill.

3	Click Fill, then select a fill style.

Tips

Click the Advanced tab to specify a gradient fill.

Related Topics

About Borders and Fill (Shading)


To keep an image from becoming distorted
To keep an image from becoming distorted,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Content.

2	Select Preserve Image Width/Height Ratio.

Tips

Selecting this option will restore a distorted image to its correct proportions. However, the restored image may not fill the box.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


To size a graphics box with specific measurements
To size a graphics box with specific measurements,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Size.

2	To set a width or height measurement, click Set, then specify a width or height.

3	To have the graphics box fill the width or height of a page column (from left to right margin), click Full.

4	To prevent an image from being distorted, click Maintain Proportions under width or height if you set the other measurement to full.

Tips

A box with Full as its height is automatically attached to the page.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


About Customizing Graphics and Using Styles

Graphics boxes and lines are formatted with styles. There are fourteen predefined box styles and many line, fill, and border styles to use when you quickly create a graphic. For quick access to graphics box styles, you can change which styles appear on the Graphics menu.

To customize any part of a graphic, edit a style for the box, border, fill, or line. You can then use QuickFormat to apply the box's format to other boxes in your document. You can also create graphics box styles for use in other documents or templates.

You can also save a graphics image, chart, or TextArt image in WordPerfect Graphics (.wpg) format. The .wpg file can then be edited in other draw or graphics applications.

About Graphics Styles

About Customizing Graphics Styles

About Predefined Graphics Box Styles

About Line Styles

Related Concepts


To save the format of a paragraph as a style
To save the format of a paragraph as a style,

1	Select the paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Styles [image] QuickStyle..

3	Type a name for the style.

Tips

The paragraph format, including indent, justification, border, fill, bullets, and font, is saved as a style.

The style is saved with the current document.

To apply the style to other paragraphs, click a paragraph, click Format [image] Styles, then select the style.

About Changing Paragraph Format


To edit a list definition
To edit a list definition,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List [image] Define.

2	Select the list name, then click Edit.

3	To change the list name, type a name in the List text box.

4	To change the numbering format, select a format on the Position drop-down list.

5	If you have used special numbering for total, volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers, click Page Numbering to customize the way page numbers appear.

6	To change to a different list style, click Change.

Tips

You don't need to mark captions for figure, table, text, equation, or user-defined boxes in your document. Click a box type on the List box captions automatically drop-down list if you want a list of captions for graphics and other types of boxes.

Related Topics

About Creating a List of Items in Your Document


To adjust the margins for all paragraphs of text
To adjust the margins for all paragraphs of text,

1	Click in the paragraph where you want the adjustment to take effect.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

3	Specify the new margins in the Left and Right margin adjustment text boxes.

Tips

When you adjust the paragraph margins, text is adjusted relative to the current page margins. For example, adding a 1" paragraph in a document with a 1" margin makes the new margin 2".

About Changing Paragraph Format


About Guidelines

Guidelines show the margins or measurements of elements in a document, such as page margins, tables, columns, headers, and footers. Guidelines display in the document window as dotted lines, but they do not print in the document.

You can change the structure of the document by dragging a guideline to a new position. This is the quickest way to change margins, size tables or columns, or place headers and footers on the page.

To change margins using margin guidelines

To specify an exact table column width

To adjust column widths

To adjust the distance below a header or above a footer

Related Concepts


To change the current table of contents style
To change the current table of contents style,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Contents [image] Define.

2	Click Styles.

3	Select a level style in the Level list box.

4	Select a style in the Styles list.

Tips

To create a new table of contents style, click Create, type a name and description for the style, then use the Styles Editor.

To edit an existing style, click Edit, then use the Styles Editor.

Related Topics

About Styles


To customize a table border style for the current table
To customize a table border style for the current table,

1	Click in the table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Borders/Fill [image] Table.

3	Select a style from the Border palette, then click Custom.

4	If you do not want to change all border lines, select individual sides in the Select sides to modify group box.

5	Select any options for line style, color, or shadow position, color, and width.

Tips

You can also right-click the table, then click Borders/Fill.

To get information about an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table


To change a web document to Corel WordPerfect format
To change a web document to Corel WordPerfect format,

1	Open an HTML document in the Web Editor.

2	In the Web Editor, click [image].

Tips

You can also click File [image]  Internet Publisher [image]  Format as WP Document.

HTML formatting is converted to its nearest Corel WordPerfect equivalent. Some HTML-specific codes such as Java Applets are not visible, but the codes are not lost. You can still see the codes using Reveal Codes.

Related Topics

About Creating Internet Documents


About Web Document Table of Contents

Table of contents items are generated as hyperlinks and displayed in a bullet list. Page numbers are not included in web documents, so they do not appear in the table of contents. All headings, except Heading 1, are automatically included in the table of contents when it is generated. You can also mark text to include in the table of contents.

Related Concepts


About Using Graphics in Web Documents

Most web browsers are limited to viewing images in GIF and JPEG formats. However, When you create a web document using Corel WordPerfect, you can insert a graphics image in any file format that Corel WordPerfect supports. When you publish to HTML, Corel WordPerfect automatically converts the images.

In the Internet Publisher you can specify where to save the converted graphics locally and where graphics images reside on a web server. You can also specify alternate text for graphics, and the format to which you want non-GIF or non-JPEG graphics converted.

GIF images can use a transparent background so any white space around the image is changed to match the page background. GIF images can also be specified as "interlaced" so the image loads first as a rough outline then fills in the details, rather than simply loading top to bottom.

Graphics can be a dynamic part of your web page when they are used as a button to submit a form, or as a jump or link to other web documents. Use an Image Map to link different parts of a graphic to different URLs.

To publish a web document to HTML

Related Concepts


To create a hyperlink to an Internet document
To create a hyperlink to an Internet document,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to create the hyperlink.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Click Browse Web and open the document you want to the link to jump to. The document can be on the Internet or on a local server.

4	Click Corel WordPerfect on the Windows Task Bar or press Alt+tab to return to WordPerfect.

The URL (address) of the last document you viewed is displayed in the text box.

5	Click OK, then type the text that you want formatted as the link.

Tips

Corel WordPerfect automatically creates a hyperlink when you type Internet-identifying text that starts with characters such as "ftp:\\," "http:\\," "www," or "mailto." See QuickLinks.

To use a button rather than text as the hyperlink, click Make link appear as a button.

You can also type the URL in the Document text field instead of finding the document in the browser.

Select the text first if you want to use existing text for the hypertext link.

To create a link to a specific HTML anchor, specify the URL, then type the anchor name in the Bookmark text box exactly as it appears in the Source view of the document. Anchor names are case sensitive.

About Web Document Hypertext


Default Topic
Click Help [image] Help Topics to find information about using this feature.


To position a graphics box in columns precisely
To position a graphics box in columns precisely,

1	Right-click the graphics box [image] click Position.

2	Select Page from the Attach Box To drop-down list.

3	From the Horizontal drop-down list, select the column where you want to put the box (left column, right column, or centered in columns).

4	In the Across Columns text boxes, specify the starting and ending column numbers.

5	In the Horizontal edit box, specify any distance you want to offset the box from the left or right edge of the columns, or from the center of the columns.

6	From the vertical drop-down list, select the location from which you want to measure the vertical position of the box.

7	In the Vertical edit box, set any distance you want to offset the box from that location.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

If the column options fail to appear, make sure the graphic is placed within the columns.

If you want the image to span the specified columns, you may want to set the size to full width.

Related Topics

About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page


To insert a vertical line between columns
To insert a vertical line between columns,

1	Click in the column.

2	Click Format [image] Columns [image] Border/Fill.

3	Click the down scroll arrow, then click the single vertical line.

4	To apply the border only to the selected column, make sure "Apply border to current column group only" is selected.

Tips

You can change the color, line style, or drop shadow for the line between columns.

If you deselect Apply border to current column group only, the line separates all columns on the current page and all subsequent pages in the document.

 	About Columns


To remove the Macro toolbar
To remove the Macro toolbar,

1	On the Macro toolbar, click Options [image] Remove Macro Bar.

Related Topics

About the Macro Toolbar


About Table of Authorities Edit Full Form Toolbar

Use this toolbar to edit the full form of a table of authorities entry. The full form is the full text of the authority (citation of a case, statute, etc.) as it will appear in the table of authorities. The full form also includes the short form (nickname) of the authority and the section in which the authority appears.

To mark an authority for a table of authorities

Related Concepts


To display or hide merge codes
To display or hide merge codes,

1	Create or open a data file or form file.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Options.

3	Click Display Codes and select one of the first three options.

4	To display the codes, click Display Codes.

5	To keep the codes but display code markers only, click Display as Markers.

6	To keep the codes but not display them, click Hide Codes.

Related Topics

About Inserting Merge Codes in a Document


To change a merge file into a regular document
To change a merge file into a regular document,

1	Create or open a data file or a form document.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Options.

3	Click Remove Merge Bar, then click OK.

Tips

When you remove the Merge toolbar, the merge file is no longer recognized as a merge file.

After the Merge toolbar has been removed, you cannot use Undo to put it back. You can only recreate the merge file.

About Editing a Merge File


To sort and print a data file
To sort and print a data file,

1	Create or open a data file.

2	On the Merge toolbar, click Options.

3	To sort records, click Sort, then specify sort options.

4	To print records, click Print, then specify print options.

Related Topics

About Editing a Merge File


About Editing a Merge File

You can create or open a merge file and edit it using the Merge toolbar. To edit a form document, insert field codes and other merge codes in the same way that you created the file.

However, there are different ways to edit a data file depending on how the data file is formatted. A data file can be formatted as either a data text file or a data table file. In a data table file, you can manually edit information in the cells of the table. In a data text file, you can edit the text manually, but you must be careful to not delete ENDFIELD and ENDRECORD codes. With either type of data file, you can use Quick Data Entry to help you add or delete data from the file.

If you are using the Address Book as your data source, you can open the Address Book and add or delete records there at any time.

To display or hide merge codes

To insert addresses from the Address Book

To edit records in a data table

To edit fields in a data table

To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry

To edit a merge data text file manually

To change a table to a data text file for a merge

To sort and print a data file

To create a form document for a merge

To change a merge file into a regular document

Related Concepts


About Merging to E-mail

You can use a data file or the Address Book to merge information to your active e-mail system. Normally when you send an e-mail message, each recipient gets the same word-for-word message. However, when you merge to e-mail, you can create personalized messages for each recipient.

To do this you create a form document with the fields you want in the message. You then merge the form document with a data source, and specify E-mail as the output when you perform the merge.

To merge to e-mail

To perform a merge

To create a data file for a merge

To create a form document for a merge

Related Concepts


To merge to e-mail
To merge to e-mail,

1	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Perform Merge.

2	Specify the location of the form document.

3	Specify the location of the data source.

4	Click Output [image] E-mail.

5	Specify the field containing the e-mail address.

6	Type the subject line you want to appear in each merged e-mail message.

7	Click OK, specify any other merge options, then click Merge.

Tips

The fields displayed in the drop-down list come from the data source you specify in the Perform Merge dialog box.

The data source must contain an e-mail address field. If you use the Address Book for all your correspondence, you won't need to create this field in a data file every time.

Related Topics

About Merging to E-mail


About User-Generated Merge Prompts

The following merge commands create prompts that require user input during the merge: CHAR, GETSTRING, and KEYBOARD. During the merge, the value entered for CHAR and GETSTRING goes to the assigned variable. The value entered for a KEYBOARD prompt goes to the document.

To insert merge codes

Related Concepts


Web / Anchor
anchor

In HTML, bookmarks are called anchors. To see anchor codes in an HTML document in Netscape Navigator, click View [image] Source.

A hyperlink that jumps to an anchor begins with the tag <a href="xxx">, where xxx represents the anchor (bookmark) name. (If the link jumps to an anchor within the document the name is preceded with a #.) This is followed by the text of the hyperlink, followed by the tag </a>. At the jump destination the tags are <a name="xxx"></a>, as in the following example:

<a href="http://www.corel.com/">Corel Corporation Home Page</a>

Anchor names are case sensitive. When you type them in the Bookmark text box of the Hyperlink Properties dialog box, type them exactly as they appear in the Source view of the HTML document.


About Using Corel WordPerfect 6.1 and 7 Macros in Version 8

Macros created with Corel WordPerfect 6.1 and 7 for Windows do not need to be converted to run in Corel WordPerfect 8. However, there are a few commands that function slightly differently or are obsolete in version 8.

To get a list of these commands, Click Help [image] Contents [image] double-click Macros [image] Macro Programming [image] click Contents [image] double-click Upgrade Help [image] New Commands and Changes to WordPerfect Macros.

Related Concepts


To generate a table of contents
To generate a table of contents,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Contents [image] Generate.

Tips

Before you can generate the table of contents, you must mark text in your document and define the table of contents.

Related Topics

About Creating a Table of Contents


To generate a table of authorities
To generate a table of authorities,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Table of Authorities [image] Generate.

Tips

Before you can generate the table of authorities, you must mark the authorities you want to include and define each section of the table.

About Creating a Table of Authorities


To generate a list
To generate a list,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] List [image] Generate.

Tips

Before you can generate the list, you must mark the text in your document and define the list.

About Creating a List of Items in Your Document


To generate cross-references
To generate cross-references,

1	Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Cross-Reference [image] Generate.

Tips

Before you can generate cross-references, you must mark the references and targets with the same target name.

Generating cross-references inserts or updates the number in the reference.

If you build hyperlinks when you generate cross-references, you can click the reference number to jump to the reference.

About Creating Cross-References


To change how all new text boxes look
To change how all new text boxes look,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box [image] Styles.

2	Select Text Box in the Styles list.

3	Under List styles from, select Default Template.

4	Click Edit [image] Settings [image] Change.

5	Select BoxText in the Available styles list, then click Edit.

6	Select any options in the Styles Editor dialog box to change how text appears in the box.

7	Click OK [image] Close [image] OK.

8	Use the options in the Edit Box Style dialog box to change how the graphics box looks.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, click [image], then click the option.

The new style is applied to text boxes in the current document and in other new documents that use the same template.

About Changing the Text Box Default Style


To edit a graphic that is over or under another graphic
To edit a graphic that is over or under another graphic,

1	Click the graphic.

2	Click [image] or [image] on the Property Bar until you find the box you want to edit.

Tips

These Property Bar options are active only when more than one graphic (such as a text box, graphic line or image) appears in the document.

 	About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


margin marker

The outside marker at both ends of the white space on the Ruler. The left margin marker looks like [image], and the right margin marker looks like [image].


To print hidden text
To print hidden text,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display.

2	Click Hidden Text so it will display in the document window.

3	Print the document.

Tips

Hidden text prints only when it is displayed in the document window.

About Hiding Text


To display hidden text
To display hidden text,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display.

2	Click Hidden text to select it.

About Hiding Text


To hide hidden text
To hide hidden text,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display.

2	Click Hidden Text to deselect it.

Tips

Text that is hidden does not print.

About Hiding Text


To view information about a comment (author, creation date, etc.)
To view information about a comment (author, creation date, etc.),

1	Click the comment icon.

2	Right-click the comment, then click Information.

Tips

If you have not specified user information (such as initials) using Tools [image] Settings [image] Environment, Information will not be available when you right-click the comment. If you have specified user information, the comment icon displays with the initials specified in Environment Settings. If you have not specified user information, the comment icon displays as [image].

Comment icons display in the left margin area of a document window. To see the icons, drag the slider on the horizontal scroll bar to the left edge or click View [image] Zoom [image] Page Width.

Comment icons only display in Page and Two Pages view modes.

About Adding Comments in a Document


To view a comment in Page or Two Pages view mode
To view a comment in Page or Two Pages view mode,

1	Click the comment icon.

Tips

Comment icons display in the left margin area of a document window. To see the icons, drag the slider on the horizontal scroll bar to the left edge or click View [image] Zoom [image] Page Width.

About Adding Comments in a Document


About Spacing Words and Letters

You can increase or decrease the distance between words or letters for selected text or from the insertion point forward in the document. This change can affect a word, a line, a heading, or any part of a document.

When you are using full justification (aligned at both right and left margins), the distance between words is automatically adjusted to fill the lines of text. You can limit the amount of compression or expansion allowed between words (using the options under Word spacing justification limits).

You can adjust the amount of leading between lines of text in your document by specifying a measurement under Adjust leading.

To change the amount of spacing between words or letters

To adjust spacing between words in fully justified text

Related Concepts


About Changing the Spacing Between Letters

You can increase or decrease the distance between letters for selected text or for the entire document.

Automatic kerning adjusts the distance in all occurrences of certain pairs of letters. The letter pairs are automatically kerned based on the font face used.

Manual kerning adjusts only the distance between the two letters on either side of the insertion point.

Letterspacing adjustments affect the distance between all letters, whether or not they are kerned. Use it to reduce the amount of space taken by the text, or to make letters look less crowded.

To change the kerning between two letters

To turn Automatic Kerning on or off

To change the amount of spacing between words or letters

Related Concepts


To delete a custom page numbering format
To delete a custom page numbering format,

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering.

2	In the Page numbering format list box, select the custom page numbering format, then press Delete.

Tips

You cannot delete the page numbering formats provided by Corel WordPerfect.

About Custom Page Numbering Formats


To change a graphics image to a watermark
To change a graphics image to a watermark,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Style.

2	Select Watermark.

3	To change the size, position, and other box options, right-click the watermark box, then click Edit Box.

About Watermarks


To specify where styles are saved
To specify where styles are saved,

1	Click Format [image] Styles [image] Options [image] Setup.

2	Select an option under Save new styles to.

Tips

To get information on an option in a dialog box, right-click the option.

Related Topics

About Style Setup


To edit a merge data file's field names
To edit a merge data file's field names,

1	Create or retrieve a data file [image] click Quick Entry [image] Field Names.

2	To create a new field, click a field name where you want to add the field.

3	Type the new name in the Field Name box, then click Add to add the field after the current selection, or click Add Before to add it before.

4	To delete a field, click the name, then click Delete.

5	To replace a field, click the name, type the new name in the Field Name box, then click Replace.

Tips

If you delete or replace a field name, information in that field will be deleted from each record in the data file. For example, if you replace "Address" with "Street Address," all data in the "Address" field in all records will be deleted and will have to be reentered.

You can use Edit Field Names to add fields after the data file has been created. After creating the new fields, add data to the fields using Quick Data Entry.

Related Topics

About Using Quick Data Entry to Create a Merge Data File


To associate a template with toolbars, menus, and keyboards
To associate a template with toolbars, menus, and keyboards,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbars, Menus, or Keyboards.

3	When you name the item, click Template.

4	Select the current, default, or additional objects template.

Tips

Unless you specify a template, the current template is associated with the item.

You must specify which template is the additional objects template. To do this, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Template.

Related Topics

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


About the Shadow Cursor

As you work in a document, the insertion point changes to a "shadow cursor" when you point to text or to white space. This cursor shows where the insertion point will go when you click the mouse. When the shadow cursor appears in the white space of your document, you can click anywhere to start typing text. You can also drag to insert clipart, a text box, or a table.

You no longer need to insert blank lines manually to leave space between paragraphs or graphics. Simply click where you want to place the text, and begin typing. You can create special pages such as title pages more quickly this way.

In addition, the shadow cursor changes appearance to show how text will be aligned when you start typing. The arrows point differently when it is left-justified, centered, or right-justified.

To turn off the shadow cursor

To use the shadow cursor to create graphics

When I edit a header, the shadow cursor doesn't show in the document.


About Submenus
This menu option leads to different submenus. To get specific help, click a submenu item.


To change the way a graphics box looks
To change the way a graphics box looks,

1	Right-click the graphic.

2	Use the QuickMenu options to change the look of the selected graphics box.

Tips

You can add borders, captions, shading (fill), change the way text flows around the box, and attach the box to a page, paragraph, or character.

You can also edit a graphics box by clicking it and selecting options from the Graphics Property Bar.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


About Symbols

Use Symbols to access characters that are not on your keyboard, such as iconic symbols, phonetic characters, and characters in other alphabets. You can insert these characters at your insertion point in a document or in some dialog box text boxes. You can also assign frequently used symbols to keys on the keyboard.

Not all fonts include all symbols. Excluded symbols are represented by a hollow box.

To insert symbols


About Opening Documents

Use Open to retrieve a document into a new document window. You can also use Open to do file management tasks, like view, copy, move, rename, print, and delete files. Click [image] for more information about managing files.

To open a new document window

To open a document you recently edited

To insert the text of a file into your document

To change whether the File menu lists the last opened documents


About Save and Save As

Use Save to save the current document. Use Save As to save a new document or to save the current document with a new name, in a different folder, with a password, or in a new format.

To save selected text as a new file

To convert a file from a different format


About Print

When you print a document, you can:

Print the entire document or only specific pages

Change the print quality and omit graphics to allow faster printing

Set printing options, such as the number of copies

Print envelopes and labels

Do booklet printing, print only odd or even pages, and print pages in reverse order

Save custom print settings for use in other print jobs

The printer you use affects the way this application prints and displays text on the screen. Before printing a document, you must add and select a printer. This was probably done when your copy of Windows was installed. This application automatically uses the printer you selected in Windows.

To select a printer

To print the current document


About the Corel Web Site

Through the Corel Web Site you can find helpful information about Corel WordPerfect on the World Wide Web.

If you have installed a browser and have an online connection to an Internet service provider, you can go to the Corel WordPerfect product index, which contains links to:

Frequently Asked Questions and their answers

Technical Information Documents, support newsgroups, and help by e-mail

Information about the current Corel product offerings

Downloadable upgrades and replacement software

To go to the Corel Web Site

Related Concepts


About the PerfectExpert

Corel WordPerfect 8 comes with its own built-in expert which is ready to help you with any task. The PerfectExpert includes the best features of QuickTasks, templates, and Coaches, combined with information from online Help and the power of a natural language interface to assist you with everyday tasks. The PerfectExpert allows you to quickly create complex documents using professionally-designed templates.

You can type in your own words to ask for the information you need. The PerfectExpert searches through all the Help files included in the Corel WordPerfect Suite then lists topics that are the best match for your question.

To use Ask the PerfectExpert

Related Concepts


About Help

When you need information, you need not look any further than your computer screen. Corel WordPerfect makes finding the help you need convenient.

You can get Help wherever you are in Corel WordPerfect by clicking the [image] icon or by clicking the Help button. You can also search for information by the kind of work you have to do (How Do I...?), look up keywords in the Index, or Find text in Help topics. Use Ask the PerfectExpert to type in your own words to find the help you need.

The new PerfectExpert combines the best features from QuickTasks, templates, Help, and Coaches to help you accomplish your work more quickly. PerfectExpert can guide you through a detailed project such as creating a resume (even if you want to use other suite applications to create parts of the document), or it can guide you through a smaller task such as inserting a clipart image. PerfectExpert even provides you with galleries of professionally-designed documents to choose from, and you can change the layout and content in any number of ways to match your needs.

The Corel WordPerfect Suite also ships with the full text of the printed manuals online. You can access these through the Reference Center.

To use context-sensitive Help

To find Help topics

To use Ask the PerfectExpert

Related Concepts


To save a WordPerfect template
To save a WordPerfect template,

1	Click in the template you have created or edited.

2	Click File [image] Save or Save As.

3	Type a description (this displays in the list of projects and templates).

4	Type a name for the template (used for the filename).

5	Select the group you want to save the template in.

6	Click OK. If prompted, click Yes to overwrite the original.

About Templates and Projects


To name a table
To name a table,

1	Click in the table you want to name.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Names.

3	Click the default table name, then click Edit.

4	Type a name in the text box.

Tips

A name can contain letters, numbers, spaces, and the symbols #, $, ?, @, or _, but the first character must be a letter, number, or underscore (_).

While you are typing a name, you can press Ctrl+W to insert Symbols. Note that most symbols in the ASCII character set are invalid.

To insert a name into the Formula Edit text box, click Names on the Table Formula toolbar, click the name, then click Insert.

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables


To delete a table component name
To delete a table component name,

1	Click in the table that contains a table component name you want to delete.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] Names.

3	Click the table component name, then click Delete.

Tips

You can also open the Table Names in Current Document dialog box by clicking Names on the Table Formula toolbar.

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables


Why can't I edit a cell?

You cannot edit a locked table cell. To unlock the cell, select the cell, right-click, then click Format and deselect Lock.

To unlock all cells in a table, right-click in the table, then click Format [image] Table and select Disable cell locks.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Tables


Why can't I move or size a table by using the mouse?

You can move the table with a mouse by creating a text box and creating a table inside it. Otherwise, to move or size a table, use Table Format and the Ruler.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Tables


To use context-sensitive Help
To use context-sensitive Help,

1	Click the What's This? icon [image] on the top right corner of a dialog box.

2	Place the pointer on the item you want information about, then click.

Tips

You can also right-click an item to get information.

To get more help on pull-down menu items, press Shift+F1, place the pointer on the item, then click.

About Help


To use Ask the PerfectExpert
To use Ask the PerfectExpert,

1	Click Help [image] Ask the PerfectExpert

2	Type your question.

3	Click the topic that matches your task, then click Display.

Tips

If the topic doesn't appear in the top list, you can click a book to view more topics. The list is sorted by application.

If a Help window is already open, click Help Topics [image] Ask the PerfectExpert to type in a question.

Click Help [image] PerfectExpert to display PerfectExpert in a window next to your document.

Click File [image] New to have PerfectExpert guide you through a new project.

About the PerfectExpert


To find Help topics
To find Help topics,

1	Click Help [image] Help Topics.

2	Click Contents for visual examples, help with tasks (How Do I...?), help with macros, and other Corel information.

3	Click Index to look up a topic or task in an alphabetical list.

4	Click Find to search for a word in the text of all Help topics.

5	Click Ask the PerfectExpert to search for help in your own words.

Tips

Click Help [image] PerfectExpert or File [image] New for help creating specific types of documents.

The Showcase Corel WordPerfect page in Contents illustrates many tasks you can do. Click in the illustrations for specific help about a task.

Each book listed in the How Do I book in Contents represents a category of tasks. The pages represent individual topics.

When you search with Find, all topics containing the word you type are listed. Type a second or third word to narrow the search.

Ask the PerfectExpert lists several topics that should match your query. Click different books if the topic you want is not listed.

You can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application you're working in. In the Help window, click Options [image] Keep Help on Top [image] On Top.

About Help


About Spell-As-You-Go

Spell-As-You-Go is like using Spell Checker as you type. It marks words that might be misspelled so you can decide whether to correct them.

To correct misspelled words

To turn on or off Spell-As-You-Go

Related Concepts


To turn on or off Spell-As-You-Go
To turn on or off Spell-As-You-Go,

1	Click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Spell-As-You-Go or Off.

Tips

Spell-As-You-Go is turned on when a check appears beside it or beside Grammar-As-You-Go on the Proofread submenu. Spell-As-You-Go is turned off when a check appears next to Off.

About Spell-As-You-Go


To create blinking text in a web document
To create blinking text in a web document,

1	Click where you want the blinking text to start.

2	Click Format [image] Font.

3	Click Blink [image] OK, then type the text.

Tips

You can also select existing text, then press F9 and click Blink.

Blinking text is displayed as shadow text until you view the document in a browser.

To view the text as it will appear in a web browser, click View [image] View in Web Browser, or click [image] on the toolbar.

About Web Document Fonts


About Using Image Maps

Just as you can insert hyperlinks in text, you can use an image to represent a hyperlink. You can also use an image in which different parts of the image represent different hyperlinks to documents specified by a URL. Images with multiple hyperlinks are known as image maps.

Image maps are often used for inserting button bars in an Internet document that allows someone viewing the document to easily navigate to different documents on the site. You can create an image map in Corel Presentations (play the macro IMGEMAP.WCM) or other products such as Corel Web.Designer, then insert them into your document using the Corel WordPerfect Internet Publisher.

The Internet Publisher supports both server-side and client-side image maps. You can specify mapping options, image properties, and the alternate text that appears when someone viewing the document has turned off graphics display in his or her browser.

If you want to use the same image map in several documents, you can specify the map description in one document, such as a home page, then link that same image map to related files. When you make changes to the image map, you will then only need to make the changes once instead of making the changes in every file.

Related Concepts


About Page Setup

The Page Setup dialog box lets specify how the printed page will be formatted. You can select the paper size, paper feed and source, and printing orientation and adjustments. You can divide the page, which lets you print more than one copy of something on a single sheet of paper. You can set page margins, specify how two-sided documents are printed, and adjust printing to add extra space on one edge of the page.

For information about an option in a dialog box, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

To select a page definition

To create a page definition

To divide pages

Related Concepts


To correct misspelled words
To correct misspelled words,

1	Right-click the marked word.

2	Select the correct spelling.

Tips

As you type, the words that are not included in any of the Corel WordPerfect dictionaries are marked.

If you frequently use the word, click Add to add it to the user word list so it won't be flagged as an error again. This is especially useful for names of people and places, as well as for technical terms not found in the Corel WordPerfect word list.

Click Skip in Document to have Corel WordPerfect accept the word only in the current document.

Click Spell Check to start the Spell Checker, where more spelling aids are available.

Related Topics

About Spell-As-You-Go


Why don't my table lines print?

Table lines do not print if the Print graphics option is deselected. Click File [image] Print, then check to be sure that Print graphics is selected.

Troubleshooting Tables


About Document Default Fonts

The Document Default Font specifies which font is used in the current document. Rather than specifying a font at the beginning of a document, make the change to the Document Default Font so the font setting is not accidentally deleted.

To specify a default font for all documents created with the current printer, you can select the Use as default option in the Document Default Font dialog box.

To specify a default font for all new documents

To select a default font for the current document

Related Concepts


To indent the first line of every paragraph automatically
To indent the first line of every paragraph automatically,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

2	Specify the paragraph indent in the First line indent box.

Tips

In the document window, press Enter to start typing at the indent setting.

About Changing Paragraph Format


To insert additional space between paragraphs
To insert additional space between paragraphs,

1	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

2	Click Number of lines, then specify a number to multiply the current line spacing setting. Or, click Distance in points, then specify the number of points you want between lines.

Tips

For example, if line spacing is set at 1, specifying a 3 for Number of lines will insert 3 lines between each paragraph of text.

About Changing Paragraph Format


To adjust the margins for a paragraph
To adjust the margins for a paragraph,

1	Select the paragraph.

2	Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format.

3	Specify the changes for Left and Right margin adjustment.

Tips

Text is moved relative to the current page margins. For example, if you adjust a paragraph by 0.5" in a document with a 1" margin, the new margin is 1.5". Specify a negative number to reduce the current margins.

About Changing Paragraph Format


RGB

RGB (Red, Green, Blue) uses the primary colors of light to define colors. When each color is at its maximum intensity (maximum value=255), the color defined is white.


HLS

HLS (Hue Luminosity Saturation) defines colors in the context of a computer monitor. You can think of the three settings as similar to the hue, brightness, and contrast adjustments on your television. Hue adjusts the color (0=red, 120=green, 240=blue, 360=red), Luminosity adjusts the amount of white and black, and Saturation adjusts the intensity of color.


CMYK

CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) is modeled after the colors that print shops use for color separations. When all color values are at the maximum levels (maximum value=255), the resulting color is black. When all color values are zero, the resulting color is white.


baseline

The invisible line that characters are aligned on. The part of the letter that extends below the baseline (as in p, g, or q) is called the descender.


dot leaders

A row of periods (or any other character) that extends between text on the left and right sides of a page or column. They help the reader connect text that is separated with white space. Dot leaders are used between tab stops and before text that is flush right, such as in a table of contents.


scalable font

A font that can be sized to any height. Your printer determines whether you can print with scalable fonts. Some printers allow only certain point sizes. See your font software documentation for more information.


About Aligning Text with Dots

When you line up text with tabs, you can insert a row of dots called dot leaders. You can define a tab with dot leaders so that when you press the tab key at that position, a row of dots is inserted before the text. You can also insert dot leaders with centered or right-aligned text.

Dot leaders are useful in documents such as address lists, programs, or tables of contents when the reader might need help matching text on the left with words or numbers on the right.

To center text with dot leaders

To right-align text with dot leaders

To change tab settings using the Tab Set dialog box

To change the dot leader character

Related Concepts


To change the dot leader character
To change the dot leader character,

1	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab Set.

2	In the Dot leader character text box, type a new character.

3	Specify the number of spaces you want between dot leader characters in the Spaces between characters text box.

Tips

To insert a non-keyboard character, press Ctrl+W, select a character, then click Insert and Close.

About Aligning Text with Dots


Why does my text disappear in a table cell?

Text may disappear as you type it in a table cell for several reasons. Click in the cell, then check the following:

The table row height may be fixed and you have typed more text than will fit in the specified height. Click Table [image] Format [image] Row, then increase the fixed height or click Auto.

The table row height may be fixed and the top row margin (amount of white space in the cell) is greater than the row height. Click Table [image] Format [image] Row, then increase the row height or decrease the top row margin.

The table lines per row may be set to Single line. Click Table [image] Format [image] Row [image] Multi line.

You may have typed more text in a cell than will fit on one page. Click Table [image] Format [image] Row [image] Allow row to span pages. This allows the row to continue onto the next page.

Your text color may be the same color as the fill of the cell, or your text color may be set to white. Click Format [image] Font to change the font color, or click Table [image] Lines/Fill to change the cell fill color.

A Hidden Text code may be in a cell. Click Format [image] Font, then click Hidden so it is not selected.

Troubleshooting Tables


To keep a graphics box on a page
To keep a graphics box on a page,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Position.

2	Select Page on the Attach Box To drop-down list.

3	Select Position.

4	Select Box Stays on Page.

Tips

When Box Stays on Page is checked, the box stays where you put it until you move it.  Otherwise, adding text can sometimes cause the box to move.

About Positioning a Graphics Box on the Page


To line up numbers on the decimal point with tabs
To line up numbers on the decimal point with tabs,

1	Click where you want to begin lining up numbers.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Tab Set.

3	From the Type pop-up list, select Decimal.

4	Specify where you want the decimal point in the Position text box, then click OK.

5	Tab to the position you specified, then type a number that includes a decimal point.

6	Press Enter, then type another number.

7	Repeat step 6 until you have completed the list of numbers.

Tips

If you want to line up an existing list of numbers on the decimal point, select the list, then follow steps 2-4. Make sure each number is tabbed to the position you specify in the Position box.

Use the tab bar to quickly change the position of a decimal tab. To display the tab bar, click the tab icon (arrow pointing to a square) in the left margin where you set the decimal tab. Click the decimal tab marker (triangle with a cross) and drag it to the position you want.

Your numbers may not line up correctly if you have used spaces in addition to tabs. Click View [image] Reveal Codes to check for extra spaces, then delete them.

Related Topics

About Changing Tab Settings


To change how ordinal numbers look
To change how ordinal numbers look,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go.

2	Click QuickOrdinals.

Tip

By default, when you type numbers such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, QuickCorrect replaces them with [image]. Deselect QuickOrdinals to turn this off.

About Superscript and Subscript


To create subscript or superscript text
To create subscript or superscript text,

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Click Position, then select Subscript or Superscript.

3	To return to normal text, click Format [image] Font [image] Position, then select Normal.

Tips

You can also press F9 to open the Font dialog box.

You can select text, then follow steps 1-2.

By default, ordinals such as st, nd, and rd, are automatically superscripted. To turn off this option, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go [image] QuickOrdinals.

About Font Sizes


To turn off QuickTips
To turn off QuickTips,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Interface, then deselect Show QuickTips.

About QuickTips


To reformat documents for the default printer
To reformat documents for the default printer,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Select Reformat documents for the WordPerfect default printer on open.

Tips

This option reformats documents to match the settings of the current printer. When you open a document that was formatted with another printer, some format elements can change when the document is reformatted.

When you deselect this option, Corel WordPerfect looks for the printer that the document was formatted with. If you do not have that printer available, the document if reformatted for the current printer only if necessary.

About Environment Settings


About Adding and Moving Parts of a Table

You can insert columns and rows into a table before or after the insertion point; split and join tables and table cells; and copy, cut, and paste parts of a table.

To insert columns or rows in a table

To cut or copy table rows or columns

To join table cells

To split table cells

To join two tables

To split a table

Related Concepts


About Font Sizes

Font sizes are displayed in points. A standard, readable font size is 12 points. Relative font sizes (Small, Normal, Large, etc.) are displayed in proportion to the current font size.

You can change the font size and relative size for:

All documents created using the current printer selection (printer default font)

The current document only (document default font)

Sections of text within a document

The current font and size (points or pt) is displayed on the Property Bar.

You can reuse the last 10 fonts that appear in the document by clicking [image] on the Property Bar. The Property Bar also includes font and size buttons that you can use to change the selected text, or if no text is selected, to change all the text following the insertion point.

To change the font size of text

Related Concepts


About Table Cell Format

You can change justification, alignment, and attributes of a table cell. You can also rotate text and add diagonal lines to a table cell.

To copy the format of a table cell

To select a table cell with a keystroke

To add diagonal lines in a table cell

To rotate table cell contents

To change table text alignment

To lock table cells

To ignore a cell during calculations

Related Concepts


About Table Column Format

You can change alignment, width, and white space of a table column. You can also change the decimal point placement in a table column.

To select tables, rows, and columns using Row/Col indicators

To adjust unequal table columns to have equal widths

To adjust table column widths automatically

To specify an exact table column width

To adjust the white space around text in a cell

To line up numbers on the decimal point in tables

To change table text alignment

Related Concepts


About Table Row Format

You can change the lines per row, height, and white space of a table row. You can also make header rows and allow a row to continue across pages.

To select tables, rows, and columns using Row/Col indicators

To allow a table row to continue across pages

To adjust the white space around text in a cell

To create a table header row

To change table row height and text lines per row

Related Concepts


About Table Format

You can change alignment, horizontal position, size, and white space of a table.

To select tables, rows, and columns using Row/Col indicators

To line up numbers on the decimal point in tables

To adjust the white space around text in a cell

To change table text alignment

To specify a table's horizontal position

To change how many rows and columns appear in an existing table

To specify an exact table column width

Related Concepts


To find exact matches for a word
To find exact matches for a word,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

2	Type the word in the Find text box.

3	Click Match, then select the Whole Word, Case, or Font option.

4	Specify any other options.

5	Click Find Next to search forward in the document, or click Find Prev to search backward.

Tips

Whole Word finds entire words that match the text. If you type "low" and select Whole Word, you will find that word but not "allow" or "lower."

Case finds only text that matches the upper- and lowercase letters you type. For example, if you type "Olympic" and select Case, you will not find "olympic."

Font finds text with specific font face, style, size, and format attributes (such as Underline or Small).

Related Topics

About Finding and Replacing Text


To select all text between the insertion point and found text
To select all text between the insertion point and found text,

1	Click where you want to begin selecting text.

2	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

3	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

4	Click Action [image] Extend Selection.

5	Click Find Next to search forward or Find Prev to search backward.

Related Topics

About Custom Find and Replace Options


To find text and select it
To find text and select it,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

3	Click Action [image] Select Match.

4	Click Find Next to search forward or Find Prev to search backward.

Related Topics

About Custom Find and Replace Options


To limit the number of times to find and replace a word or code
To limit the number of times to find and replace a word or code,

1	Click Edit [image] Find and Replace [image] Options [image] Limit Number of Changes.

2	Specify the number of times you want to find or replace the text or code.

Tips

After the text or code is found, Find stops at the last occurrence of the search text.

About Custom Find and Replace Options


To save the Undo/Redo History with the document
To save the Undo/Redo History with the document,

1	Click Edit [image] Undo/Redo History [image] Options.

2	Click Save Undo/Redo items with document.

Related Topics

About Undo and Redo


To remove a subdocument from a master document
To remove a subdocument from a master document,

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Drag the appropriate [Subdoc] code out of the Reveal Codes window.

Tips

This only removes the subdocument link from the master document. It does not delete the subdocument.

About Master Documents and Subdocuments


annotate

To add words and graphical objects to a chart you have created in Corel Presentations. For example, you can annotate a bar chart to add comments and arrows to the bars.


To go to the Corel Web Site
To go to the Corel Web Site,

1	Click Help [image] Corel Web Site.

About the Corel Web Site


To center several lines of text
To center several lines of text,

1	Click Format [image] Justification [image] Center.

2	Type the text to be centered.

Tips

To end centering, click Format [image] Justification, then select Left, Right, or Full.

You can end centering temporarily for one line, then resume centering on subsequent lines. To do this, place the insertion point where you want to end centering, then click Format [image] Line [image] Other Codes [image] End centering/alignment [image] Insert.

You can also click [image] on the Property Bar.

About Centering Text


To start a new page
To start a new page,

1	Click where you want to start the new page.

2	Click Insert [image] New Page.

Tips

A Hard Page code is inserted when you start a new page. To start a new page without adding a code, click Format [image] Page [image] Force Page [image] New Page.

In Draft view, the new page break is represented as a double line.

You can also insert a page break by pressing Ctrl+Enter.

In columns, pressing Ctrl+Enter inserts a column break. To insert a hard page break in columns, press Ctrl+Shift+Enter.

About Forcing a Page Number


About Defining a Table of Contents

Use Define Table of Contents to define where and how you want the table of contents to appear.

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

To change the page numbering format for a table of contents

To change the current table of contents style

To define and generate a table of contents

Related Concepts


About Playing a Macro from a Toolbar, Menu, or Keystroke

You can assign macros (either those saved to a file or template macros) to a keystroke, a menu item, or a toolbar or Property Bar button. You do this with macros you have created and macros that are included with Corel WordPerfect.

If you frequently use the macros included with Corel WordPerfect, there is a predefined toolbar you can use. Right-click the toolbar and select Shipping Macros.

You can play a macro while viewing a document online by assigning it to a hyperlink in that document.

To assign a macro to a keystroke

To assign a macro to a menu

To assign a macro to a toolbar button

To assign a macro to the Property Bar

To assign a template macro to a keystroke

To assign a template macro to a menu

To assign a template macro to a toolbar

Related Concepts


To view product and license information
To view product and license information,

1	Click Help [image] About Corel WordPerfect.

About Getting Information on Corel WordPerfect


To reinstall or add components to Corel WordPerfect
To reinstall or add components to Corel WordPerfect,

1	On the Windows Taskbar, click Start [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Setup & Notes [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 Setup.

2	Follow the instructions on the screen.

About Reinstalling or Removing Corel WordPerfect


About Selecting Box or Line Styles

Select a graphics box style or a line style to apply to a box or line. You can also edit existing styles, or create new ones and save them to use again.

Graphics box styles define the look of the box (but not the contents). Borders, background (fill), drop shadows, corners, and colors can all be customized.

Line styles define the look of horizontal or vertical lines. You can customize the line color, pattern, thickness of lines, or spacing around the line.

To create or edit a custom box style

To create or edit a custom line style

Related Concepts


To create a pleading document using the Pleading paper project
To create a pleading document using the Pleading paper project,

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select Legal from the drop-down list, click Pleading paper in the list of projects, then click Create.

3	Specify the line numbering and number of lines in your pleading paper, then click OK.

4	Use the PerfectExpert panel to change other formatting elements, such as the margins, font, and justification.

Tips

This PerfectExpert uses the pleading.wcm macro to display the Pleading Paper dialog box. You can play pleading.wcm again to change the existing settings in that document.

The settings in the Line Numbering and Vertical Lines group boxes are in effect each time you create a pleading paper.

About Templates and Projects


To create a toolbar, menu, or keyboard
To create a toolbar, menu, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbar, Menus, or Keyboards.

3	Click Create.

4	Specify a name and, optionally, a template.

5	Click OK to open an editor.

6	Add buttons, menu items, or keystroke assignments in the Toolbar, Menu, or Keyboard Editor.

Tips

You can also right-click a toolbar or menu, click Settings, then follow steps 2-6 above.

You can change how a Property Bar looks, but you can't create new Property Bars.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


About Changing a Toolbar or Property Bar

You can change the appearance and location of a toolbar or Property Bar.

Toolbar buttons can display with text only, pictures only, or with both pictures and text. You can also change the font face and size used for button text.

You can also change the toolbar position, determine how many rows of buttons can appear, and specify whether or not you want the toolbar to scroll if you can't see all of the buttons.

To change the appearance and location of a toolbar or Property Bar

Related Concepts


To change the appearance and location of a toolbar or Property Bar
To change the appearance and location of a toolbar or Property Bar,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbars or Property Bars, select a bar, then click Options.

3	Select and change any options.

Tips

To get information on an option, press Shift+F1, then click the option.

You can also right-click the toolbar, click Settings, select the toolbar, then click Options.

About Changing a Toolbar or Property Bar


To copy a toolbar, menu, or keyboard to another template
To copy a toolbar, menu, or keyboard to another template,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbars, Menus, or Keyboards, then click Copy.

3	Select the template to copy from.

4	Select one or more toolbars, menus, or keyboards.

5	Select a template to copy to, then click Copy.

Tips

You can also right-click a toolbar or menu, click Settings, then follow steps 2-5 above.

To select more than one item, click and drag to select several that are together, or press Ctrl as you click to select individual items. Press Ctrl+/ to select all items.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


To delete a toolbar, menu, or keyboard
To delete a toolbar, menu, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbars, Menus, or Keyboards.

3	Select the toolbar, menu, or keyboard, then click Delete.

Tips

You can delete only the toolbars, menus, or keyboards that you have created.

You can also right-click a toolbar or menu, click Settings, then follow step 3 above.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


To edit a toolbar, Property Bar, menu, or keyboard
To edit a toolbar, Property Bar, menu, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbars, Property Bars, Menus, or Keyboards.

3	Select a toolbar, Property Bar, menu, or keyboard to edit, then click Edit.

4	Change any options in the editors.

Tips

You can also right-click a toolbar or menu, click Settings, then click Edit.

You can edit toolbar buttons without opening the Toolbar Editor. To delete a toolbar button, press the Alt key while dragging the button from the toolbar. To reposition a button, press the Alt key while dragging the button to a new position. To add a program shortcut to a toolbar, drag the program icon from the desktop to the toolbar.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


To rename a toolbar, menu, or keyboard
To rename a toolbar, menu, or keyboard,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize.

2	Click Toolbars, Menus, or Keyboards.

3	Select a toolbar, menu, or keyboard, then click Rename.

4	Type a new name.

Tips

You can rename only the toolbars, menus, and keyboards that you have created.

You can also right-click a toolbar or menu, click Settings, then follow steps 3-4 above.

About Toolbar, Keyboard, and Menu Settings


To create an equation inside a line of text
To create an equation inside a line of text,

1	Click in the line of text where you want the equation or expression to appear.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Custom Box.

3	Click Inline Equation, then click OK.

4	On the Property Bar, click Graphics [image] Content.

5	Click Edit, then use the Equation Editor to create the equation.

Tips

To retrieve an equation saved as text, click Insert [image] Equation [image] File [image] Insert File, then specify the path and filename of the equation file.

About Creating Equations


About Concordance Files for Indexes

A concordance is a list of words or phrases and the page numbers where each word or phrase occurs. You can generate a concordance as an index or include it in an index of marked headings and subheadings.

A concordance file is a document you create consisting of words and phrases you want to include in the concordance. Type each word or phrase at the beginning of a line, then press Enter before typing the next word or phrase.

The generated concordance uses the capitalization of the concordance file. For example, if you create a "butterfly" entry in the concordance file, then generate the concordance with a document that includes "Butterfly," all occurrences of "butterfly" and "Butterfly" are listed under the "butterfly" heading.

To create a concordance file for an index

Related Concepts


About Marking Text for an Index

Mark text for index entries using the Index toolbar. Click where you want to create an index reference, then type heading and subheading entries in the toolbar text boxes. Subheadings are optional.

Plan for consistency in heading and subheading entries. For example, decide if, as a general rule, you will use:

Capitalized or lowercase entries

Singular or plural nouns

Gerunds or active verbs

The Heading and Subheading drop-down lists contain all index terms used in the current document. Check the lists before creating a new entry to avoid creating inconsistent or redundant entries. You cannot edit items in the lists.

In Reveal Codes, index marks are displayed as [Index]. To see the contents of the code, click it. Index codes include headings and subheadings separated by a semicolon, as in [Index:butterflies;monarch]. To delete a code, drag it from the Reveal Codes window.

Once you have marked text, heading and subheading entries remain listed even if you delete all occurrences of an entry. However, after you exit Corel WordPerfect and open it again, an entry will no longer appear if it does not appear as a mark in the document.

To mark text for an index

Related Concepts


concordance

A list of words or phrases that appear in a document. When you use a concordance file in an index, the words or phrases are listed with the page numbers where they occur.


To edit a QuickFormat heading
To edit a QuickFormat heading,

1	Click the heading. You do not have to select the text.

2	Make any editing changes to the paragraph format.

Tips

You can also use the Styles Editor to edit both character and paragraph QuickFormat styles. Click Format [image] Styles, select the style you want to edit (for example, QuickFormat1), then click Edit.

About Using QuickFormat to Copy Text Format


To create a template description
To create a template description,

1	With the template open for editing, click Description on the Template toolbar.

2	Type a description to identify the template.

Tips

You can also type a description when you save the template.

About Templates and Projects


To edit a code
To edit a code,

1	Double-click the code in the Reveal Codes window.

2	Use the dialog box that appears to change the code settings.

Tips

You can move a code by dragging it in the Reveal Codes window.

About Codes in a Document


To edit the text of a graphics box caption
To edit the text of a graphics box caption,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Edit Caption.

2	Edit the text or change the font attributes.

Tips

To change the position, width, rotation or numbering style of the caption, right-click the box and click Caption.

Related Topics

About Adding a Caption to a Graphics Box


About the Toolbar

Use the toolbar to access features you use frequently.

You can choose from several standard toolbars, or you can create your own. Many features have a corresponding toolbar so you can quickly access options specific to that feature. For example, when you create a table or an equation, the toolbar for that feature automatically displays.

To see a description of a toolbar button, you can display a QuickTip by moving the mouse pointer over the button. You can also right-click a toolbar to quickly display a list of other toolbars and options.

To display or hide toolbars

To move the toolbar

To specify toolbar, Property Bar, keyboard, or menu settings

To assign a macro to a toolbar button

To assign a template macro to a toolbar

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Outline/Bullets & Numbering

What do you want help with?

I want different spacing between bullets (or numbers) and text.

My list items aren't numbering like they used to.

I want an asterisk, not a bullet.

Why can't I put a blank line between list items?

Why are the bullet characters hollow squares?

How can I turn Bullets & Numbering off?

How do I turn off a bulleted or numbered list?

Why doesn't my numbered list or outline start with number one?

How can I change my list or outline numbers to bullets?

I don't want every line bulleted, just the first one.

Related Concepts


To send a printer command file to a printer
To send a printer command file to a printer,

1	Create a printer command file (see your printer documentation for more information).

2	Click Format [image] Typesetting [image] Printer Command.

3	In the Printer command filename text box, type the location and name of the printer command file you want to send.

Tips

After you send a printer command to your printer, you might need to reset the printer using another printer command to restore normal printer functions. To reset the printer, repeat the steps for inserting printer commands and re-enter the default values. See your printer documentation for instructions.

About Printer Commands


Why did I lose my document?

If you exit Corel WordPerfect without saving your document, or if a power or network failure occurs, you will lose your work unless you have turned on the Document Backup feature. To do this, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Document, then specify a backup folder and how often to back up your work. Then, when you are unable to exit Corel WordPerfect properly the backup copy of your document is saved in the backup folder you specify.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


To use QuickIndent
To use QuickIndent,

1	Press Tab at the beginning of any line in the paragraph except the first line.

Tips

If the first line of the paragraph does not begin with a tab, QuickIndent creates a hanging indent.

If the first line of the paragraph does begin with a tab, QuickIndent indents the paragraph.

You can indent the paragraph one more tab stop by pressing Tab again. To move it one tab stop to the left, press Shift+Tab.

Pressing Tab in the middle of the first line of an indented paragraph inserts an indent at that point. All succeeding lines in the paragraph are indented to that tab stop. Pressing Tab in any other line only inserts a regular tab.

By default, QuickIndent is on. You can turn it off in the QuickCorrect Options dialog box.

Related Topics

About QuickCorrect


To change Windows screen colors
To change Windows screen colors,

1	On the Windows Taskbar, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel [image] double-click Display [image] click Appearance.

2	Specify the colors you want to use.

Tips

To get information on an option in the dialog box, click [image] then click the option.

You can also right-click the Windows desktop, then click Properties [image] Appearance.

About Changing Windows Screen Colors


About the Menu

Use the menu to access Corel WordPerfect features with the mouse or keyboard. Click on a menu item to access it.

Each menu item has a mnemonic letter you can use to access the item. For example, press the Alt+F to access the File menu. With the File menu displayed, press Alt+O to display the Open dialog box.

You can create different menus or use the default menus. To see a description of a menu item, point to the option to display a QuickTip. You can also right-click a menu to quickly display a list of other menus and options.

Related Concepts


margin

A margin is the width of blank space from the edge of the text to the edge of the page. A document can have margins on the top, bottom, and sides of the page.


About Inserting Field Names (Merge)

When you click Insert Field on the Merge toolbar, you can select available fields or numbers from the associated data source. If you have not yet associated a data source, you can type the name of the field now and complete the association later. However, the field name or number you type must match exactly with the data source. If you want, you can click Data Source to make or change an association.

This dialog box remains open, allowing you to add several fields to your document without opening the dialog each time.

To insert merge codes

To create a form document for a merge

Related Concepts


About Envelope Already Exists

An envelope has already been defined. You can edit the current envelope definition, cancel it, or define a new one. In the Perform Merge dialog, you can also click Reset to cancel an envelope definition. However, doing so also resets all other options.

To merge envelopes

To change options for a merge

Related Concepts


About Data Text Files for Merges

You can format data files in either a text or table format. In text format, fields and records are marked with ENDFIELD and ENDRECORD codes.

When you edit a data text file manually, you must be careful to not delete the ENDFIELD and ENDRECORD codes. To avoid this problem, you can use Quick Data Entry to add and delete information in your data file.

You can also use the Merge toolbar to insert ENDFIELD, ENDRECORD, or other merge codes, to perform the merge, and to change other options for the merge.

To create a data file for a merge

To change a table to a data text file for a merge

To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry

To edit a merge data text file manually

To edit a merge data file's field names

To insert merge codes

To display or hide merge codes

To sort and print a data file

To go to the associated form document

To change a merge file into a regular document

Related Concepts


About Data Table Files for Merges

You can format data files in either a text or table format. In table format, information is placed in a table with the fields in vertical columns and records in horizontal rows.

To edit a data table file manually, you edit the information in any of the table cells. You can also use Quick Data Entry to add or delete information.

Use the Merge toolbar to add or delete rows (records) or columns (fields), insert other Merge codes, perform the merge, and change other options for creating the merge.

To change a table to a data text file for a merge

To create a data file for a merge

To edit a merge data file using Quick Entry

To edit fields in a data table

To edit records in a data table

To edit a merge data file's field names

To insert merge codes

To sort and print a data file

To go to the associated form document

To display or hide merge codes

To change a merge file into a regular document

Related Concepts


About Password Protection

Use Password Protect to assign a password to a Corel WordPerfect document. When you protect a document with a password, any associated backup or temporary files that WordPerfect creates are also protected. You can also remove the password from a file.

Enhanced Password Protection is case sensitive and includes powerful encryption capabilities. The Password feature is not available with all applications and file formats. If you save a password-protected file in a non-WP format or WP 4.2 format, the password is removed.

To assign a password to a file

To open a password-protected file

To remove a password from a file


To assign a password to a file
To assign a password to a file,

1	Click File [image] Save As.

2	Specify the file you want to password-protect.

3	Make sure the file format is Corel WordPerfect 5 or later.

4	Click Password protect, then click Save.

5	Type the password you want to use, then click OK.

6	Retype the password, then click OK.

About Password Protection


To remove a password from a file
To remove a password from a file,

1	Open the password-protected file.

2	With the password-protected file open, click File [image] Save As.

3	Specify the name of the file you just opened.

4	Click Password Protect to deselect it, then click Save.

5	Click Yes to replace the original password-protected file with no password.

About Password Protection


To open a password-protected file
To open a password-protected file,

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to open, then click Open.

3	Type the password for the file.

Tips

If you do not enter the correct password, you will not be able to open the file.

About Password Protection


About Installing the Web Browser

The Netscape Navigator browser is included with the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8. Insert the CD, then click Netscape Install.

Related Concepts


SQL

An SQL database is a relational database that uses a special language, the Structured Query Language, to store and access information in the database.


counter

A counter is a code you can use to automatically number items in a document. For example, if a document has a series of figures a counter is used to number them. You can then refer to these numbers in a list of figures or use the numbers for cross-references from text to a figure.


To enlarge or reduce an image (Zoom)
To enlarge or reduce an image (Zoom),

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click Zoom, then click [image] to make a scroll bar appear at the right side of the image.

3	Drag the arrows in the scroll bar to enlarge or shrink the image until it is the size you want it to be.

Tips

Click Zoom [image] 1:1 to restore the image to its original size. To undo all changes to the image, click Reset Attributes.

To use precise values to change the image size, click Edit Attributes [image] Scale Image, then specify a value for X (width) and Y (height). Or, specify a scale for both X and Y. If X and Y are not equal the image will be distorted.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To create a drawing
To create a drawing,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw Picture.

2	Create the drawing.

3	Click outside the drawing to save it in your document.

Tips

While creating the drawing, you can use the Corel Presentations menus and toolbars to create the drawing.

To insert a basic shape such as a circle or rectangle, click Insert [image] Shapes, then select an option.

Related Topics

About Graphics


To rotate an image inside a graphics box
To rotate an image inside a graphics box,

1	Right-click the image [image] click Image Tools.

2	Click Rotate.

3	Drag one of the corner rotation handles in the direction you want to rotate the image.

Tips

To use precise measurements, click Edit Attributes [image] Rotate image, then specify an angle of rotation.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Image


To spell-check a specified number of pages
To spell-check a specified number of pages,

1	Click Tools [image] Spell Check.

2	Click Number of Pages in the Check drop-down list.

3	Specify the number of pages, then click OK.

4	When Spell Checker stops on a word, click any of the available options, or edit the word in the Replace With text box.

Tips

By default, Spell Checker starts automatically when you open it. To change this setting, click Options [image] Auto start.

About Spell Check


About Spell Check

Use Spell Check to check for misspelled words, duplicate words, and irregular capitalization in documents, parts of documents, and text entry boxes.

Click [image] to get detailed help on Spell Check.

To spell-check a specified number of pages

Related Concepts


About Thesaurus

Use Thesaurus to find synonyms (words that are alike) and antonyms (words that are opposite). When Thesaurus displays replacements for a word, they are arranged by their relationship to that word. For example, all synonyms are grouped together under the Synonym heading.

Click [image] to get detailed help on Thesaurus.

Related Concepts


About Grammatik

Use Grammatik to proofread documents, parts of documents, and text entry boxes for grammar and style errors. You can choose a checking style designed for the type of writing you are checking, or you can create a customized checking style.

Click [image] to get detailed help on Grammatik.

Related Concepts


About Features that Require Generating (Index, List, etc.)

When you create a list, an index, cross-references, a table of contents, or a table of authorities, the last step is to generate. Generate searches through the marks you have made in the document and places the correct reference numbers (such as page, footnote, chapter, and caption numbers) in your list, index, etc.

When you edit a document, page and reference numbers change. When you have finished editing a document that contains a list, index, cross-reference, table of contents, or table of authorities, be sure to generate again so all reference numbers are updated.

Related Concepts


About Font Attributes

The Font Attributes button gives you quick access to attributes that change font appearance, such as bold, double underline, small caps, hidden text, and in web documents, blinking text. You can apply the attributes to the word at the insertion point, to selected text, or to the text you are about to type.

Related Concepts


To change footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes
To change footnotes to endnotes or endnotes to footnotes,

1	Right-click the toolbar [image] click Shipping Macros.

2	Click [image] or [image].

Tips

These buttons play macros that are included with Corel WordPerfect. You can also play the macros by clicking Tools [image] Macro [image] Play. The macros are called footend.wcm and endfoot.wcm.

About Footnotes and Endnotes


About Deleting Tables

You can delete a table cell, row, column, or the entire table.

When you delete a table cell, you can delete the contents or the formulas.

When you delete a row or column, you can delete the data, the structure, or both.  You can also delete just the formulas.

When you delete an entire table, you can delete the entire table, just the data or structure, or just the formulas.  You can also convert the table data to a merge data file.

To delete the contents of table cells

To delete the structure of a table column or row

To delete the contents or structure of an entire table

To cut or copy table rows or columns

To change a table to a data text file for a merge

Related Concepts


About Filling a Table with Incrementing Numbers or Dates

Use QuickFill to continue a pattern of incrementing values across a row or down a column.

You can use Roman numerals, days of the week, months, or quarters, even if only one cell is used to establish the pattern. To repeat incrementing or decrementing numbers, however, at least two cells with values are required to establish a pattern.

A pattern of values must increment or decrement based on addition or subtraction. You cannot fill in a pattern of values that increment or decrement based on multiplication or division.

You can select and fill in values in a row, column, or range.

To fill a table with incrementing numbers or dates

Related Concepts


To copy the box format to other boxes
To copy the box format to other boxes,

1	Format a graphics box the way you want it.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat.

3	Click other graphics boxes in the document.

4	When you finish, click Format [image] QuickFormat.

Tips

The box border, fill, wrap text, attach to, caption and size option are applied to other boxes.

You can also save the box settings as a style. Turn off the Property Bar, then right-click the box and click Edit Box. Click Save Style As, then type a name for the box style.

Related Topics

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


To apply a style to text
To apply a style to text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the style to take effect.

2	Click Format [image] Styles.

3	Select the style, then click Apply.

Tips

You can also select styles by clicking [image] on the Property Bar. Or, to open the Styles List, press Alt+F8.

Paragraph styles apply to the paragraph at the insertion point. Document styles apply to the entire document. For character styles, you need to select the text you want the style applied to.

The listed styles are found in the current document.  You can list styles found in other locations. Click Options [image] Setup and select the styles you want listed.

About Styles


source application

The application in which an embedded or linked object was created.


DDE

DDE can link a file created by a Windows application that supports DDE and a Corel WordPerfect document. This connection lets you transfer information from the source file into the WordPerfect document. If both files are open, the transferred information can be updated automatically when information changes in the source file.


About Plug and Play Functionality

Corel WordPerfect automatically handles changes in certain hardware functions.

About Screen Resolution Changes

About Network Drive Changes


About Changing Address Books to Merge Data Files

When you merge information from the Address Book, the records are interpreted as a merge data file at the time of the merge. If you want to save Address Book information as a merge data file, you can use the adrs2mrg.wcm macro included with Corel WordPerfect.

To change Address Books to merge data files

Related Concepts


To change Address Books to merge data files
To change Address Books to merge data files,

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Select adrs2mrg.wcm and click Play.

3	To change an entire address book, click All Records from Address Book, then select an Address Book.

4	To change selected records, click Selected Records [image] Select Records. Click the records you want and drag them to the Select Address box.

5	Click OK twice, then save the merge data file.

Tips

If the adrs2mrg.wcm macro is not listed, you might have to install it. Run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup program, select a Custom installation, then select the WordPerfect Macros option (a component of the WordPerfect option).

Related Topics

About Changing Address Books to Merge Data Files


About Editing a Graphics Box

When you click a graphics box, the graphics Property Bar appears. The Property Bar displays frequently used options for editing graphics. You can also right-click a graphic to display a QuickMenu with commonly used editing features.

Related Concepts


About Editing an Image

The Image Tools palette has been redesigned. It now lists names for each of the image options to make them easier to identify.  To display the new palette, right-click a graphics box, then click Image Tools. In the Image Tools palette, click [image], then click an option to display information about how that option works.

Related Concepts


About Screen Resolution Changes

Corel WordPerfect keeps document windows from becoming "lost" due to changes in screen resolution, even if Corel WordPerfect isn't running at the time of the change. For example, if you plug a notebook into a docking station with a higher screen resolution, Corel WordPerfect detects the change and adjusts the screen display to keep the main document window visible. Other document windows are cascaded to keep them partially visible.

Related Concepts


About Network Drive Changes

Corel WordPerfect helps you avoid losing information due to changes in network drives.

If a network drive notifies Corel WordPerfect that it is being disconnected, Corel WordPerfect checks the drive for open program files or documents. If there are any, you are prompted to close the programs and to save the documents to a different location before ending the connection.

If a network drive disconnects without letting Corel WordPerfect accept or reject its removal, Corel WordPerfect informs you that you are no longer connected to the drive and that you need to save your documents to a different location.

Related Concepts


embed

To insert a copy of information (an object) created by another application. When the information changes in the original file the information does not change in your Corel WordPerfect document. You can double-click the object (in most cases) to open the source application and edit how the object appears in Corel WordPerfect.


Why don't my table lines line up?

Your table lines may not line up with each other if you have changed the line styles of individual cell lines.

If the lines that don't line up are in a column, check the line style of every cell in the column to make sure all the lines in question (left or right) have the same line style selected. If those are correct, check the adjoining column of cell lines.

If the lines that don't line up are in a row, check the line style of the row to make sure all the lines in question (top or bottom) have the same line style selected. If those are correct, check the adjoining row of cell lines.

In addition, your table lines may not line up if you have added a border on top of a table line, or if you have joined two tables with different line styles or borders.

Troubleshooting Tables


About CUA (WPWin8) and DOS Keystrokes

Use the following CUA or DOS keystrokes to move around in Corel WordPerfect 8 or to select text. Use CUA keystrokes if you are using the WPWin 7 or WPWin 8 keyboard. Use DOS keystrokes if you are using the WPDOS 6.1 keyboard.

To move the insertion point to the	Press the CUA keystroke	Press the DOS keystroke
Beginning of a document	Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a document (before codes)	Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
Beginning of a line (before codes)	Home, Home	Home, Home, Home, Left Arrow
Bottom of the screen	PgDn	Home, Down Arrow
End of the document	Ctrl+End	Home, Home, Down Arrow
Next character	Right Arrow	Right Arrow
Next line down	Down Arrow	Down Arrow
Next page	Alt+PgDn	PgDn
Next word	Ctrl+Right Arrow	Ctrl+Right Arrow
Previous character	Left Arrow	Left Arrow
Previous line up	Up Arrow	Up Arrow
Previous page	Alt+PgUp	PgUp
Previous word	Ctrl+Left Arrow	Ctrl+Left Arrow
Specified page	Ctrl+G	Ctrl+Home
Previous document	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Shft+F3
Next document	Ctrl+F6	F3
Previous window	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Alt+Shft+F6
Next window	Ctrl+F6	Alt+F6
Previous pane	Shft+F6	Ctrl+Shift+F1
Next pane	F6	Ctrl+F1
To insert a	Press	Press
Back Tab (Margin Release)	Shift+Tab	Shift+Tab
Hard Page Break	Ctrl+Enter	Ctrl+Enter
Hard Return	Enter	Enter
Hard Space	Ctrl+Space	Home, Space
Hyphen, Hard	Ctrl+-	Home+-
Hyphen, Soft	Ctrl+Shft+-	Ctrl+-
To delete the	Press	Press
Character to the left	Backspace	Backspace
Current character	Delete	Delete
Rest of a page	Ctrl+Shft+Delete	Ctrl+PgDn
Rest of a line	Ctrl+Delete	Ctrl+End
Current word	Ctrl+Backspace	Ctrl+Backspace
Other editing keystrokes	Press	Press
Copy text to the Clipboard	Ctrl+C	Ctrl+Insert
Cut text to the Clipboard	Ctrl+X	Shft+Delete
Typeover	Insert	Insert
Cancel	Esc	Esc
Convert case of selected text	Ctrl+K	Ctrl+K
While in a column, to	Press	Press
Move one column to the right	Alt+Right Arrow	Alt+Right Arrow
Move one column to the left	Alt+Left Arrow	Alt+Left Arrow
Move to the top of the column	Alt+Home	Alt+Home
Move to the bottom of the column on the current page	Alt+End	Alt+End
While in a dialog, to	Press	Press
Move to the next control	Tab	Tab
Move to the previous control	Shft+Tab	Shift+Tab
Perform the default action	Enter	Enter
While in a table, to	Press	Press
Move up one cell	Alt+Up Arrow	Alt+Up Arrow
Move down one cell	Alt+Down Arrow	Alt+Down Arrow
Move right one cell	Alt+Right Arrow or Tab	Alt+Right Arrow or Tab
Move left one cell	Alt+Left Arrow or Shift+Tab	Alt+Left Arrow or Shift+Tab
Move one tab space	Indent (F7)	Indent (F4)
Decrease column width	Ctrl+,	Ctrl+,
Increase column width	Ctrl+.	Ctrl+.
To select (block) text	Press F8 or Shift+	Press Alt+F4 or F12, then press
One character to the right or left	Right Arrow or Left Arrow	Right Arrow or Left Arrow
One line up or down	Up Arrow or Down Arrow	Up Arrow or Down Arrow
To the end of the line	End	End
To the beginning of the line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
To the top of the screen	PgUp	- (number pad)
To the bottom of the screen	PgDn	+ (number pad)
To the first line on previous page	Alt+PgUp	PgUp
To the first line on the next page	Alt+PgDn	PgDn
One word to the right or left	Ctrl+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Left Arrow	Ctrl+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Left Arrow
One paragraph up or down	Ctrl+Up Arrow or Ctrl+Down Arrow (or press F8, then Shift+Enter)	Ctrl+Up Arrow or Ctrl+Down Arrow
To the beginning of the document	Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
To the end of the document	Ctrl+End	Home, Home, Down Arrow
To select a different toolbar, menu, or keyboard

About the DOS Keyboard Template

About the CUA (WPWin8) Keyboard Template


About the DOS Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift	Prev Pane		Show Symbols	Select Paragraph		Next Window
Ctrl	Next Pane	Spell Check	Redisplay	Select Sentence	Define Outline Style	Decimal Tab
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		Ruler Bar	Select Cell	Generate	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus		Reveal Codes	Select	Tools
Shift	Settings		Prev Doc	Double Indent	Date	Center Line
Normal	Help Contents	Find and Replace	Next Doc	Indent	Open	Bold
Ctrl+Shift
Ctrl	Insert	Font	Sort	Macro Record/Stop	Tab Set	Save
Alt+Shift
Alt	Create Table	Styles	Graphics	Play Macro	Create Table	Envelope
Shift	Print	Format	Merge	Open	Character	Bookmark
Normal	Close	Underline	End Field	Save As	Reveal Codes	Select
To select a different toolbar, menu, or keyboard

About the DOS Keyboard Template

About the CUA (WPWin8) Keyboard Template


About the CUA (WPWin8) Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift	QuickCorrect		Show Symbols			Next Doc
Ctrl	Spell Check	Find and Replace	Redisplay	Close	Draft View	Prev Doc
Ctrl+Alt
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		Ruler Bar		Hide Bars	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus	Find Previous	Reveal Codes	Exit	Page View	Next Window
Shift	Help: What Is?	Find Next	Save	New	Full Page View	Prev Pane
Normal	Help	Find and Replace	Save As	Open	Print	Next Pane
Ctrl+Shift	Double Indent				Vert Line	Table QuickFill
Ctrl	Hanging Indent	Margins	Generate	Macro Record/Stop	Horiz Line	Format Table
Alt+Shift	Decimal Tab					Calculate
Alt	Flush Right	Styles	Sort	Play Macro	Create Text Box	Table Numeric Format
Shift	Center Line	Select Cell	Merge	QuickMenu	Edit Text Box	Table Lines/Fill
Normal	Indent	Select	Font	Menu	Image	Create Table
Related Topics

About CUA (WPWin8) and DOS Keystrokes


About the DOS Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift	Prev Pane		Show Symbols	Select Paragraph		Next Window
Ctrl	Next Pane	Spell Check	Redisplay	Select Sentence	Define Outline Style	Decimal Tab
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		Ruler Bar	Select Cell	Generate	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus		Reveal Codes	Select	Tools
Shift	Settings		Prev Doc	Double Indent	Date	Center Line
Normal	Help Contents	Find and Replace	Next Doc	Indent	Open	Bold
Ctrl+Shift
Ctrl	Insert	Font	Sort	Macro Record/Stop	Tab Set	Save
Alt+Shift
Alt	Create Table	Styles	Graphics	Macro Play	Create Table	Envelope
Shift	Print	Format	Merge	Open	Character	Bookmark
Normal	Close	Underline	End Field	Save As	Reveal Codes	Select
Related Topics

About CUA (WPWin8) and DOS Keystrokes


To create a custom date/time format
To create a custom date/time format,

1	Click Insert [image] Date/Time [image] New Format.

2	In the Edit date/time format text box, delete any codes you do not want and click where you want to add codes.

3	Click Year, Month, Day, or Time, then select a code and click Insert.

4	Add words, punctuation, or other codes to the format.

Tips

The Date/time sample box shows how the format will look in the document.

About Adding the Date and Time in a Document


Can I use documents from Corel WordPerfect 4.2 - 7 in version 8?

Corel WordPerfect 8 can directly open documents created in any of the previous DOS or Windows versions. Click File [image] Open and type the name of the document file.

After you edit the document in version 8, you are prompted to specify which version you want to save the document in. If you save it in WordPerfect 6/7/8 format, you cannot open the document again in an earlier version (4.x or 5.x). Also, if you use features only available in version 8, the document will contain "unknown" codes if you open it in version 6.x or 7.

Troubleshooting Upgrading from Previous Versions of Corel WordPerfect


Will Corel WordPerfect 8 documents work with WordPerfect 4.2 - 7?

To make sure that the document you created can be used with previous versions of Corel WordPerfect for DOS or Windows, you need to save it in the proper format. To do this, click File [image] Save As. Select a WordPerfect format from the File type drop-down list.

Some of the features available in Corel WordPerfect 8 will not convert to earlier versions of the product.

Corel WordPerfect 8 uses the same file format as version 7.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


To change whether the File menu lists the last opened documents
To change whether the File menu lists the last opened documents,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment.

2	Click Interface [image] Display last open documents on the File menu.

Related Topics

About Environment Settings


Letterhead

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including letters with predesigned letterheads. Click File [image] New, then select a letter project.

When creating custom letterheads for your company, you may find the following tools and ideas useful.

Add images (clip art, borders)

Shape and contour text

Quickly add horizontal lines

Create white text on black background

Create headers/footers for subsequent pages

Create a letterhead template

Make letterhead file into a template

Save letterhead as a style so it can't be messed up

Format a letterhead along with subsequent pages

Related Concepts


About PerfectExperts and Templates Shipped with Corel WordPerfect

Corel WordPerfect 8 includes many PerfectExpert projects and templates, or ready-made documents, that help you to perform both simple and complex tasks quickly. There are PerfectExpert projects for creating book reports, calendars, exams, fax cover sheets, letters, memos, newsletters, and web pages. Corel WordPerfect even includes games such as Hangman and Tic-Tac-Toe.

Click File [image] New, then select a category from the drop-down list. The PerfectExpert projects are organized in categories such as Business Correspondence, Legal, and Education. If you use a particular PerfectExpert frequently, you can click it, then click Copy to Favorites.

About the PerfectExpert

To find Help topics

Related Concepts


The text in the columns is narrower than I expected.

There could be an indent before the text. Click in the text, then click View [image] Reveal Codes and delete any Indent codes.

Troubleshooting Columns


Troubleshooting Columns

What do you want help with?

The text in the columns is narrower than I expected.

Why can't I see the columns?

Why won't the newspaper columns balance?

Related Concepts


Why won't the newspaper columns balance?

You might have extra hard returns inserted at the bottom of a column, which would add extra space in that column.

You might have formatting options that would conflict with columns. Move to the paragraph that's not balancing and click Format [image] Keep Text Together. Deselect all the options.

Troubleshooting Columns


Why can't I see the columns?

You might not have enough text in the first column to wrap to the next column. When the first column is full the second column will display.

The column margins might be so wide that you can't view all columns. To see where the margins extend to, click View [image] Guidelines [image] Columns.

Troubleshooting Columns


The address isn't printing in the right place in the upper corner.

You can check the margins by clicking Format [image] Envelope [image] Options. If you are using the correct margins, you might need to shift the printing on the page. Click File [image] Print [image] Two-Sided Printing. Specify a measurement in the Shift image for binding text box, then click the edge of the paper where the printing is shifted.

Troubleshooting Envelopes


I need a different size of envelope.

Corel WordPerfect 8 includes many standard envelope sizes, but if you need to create a different one, click Format [image] Envelope [image] Create New Definition.

Troubleshooting Envelopes


Troubleshooting Problems with Help or Manual Instructions

What do you want help with?

I can't find the menu items or icon listed in the Help steps.

I pressed the keystrokes, but they didn't work.

Related Concepts


I pressed the keystrokes, but they didn't work.

Any keystrokes listed as a tip in Help or the manual apply only if you are using the default WPWin 8 keyboard. You may have the WPDOS 6.l keyboard, or a custom keyboard, selected. To see what keyboard you have selected or to select a different keyboard, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image]  click Keyboards.

If you have the WPDOS 6.1 keyboard selected, see About the DOS Keyboard Template for the DOS-equivalent keystrokes (click Related Topics below).

To change to the WPWin 8 keyboard as you work in a document, press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Backspace.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Problems with Help or Manual Instructions


Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes

What do you want help with?

Why isn't the footnote line printing?

My footnote or endnote font isn't the same as the document's.

Why can't I see my footnotes or endnotes?

How can I delete the line between the footnotes and text?

I deleted the footnote text, but the number is still in my document.

How can I print all the endnotes on a separate page?

Related Concepts


I deleted the footnote text, but the number is still in my document.

You must delete the footnote reference that corresponds with the footnote text. Find the number in the document and delete it.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


How can I delete the line between the footnotes and text?

Click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote [image] Footnote Number [image] Options [image] Separator, then select X (None) for the Line Style.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


How can I print all the endnotes on a separate page?

Endnotes are automatically printed at the end of the document.

You can insert a page break before the endnotes. Click Insert [image] New Page.

Or, to click where you want the endnotes to start, click Insert [image] Footnote/Endnote, click Endnote, then click Endnote Placement.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


Why isn't the footnote line printing?

Graphic lines don't print in draft mode. Click File [image]  Print [image]  Details and make sure Print text only is not selected.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


Why can't I see my footnotes or endnotes?

Click View [image] Page or Two Pages. Footnotes and endnotes don't display on the page when Draft is selected.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


The header or footer doesn't appear on the first page.

The header or footer code is probably not on the first page of the document. It must be somewhere on the first page.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


Why did the top margin move after I added a header?

The header appears below the top margin. If you want the main document text to be below the top margin and the header above it, you can drag the Header/Footer guidelines. To view the guidelines, click View [image] Guidelines [image] Header/Footer.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


Why didn't the header or footer print?

Some printers cannot print to the edge of the paper. If the header or footer extends into this area, your printer won't be able to print it, even though you can see it in Page Mode.

Check your printer manual for the margins in this nonprinting area. Then change the header/footer margins by dragging the guidelines. To view the guidelines, click View [image] Guidelines [image] Header/Footer.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


My header and footer font isn't the same as the document's.

To select the font you want for all parts of a document, including headers, footers, page numbers, and footnotes, change the document default font. Click File [image] Document [image] Default Font, then select the font you want.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


Why are my headers printing on top of each other?

Try typing one at the left margin and the other flush right (click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right). Or type each header on a separate line.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


Why can't I see my headers or footers?

Click View [image] Page or Two Pages. Headers and footers don't display on the page when Draft view is selected.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


I can't print tractor-fed labels in the right position.

When you print on tractor-fed labels, position the labels in the printer so that the first line of text will print on the first line of each label. To position the labels, make sure label margins (not page margins) are set to 0", 0". Then print a test label and reposition the labels until the information prints correctly.

Troubleshooting Labels


Why doesn't the text print on the edge of some labels?

Labels that go to the edge of the sheet may not print correctly on printers with a wide unprintable zone. Also, printing the same label on different printers may give different results. You need to adjust the label definition to account for the printer's unprintable zone.

Troubleshooting Labels


Calendars

To quickly create a calendar, click File [image] New [image] Calendar, Monthly. You can also use the Calendar Expert to help you create a calendar for any month in a specified year (1976-2016). Click File [image] New [image] select Custom WP Templates from the drop-down list [image] double-click <Calendar Expert>.

Here are some tools to help you create your own distinctive calendars.

Create a calendar using a table

Fill in an incrementing pattern of numbers

Make the calendar look good (SpeedFormat)

Use TextArt to create fancy text

Add images

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Display Problems

What do you want help with?

I can't see all the text in a line at once.

When I edit a header, the shadow cursor doesn't show in the document.

My table redraws too slowly. How can I speed it up?

There are too many bars on my document window.

Why are the dialog boxes missing things like buttons?

How can I see letters that are too small to read?

It takes too long to scroll through a document.

What is the slender gray line that follows my insertion point?

My fractions don't look the same.

How can I turn off the yellow Help boxes?

Why do the words appear to run together on-screen?

Why are dots appearing between my words on the document window?

What are the red and blue marks under some words?


Why are the dialog boxes missing things like buttons?

The problem occurs with some video drivers. Contact the manufacturer of your video driver to see if a newer driver is available to fix the problem. Or review your display driver setup in the Windows Control Panel.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


There are too many bars on my document window.

To work with a larger editing window, you can close any or all toolbars, including the Ruler and Application Bar. Click View [image] Hide Bars to turn them all off. To view them again, press Escape.

To turn off individual bars, click View [image] Toolbars.

To change the display of scroll bars, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


How can I see letters that are too small to read?

You can change the view of the document by clicking View [image] Zoom.

Depending on your video driver, you might be able to change the size of text in documents, dialog boxes, and menus. Right-click on the desktop, then click Properties.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


What is the slender gray line that follows my insertion point?

When you move the insertion point through text, a shadow cursor moves through the text. This pointer shows where the insertion point will appear when you click the mouse. To turn it off as you work, click View [image] Shadow Cursor. To change how and where it works, and to change its appearance, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


How can I turn off the yellow Help boxes?

The yellow Help boxes are called QuickTips. To turn them off, click Tools [image]  Settings [image]  double-click Environment. Click Interface [image]  Show QuickTips.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


How can I change my list or outline numbers to bullets?

Select the entire list or outline, click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image] Bullets, then click a bullet style.

Troubleshooting Outline/Bullets & Numbering


Why can't I put a blank line between list items?

Press Enter twice to add an extra line space between list or outline items as you type them. To insert a blank line between existing items, click at the end of the line above where you want the blank line, press Return, then press Backspace to delete the outline number code.

Troubleshooting Outline/Bullets & Numbering


How can I turn Bullets & Numbering off?

Click at the end of the list or outline, then click the left side of the [image] button.

Troubleshooting Outline/Bullets & Numbering


Why doesn't my numbered list or outline start with number one?

If there is another numbered list or outline earlier in the document, you need to start a new list or outline. Click at the beginning of the new outline or list, then click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image] Start new outline or list.

Troubleshooting Outline/Bullets & Numbering


Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting

What do you want help with?

Why are my mouse buttons reversed?

I selected and bolded text, but it was deleted when I started typing.

When I click in the margin, text is selected.

I don't want Corel WordPerfect to automatically select a word.

I didn't mean to do that.

Why doesn't Undo always work?

Why can't I type two spaces after a colon?

Can I use my Corel WordPerfect 6.1 or 7 keyboard in version 8?

I began typing, but the text didn't appear where I expected it.

I don't want to learn new Windows keystrokes.

I selected text, but now I want to select more.

Why can't I use the mouse to select a graphic?

Why can't I drag to another page?

Why can't I drag selected text to another document?

My fractions don't look the same.

Why can't I type a lowercase letter after a period?

Can I select multiple areas in a document by using the Ctrl key?

When I type, it deletes the text that is already there.

Why are dots appearing between my words on the document window?

Why does typing 1/2 turn into [image]?

Related Concepts


Why are dots appearing between my words on the document window?

Show Symbols is on. You can choose which symbols you want to display in your document. To hide the symbols for all documents, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Symbols [image] Show symbols on current and new documents.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


I don't want Corel WordPerfect to automatically select a word.

Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment [image] deselect Select whole words instead of characters.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why doesn't Undo always work?

You can undo changes made to text, graphics, or tables. However, some actions, such as scrolling or saving a document, cannot be reversed using Undo.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Can I use my Corel WordPerfect 6.1 or 7 keyboard in version 8?

You can select a standard WPDOS 6.1, WPWin 7, or WPWin 8 keyboard to use with Corel WordPerfect 8. To select a standard keyboard, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Keyboards, then select the keyboard you want to use.

You can also import a custom keyboard you created in Corel WordPerfect 7 for use with Corel WordPerfect 8. To do this you must copy the keyboard from the version 7 template to a version 8 template.

1	Copy the Corel WordPerfect 7 template, wp7us.wpt, to the \Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates folder.

2	To add the keyboard to an existing template, click File [image] New, select the category and template in which you want to use the keyboard, then click Options [image] Edit WP Template.

3	To add the keyboard to a new template, click File [image] New [image] Options [image] Create WP Template.

4	Click Copy/Remove Object on the Template toolbar.

5	Select the template you are copying from.

6	On the Object Type drop-down list, select Keyboards.

7	Select the keyboard from the list on the left, then click Copy>>.

The keyboard is available to use when you have that template selected. You can copy it to other templates as well.

Tips

If you want all the objects from your Corel WordPerfect 7 template to be available, save it as your additional objects template. Copy wp7us.wpt to the Custom WP Templates folder as described above. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] Files [image] Template. In the Additional objects template box, specify the path and filename for the wp7us template. Click OK, then double-click the Customize icon and click Keyboards. You can select from any of the keyboards you used in WordPerfect 7.

Troubleshooting Upgrading from Previous Versions of Corel WordPerfect


I don't want to learn new Windows keystrokes.

Corel WordPerfect 8 uses a default keyboard that is consistent with many Windows applications. For example, the keyboard uses F1 for Help, Escape for Cancel, and Ctrl+F for Find. Learning the keystrokes on the default Windows keyboard can make it easier to switch between Windows applications, but you can add or change keystrokes to make using WordPerfect 8 comfortable for you.

If you are accustomed to using DOS versions of WordPerfect, you can select the WPDOS 6.1 Keyboard. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Customize [image] click Keyboards. You can also use the keyboard editor to create a custom keyboard with the shortcut keys you like to use.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why can't I use the mouse to select a graphic?

If you selected Behind text in the Wrap text dialog box, you might have trouble selecting a graphics image if text runs through it.

To select the graphics image, place the mouse pointer over the image, right-click, then click Select Box.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why can't I drag selected text to another document?

You need to have both documents displayed in the document window. Open both documents, then click Window [image] Tile Top to Bottom (or Tile Side by Side). Select the text and drag it to the other document.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why can't I type a lowercase letter after a period?

In addition to fixing typos on the fly, QuickCorrect makes certain consistency changes, such as adding an initial cap to each new sentence. To turn this QuickCorrect option off, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go [image] Capitalize next letter after end-of-sentence punctuation.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding

What do you want help with?

When I click an object, "can't turn into an OLE object" appears.

Why can't I set up a DDE link?

Why can't I set up an OLE link?

Why can't I link to my file?

How do I edit an embedded sound or video clip?

Why doesn't the source object open when I double-click it?

Why can't I change or update a link?

Why can't I import my database using ODBC?

Related Concepts


Why can't I change or update a link?

Links is dimmed on the Edit menu if a linked object is selected in the document. Click on some text in the document to deselect the linked object, then click Edit [image] Links to change the source of the object, break the link to the object, or update the object.

Objects is dimmed on the Edit menu if no object is selected in the document. To edit the linked information, click on the object you want to edit, then click Edit [image] Object. You can also double-click the object to edit it (if the object is not a sound or video clip).

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


Why can't I link to my file?

You must save a file to disk before you can link to it. If the file has not been saved, the link options will not be available in the Paste Special dialog or in the Import Spreadsheet and Database dialog. If you want to create a link to an unsaved file you must switch back to the source application, save the file, then copy the selection to the clipboard again.

You can embed a file that has not been saved. In this case, the information exists only within your Corel WordPerfect document.

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


Why doesn't the source object open when I double-click it?

The application needed to edit the object might not be available on your system. Reinstall the application.

The source application might have a dialog box open. Switch to the source application and close the dialog box. Double-click the object again in Corel WordPerfect.

You might not have pasted the object as an OLE link or embedded object. Click Edit [image] Reveal Codes. Click the Box code that represents the object. If the code does not say "linked object" or "embedded object", it was not embedded as an OLE object. Right-click and choose an option from the pop-up menu to change how the object looks in WordPerfect, or delete the object and insert it or paste it as an OLE object.

Your system might not have enough resources to open the application. Close unnecessary applications or windows and double-click the object again.

If it is a linked object, make sure the source file has not been moved, renamed, or deleted. If the source file has been moved or renamed you can use Edit [image] Links [image] Change Source to change the source for the link.

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


Why can't I see the new button I added?

There is not enough room on the screen to display the new button.

Show only icons on the buttons. To do this, right-click the bar, then click Settings [image] Options [image] Picture.

Click the small scroll bar on the right side of the toolbar to see the new button. If there is no scroll bar, right-click the toolbar, then click Settings [image] Options [image] Show scroll bar.

Remove other buttons to make room to display the new button.

Troubleshooting Toolbars and Menus


Where is my Ruler?

The Ruler can be turned off. To display the Ruler, click View [image] Ruler.

Troubleshooting Toolbars and Menus


I can't find the menu items or icon listed in the Help steps.

The menus and icons listed in the steps are for the default menu and toolbars shipped with Corel WordPerfect 8. You might have a custom menu or toolbar selected.

Also, toolbars can appear differently in different contexts. For example, a different Property Bar appears when a graphic is selected than appears when text is selected. Check to see what is selected in the document window.

To restore the default menus or toolbars,

1	Check which menu you are using. Right-click the menu and select <WordPerfect 8 Menu> to restore the default menu.

2	Right-click a toolbar to see which toolbars are displayed. Select WordPerfect 8 to use the default toolbar. To reset a toolbar to its default settings, right-click the toolbar, then click Settings [image] Reset.

Note: Your system administrator can specify custom menus and toolbars when Corel WordPerfect is installed using a network. Check with your system administrator if you need changes made to your default menus or toolbars.

Troubleshooting Toolbars and Menus


Troubleshooting Formatting Codes

What do you want help with?

The code isn't inserted at the insertion point.

Can I turn off Auto Code Placement?

I know a code is there, but I can't see it.

The wrong date is displayed.

When I delete a code a prompt asks if I want to. Can I turn this off?

How do I delete a code?

Related Concepts


When I delete a code a prompt asks if I want to. Can I turn this off?

Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment [image] click Prompts [image] deselect Confirm deletion of codes and stop insertion point at hidden codes.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


Why can't I import my database using ODBC?

Install the ODBC driver and name a data source using the setup program that came with your database application.

Configure the database drivers. Click Start [image] Run [image] Settings [image] Control Panel [image] double-click ODBC.

Install the suite database engine. Run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup and specify a Custom Install. Click Required Shared Components [image] Components [image] Database Engine 3.0.

Import or link to the database without using ODBC. Corel WordPerfect supports several popular formats.

Export the database information to a file in ASCII delimited text format, then import that file into your document.

Troubleshooting Spreadsheet and Database Importing and Linking


Why can't I set up an OLE link?

I selected the information in the other application, but Paste Link is dimmed on the Edit menu in Corel WordPerfect.

The source file has not been named. Save the file in the source application.

The information was created in an application that does not support DDE or OLE linking. If you are trying to link to a spreadsheet or database application, you can use a spreadsheet or database link. Or, use the Windows Object Packager utility to create an OLE package.

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


Why can't I set up a DDE link?

The type of link you create depends on the types of links the source application supports and which format you select in the Paste Special dialog box. The text at the bottom of the Paste Special dialog box tells how each format will appear in your document.

For example, to paste Corel Quattro Pro information as a DDE Link into Corel WordPerfect, click WB1 in the Paste Special dialog box.

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


My printer wrinkles the envelope.

Many printers have a switch or knob in the back that allows paper to pass straight through without being wrinkled. Many printers also have a special tray for envelopes. Refer to your printer manual to find out how to take advantage of your printer's capabilities.

Troubleshooting Envelopes


Troubleshooting Comments and Hidden Text

What do you want help with?

Why can't I see hidden text?

I want to print the comments in a document.

I can't see the comments I added.

Related Concepts


Why can't I see hidden text?

Hidden text will display as normal text unless the option to view it has been turned off. If you know your document contains hidden text but you can't see it, or if text seems to be missing (it may be hidden), you can display hidden text in the document window. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display. Make sure that Hidden Text is selected.

Troubleshooting Comments and Hidden Text


I can't see the comments I added.

If you are using Draft view, your comments display as shaded text. However, in Page or Two Pages view, comments display as icons in the left margin area of the document window. If you have specified user initials in Environment Settings, the icon displays with your initials. If you haven't specified initials, the icon displays as [image]. To see the comment text, click the icons.

Troubleshooting Comments and Hidden Text


I want to print the comments in a document.

You can print a comment by itself on a page. However, you can print a comment with the document only if it has been converted to text. To convert a comment to text, click after the comment, then click Insert [image] Comment [image] Convert to Text.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Comments and Hidden Text


Troubleshooting Converting File Formats

What do you want help with?

How do I convert documents from older versions of Corel WordPerfect?

I can't see the document I'm looking for in the Open dialog box.

How do I convert documents created with another word processor?

In the converted document, the fonts are different.

Why are the line breaks and page breaks different?

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists

What do you want help with?

I want different spacing between bullets (or numbers) and text.

I want an asterisk, not a bullet.

How do I turn off a bulleted or numbered list?

My list items aren't numbering like they used to.

I don't want every line bulleted, just the first one.

Why are the bullet characters hollow squares?


I can't see the document I'm looking for in the Open dialog box.

Make sure the Look in text box displays the correct drive or folder. If you don't know where the file is located, use QuickFinder to search for it. Specify the filename to look for, then click Find.

Make sure the File type text box displays the correct file format. The default file type changes depending on the application and feature you are using.

If the document is on a network drive and you don't see the drive in the Look in text box, click Tools [image] Map Network Drive, and map the drive. If the drive will not map to the path you specify, you may not have rights to that location. See your System Administrator.

Troubleshooting Opening Files


I don't want every line bulleted, just the first one.

When you press Enter in a bulleted list, a new item begins with a bullet. Instead of pressing Enter at the end of every line, just keep typing and let the text automatically "wrap" to the next line. Press Enter only at the end of the paragraph.

To remove unwanted bullets in existing text,

1	Click at the end of the line that immediately precedes the bullet.

2	Press the Spacebar, then press Delete.

Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists


Why did my graphics disappear when I converted my document?

Make sure the option to view graphics in your document is enabled. Click View, then make sure Graphics is selected. If you can see your graphics, but they do not print, click File [image] Print, then make sure that Print graphics is selected.

Related Concepts


To use a symbol as a bullet
To use a symbol as a bullet,

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image] Bullets.

2	Click More bullets, select a symbol, then click Insert and Close.

Tips

To edit an existing bullet format, click the format, then click Edit. In the Create Format dialog box, click the Number/Bullet drop-down list, then click More to open the Symbols dialog box.

About Bulleted Lists


In the converted document, the fonts are different.

The converted file may have originally contained different fonts than those you have installed on your computer. If the original font is not available, Corel WordPerfect matches it as closely as possible with a font that is available.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Converting File Formats


My list items aren't numbering like they used to.

The first line of a list item begins with a paragraph style. Corel WordPerfect automatically inserts the style code when you use Outline/Bullets & Numbering or QuickBullets. If you delete this code the list ends.

To resume the list using Outline/Bullets & Numbering, click at the beginning of the list, click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, then click the numbering or bullet type you were using.

To resume the list using QuickBullets, type the number or asterisk at the beginning of the next line, type any punctuation used in the preceding items (such as a period or right parenthesis), then press Tab or Indent.

To apply numbering to selected text, click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering, then click the numbering or bullet style you want.

Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists


Why are the bullet characters hollow squares?

Bullets use Corel WordPerfect Symbols. When hollow squares appear, it means that not all the symbol fonts are installed. To reinstall the fonts,

1	Run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup from the Start menu.

2	Follow the prompts, selecting a Custom installation.

3	In the Custom Installation dialog box, click Selection Options [image] Deselect All.

4	Click Required Components [image] click Components.

5	Click PerfectFit [image] Components, then select Symbol Fonts. None of the other components need to be selected.

6	Complete the installation.

Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists


I want different spacing between bullets (or numbers) and text.

Bulleted and numbered lists automatically indent text one tab setting after the bullet or number.

To change the distance between the bullet or number and the text,

1	If the Ruler is not displayed, click View [image] Ruler.

2	Click at the beginning of the list, then drag the tab marker (triangle) on the Ruler to a new position.

Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists


Why are the line breaks and page breaks different?

Although Corel WordPerfect attempts to preserve the format of the original document, some changes may occur because of differences between applications. You can adjust such things as the margins, font, and line spacing.

You can also use Make It Fit (click Format [image] Make It Fit) to fit the document on a specific number of pages.

Troubleshooting Converting File Formats


How do I convert documents from older versions of Corel WordPerfect?

Files saved in Corel WordPerfect 5.x format on any platform (DOS, Windows, or OS/2) are compatible with WordPerfect versions 5.x through 8 on any other platform.

You can convert files created in earlier versions of WordPerfect when you open them in Corel WordPerfect 8. You can then save the document in WordPerfect 8 format or in the document's original format.

Troubleshooting Converting File Formats


How do I convert documents created with another word processor?

Open the document. Corel WordPerfect detects the document format. The Convert File Format dialog box appears with the format of the file displayed. If the correct format is not listed, select the closest format. You can then save the document in WordPerfect 6/7/8 format or in the document's original format.

Troubleshooting Converting File Formats


Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents

What do you want help with?

What are all those buttons on the Review Document dialog box?

I routed a master document, but it doesn't include the subdocuments.

I can't delete marked text because someone has changed it.

Why can't I compare two documents?

What do I need to send documents by e-mail?

The document I routed doesn't show any of the colored markings.

How do I get rid of the redlined and strikeout text?

I can't change the color I used to mark my changes to a document.

I can't open the subdocuments for the master document.

I don't want my document review changes marked in color.

I want several people to edit a routed document at the same time.

In a routed document, I can't undelete deleted text.

I'm not hooked up to a network, can I still route documents?

When I print a document, the color markings don't print in color.

How can I see a routed document as is, without all the markings?

I edited a routed document, but my changes are not marked.

When I edit a routed document, some features are dimmed.

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Finding Files

What do you want help with?

I can't find a file I know is on a drive or in a folder.

Why did I lose my document?


How do I turn off a bulleted or numbered list?

At the end of the list press, Enter [image] Backspace.

Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists


I want an asterisk, not a bullet.

When you type an asterisk followed by a tab or indent, QuickBullets begins a bulleted list. To turn this feature off, click Tools [image]  QuickCorrect [image]  Format-As-You-Go, then deselect the QuickBullets check box.

You can also create a bulleted list that uses an asterisk for the bullets. To do this,

1	Click Insert [image]  Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image]  Bullets.

2	Click More Bullets.

3	Type 0,42 in the Number box to select the asterisk character, then click Insert and Close.

This creates a new type of bulleted list that uses asterisks for the bullet character. Click OK to begin creating the list. To use this type of list again, click Insert [image]  Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image]  Bullets and select the list.

Troubleshooting Bulleted and Numbered Lists


How do I get rid of the redlined and strikeout text?

When you compare two versions of a document, redline and strikeout are used to mark deleted, moved, and added text. To remove the markings, click File [image] Document [image] Remove Compare Markings, then click OK.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


I can't find a file I know is on a drive or in a folder.

Make sure the Look in text box displays the correct drive or folder. If you don't know where the file is located, use QuickFinder to search for it. Specify the file name to look for, then click Find.

If you have used QuickFinder to find a file, make sure that the search criteria is correct for the file you are looking for.

Make sure the File type text box displays the correct file format. The default file type changes depending on the application and feature you are using.

If the document is on a network drive and you don't see the drive in the Look in text box, click Tools [image] Map Network Drive, and map the drive. If the drive will not map to the path you specify, you may not have rights to that location. See your System Administrator.

The file you are looking for may be hidden. To show all files, including hidden files, click the Windows Start button [image] Programs [image] Windows Explorer, then click View [image] Options [image] Show All Files.

Troubleshooting Finding Files


Why can't I compare two documents?

You cannot compare two documents with the same filename. Rename either the current document or the document you are comparing it to.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


Troubleshooting Fonts

What do you want help with?

In the converted document, the fonts are different.

Why do the words appear to run together on-screen?

Why do I have little boxes in the Symbol dialog box?

Related Concepts


Why do I have little boxes in the Symbol dialog box?

You need to reinstall the fonts used for the Symbol character sets.

1	Run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup from the Start menu.

2	Follow the prompts, selecting a Custom installation.

3	In the Custom Installation dialog box, click Selection Options [image] Deselect All.

4	Click Required Components [image] click Components.

5	Click PerfectFit [image] Components, then select Symbol Fonts. None of the other components need to be selected.

6	Complete the installation.

About Fonts


Why does my text print differently than it looks on the screen?

If you are using Draft view, the fonts might look different on-screen than they do as printed fonts. To view fonts and other document attributes as they will print, click View, then select either Page or Two Pages.

The font in your document may not be available in the printer you are using. If so, Corel WordPerfect replaces the font with the closest match available on that printer. The match may not be exact. You can select a font that your printer uses, or try selecting a TrueType font.

The font in your document may be available from your printer, but may not have a corresponding screen font. As a result, the font on screen may or may not accurately represent the printer font. Selecting TrueType fonts in your document will provide better consistency between screen display and printed text.

Text might appear to run together or normal text might appear bolded. The problem appears more frequently when using a font size 12 points or smaller. You might wish to start Corel WordPerfect using the /DM=90 startup option to avoid this problem. Or, if you have Microsoft Plus! for windows installed, click Start [image]  Settings [image]  Control Panel  [image]  Plus!, then clear the Smooth Edges of Screen Fonts check box.

You can change font replacement settings for screen fonts and for printer fonts. Click Related Topics below for more information.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Fonts


Troubleshooting Internet Publisher

What do you want help with?

Why is my text red with a double underline?

Will color text in a document stay colored when published to HTML?

Why are my images "Not Available"?

I can't get my browser to work with Corel WordPerfect.

Why do I lose formatting when I publish to the Internet?

How can I be sure what my document will look like on the Internet?

Related Concepts


Why do I lose formatting when I publish to the Internet?

Most World Wide Web documents are written in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). When you format an existing Corel WordPerfect document as a web document, Internet Publisher deletes WordPerfect codes that have no HTML equivalent and modifies others for consistency with HTML standards. For a list of WordPerfect codes that are deleted or modified, see:

About Creating a Web Document

Troubleshooting Internet Publisher


I can't get my browser to work with Corel WordPerfect.

Corel WordPerfect is designed to work with your registered browser. The browser software may not be installed or registered correctly.

To install a browser, insert the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 CD, run Setup and specify a Custom Install. Click Corel Central, then click Netscape Communicator. If you wish to use a browser not included with the Corel WordPerfect Suite, refer to the documentation for that product.

To use the browser to connect to the Internet, you must have a modem installed and connected to a phone line, and you must have an account with an Internet Service Provider. Alternately, you must have a network connection that allows you to connect to the Internet.

About Installing the Web Browser

Troubleshooting Internet Publisher


How can I be sure what my document will look like on the Internet?

The Web Editor simulates the way a document will look in a browser. Click [image] to preview the document in Netscape Navigator or your registered browser. An individual browser can change the background color and how some of the text appears, so your view may differ from another person's view.

Tips

Publish a Corel WordPerfect document to Corel Barista if retaining the exact formatting is essential.

When you preview a document, Java applets will not run. Publish to HTML, then open the document in your browser to see the Java applet running in a browser.

Troubleshooting Internet Publisher


How do I edit an embedded sound or video clip?

If you double-click a sound or video clip, the clip plays. To edit the clip, right-click the object, then click Edit.

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


Troubleshooting Opening Files

What do you want help with?

How do I open a file I want to protect with a password?

I can't open this document.

I can't save changes to this file.

Why doesn't the password I typed to open the file work?

I can't see the document I'm looking for in the Open dialog box.

I can't open a file created in Corel WordPerfect for DOS.


Why doesn't the password I typed to open the file work?

If you selected Enhanced Password Protection when you saved the document in Corel WordPerfect versions 7 or 8, the password is case-sensitive. Make sure you are typing the password in the correct case. For example, if you saved the document with the password SAM in all capital letters, you must type the password SAM in all capital letters again to retrieve the document.

In addition, the Enhanced Password Protection available in Corel WordPerfect versions 7 and 8 cannot be read by earlier versions of WordPerfect such as WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows 3.1. If you wish to have the document available to earlier versions of WordPerfect, resave the document and specify original password protection.

Troubleshooting Opening Files


I can't open a file created in Corel WordPerfect for DOS.

Corel WordPerfect 8 cannot retrieve a file if the filename contains IBM extended characters that are not part of the Windows ANSI character set. Open the file in WordPerfect for DOS and rename it without using IBM extended characters.

Also, if you can't retrieve the file in either WordPerfect for DOS or WordPerfect for Windows, the file may be damaged. Use data recovery software to repair the damaged file.

Troubleshooting Opening Files


How do I open a file I want to protect with a password?

Open the file, then click Open as copy. This means that any changes you make to the copy will not affect the original file. If you want to save any changes you make, you must save the file with a new name.

When you attempt to open a network document that is already open, Corel WordPerfect notifies you and allows you to open the document as a copy.

Troubleshooting Opening Files


Troubleshooting Hyperlinks and Jumps in Text

What do you want help with?

My links aren't working.

Related Concepts


My links aren't working.

If you have linked to a web document, the link will not work unless the browser used to locate and view the document is open.

Troubleshooting Hyperlinks and Jumps in Text


Troubleshooting Printing

What do you want help with?

If I don't have a printer attached, how can I print my file?

I want to cancel the print job.

When I print a document, table lines don't appear.

My printer wrinkles the envelope.

How do I restore my printer settings after I added a printer command?

Nothing happens when I try to print an envelope or document.

When I added a printer command, my document printed wrong.

My text runs off the edge of the page.

Can I use old WordPerfect printer drivers with Corel WordPerfect 8?

Why don't my graphics appear when I print?

When I print, some of the text on the edge of the page doesn't print.

My header or footer is partially printed or missing.

When I use a network printer, I get a status page before my document.

At the end of my printed document, I get a blank page.

Can I print a table without the lines showing?

I get an error message when I print (such as "too many fonts").

I get prompted to feed envelopes, but I have envelopes in the tray.


Nothing happens when I try to print an envelope or document.

Make sure your printer is connected correctly and is ready to print. If you are printing to a network printer there could be print jobs in the print queue before yours; if that is the case, you may just need to wait for your print job. The network print server may not be working correctly; see your system administrator for help with network-specific problems.

Make sure the printer you have selected is the same one you want to print to.

The printer may not be set up the way you expect. Click File [image] Print [image] Properties, then make sure the printer is set up the way you want.

You can open the Windows Print Status and History dialog box to get more information about the print job. Click File [image] Print [image] Status.

Make sure the print settings you specified in the Print dialog are correct for the print job. For example, check the Print and Page range settings on the Print tab and check where the print job is being sent.

Troubleshooting Printing


My text runs off the edge of the page.

Make sure the printer you have selected is the one you want to print to. Click File [image] Print.

Make sure you have the correct page size selected. Click File [image] Page Setup.

Troubleshooting Printing


Why don't my graphics appear when I print?

Graphics, including table lines, will not print if the Print text only option is selected. Click File [image] Print [image] Details, then make sure that Print text only is not selected.

Troubleshooting Printing


My header or footer is partially printed or missing.

Your printer may not be able to print where the header or footer has been placed. Some printers cannot print close to the edge of the paper. Check the documentation for your printer to see where it can print.

Check the margin settings in the document and compare them to the margins of the header or footer. Header and footer margins are defined in the Current Document Style, so there might be a conflict between margin settings in that style and in the document.

You can also make vertical and horizontal printing adjustments for the page size you are using. Click File [image] Page Setup, select the page size you are using, then click Edit and specify vertical and horizontal printing adjustments. The printing adjustments help you place text at a location on the page that your printer can print.

You might also want to edit the header or footer and make sure that text hasn't been deleted.

Troubleshooting Printing


At the end of my printed document, I get a blank page.

Network printers often feed a blank page between print jobs. If you are using a network printer that has a form feed option, turn the option off.

Text, hard returns, or extra hard page breaks may have created an extra page at the end of the document. Go to the last page, and if there are extra codes, delete them.

Troubleshooting Printing


I get an error message when I print (such as "too many fonts").

Font information is sent to the printer with your print job. If the font information exceeds the memory capacity of your printer, you might receive an error message. If you are using TrueType fonts, you can prevent font information from being sent to the printer by specifying that the fonts print as graphics. Click File [image] Print [image] Details [image] Print text as graphics.

Troubleshooting Printing


I get prompted to feed envelopes, but I have envelopes in the tray.

You need to specify which paper tray you are using. Click File [image] Page Setup. Make sure that your envelope page size is selected, then click Edit. Select the correct paper tray from the Source drop-down list.

Troubleshooting Printing


When I print a document, table lines don't appear.

Table lines are printed as graphics. You might have selected the option to print only text. Click File [image] Print [image] Details, then make sure that Print text only is not selected.

Troubleshooting Printing


Can I use old WordPerfect printer drivers with Corel WordPerfect 8?

Corel WordPerfect no longer uses WordPerfect printer drivers (.prs files). When you retrieve documents created with old printer drivers they are reformatted for the Windows printer you have selected.

Troubleshooting Printing


Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents

What do you want help with?

Will Corel WordPerfect 8 documents work with WordPerfect 4.2 - 7?

When I save a file, I don't see a prompt asking if I want to save it.

I want to make long filenames for my old documents.

In the Save File as Type box, I don't see the file format I need.

When I save a document, why does it say WordPerfect 6/7/8 format?

When I try to save a file, I get a message that my file is too large.

When I try to save a document, I get a Document Is Read Only message.


In the Save File as Type box, I don't see the file format I need.

Corel WordPerfect 8 can convert many popular file formats. If you can't find the format you need and you are saving the document for use in another application, consult the application's documentation to see if it suggests compatible file formats. For example, you can save a document to RTF or ASCII text or export tables to ASCII delimited text if you are going to import them into a spreadsheet or database.


When I try to save a file, I get a message that my file is too large.

If your computer has limited memory, it may be difficult to save a very large document. If this is the case, you can divide the document into smaller parts by cutting part of the document and pasting it into a new document. You can do this a number of times to create several files, then save each file individually.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


When I try to save a document, I get a Document Is Read Only message.

When you open a document you can open it as a copy. If you open a file as a copy, Corel WordPerfect will not let you overwrite the original file. You must save any changes to a file with a different name.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


I want to make long filenames for my old documents.

Corel WordPerfect 8 lets you use the descriptive names you might have given to files in previous versions of WordPerfect as system filenames. To ensure that former descriptive names automatically become long filenames, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Summary. Click On open, use the descriptive name for the new filename.

You can also play a macro (Longname.wcm) which converts the names of selected documents from the DOS (8.3) filename to a long filename based on the Document Summary description. To play this macro, click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then double-click Longname.wcm.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


When I save a file, I don't see a prompt asking if I want to save it.

If you have already saved the document, click File [image] Save and the document is saved again with the same name. You are prompted for information when you click File [image] Save As.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


I want to cancel the print job.

1	Click File [image] Print [image] Status.

2	Select the print job you want to cancel.

3	Click Document [image] Cancel Printing.

Tips

Make sure the print job you have selected is the one you want to cancel; you cannot undo the cancellation.

If you print to a network printer, you can only delete your own print jobs.

You can also cancel the job in the Windows print queue, in your network print queue, or at your printer. For more information on each of these options, see the respective product documentation.

Troubleshooting Printing


Troubleshooting Address Book

What do you want help with?

Information I want to see doesn't display in the Address Book.

Can I convert the Address Book from an earlier version?

Addresses aren't inserted the way I want them.

Why won't my call go through?

The Address Book doesn't have enough places to enter information.

Can I bring my data files into the Address Book?

Can I save my address book file as a merge data file?

I installed something else and my Address Book changed.

Can I put my personal Address Book on a network?

Can I take my Address Book to another machine?

I'm losing data in my network Address Book.

Why can't I add or edit addresses in the Address Book?

Can the Address Book be shared on a network?


Why won't my call go through?

In order to use the Dial feature, you must first have a modem or telephone device connected to your computer.

Second, the Microsoft Phone Dialer application must be aware of the hardware you are using. Open the Control Panel, then double-click Modems to install your modem or other telephone device.

For more information, refer to Microsoft Help and the documentation that came with your modem.

Unless you have a dedicated phone line, you might check to see if someone else is on the phone.

Troubleshooting Address Book


Addresses aren't inserted the way I want them.

To insert addresses the way you want, you can either select a different format or create a custom format. Click Related Topics for more information.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Address Book


The Address Book doesn't have enough places to enter information.

You can create your own place (or field) to enter custom information in the Address Book. For example, you could create a field to contain nickname or birthday information.

Click [image] for information on creating a custom field.

Troubleshooting Address Book


Can I bring my data files into the Address Book?

Yes. Using the Import Expert, you can easily bring your merge data files into the Address Book, as long as your data file contains field names and is in normal data file format (not a table).

Click [image] for information on exporting and importing address books.

Troubleshooting Address Book


Can I save my address book file as a merge data file?

Yes. You can run a macro that will convert the Address Book file to a merge data file. Click Related Topics for more information.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Address Book


Can I take my Address Book to another machine?

Yes. Use the Export feature to create a file.

Click [image] for information about exporting Address Books.

Troubleshooting Address Book


Information I want to see doesn't display in the Address Book.

The Address Book can contain more information than can be displayed at one time.

Click [image] for more information on arranging, sorting, and opening display columns.

Troubleshooting Address Book


Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking

What do you want help with?

Spell Checker can't find the dictionary for another language.

Can I use my Corel WordPerfect 5.2/6.1 dictionary in version 8?

I get an error message when I try to use Spell Checker or Grammatik.

Why won't Spell Checker recognize words in my custom dictionary?

What are the red and blue marks under some words?

Grammatik didn't find any errors in my document.

Related Concepts


What are the red and blue marks under some words?

The automatic proofreading tools in Corel WordPerfect mark words that might contain grammar errors or be misspelled. When Spell-As-You-Go is on, words that might be misspelled are marked with red after you type them. When Grammar-As-You-Go is on, phrases marked with blue might have grammar errors, such as subject-verb agreement or incomplete sentences.

You can then decide whether to correct the marked words. Right-click the word or phrase that is marked, and select corrections from the QuickMenu. If you do not want words to be marked as you type, you can turn off proofreading. Click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Off.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


Why won't Spell Checker recognize words in my custom dictionary?

Corel WordPerfect consults only the word lists you have active. To activate a user word list,

1	From Spell Checker or Grammatik, click Options [image] User Word Lists.

2	Click the check box next to the word list you want to activate.

Tips

The user word list for your language and the Document Word List do not have check boxes because they are always active.

An "x" appears in the check box next to an active word list.

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


Grammatik didn't find any errors in my document.

The original checking style is set to Quick Check. Quick Check is not as strict as some of the other checking styles. For example, you could apply a Very Strict or a Student Composition checking style which would probably find more errors in your document.

To apply a different checking style, open Grammatik, click Options [image] Checking Styles, then select a style.

Also, Grammatik doesn't check headers/footers and footnotes unless you check that option. To have Grammatik check these, open Grammatik, click Options [image] Check headers, footers, footnotes.

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


Spell Checker can't find the dictionary for another language.

You might need to purchase and install the language module for the language you want to check. Contact your local software reseller.

If you have already installed the main word list for the language you are using, make sure it is in the folder that contains your other *.mor files (usually C:\Corel\Suite8\Programs).

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


I get an error message when I try to use Spell Checker or Grammatik.

The Spell Checker, Thesaurus, and Grammatik files must be located in the Corel WordPerfect or shared applications folder. You may not have installed these files, or you may have moved the files to a different folder.

Start the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup program to install the files. Select a Custom installation and select only the files you need.

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


Can I use my Corel WordPerfect 5.2/6.1 dictionary in version 8?

You can use any Corel WordPerfect 6.1 supplemental dictionary (.sup file; now called a user word list) in Corel WordPerfect versions 7 or 8. If you created a supplementary dictionary in Corel WordPerfect 5.2, you can open it in version 8 and then run a spell check on it to add its words to your Corel WordPerfect 8 user word list.

You cannot use the Corel WordPerfect 5.2 main dictionary (.lex file) in Corel WordPerfect 8.

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


Troubleshooting Merge

What do you want help with?

Why is one address on two different files?

I want to make a merge file into a regular document.

Merge codes are printed with my data.

Blank lines are showing in the merged documents.

I want to cancel a merge.

How do I merge and print specific records?

Can I make another database work in a merge?

Can I use merge files created in other versions of Corel WordPerfect?

Wrong information is inserted in a field.

Related Concepts


Merge codes are printed with my data.

When you print a merge data file, you can stop the merge codes from printing. Open the data file, then click Options on the Merge toolbar. You can choose to hide the codes completely or to display the codes as markers.

You can also change how merge codes display for all future documents using Settings. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display [image] click Merge.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


Blank lines are showing in the merged documents.

This means that a field in your data source is empty. However, you can have blank lines removed during the merge so you do not have to edit them manually. Click Options in the Perform Merge dialog box and select an action to take for empty fields.

Troubleshooting Merge


How do I merge and print specific records?

Use the Select Records option on the Perform Merge dialog to select records from either a data file or the Address Book. If you only want to print certain records from the Address Book, you can insert the ones you want into a document and then print it.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


Can I use merge files created in other versions of Corel WordPerfect?

Merge files created in earlier versions of Corel WordPerfect are compatible with Corel WordPerfect 8. However, each new version of Corel WordPerfect might contain new merge commands. You might want to review merge files from previous documents to make sure they use current commands.

When you retrieve a file from another format, it is converted to Corel WordPerfect 8 for you.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


Wrong information is inserted in a field.

You are probably merging with a data file that contains missing fields. Each record in the data file must contain the same number of fields (marked with ENDFIELD codes), even if some fields are empty. If you delete an ENDFIELD code, the merge uses information from the next available field.

If this is a recurring problem, put your data in a data table. The table structure maintains those empty fields for you. Or use the Address Book to store the information.

If the problem persists, check to make sure the field in the data file contains the correct information.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


I want to make a merge file into a regular document.

When you remove the Merge toolbar, the merge file is no longer recognized as a merge document.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


I want to cancel a merge.

To cancel a merge that takes longer than a few seconds, click Cancel on the Please Wait dialog. To cancel a keyboard merge, click Stop on the Merge toolbar to stop the merge at the current position. Click Quit to continue the merge but ignore all merge commands.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


Why is one address on two different files?

If this happens with just one address, you might have repeated that address in your data source.

If this happens with every address, you probably have the Perform Merge option set to two copies. In the Perform Merge dialog box, click Options and specify the number of copies.

Troubleshooting Merge


Troubleshooting Recording and Playing Macros

What do you want help with?

Can I use a macro from Corel WordPerfect 6.x or 7 in version 8?

I can't find help for macros.

A macro I recorded occasionally produces an error message.

When I recorded a macro, I accidentally did something wrong.

Related Concepts


A macro I recorded occasionally produces an error message.

A macro you record may not play properly in every situation. Some macros depend on certain options or settings. When a macro cannot play, a message may appear, indicating the reason and the line number(s) in the macro you can check.

Troubleshooting Recording and Playing Macros


When I recorded a macro, I accidentally did something wrong.

You can click Edit [image] Undo to reverse or undo the action, then you can continue recording the action you want.

You can also edit the macro after you finish recording it. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit and select the macro to open it for editing. (For more information, click Related Topics below.)

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Recording and Playing Macros


I can't find help for macros.

To display in-depth information about the Macro feature, macro commands, and macro programming techniques, click Help Topics [image] Contents [image] double-click Macros [image] Macro Programming.

The Corel WordPerfect Macros Help file (wpmh8en.hlp) is available only if you choose a Custom install and select the Macros Help option.

Troubleshooting Recording and Playing Macros


Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor

What do you want help with?

The text in the TextArt window just disappeared. What happened to it?

Boxes appear on my screen instead of the equations I created.

I put TextArt text in my document, but now I can't edit it again.

When I try to start TextArt I get an error message about OLE objects.

How can I get rid of the shadow and outline behind my TextArt image?

When I tried to insert a TextArt design, "can't convert" appeared.

The TextArt text looks grainy and rough, how can I make it smoother?

Not all of the text I selected came into TextArt.

When I switched to another document window, TextArt is still opened.

How do I change the words that are displayed in TextArt?

I want three lines of text in my TextArt, but it stays on one line.

Related Concepts


Boxes appear on my screen instead of the equations I created.

You may have graphics set to not show in your document. Click View [image] Graphics to show Graphics.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


Troubleshooting Master Documents

What do you want help with?

I routed a master document, but it doesn't include the subdocuments.

I can't open the subdocuments for the master document.

A subdocument looks different when it is opened in a master document.

I get more than one index when I generate my master document.

Related Concepts


I used footnotes, but I should have used endnotes.

A macro ships with Corel WordPerfect to convert footnotes to endnotes and vice versa. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then click endfoot.wcm (which converts endnotes to footnotes) or footend.wcm.

The macros are typically installed to the default macros folder. If you did not install these macros, you can find endfoot.wcm and footend.wcm in the \Corel\Suite8\Macros\WPWin folder on the Corel WordPerfect 8 Suite CD.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


A subdocument looks different when it is opened in a master document.

Master document styles, including Initial Styles, override subdocument styles. When you open subdocuments in a master document, then close and save the subdocuments, master document styles are saved with the subdocuments.

Troubleshooting Master Documents


I don't want the header or footer to appear on the first page.

Click the first page, then click Format [image] Page [image] Suppress [image] All. You can also place the Header or Footer code in a Delay Code. Click Format [image] Page [image] Delay Code [image] Skip one page [image] OK.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


I can't see all the text in a line at once.

You can change the level of magnification by clicking View [image]  Zoom. Experiment with 100%, Margin width, and Page width.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


It takes too long to scroll through a document.

If you select Draft view a document displays faster than when you select Page view. (Click the View menu to select one of these.) Draft view is useful for writing and editing text; Page view is more useful when you're making your document ready to print, or when you work with page elements such as headers, footer, or watermarks.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


I get more than one index when I generate my master document.

If you have defined an index for a subdocument, it is generated when you generate the master document. For one consolidated index of the master document, drag [Def Mark:Index] from the Reveal Codes window in the subdocuments, define an index for the master document, then generate it. All of the headings and subheadings you have marked in subdocument and master document text will be listed.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Master Documents


Troubleshooting Publishing to Envoy

What do you want help with?

I can't publish to Envoy.

Why doesn't my Envoy document look like my WordPerfect document?

Related Concepts


When I type, it deletes the text that is already there.

If you try to insert text but the insertion point replaces the text as you type instead of pushing it over, it means you are in Typeover mode. You can turn Typeover mode on and off by pressing the Insert key on your keyboard.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why does typing 1/2 turn into bmc 1half.bmp?
Why does typing 1/2 turn into [image]?

In addition to fixing typos on the fly, QuickCorrect makes certain typography changes. To turn off QuickCorrect, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect, then deselect Replace words as you type.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


I began typing, but the text didn't appear where I expected it.

When you scroll through a document using the scroll bars, the insertion point stays in its original location. To type in the location you scrolled to, click first, then start typing.

Also, the shadow cursor shows you where the insertion point will be when you click. If you forget to click, the text you type appears at the previous location of the insertion point.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why doesn't my Envoy document look like my WordPerfect document?

To print to Envoy 7, you need the Envoy 7 print driver. This driver is not included with Corel WordPerfect Suite 8, but will be available with the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 Professional version. For more information about Envoy 7, visit the Corel Envoy web page http://www.corel.com/products/wordperfect/envoy7.

A number of factors affect the way your Envoy file turns out. Some of the most common causes of problems are explained below in the first bulleted list. The second bulleted list below gives suggestions. These situations and suggestions apply to most other applications as well as to Corel WordPerfect.

What Happened

The Envoy 7 Driver was not selected when you created the file. Every font has unique characteristics that affect word spacing, word wrap zone, line spacing, and so on. Even fonts with the same name may be slightly different for each printer driver you select. If you select a different driver after you create the file, these font differences can cause the document to be reformatted.

 	Some font information was not available. Fonts can reside either in your Windows fonts folder or at your printer. When fonts are stored on the printer, not all font information is available to the Envoy 7 Driver. In such cases Envoy will reproduce the font as closely as it can, given the information available. Also, if the computer system where you are viewing the Envoy file does not have the same fonts installed as the system where you created the file, some fonts that are not embedded may look different.

The viewing system has limited capabilities. Some computer systems are not able to display details you could see on the printed page. For example, some printers can support up to 1200 x 1200 dpi output, but the screen can't.

Your application's color palette may differ slightly from the Envoy palette. Because Envoy was designed for cross-platform use, the Envoy color palette is the best match for both Macintosh and Windows systems. This means that Envoy uses a color palette that may not match exactly with the color palette you use in WordPerfect.

The zoom level may be too small. Often you get better resolution on screen if you increase the zoom level in the Envoy Viewer.

What You Can Do

Before You Create the File in Corel WordPerfect

Before you create a file in WordPerfect that you plan to print to Envoy, select the Envoy 7 Driver properties you want. This will format the file correctly for Envoy.

1	Click Start on the Windows 95 taskbar, then click Settings [image] Printers.

2	Select the Envoy 7 Driver, then click File [image]  Properties.

3	Click the Destination, Resolution, or Fonts tab, then select any options.

4	Open WordPerfect 8 for Windows 95.

5	Click File [image] Print [image] Printer, then select the Envoy 7 Driver.

6	Create the file in WordPerfect, then print it to Envoy.

If You Are Using an Existing File

If you have printed a file to Envoy that doesn't look the way you expected it to, try the following suggestions.

Select the Envoy 7 Driver first. First, open your file again in the original application (such as WordPerfect). Then select the Envoy 7 Driver before you make any more changes to the file. This will make it format correctly for the Envoy 7 Driver.

Embed fonts. Try embedding any fonts that don't appear correct in your Envoy file.

Try Make It Fit. If a document paginates differently in WordPerfect when you select the Envoy 7 Driver, try the Make It Fit feature, then print to Envoy again.

Enlarge graphics, or increase resolution. If you have graphics in your file, you may want to enlarge them in the original application to make the details look clearer in the Envoy file. You can also select higher resolution options for bitmaps in the Envoy 7 Driver Properties dialog box.

Troubleshooting Publishing to Envoy


I can't publish to Envoy.

To print to Envoy 7, you need the Envoy 7 print driver. This driver is not included with Corel WordPerfect Suite 8, but will be available with the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 Professional version. For more information about Envoy 7, visit the Corel Envoy web page at http://www.corel.com/products/wordperfect/envoy7.

Troubleshooting Publishing to Envoy


I selected and bolded text, but it was deleted when I started typing.

If you start typing, the selected text is replaced. It is a good idea to deselect text after you change it. Click Edit [image] Undo to get the text back.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


I selected text, but now I want to select more.

You can use the Shift key to extend (or shrink) a selection, even if you used the mouse to select it. Hold down the Shift key and use the arrow keys to change the size of your selection. You cannot, however, select multiple blocks of text in Corel WordPerfect.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


I didn't mean to do that.

If you have pasted text in the wrong place or deleted text you want back, click Edit [image] Undo and your last action is "undone." If you change your mind again, click Edit [image] Redo.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why can't I drag to another page?

Trying to drag and drop text to a different page can be cumbersome. To move or copy text long distances, use Cut, Copy, and Paste on the Edit menu.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why are my mouse buttons reversed?

In a document window, if the mouse is set for a right-handed person, the left button should move the insertion point and the right button should display a QuickMenu. The opposite is true for a left-handed person. To change the mouse settings, go to the Windows desktop and click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel [image] Mouse.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Troubleshooting Cross-References

What do you want help with?

I made a target and reference, but they don't match.

I see a "?" where a page number should be.

Related Concepts


I see a "?" where a page number should be.

After you mark cross-references a question mark acts as a placeholder until you generate. After you generate the cross-references it is replaced by the reference number or text.

If a target is deleted after you generate, the reference will again be a question mark because there is no target to refer to. If this happens, mark the target again and generate.

Troubleshooting Cross-References


I made a target and reference, but they don't match.

Check that the code for both the target and reference use the same target name (open the Reveal Codes window and click on the code). If they are the same, generate the references again.

Troubleshooting Cross-References


Troubleshooting Indexes and Tables of Contents

What do you want help with?

I generated and now I have two indexes.

I don't want the first page of the report to be page 3.

Regenerating the table of contents undid my formatting changes.

My page numbers are wrong.

I get more than one index when I generate my master document.

Index/table of contents page numbers don't update when I regenerate.

Related Concepts


My page numbers are wrong.

You've deleted or added text to the document that caused the text to move to different a page. Click Tools [image] Reference [image] Generate to redo the page numbers.

Troubleshooting Indexes and Tables of Contents


Index/table of contents page numbers don't update when I regenerate.

The index or table of contents definition code was deleted, but the text of the index or table of contents remained in the document.

Delete the text, click where you want the index or table of contents inserted, then click Tools [image] Reference [image] Index or Table of Contents [image] Define.

Troubleshooting Indexes and Tables of Contents


I generated and now I have two indexes.

The index or table of contents definition code was deleted, but the text of the index or table of contents remained in the document. Then, a new definition code was inserted.

Delete the second set of Gen Txt codes and index or table of contents text. Regenerate if necessary.

Troubleshooting Indexes and Tables of Contents


Regenerating the table of contents undid my formatting changes.

Each time the table of contents is regenerated, new text is inserted. This means if you have applied special formatting to the table of contents text, it is deleted. Click Define on the Table of Contents toolbar to specify how you want the table of contents to look. Avoid adding special formatting until you are sure you do not need to add or delete text from your document that will cause changes in page numbers.

Troubleshooting Indexes and Tables of Contents


I don't want the first page of the report to be page 3.

Click in the page you want to be numbered one. Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value. Type 1 as the page number and select click Always keep number the same.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


Troubleshooting Upgrading from Previous Versions of Corel WordPerfect

What do you want help with?

How do I use templates from previous versions of Corel WordPerfect?

Can I use documents from Corel WordPerfect 4.2 - 7 in version 8?

When I save a document, why does it say WordPerfect 6/7/8 format?

Will Corel WordPerfect 8 documents work with WordPerfect 4.2 - 7?

Can I use older language modules with Corel WordPerfect 8?

Can I use my Corel WordPerfect 6.1 or 7 keyboard in version 8?

How do I use Corel WordPerfect 6.1 or 7 styles with version 8?

Can I use old WordPerfect printer drivers with Corel WordPerfect 8?

Can I use a macro from Corel WordPerfect 6.x or 7 in version 8?

I want to make long filenames for my old documents.

Can I use my Corel WordPerfect 5.2/6.1 dictionary in version 8?


Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation

What do you want help with?

When I adjust page margins, shouldn't headers and footers adjust too?

I changed margin widths but tables in my document aren't affected.

How can I use the same settings for each new document?

Can I have portrait and landscape print in the same document?

Can I adjust all the margins using the guidelines at the same time?

When I print, some of the text on the edge of the page doesn't print.

I want to print portrait and landscape on the same page.

I want to use exact measurements to set margins from the Ruler.

Related Concepts


I want to print portrait and landscape on the same page.

You can't have both portrait and landscape orientations on the same page using Page Size. But you can do the following:

Put text in a graphics text box and rotate it.

Rotate the cell contents of a table.

Click Related Topics below for information about these two methods.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation


Can I have portrait and landscape print in the same document?

Yes, portrait and landscape pages can appear in the same document. Click Format [image] Page [image] Page Setup to specify the size and orientation for the current page. To make the change for the current page only, select Following pages different from current page.

Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation


When I print, some of the text on the edge of the page doesn't print.

Most printers have an area around the edge of the page that they cannot print to. In most cases, Corel WordPerfect doesn't allow smaller margins than your printer can accommodate. Try setting larger margins, and make sure the paper is centered in the printer.

Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation


I want to use exact measurements to set margins from the Ruler.

Right-click the Ruler [image] click Margins.

Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation


How can I use the same settings for each new document?

If you always use the same feature settings (such as margins, justification, and fonts) for each document, you can change the default style for each document. Click File [image] Document [image] Current Document Style, click Use as default, then insert formatting codes like you would when creating a regular document.

Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation


Troubleshooting Tables

What do you want help with?

The table row won't split, but I want it to.

Why can't I edit a cell?

Can I print a table without the lines showing?

Why can't I move or size a table by using the mouse?

The table row splits, but I don't want it to.

Why don't my table lines print?

My table redraws too slowly. How can I speed it up?

Why does my text disappear in a table cell?

Can I rotate multiple cells of text in a table all at once?

Why don't my table lines line up?

I changed margin widths but tables in my document aren't affected.

Related Concepts


I changed margin widths but tables in my document aren't affected.

If the table isn't sized to fit the full width between margins, the table size remains unchanged when the margins change. To specify that a table resizes with the margins, right-click the table, click Format [image] Table, then select Full on the drop-down list under Table position on page.

Troubleshooting Tables


The table row splits, but I don't want it to.

To keep a multi-line row from splitting across pages, click the row, click Table on the Property Bar, click Format [image] Row, then deselect Divide row across pages.

Troubleshooting Tables


The table row won't split, but I want it to.

To allow a multi-line row to split across pages, click the row, click Table on the Property Bar, click Format [image] Row, then select Divide row across pages.

To split one row into two or more, select the row across all columns, click Table on the Property Bar, click Split [image] Cell [image] Rows. Specify the number of rows to create.

To split the entire table, click the row where you want the table to split, click Table on the Property Bar, then click Split [image] Table.

Troubleshooting Tables


Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents

What do you want help with?

I pressed Tab but the insertion point didn't move.

I want to use exact measurements for tab stops on the Ruler.

I set tabs earlier and now my bulleted list doesn't look right.

Why can't I move a whole paragraph to the right using the Tab key?

Why do several lines move when I press Tab?

I pressed Tab in front of a line of text and the paragraph indented.

I pressed Tab in the middle of a line and the whole paragraph moved.

Related Concepts


I want to use exact measurements for tab stops on the Ruler.

Right-click the Ruler [image] click Tab Set. To get more information about an option in the Tab Set dialog, click [image], then click the option.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


Why can't I move a whole paragraph to the right using the Tab key?

The Tab key moves only the first line of a paragraph to the right. Use Indent (F7) when you want to move all the lines in a paragraph to the right.

If QuickIndent is turned on, you can press Tab at the beginning of any line in the paragraph (except the first line) to indent the paragraph. If a Tab does not already appear on the first line, this creates a hanging indent.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


I pressed Tab in the middle of a line and the whole paragraph moved.

This is designed to occur when QuickIndent is on. To turn off QuickIndent, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go, then deselect QuickIndent.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


I pressed Tab in front of a line of text and the paragraph indented.

This is designed to happen when QuickIndent is on. To turn off QuickIndent, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go, then deselect QuickIndent.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


I set tabs earlier and now my bulleted list doesn't look right.

The tab settings you make at the beginning of your document affect the rest of the document until you add another tab setting.

If you created a bulleted list using the default tab settings, then you changed the tab settings above that list, the bulleted list will use those tab settings. To change the tab settings back to the default, select the bulleted list, then click Format [image] Line [image] Tab Set [image] Default.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


Troubleshooting Working in Other Languages

What do you want help with?

My spell checker flags words in other languages.

Can I use older language modules with Corel WordPerfect 8?

How can I spell check a second language?

Related Concepts


My spell checker flags words in other languages.

If you want to use language tools such as Spell Checker and Grammatik to proofread text in another language, you must have the word list (dictionary) for that language. Corel Language Modules, which include language tools and word lists, are available for many languages.

You can use as many as ten user word lists and ten main word lists for proofreading. For example, you can use both the U.S. English main word list and the Canadian French main word list when you proofread a U.S. English document.

To make sure the right word lists are available, open Spell Checker or Grammatik, then click Options [image] User Word Lists. Select the language of the document, then click Add List to use additional word lists with that language. Select the filename for the word list, then click Open.

Troubleshooting Working in Other Languages


How can I spell check a second language?

To specify that you want to spell check in a different language, open Spell Checker or Grammatik. Click Options [image] User Word Lists, then select additional word lists you want to activate.

To specify that you want to spell check in an additional language (such as Canadian English and Canadian French), open Spell Checker or Grammatik. Click Options [image] User Word Lists, then click Add List. Select the filename for the new user word list, then click Open.

Troubleshooting Working in Other Languages


Can I use older language modules with Corel WordPerfect 8?

If you purchased language modules for earlier versions of Corel WordPerfect, you should update them for Corel WordPerfect 8. For information on updating your language modules, contact your local reseller or see the Corel WordPerfect web site (click Help [image] Corel Web Site) for more information.

Troubleshooting Working in Other Languages


Troubleshooting Fax

What do you want help with?

Why can't I fax from Corel WordPerfect?

Related Concepts


Why can't I send mail from Corel WordPerfect?

Corel WordPerfect 8 supports WordPerfect Office 4.0, Novell GroupWise 4.x and 5.0, and Digital Teamlinks, as well as any mail system using the MAPI or CMC standards. Products with a Designed for Windows 95 logo should support CMC mail enabling. If your mail system is one of the above, the Mail option should appear on the File [image] Send menu.

Troubleshooting Mail


Why wasn't my code inserted at the insertion point?

Corel WordPerfect places certain codes at the top of a paragraph or page in which the insertion point is placed, depending on the feature. For example, Page Size codes are inserted at the top of the page.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


Flyers and Signs

PerfectExpert includes projects that help you create specific documents, including flyers and signs. Click File [image] New, then select a project.

Here are some more things you can do with flyers and signs.

Shape and contour text with TextArt

Make text fit on the page

Insert clip art images

Create a bulleted list

Make text fit next to the image (Wrap Text)

Add borders around the page (add fill)

Add a drop shadow

Create text on its side (rotated)

Create white text on black background

Create horizontal lines

Related Concepts


Lists

To quickly create a numbered list, use the List project. Click File [image] New [image], then select the List project. To create other lists, you can use the following:

Create a numbered or bulleted list

Generate a list of items in your document

Generate an index

Create a bulleted list in a web document

Related Concepts


Books and Other Long Documents

When you create books or other long documents, you can work smarter using such features as Master Documents, indexing, and styles. Other formatting features can help you create a published look.

Create a master document with links to chapters

Number pages

Create headers and footers

Create lines in headers and footers

Learn more about folded and bound documents

Create an index

Create a list of figures

Create a table of contents

Use styles to create a consistent look

Make adjustments for a published look

Related Concepts


Business Reports

When you use Corel WordPerfect to write a business report, you can also include charts, graphs, and spreadsheets from other programs. For example, you can link a spreadsheet with Corel Quattro Pro and have figures update in your Corel WordPerfect document when you change them in Quattro Pro.

Click File [image]  New to see if you can use any of the forms in PerfectExpert to quickly complete your task. The following tools and ideas can help you create business reports.

Create a report outline

Create running titles (headers/footers)

Make headings look the same

Use styles for a consistent look

Create a "confidential" watermark (and more)

Insert an equation

Insert a graphics image

Create a table of contents

Create an index

Create a list of figures

Insert and link charts and spreadsheets

Route the report to colleagues for review

Related Concepts


About Creating a Published Look (Typesetting)

Use the Typesetting features to create a published look. Adjust the spacing between words, letters, and lines. Place text exactly where you want it.

To adjust the space between lines (leading)

To change the amount of spacing between words or letters

To create an overstrike character

To place the first baseline at the top margin of the page

To advance a certain distance from the insertion point

To advance to an absolute position on the page

To change the kerning between two letters

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Templates

What do you want help with?

When I use a template, I am prompted for personal information. Why?

I can't find the template I want to use.

Each time I start a document I get the New dialog box.

The template I want isn't displayed with the other templates.

How do I use templates from previous versions of Corel WordPerfect?

I created a template macro, but I don't know where to find the file.

I used a template and now there are blank lines in the document.

Where is my default template stored on a network?

Why does my toolbar, menu, or keyboard change when I'm in a table?

Does my document update if I change the template I used to make it?

The Property Bar stays the same no matter what template I'm using.

Where are my templates stored?

What is the filename for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard I created?

Related Concepts


How do I use templates from previous versions of Corel WordPerfect?

You can use templates from Corel WordPerfect 7 in version 8 without changing them. To select your custom templates from the list of projects and templates in the File New dialog box, you must copy them to the \Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates folder.

To use a template from Corel WordPerfect 6.1, you must edit the template in Corel WordPerfect 8 and save it. This converts the template for use in version 8.

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select the category where the template is found. The Custom WP Templates category contains your templates from previous versions of Corel WordPerfect.

3	Select the template, then click Options [image] Edit WP Template.

4	Click Yes to convert the template to Corel WordPerfect 8 format.

5	Click Yes to overwrite the original template.

6	Click [image] on the Template feature bar to close the template.

Troubleshooting Templates


The template I want isn't displayed with the other templates.

The template you want is not saved in the correct folder. The templates in the PerfectExpert list are saved to the \Corel\Suite8\Template folder. Templates you create are saved in \Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates. You need to move your template to that folder.

If you want to store templates in another folder, you can list that folder as your additional template folder.

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Template.

2	In the Additional template folder box, specify the name of the folder where you want to store your templates.

Troubleshooting Templates


Troubleshooting Graphics Box Captions

What do you want help with?

I can't use both numbers and letters to number the same captions.

How can I have more than one set of caption numbers in one document?

How can I number captions some other way besides Figure #?

My captions aren't numbered correctly. How can I fix the numbering?

Related Concepts


How can I number captions some other way besides Figure #?

"Figure #" appears at the beginning of each caption for a graphics box. You can change the "Figure #" by editing or deleting it. To permanently change the words and numbers that are inserted for each image, edit the image box style.

1	Click Format [image] Graphics Styles.

2	Select Image in the Styles list box, then click Edit.

3	Click Caption.

4	In the Caption Numbering and Styles group box, make any changes to the type of numbering being used for the image boxes you insert.

Tips

If you don't want caption numbering, select Change for the Initial Style: Caption item, then select <None>.

Troubleshooting Graphics Box Captions


My captions aren't numbered correctly. How can I fix the numbering?

If you insert different types of graphic boxes, they will not number sequentially. For instance, image boxes and text boxes are numbered separately. If you want one type of graphics box to number sequentially with another type, you can change the counter type being used for the graphics box.

1	Right-click the box.

2	Click Caption.

3	Click Change in the Caption Numbering and Styles group box.

4	Select the counter numbering style that matches the type of box you want it to be numbered with (figure, text, equation, etc.).

Troubleshooting Graphics Box Captions


How can I have more than one set of caption numbers in one document?

You can insert several graphics boxes of the same type, and yet  number them in different sets. To do this change the counter numbering style for the boxes that you want to number independently. For example, you can have several image boxes in one document and have one set numbered as image boxes and another set numbered as text boxes.

1	Right-click the box where you want numbering to change.

2	Click Caption.

3	Click Change in the Caption Numbering and Styles group box.

4	Select a different counter numbering style for that box (figure, text, equation, etc.).

5	Repeat steps 1-4 for each box that you want to be numbered in that group.

Tips

You can create your own type of caption numbering. Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter [image] Create, then use the options on the Create Counter Definition dialog box to create your own counter. It will then be added to the list of counter numbering styles and you can use it for your captions.

Troubleshooting Graphics Box Captions


I can't use both numbers and letters to number the same captions.

You can't use both numbers and letters automatically in the same caption. You can, however, edit each caption and insert the numbers and letters manually.

You can have Corel WordPerfect use both letters and numbers to number captions by creating two different types of counters, one with a letter counter and the other with a number counter. Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter [image] Create, then use the options on the Create Counter Definition dialog box to create the two counters. However, you still have to insert those counters manually each time you want to number a caption.

You can also add multilevel counters to captions.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Graphics Box Captions


I created a template macro, but I don't know where to find the file.

Template macros are one kind of template object. They are stored with the template, not in a separate file. You can't use a template macro file, but you can copy template macros from one template to another.

1	Click File [image] New.

2	Select the template that contains the macros you want to copy.

3	Click Options [image] Edit WP Template.

4	Click Copy/Remove Object on the template feature bar.

5	Use the options on the Copy/Remove Objects dialog box to copy the macros to another template.

Troubleshooting Templates


Where is my default template stored on a network?

The default Corel WordPerfect 8 template is called wp8xx.wpt (where xx is the language code for your default language). On a network, this template is stored in the Windows template folder. On a stand-alone workstation, the default template is stored in the C:\Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates folder.

Troubleshooting Templates


Does my document update if I change the template I used to make it?

If you change a toolbar, keyboard, menu, or style in a template, the document is updated when you open it. Text or formatting changes are not inserted into the document unless they are in a style.

Troubleshooting Templates


Where are my templates stored?

PerfectExpert projects and templates are stored in the C:\Corel\Suite8\Template folder. The templates you create are saved in your default template folder, usually C:\Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates. If you have templates from an earlier version of Corel WordPerfect, move them to this folder to access them in the PerfectExpert list.

However, if you want the templates you create to be saved in another folder, list that folder name in Files Settings.

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] click Template.

2	In the Default Template Folder box, specify the name of the folder in which your templates will be stored.

Troubleshooting Templates


What is the filename for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard I created?

The keyboards, toolbars, template macros, and menus that you create in a template are called template objects. These template objects are stored with the template. They are not stored in separate files. However, you can still copy these objects to other templates.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Templates


When I use a template, I am prompted for personal information. Why?

Some templates and PerfectExpert projects require certain information, such as a name and address. When you create a document using a project, Corel WordPerfect prompts you to select or create an entry in the Address Book. If you select your address entry for personal information, that entry is used for all personal information in other projects you use.

If you create a document with a custom template, or a template from a previous version of Corel WordPerfect, you are also prompted for information. If no personal information set exists, you can type the information in the dialog box or select your entry in the Address Book. If you select an Address Book entry, it is used for all other templates.

After you select your personal information, you can change it by selecting or creating another Address Book entry. Click File [image] New [image] Options [image] Personal Information.

Troubleshooting Templates


Troubleshooting Graphics

What do you want help with?

I want to put a picture in a text box.

While I was typing, my graphic moved to the next page.

I put a graphic on top of another one and now I can't select it.

Clicking a graphic starts another program, how do I get rid of it?

When I click an object, "can't turn into an OLE object" appears.

I can't move a drawing exactly where I want it.

A graphic from another program doesn't open in Corel WordPerfect.

How can I make the image look like it was before I used Image Tools?

The picture I placed at the top of my document disappeared.

I can't keep my drawing on the page where I want it.

When I insert a drawing in a line of text, the text writes over it.

I see only Edit on the Box Caption dialog box. What about Create?

Why can't I edit a background graphic image?

How can I just resize the drawing and not the box around it?

I edited an image. How do I use in it another document?

I can't rotate a picture that I've inserted.

How do I keep the drawing with the paragraph that talks about it?

I can't see any drawings I put in my document, just empty boxes.

When I resized a picture, it got distorted.

Related Concepts


I put a graphic on top of another one and now I can't select it.

When you have several overlapping graphics images, it is sometimes hard to select the one you want by using the mouse. Right-click one of the overlapping boxes, click Select Other, then click the box you want to select.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I used a template and now there are blank lines in the document.

When you select a template and use it to create a document, the template prompts you for the information it needs. If you don't provide some of the prompt information, the template leaves that part of the document blank. This can cause blank lines in the document. If the document doesn't need the missing information, you can delete the blank lines. Otherwise, you can add the information you neglected to provide in the template prompts.

Troubleshooting Templates


Clicking a graphic starts another program, how do I get rid of it?

You probably clicked the graphic box twice, not once. Clicking a graphic once selects the box so that you can use Corel WordPerfect features to move and size the box. However, double-clicking a graphic image starts Corel Presentations or another drawing program that is associated with the image. Dotted lines appear around the graphics box, and new menus and toolbars also appear in the document window. You can return to Corel WordPerfect by clicking outside the image in the document window.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I can't move a drawing exactly where I want it.

It can be difficult to place a drawing precisely by using the mouse. A drawing (or image) is in a box, and when you move and size the box the size of the image changes to fit it.

You can use measurements to position a graphics box precisely on a page. You can also precisely position the image within a box.

Right-click the graphic [image] click Position. You can then select an option on the Attach Box To drop-down list to attach the box to a page, paragraph, or character within a line of text. For each of these attachment types, you can use measurements to position the box exactly on the page.

To precisely position the image within a box, right-click the graphics box, click Content, then select a horizontal and vertical position for the box. You can place it flush against an edge of the box or center it between the edges.

Troubleshooting Graphics


Each time I start a document I get the New dialog box.

Don't click File [image] New to start a blank document. When you use File [image] New, the New dialog box always appears so that you can select a project or WordPerfect template.

However, if all you want is a blank document, not a project or template, click [image] on the toolbar.

Troubleshooting Templates


How can I make the image look like it was before I used Image Tools?

When you use Image Tools to change how an image looks, keep in mind that you are not actually editing the image. You are only changing the appearance of that image in the current document. At any time you can return the image to its original appearance by clicking Reset Attributes on the Image palette. You can also reinsert the original image.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I can't keep my drawing on the page where I want it.

Sometimes inserting text above an image pushes the image to another page. Because the image stays in the same place on the page, this can also insert unwanted white space. You can make sure an image stays where you put it and doesn't move to another page. Right-click the box, then click Position. Click Page from the Attach Box To drop-down list, then make sure that Box Stays On Page is selected.

Troubleshooting Graphics


Why does my toolbar, menu, or keyboard change when I'm in a table?

Certain toolbars, keyboards, and menus are linked to certain features and display only when using that feature. For example, a different toolbar appears when you use Internet Publisher.

To find out what a toolbar button does, point to the button to display a QuickTip. If you want to change toolbars, keyboards, or menus, click Tools [image] Settings [image] Customize to select the one you want. When you create a template, you can associate toolbars, keyboards, and menus with different features for that template only.

Troubleshooting Templates


I see only Edit on the Box Caption dialog box. What about Create?

Editing a caption is the same as creating one. When you click Edit, a caption is created if it doesn't already exist.

The easiest way to add a caption to a graphics box is to right-click the graphics box and click Create Caption. You are then placed in a caption that you can edit.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I can't find the template I want to use.

If you can't find a template in the PerfectExpert projects list, it might be located in a folder other than your default template folder (usually C:\Corel\Suite8\Custom WP Templates). Move the template file to that folder.

You can also specify an additional templates folder, such as a shared network folder, in Files Settings. Click Tools [image] Settings [image] Files [image] Template.

Troubleshooting Templates


How can I just resize the drawing and not the box around it?

When you use the mouse to drag and resize a picture or drawing, you are actually resizing the box around the picture and not the picture itself. To resize a picture (image) within a graphics box, right-click the image, click Image Tools, then use the Zoom options to resize the image. You can make the image larger or smaller or crop a portion of the image and make it fill the whole box.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I can't rotate a picture that I've inserted.

You can use the mouse to rotate an image inside a graphics box, and you can flip the image side to side or top to bottom. Remember that before you rotate an image you might need to enlarge the box so that the image will still fit no matter which way you turn it.

To rotate an image with the mouse, right-click the image [image] click Image Tools [image] Rotate. Drag one of the four handles in the corners of the image box to rotate the image.

To use measurements to rotate an image, right-click the image [image] click Edit Attributes [image] Rotate Image, then set the number of degrees you want to rotate the image in a counterclockwise position.

Troubleshooting Graphics


The Property Bar stays the same no matter what template I'm using.

The Property Bar appears differently in different contexts, but does not change according to the template. In contrast, the toolbar is a template object and you can specify a default toolbar for a particular template.

For example, when you select a graphic, then click in text again, the Property Bar changes. However, if you click in text while using the standard template, then click in text while using another template (such as an invoice form), the text Property Bar appears the same.

You cannot create new Property Bars to link to different features.

Troubleshooting Templates


I can't see any drawings I put in my document, just empty boxes.

If all the graphics boxes in your document are empty, the images are probably hidden. On certain systems it requires extra time to rewrite the screen as you move through a document that contains complicated images. You can hide the pictures to speed up editing. Click View [image] Graphics to deselect the Graphics option on the View menu. When the Graphics option is deselected, empty boxes appear in the document to show the space the images will fill. Click View [image] Graphics to display the boxes again.

Troubleshooting Graphics


When I resized a picture, it got distorted.

When you resize a graphics box, the image inside the box expands or shrinks to fill the box. Changing the proportions of the box distorts the image. If you want to make sure an image maintains its original proportions as you resize the box, right-click the image, click Content, then make sure the Preserve Image Width/height Ratio box is selected.

Once an image is distorted, you can return it to its original proportions. Right-click the image, click Image Tools, then click Reset Attributes.

Troubleshooting Graphics


The picture I placed at the top of my document disappeared.

You probably tried to drag the picture into a header and you are editing the header. Click back in the document and the drawing will reappear. You can use the Graphic menu to insert a graphic into a header, but you cannot drag a graphic from your document into a header or footer. When you try to drag a graphic into a header, the graphic appears to move into the header, but when you actually edit text in the header the graphic isn't there.

Troubleshooting Graphics


While I was typing, my graphic moved to the next page.

When you insert a graphics image, it is attached to the place where the insertion point is. The graphics image will always stay in the same place on the page, but if the spot it is tied to is pushed to the next page, the graphics image will also jump to the next page.

To make sure an image stays on the page where you put it, right-click the image, then click Position. Select Page on the Attach Box To drop-down list, and select Box Stays On Page.

Troubleshooting Graphics


When I insert a drawing in a line of text, the text writes over it.

You can make room for the graphic so that text above it does not cover it.

1	Right-click the graphic, click Edit Box.

2	Select Character on the Attach To drop-down list.

3	Click Position, then select Box Changes Text Line Height.

Troubleshooting Graphics


The document I routed doesn't show any of the colored markings.

When you first edit a routed document that has been returned to you, the markings are not displayed so that you can see the completed document. To display the markings, click [image].

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


When I click an object, "can't turn into an OLE object" appears.

There are several possible reasons that an error message is displayed when you click on an OLE object in Corel WordPerfect.

The object is not actually an OLE object and does not have a source. You can use the object in the document, but you cannot edit it.

If the message states that WordPerfect can't create the OLE object, the server application may not be registered correctly. Reinstall the application or run the Windows system application Regedit to check the registry entries by hand.

The application necessary to edit the object is not available. For example, if the object is linked to Corel Presentations, Corel Presentations must be installed. (If you are low on disk space, you can install the Corel applications you use most to your hard drive, then rerun the Setup program and install other applications using a CD or Network install.)

Troubleshooting Linking and Embedding


I can't change the color I used to mark my changes to a document.

To choose a color for your editing changes, click the Set Color palette and click a color. The color you select is displayed by your name in the Other user colors box.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


Why can't I edit a background graphic image?

What you are calling a "background" image is a watermark. Watermarks are pictures placed in a document as a background for text. They are printed in very light shades. You cannot edit a watermark by clicking it as you would a graphics image. Instead, use the Format menu.

1	Click Insert [image] Watermark.

2	Select the watermark you want to edit.

3	Click Edit.

4	Select any options on the watermark feature bar.

Tips

The watermark feature bar provides limited image editing capabilities. For example, you cannot use it to resize the image in a watermark. However, you can use Image Tools in Corel WordPerfect to make the image look the way you want, then save the image and use it as a watermark.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I want to put a picture in a text box.

If you want both text and a picture in a text box, insert a graphics image into a text box just as you would in the document.

However, you can also change the contents of the text box so that it contains only a picture.

1	Right-click the text box, then click Content.

2	Select Image from the Content drop-down list.

3	Click Yes to delete the current box contents.

4	In the Filename box, type the name of the image you want to use.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I edited an image. How do I use in it another document?

When you use Image Tools to change the way an image looks in a document, you don't change the original image. To use the edited image in another document, save the image in WordPerfect Graphics (.wpg) format.

1	Select the graphic in your document.

2	Click File [image] Save As.

3	Click Selected Image, then click OK.

4	If you don't want the edited image to replace the original, type a new name for it, then click OK.

Troubleshooting Graphics


A graphic from another program doesn't open in Corel WordPerfect.

If you are having problems bringing a graphic file into Corel WordPerfect, it could be that the file is not in one of the formats that Corel WordPerfect supports. To list the supported graphic formats, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File, then click the arrow on the File Type drop-down list.

If the graphic is not in a supported format, open it in the original application and save it in a supported format.

If the file is in one of the supported formats but fails to open, it might be corrupted. Try opening it in another application and saving it again.

Troubleshooting Graphics


I don't want my document review changes marked in color.

If you don't want the changes you make to a routed document marked in color, don't use the Document Review feature. Edit the document as you would any other document by using File [image] Open to open the document. The Document Review feature is activated only when you use File [image] Document [image] Review.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


In a routed document, I can't undelete deleted text.

That is true. In a routed document, a strikeout line is placed over text that other reviewers have deleted. As you edit the document, you can't edit other reviewers' deletions. The author must decide whether or not to restore deletions. However, you can add a comment or type the text back in.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


When I print a document, the color markings don't print in color.

That is true. The color markings placed on routed documents only appear in the document window. They do not show up in print.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting

What do you want help with?

I want different spacing between bullets (or numbers) and text.

How can I keep all the paragraph lines together on the same page?

I can't see tab settings for a paragraph at the bottom of the screen.

How can I put more than one blank line between paragraphs?

Can text be flush left, centered, and flush right on the same line?

How do I start a new page, not just a new paragraph?

Is there a way to automatically indent every paragraph?

Related Concepts


I edited a routed document, but my changes are not marked.

There are several reasons color markings don't appear in a routed document.

You opened the document by using File [image] Open. The Document Review feature is activated only when you use File [image] Document [image] Review to open a routed document.

Colored markings are only placed on the editing changes you make to text. Other changes, such as adding graphic images, changing fonts, and changing formats, are not marked.

When you first edit a routed document as the author, the markings are not displayed so that you can see the completed document, as is. Click [image] to show the changes.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


When I edit a routed document, some features are dimmed.

Often, features are dimmed when you edit a document because you are not able to use them at that time in view of what you are doing. For example, if you haven't created a master document, the Expand Master and Condense Master options are dimmed.

In addition, some features are not available when you are editing a routed document. These features are also dimmed.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


I can't delete marked text because someone has changed it.

When you delete text that you have added to a routed document, it is simply deleted. When you delete text that someone else has added, it is marked with a line (usually called "strikeout") and with your color to indicate that you want the text deleted.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


How can I put more than one blank line between paragraphs?

Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format, then specify the number of lines in the Spacing between paragraphs box.

Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting


I can't open the subdocuments for the master document.

Contact the person who routed the document and ask that person to expand the document and then reroute it. If a master document is not expanded when it is sent, subdocuments are not available.

Troubleshooting Master Documents


How do I start a new page, not just a new paragraph?

Click Insert [image] New Page or press Ctrl+Enter.

Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting


Is there a way to automatically indent every paragraph?

Click Format [image] Paragraph [image] Format, then specify the distance you want to indent in the First line indent box. This format is applied to all paragraphs.

Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting


I routed a master document, but it doesn't include the subdocuments.

If you want to route a complete master document you need to expand it before routing it. Otherwise, the subdocuments will not be available even though the subdocuments links still appear in the routed document.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


I want several people to edit a routed document at the same time.

If you want several people to edit a document simultaneously, you can give each one a disk copy of the document. You can then have the reviewers return the various documents to you separately, with their editing marks. You can then examine the changes and compile them into one document.

If you want several people to edit a document one after another, make sure they edit it sequentially, in a listed order. Each reviewer can access the changes that previous reviewers have made. The document is then returned to you with all editing changes in one document. You can view the text with or without the markings and accept and reject them without having to compare a series of similar documents.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


I can't see tab settings for a paragraph at the bottom of the screen.

Wherever a tab setting changes, [image] appears in the left margin. Click [image] to display a tab bar immediately above the insertion point. If no [image] is visible, click View [image] Ruler to display the Ruler so you can see or change the current tab settings.

Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting


How can I keep all the paragraph lines together on the same page?

Select the lines you want to keep together (triple-click to select the entire paragraph), then click Format [image] Keep Text Together [image] Keep selected text together on same page.

Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting


Can text be flush left, centered, and flush right on the same line?

1	Type the text you want to appear flush left.

2	Click Format [image] Line [image] Center, then type the text you want to appear centered.

3	Click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right, then type the text you want to appear flush right.

Tips

If you select existing text, then click Format [image] Line [image] Flush Right or Center, the entire line changes to the new justification setting.

You can duplicate the same look for large amounts of text by creating a three-column, single row table or by creating three parallel columns to hold your text.

Troubleshooting Paragraph Formatting


Troubleshooting Page Breaks

What do you want help with?

I added a hard page break but no page break was added.


What do I need to send documents by e-mail?

To send documents via e-mail, you need one of the following:

Novell GroupWise or any other mail system compatible with the Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI).

Any CMC mail system. Products with a Designed for Windows 95 logo typically support CMC mail enabling.

Troubleshooting Mail


I added a hard page break but no page break was added.

You may have tried to insert the page break in a column. In columns, pressing Ctrl+Enter inserts a column break. To insert a hard page break in columns, press Ctrl+Shift+Enter.

Troubleshooting Page Breaks


I'm not hooked up to a network, can I still route documents?

Yes. You can save documents on a floppy disk and pass them from person to person for review. When you receive a document on disk, you can use the document review options to mark the document for you.

1	Insert the floppy disk in a drive, then open the document in Corel WordPerfect.

2	Click File [image] Document [image] Review.

3	Click whether you are the Reviewer or Author.

4	Edit the document.

5	Save the document on the disk and give it to the next person in the route.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


What are all those buttons on the Review Document dialog box?

The Review Document dialog box appears when you use File [image] Document [image] Review [image] Author to edit a document that you have sent to others for review.

You can use the buttons on the Review Document dialog box to turn the color markings on and off, to move from marking to marking, to insert the selected marking or all markings, and to delete the selected marking or all markings.

For a brief description of what each button does, right-click the button.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


How can I see a routed document as is, without all the markings?

When you receive a document that others have reviewed, you can have the changes they made marked in different colors. A color key tells you the color used by each user. To display (or hide) the markings, click [image] in the lower left corner of the document review feature bar.

Troubleshooting Comparing and Reviewing Documents


The wrong date is displayed.

You might have inserted date text instead of a date code. Date text never changes. A date code displays and prints the current date each time you open or print the document.

To change the date text in your document to a date code, delete the date, then click Insert [image] Date/Time. Select the date format, select Keep Inserted Date Current, then click Insert.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


Troubleshooting Page Numbering

What do you want help with?

My page numbers print on top of my headers and footers.

I want to put a drawing on a page, but I can't delete the page #.

Why can't I see my page numbers?

I started a new chapter, but the chapter number stayed the same.

Page numbers change even when I don't want them to.

I used the menus to insert a page number, but it's not on this page.

The total page count isn't always accurate.

How can I create my own page numbering style?

I don't want the first page of the report to be page 3.

I can't use a, b, c, and 1, 2, 3 together to number pages.

Related Concepts


How do I delete a code?

1	Click View [image] Reveal Codes.

2	Place the insertion point on the immediate left or right of the code you want to delete.

3	Press Delete to delete the code to the right of the insertion point, or press Backspace to delete the code to the left of the insertion point.

Tips

You can also delete a code by dragging it out of the Reveal Codes window.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


I started a new chapter, but the chapter number stayed the same.

Chapter numbers do not change automatically. When you want a chapter number to increase, you need to change its value.

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value [image] Chapter.

2	Type the new number you want to use.

3	Select whether you want that number to stay the same or change if other chapters are added before it.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


The code isn't inserted at the insertion point.

Corel WordPerfect places certain codes at the top of a paragraph or page in which the insertion point is placed, depending on the feature. Also, when you use some features, existing codes change or are replaced by other codes. For example, paragraph format codes change when you use a format feature.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


I used the menus to insert a page number, but it's not on this page.

You may have inserted a page number once, in the text of your document, rather than placing it on every page. When you click Format [image] Page [image] Insert Page Number to insert a number, the number is inserted only once at the insertion point.

To put page numbers in a certain place on every page, you need to click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering. You then choose where you want to put the numbers and the kind of numbers you want to use.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


How can I create my own page numbering style?

You can create a page numbering format different that those provided by Corel WordPerfect. For example, you may want to include the name of the report you are writing with every page number.

1	Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Custom Format.

2	Type any text and insert any number codes you want in your page number format.

3	Click OK to add the new format to the Page numbering format list.

4	Select the new format, then click OK to use it from that page forward.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


I can't use a, b, c, and 1, 2, 3 together to number pages.

You are right.

In each custom page numbering format you create, you can use only one numbering method for each kind of numbers. Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Custom Format. You can add numbers for Pages, Total Pages, Chapters, Volumes, and Secondary Pages. However, for each of these kinds of numbering, you can select only one numbering method. In other words, you can use letters for pages or you can use numbers for pages, but you can't use both.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


I want to put a drawing on a page, but I can't delete the page #.

To remove page numbering from one page in your document, suppress the number for that page. Click Format [image] Page [image] Suppress, then click Page numbering to turn it off.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


Page numbers change even when I don't want them to.

You can have page numbering change to keep the numbers sequential as you add and delete text. You can also lock in page numbers so that they will always stay the same. To do this, click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering [image] Set Value [image] Page, then select Always keep number the same.

When you select Always keep number the same, the number will not change even if you add or delete several pages from your document. You can select the same setting for chapter, volume, and secondary page numbers.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


My page numbers print on top of my headers and footers.

Page numbers, headers, and footers all print in the same general location on a page. To add the page number to a header or footer, click Insert [image] Header/Footer [image] Create or Edit [image]  [image] [image]  Page Number.

When you want to place alternating page numbers on the inside and outside of a page, use Page Numbering to select a location rather than Headers and Footers.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


The total page count isn't always accurate.

To increase document editing speed, the page count for the total page numbers in your document is not always automatically updated. However, it is updated when you print a document.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


Why can't I see my page numbers?

There are two possible reasons why page numbers do not appear in the document window.

Page numbers are not displayed on-screen in draft mode. To see the page numbers as they will appear in the printed document, click View [image] Page (or Two Pages).

You may not have actually selected page numbering. Click Format [image] Page [image] Numbering, select a page number position and format, then click OK to add the page numbers in the document.

Troubleshooting Page Numbering


Troubleshooting Styles

What do you want help with?

I changed a QuickFormat paragraph, but the others didn't change.

I don't want my new documents to always be single spaced.

My style changed even though I didn't edit it.

How do I use Corel WordPerfect 6.1 or 7 styles with version 8?

How can I change the styles that come with Corel WordPerfect?

I changed the format in a style but similar styles didn't change.

When I changed the style for some text, the bold font was removed.

How can I copy the look of a heading to other headings?

Related Concepts


When I changed the style for some text, the bold font was removed.

Styles often specify what the font looks like, such as bold or italic. A heading style, for example, might specify a bold font. If the style specifies this, your bolded text will change to match the style you selected.

Troubleshooting Styles


How do I use Corel WordPerfect 6.1 or 7 styles with version 8?

You can use any styles you created with earlier versions of Corel WordPerfect if they are part of a document or template.

Retrieve the document into Corel WordPerfect 8. The program converts these styles so you can use them in WordPerfect 8.

To apply styles from a saved document or template to the current document, click Format [image] Styles [image] Options [image] Retrieve, then specify the filename of that document. The styles are imported into the current document and are listed with the other document styles.

Troubleshooting Styles


I know a code is there, but I can't see it.

Some codes are embedded within other codes. For example, a style code such as Para Style:Auto Heading 1 usually contains formatting codes such as [Bold] and [VeryLarge]. You can expand a code to view the codes embedded in it. To do this, click View [image] Reveal Codes, then click the code.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


I changed the format in a style but similar styles didn't change.

If the heading styles you created using QuickFormat do not change, automatic updating is turned off.

When you change text that has a QuickFormat style, automatic updating makes the same change to any other text that has the same style. For example, adding bold to one heading with a QuickFormat style adds bold to all other headings using that style.

You can turn off automatic updating for one paragraph or for all paragraphs using the same QuickFormat style. Click in a paragraph with the style, click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Discontinue, then choose whether to turn off automatic updating for one heading or for all headings.

If you decide you want to use automatic updating for that text once again, use Styles to reapply the QuickFormat style to that text.

Troubleshooting Styles


How can I copy the look of a heading to other headings?

When a heading looks the way you want it, use QuickFormat to copy the look of that heading to other headings.

Click in the heading, then click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] OK. Drag the paint roller pointer over the text you want to apply the QuickFormat to.

Troubleshooting Styles


My style changed even though I didn't edit it.

QuickFormat headings are linked together. If you change text that has a QuickFormat heading style, the change is applied to any other text with the same heading style. For example, if you change one heading to 24 pt text, all other headings are automatically updated to 24 pt.

You can turn off automatic updating for one paragraph using a QuickFormat style or for all paragraphs with the same QuickFormat style. Click in text with the QuickFormat style. Click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Discontinue, then choose whether to turn off automatic updating for one heading or for all headings.

Troubleshooting Styles


I don't want my new documents to always be single spaced.

When you open a new blank document, many format settings are in place, such as margins, tab settings, and line spacing. You can change these format settings by editing the Current Document Style in your default template, which defines the format used for each new document.

To change the default style, click File [image] Document [image] Current Document Style. Use the Styles Editor menu to add format codes in the Contents window.

Troubleshooting Styles


How can I change the styles that come with Corel WordPerfect?

Several sample styles are provided with Corel WordPerfect. To list the styles available in a document, click Format [image] Styles. To edit any style in the list, select the style, then click Edit. Look at the codes in the style to find out how the style changes text. Add or delete any codes, then click OK to save the edited style.

Troubleshooting Styles


I changed a QuickFormat paragraph, but the others didn't change.

If the styles you created using QuickFormat do not change, automatic updating is turned off. To use automatic updating again for that text, click Format [image] Styles, then apply the QuickFormat style to the text.

To turn off automatic updating, click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Discontinue, then choose whether to turn off automatic updating for one heading or for all headings

Troubleshooting Styles


When I try to start TextArt I get an error message about OLE objects.

There are two possible reasons for an OLE error message appearing when you start TextArt.

If the message states that Corel WordPerfect can't create the OLE object, there might be incorrect information in the registration database for the server application that is linked to that object. (TextArt acts as a server application.) You will need to check and update the entries in the registration database. For information on registration, click Start [image] Run, then type regedit and click OK to start the registry database. Help information is available in that database.

TextArt may not be correctly installed. Try reinstalling it using the Corel WordPerfect Suite setup program.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


When I tried to insert a TextArt design, "can't convert" appeared.

There are two possible reasons for the OLE error message that is sometimes displayed when you try to insert a TextArt design into your document.

If the message states that Corel WordPerfect can't create the OLE object, there may be erroneous information in the registration database for the server application that is linked to that object. You will need to check and update the entries in the registration database. For information on registration, click Start [image] Run, then type regedit and click OK to start the registry database. Help information is available in that database.

TextArt may not be correctly installed and you may need to install it.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


Not all of the text I selected came into TextArt.

You can have a maximum of 512 characters in a TextArt design. Any characters over that limit will not be imported.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


How do I change the words that are displayed in TextArt?

The first time you start TextArt, the word "Text" is displayed as the TextArt design, unless you previously selected text. This is only a sample word to show you how designed text looks. To change this word, edit the text in the Type Here box. To edit the text of an existing design, double-click the design to open TextArt.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


I want three lines of text in my TextArt, but it stays on one line.

TextArt does not wrap text to a new line automatically. As you type in the text editing box, press Enter when you want to start a new line. You can type several lines in a TextArt design.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


How can I get rid of the shadow and outline behind my TextArt image?

The shadow and outline behind the sample TextArt text appear to illustrate things you can do with TextArt. To remove or change them, make sure 3D Mode is not selected, click the 2D Options tab in the TextArt dialog box, then click Shadow and select the middle icon in the palette. Click Outline, then select None.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


The text in the TextArt window just disappeared. What happened to it?

When you select No Fill as the pattern, TextArt letters disappear unless you have selected an outline or shadow. To make the text visible, click 2D Options [image] Pattern, then select a pattern.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


The TextArt text looks grainy and rough, how can I make it smoother?

You can improve the clarity of a TextArt design by adjusting its smoothness. Select High or Very High from the Smoothness drop-down list in the TextArt dialog box. (Note that higher smoothness levels can slow down on-screen display.)

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


I put TextArt text in my document, but now I can't edit it again.

When you insert TextArt into a document, it is placed in a graphics box that you can move and size. However, to change the text or design, double-click the graphics box to open that design in TextArt. You can then use the TextArt features to edit the design.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


When I switched to another document window, TextArt is still opened.

If you open TextArt in one document window, the TextArt dialog box will switch from window to window as you switch from document to document. To close it, return to the document where you opened TextArt, then close the TextArt window.

Troubleshooting TextArt and Equation Editor


How do I restore my printer settings after I added a printer command?

After you send a printer command to the printer, you might need to reset the printer (using another printer command) to restore normal printer functions. To reset the printer, repeat the steps for inserting printer commands and reenter the default values. See your printer manual for more information.

Troubleshooting Printing


When I use a network printer, I get a status page before my document.

Network printers often separate print jobs with separator pages (also called header pages or banners). To see how your network printer is set up, click File [image] Print [image] Properties. You will probably not be able to make property changes to a network printer; see your system administrator for more information.

Troubleshooting Printing


About Corel WordPerfect SGML

You can use the word-processing power of Corel WordPerfect 8 to create and edit SGML documents. The SGML features of Corel WordPerfect allow you to create and validate SGML documents without buying expensive add-ons.

Corel WordPerfect supports SGML through the SGML editing component within Corel WordPerfect itself in which you retrieve, edit, and save your SGML documents; the Corel WordPerfect DTD Compiler, in which you create a logic file (.LGC) from an ASCII DTD; and the Layout Designer, in which you assign formatting to specific elements.

Run the Setup program and specify a Custom Install to install the SGML components. Once installed, click Tools [image]  SGML to edit an SGML document and access other SGML features. When an SGML document is open, the SGML Property Bar provides quick access to frequently used SGML features.

For more information about Corel WordPerfect SGML, click Reference Center, then click SGML.

Tips

Corel Visual DTD ships with the Professional edition of the Corel WordPerfect Suite. Using Visual DTD you can create new DTDs or edit existing DTDs in a graphical environment. See Help in Visual DTD for more information.

To create a blank SGML document in Corel WordPerfect

To open an SGML file in Corel WordPerfect

To install Corel WordPerfect SGML

To activate SGML features in Corel WordPerfect


To install Corel WordPerfect SGML
To install Corel WordPerfect SGML,

1	Run the Setup program you used to install Corel WordPerfect 8.

2	Follow the prompts to do a Custom installation.

3	In the Custom Installation screen, click Settings, choose Deselect All, then click OK.

4	Click to select WordPerfect SGML.

5	Follow the prompts to complete the installation.

About Corel WordPerfect SGML


Legal Documents

Use a predesigned project to create a legal fax cover sheet, a pleading paper, and a time sheet. Click File [image] New [image] select Legal from the drop-down list, then select the legal project you want to work on.

Some other useful features for the legal profession include the following:

Create a table of authorities

Create templates for documents I reuse

Create pleading

Related Concepts


To activate SGML features in Corel WordPerfect
To activate SGML features in Corel WordPerfect,

1	Click Tools [image] SGML [image] Document Types.

2	Click a document type in the Types list, then click Select.

Tips

If no document types are listed in the Types list, click New to create a document type.

About Corel WordPerfect SGML


To open an SGML file in Corel WordPerfect
To open an SGML file in Corel WordPerfect,

1	Click Tools [image] SGML [image] Open SGML File.

2	Specify the name of the file.

3	Click a document type in the Document Types list.

About Corel WordPerfect SGML


How do I keep the drawing with the paragraph that talks about it?

You can attach a graphic image to a paragraph of text. Right-click the graphic [image] click Position [image] click Paragraph on the Attach Box To drop-down list. Drag the box to the paragraph you want to attach it to.

As you drag the graphics box, a push pin and dotted line appear to show you where the box is attached.

Troubleshooting Graphics


To create a blank SGML document in Corel WordPerfect
To create a blank SGML document in Corel WordPerfect,

1	Click Tools [image] SGML [image] Document Type.

2	Select a Document Type, then click OK.

Tips

When you create an SGML document, the Property Bar automatically changes. This allows easier access to SGML options and features.

About Corel WordPerfect SGML


When I save a document, why does it say WordPerfect 6/7/8 format?

When you save a file, the default format is WordPerfect 6/7/8. This ensures compatibility with other users you might be exchanging files with who are using Corel WordPerfect 3.5 for Macintosh or Corel WordPerfect 6.x for Windows, DOS, or Unix. Other versions of Corel WordPerfect cannot open files saved in WordPerfect 6/7/8 format.

Files saved in Corel WordPerfect 7 or 8 can take advantage of Windows features such as long filenames and OLE linking. Corel WordPerfect 8 also includes the option of using a new graphical Equation Editor that is not available in previous versions of WordPerfect. Otherwise, the formatting options (margins, styles, fonts, etc.) are the same between 6.x, 7, and 8.

Troubleshooting Saving and Closing Documents


word list

A list of words or phrases accessed by Corel WordPerfect when you proof your document using the writing tools. For example, Spell Checker scans all active word lists when you spell-check a document.


My footnote or endnote font isn't the same as the document's.

To select the font you want for all parts of a document, including headers, footers, page numbers, and footnotes, change the Document Default Font. Click File [image]  Document [image]  Default Font, then select the font you want.

Troubleshooting Footnotes and Endnotes


I don't know what this file does. Can I delete it?

Corel WordPerfect uses several different components and standard file names. It is possible to free up hard drive space by removing nonessential components and files. Several of the common file types are listed below.

You can also free up hard drive space by removing Corel WordPerfect from your system, then running Setup and specifying a Compact install (which installs only those files required to run Corel WordPerfect). You can install additional files not included in a Compact install (such as Help files) by specifying a Custom install. You can also specify that you want to Run from CD-ROM.

If you believe you deleted an essential file, you can restore it by running Setup and specifying a Compact install.

CV*.DLL

Conversion files necessary to import and export to different file formats.

.DLL

Dynamic Link Library. An application file necessary to run Corel WordPerfect.

.EVY

Envoy data file. The suite ships with the complete set of manuals in Envoy format.

.EXE

Application file. Necessary to run Corel WordPerfect.

.HLP

Application help files (like this one). Provides user assistance and information.

.NLI

Ask the PerfectExpert help files. Allows you to search for help information using your own words.

.UWL

User word list. Contains the list for Spell Checker to use suchas English US, English UK, or medical terms.

.WCM

Corel WordPerfect macro files.

.WPD

Corel WordPerfect document files.

.WPG

Corel WordPerfect graphics files.

.WPT

Corel WordPerfect template files. A template is a document file with customized format, content, and features.

Troubleshooting Program Files


Troubleshooting Program Files

What do you want help with?

I don't know what this file does. Can I delete it?

I accidentally deleted a program file. How can I reinstall it?

Corel WordPerfect takes up too much space. Can I run it from the CD?


I can't import my spreadsheet. How can I use it in my document?

If the spreadsheet application supports linking and embedding, copy the spreadsheet data to the Windows clipboard then click Edit [image] Paste Special and insert the information as a link or embedded object.

Copy the spreadsheet data to the Windows clipboard then click Edit [image] Paste to insert the information without linking it.

Save the spreadsheet data as ASCII text, then specify ASCII as the file type in Spreadsheet/Database Import.

Troubleshooting Spreadsheet and Database Importing and Linking


Troubleshooting Spreadsheet and Database Importing and Linking

What do you want help with?

I can't import my spreadsheet. How can I use it in my document?

Related Concepts


If I don't have a printer attached, how can I print my file?

If you have a fax modem and a fax driver installed you can fax the file. Obtain the fax number (perhaps to the office or hotel you're visiting). Click File [image] Print, then select the fax driver from the Name drop-down list. Click Print.

Print to a file, then copy the file to a computer that has a printer attached. To do this, click File [image] Print [image] Details. Select the printer the file will be printed to, click Print to File, then specify a file to print to and click OK. (To avoid overwriting the original document, give the file on disk a unique name.) Click Print to save the file. At the other computer, use the DOS COPY command to copy the file to the port the printer is attached to. From an MS-DOS window, type a command in the form COPY /B MYDOC.PRT LPT1.

Troubleshooting Printing


Can I use a macro from Corel WordPerfect 6.x or 7 in version 8?

You can use many of the macros you wrote for previous version of WordPerfect in WordPerfect 8 for Windows.

The structure of the macro language has not changed for Corel WordPerfect version 6.0 through 8. While later versions of the macro language include access to new Corel WordPerfect features and some new commands for accessing existing features, some of the older product commands have been retained to maintain macro compatibility. Play the macro in Corel WordPerfect 8, note any compiler errors, then edit the macro to make needed changes.

Open the Macros Reference Center

Troubleshooting Upgrading from Previous Versions of Corel WordPerfect


ODBC

Open Database Connectivity. A Microsoft standard for accessing different database applications via a common API.


Why is my text red with a double underline?

The Internet Publisher uses red, double-underlined text to indicate the characters are Custom HTML. If you are typing text rather than HTML tags, open the Reveal Codes window (click View [image] Reveal Codes), then drag the Char Style: Custom HTML code out of the window to delete it. Text within the paired Custom HTML codes is not displayed when you publish the document to HTML.

Troubleshooting Internet Publisher


Can I make another database work in a merge?

Yes. Import the database file as a merge data file. To use the Import feature, click Insert [image] Spreadsheet/Database [image] Import.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Merge


Use File in Active Window

Click Use File in Active Window if you want the current document to become a merge file. If you have just created a data file and now want to create a form file (or the other way around), click New Document Window to create a separate file.


Corel WordPerfect takes up too much space. Can I run it from the CD?

When you install Corel WordPerfect Suite 8, select the Run from CD-ROM installation type. This installs a minimal number of files to your computer and requires the CD-ROM to be in the drive as you work.

Tips

If you are installing from a network, the Run from CD-ROM option is replaced with Run from Network.

Troubleshooting Program Files


I accidentally deleted a program file. How can I reinstall it?

Reinstall a file by running the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup program and specifying a Compact install. Only those files essential to running Corel WordPerfect are installed. You can reinstall additional files by specifying a Custom install.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Program Files


My table redraws too slowly. How can I speed it up?

Display tables with gridlines only (you will see dimmed, dotted lines and no fill style). When you do this, the table lines and fill style are retained for printing. Click View [image] Table Gridlines to turn on the gridlines.

Troubleshooting Tables


Why are my images "Not Available"?

The graphics are not in the folder or URL specified by the HTML document. You specify the graphics folder when you publish the document to HTML.

In the HTML document itself, this folder is often specified by a relative path such "\graphics" to indicate it is a subfolder to the folder in which the document is located. Use Base URL to keep track of the original graphics folder when you move the document to a different location.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Internet Publisher


To rename a file using the descriptive filename
To rename a file using the descriptive filename,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Summary [image] click On open, use the descriptive name for the new filename.

Tips

Changes you make to the file are saved with the new filename. You can save or delete the original file with the 8.3 file name.

If you plan to exchange files with users of 6.1 or earlier versions of Corel WordPerfect, they will be able to open the file but will not see the long filename. They will see a shortened filename that matches the 8.3 format. For example, a file name "My 4th Quarter Sales Report" might appear as "my4thq~1.wpd"

Files saved to a network directory that does not support long filenames are also automatically shortened to match the 8.3 format.

About Document Summary Settings


Can I print a table without the lines showing?

You can create a table, fill it in, then print the table information without the table lines showing. For example, you could do this if you want to print to a preprinted form.

After creating the table, click File [image] Print [image] Details, then select Print text only.

If you want a table with no lines, right-click the table, click Borders/Fill, click the Table tab, and select X (none) for the table border and default cell lines. You can still see the outlines of the cells if you have table gridlines turned on (click View [image] Table Gridlines).

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Tables


My fractions don't look the same.

If you type 1/2, the fraction is displayed as a single character ( [image]). To display a fraction as regular numbers, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect, select the 1/2 entry, then click Delete Entry.

To display other fractions with small numbers as a single character, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect. Type the fraction in the Replace text field, then press Tab. Press Ctrl+W and select the Typographic Symbols character set. Select the fraction you want to use as a character, then click Insert and Close. Click Add . Close.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Why do several lines move when I press Tab?

QuickIndent helps you indent a paragraph after you have typed several lines. When you press Tab at the beginning of any line in the paragraph (except the first), you indent the entire paragraph. If the first line of the paragraph does not begin with a tab, that line does not indent (making a hanging indent).

To turn off QuickIndent, Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go, then deselect QuickIndent.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


Why can't I type two spaces after a colon?

QuickCorrect automatically changes two spaces after a colon to one space. To turn this feature off, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Format-As-You-Go, then click Change two spaces to one space between words.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


I pressed Tab but the insertion point didn't move.

There might not be any more tab settings to the right of the insertion point. Look at the Ruler to check the tab settings. If you want to restore the original tab settings, right-click  the paragraph, then click Default Tab Settings.

Troubleshooting Tabs and Indents


World Wide Web

The World Wide Web (WWW or Web) refers to a large collection of documents linked through a global computer network called the Internet. Using a browser to view a document on the World Wide Web is now the most commonly used method of accessing documents on the Internet.


About the Address Book

The Corel WordPerfect Address Book stores names, addresses, and phone numbers in one handy location. You can even create several different address books for various needs (clients, friends, classmates, etc.). You can then have Address Book insert names, addresses and phone numbers in the documents you create. You can also create mass mailings by placing names and addresses into a series of personalized letters, and Corel WordPerfect will address the envelopes for you.

To insert addresses from the Address Book

Related Concepts


point

A unit of measure used for typesetting. A point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch (0.04 cm).


Example2 1
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example2 2
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example2 3
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example2 4
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example2 5
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


Example2 6
Click pictures on the left. Click arrows on the right.


About Linking to an Image on Disk

Graphics image files can be very large, particularly scanned image files and photographs. Use Image On Disk to include a large image file in a document without increasing the document size. You link the image to your document without adding the image file into the document.

If you use the image in several places in your document, you do not have to reinsert the image repeatedly after you edit the image in a drawing program.

To link to images copied into the document from the Scrapbook, you must first save them to your hard drive.

To link to an image on disk

Related Concepts


To link to an image on disk
To link to an image on disk,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

2	Click Image on Disk.

3	Select the image you want to link to your document.

4	Click Insert.

Tips

The location of the image is stored in the document, rather than the image file.

To link to images copied from the Scrapbook, you must first save them to your hard drive.

When you open the document, you need to be sure that you have access to the folder where the image file is stored. For example, if the image is stored on a CD-ROM, the CD must be in the drive and accessible.

To display the name of the image file, right-click the graphic image, then click Content. The Filename box lists the path and name of the file.

Related Topics

About Linking to an Image on Disk


About Corel Clipart

More than 12,000 Clipart images and 250 photos are provided with Corel WordPerfect. During a standard installation, only some of these are copied to your hard drive. Most of these Clipart images are stored on the Corel WordPerfect Suite CD. You can drag images from the Scrapbook directly into a Corel WordPerfect document or a Corel Presentations slide show.

You can also insert other types of images into your document. Corel WordPerfect can automatically convert and read images in many standard formats, including .JPG, .BMP, .PCX, and more.

To insert images from the Scrapbook, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart. To insert photos, bitmaps, and other types of images, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

About Scrapbook

To insert a Corel photo from the CD-ROM

To insert clipart

Related Concepts


To insert a Corel photo from the CD-ROM
To insert a Corel photo from the CD-ROM,

1	Insert the Corel WordPerfect Suite CD in your CD-ROM drive.

2	In the document window, click where you want to insert the photo.

3	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

4	In the Insert Image dialog box, specify the CD-ROM drive and click the photo you want in the files list.

5	Click Insert.

Tips

Photos are located in the \corel\suite8\graphics\photos folder on the CD. They have a .jpg extension.

To preview a photo before you insert it, click [image] and click the photo filename.

About Corel Clipart


About Word Form

When you search and replace forms of a word, there can be more than one possible replacement word. For example, if you replace forms of "make" with forms of "do," the past tense "made" can be replaced by either "did" or "done."

Select the word you want from the Word forms list box, then click Replace to insert the new word.

To find and replace different forms of a word


When creating a new label format, I get a message "margins overlap."

The total of both margins cannot exceed the label width or height. For example, if the margin width is 2.75", a left margin of 2" and a right margin of 1" would total 3". The margins would then overlap.

As you adjust the label margins, refer to the preview window to check your settings.

Troubleshooting Labels


Brochures and Mailers

Use a Template

Use the PerfectExpert to quickly create tri-folded brochures and mailers. Click File [image] New [image] Business [image] Brochure.

The PerfectExpert formats the document and enters personal information from the Address Book.

Automate Address Entry

To enter addresses on multiple mailers, use the Address Book to quickly insert addresses on labels. Or use Merge to insert a different address on each mailer.

Insert addresses on labels

Merge addresses sideways on a mailer

Create Your Own Brochures and Mailers

If you want to experiment and create something different, try the following:

Change the way text prints on the page (landscape)

Divide a page into smaller pages (Subdivide Page)

Create a bulleted list

Enlarge the first letter of a paragraph (drop cap)

Create a page border so I can type text inside

Make settings reusable (create a paragraph style)

Create repeating text or graphics in a footer

Protect format so I can reuse the document

Print on both sides of the page

Related Concepts


About Text with Graphics

You can add text to graphics in a number of ways.

To enclose text in a frame, you can add a border and fill to a selected block of text without placing it in a text box.

To contour text around a graphics image or print it across the image, change the Wrap Text option. You can also insert a watermark that puts a lightly shaded drawing behind the printed page.

Another way to make text stand out from surrounding text is to use a text box. When you insert text in a text box, you can then rotate it or make it reversed (white text on a dark background).

You can also use Corel Presentations to put words on images or charts. When you use Corel Presentations, the text is saved as part of the image or chart, rather than with the document.

You can also use TextArt to format your text in fancy shapes, patterns, and colors.

To add a border to a column

To add a border to a paragraph

To add a border to a page

To wrap text around an image

To put an image behind the text using a watermark

To add text in a graphics box

To rotate text in a text box

To create reversed text (white on black)

To add text in a drawing or other graphic

To edit or annotate a chart or graph

Related Concepts


To add text in a drawing or other graphic
To add text in a drawing or other graphic,

1	Right-click the graphic, then click Edit Image.

2	Use the Text Object Tools on the toolbar to place text in the graphic.

3	Click outside the drawing to return to the document window.

Tips

If the drawing is an OLE object, right-click the OLE object, then click Drawing Object [image] Edit.

With the Text Object Tools you can add a line of text to the drawing or add a box with several lines of text.

About Text with Graphics


About Merging Text Sideways

When you want all text to print sideways on the page, you select a landscape orientation with the Paper Size definition. When you want only a few sentences or paragraphs to print sideways, you can put text in a text box and rotate the contents sideways. For example, you could do this on flyers or books where you want to print text sideways along the edge to highlight certain text or create chapter divisions.

However, rotating text is especially useful for creating addresses on brochures and mailers when you want to print the address on the folded paper, rather than use an envelope. It is also a good idea to use the Merge feature when sending your brochure or mailer to many people. You can set up a permanent address file to save time when you send out a new mailing.

Because you are not using the envelope feature (which resets the paper size to envelope size), you need to create a text box, insert the merge codes, and rotate the contents before you merge.

To merge text sideways

Related Concepts


To merge text sideways
To merge text sideways,

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to create sideways text.

2	Click Tools [image] Merge [image] Create Document.

3	Select Use File in Active Window, then click OK.

4	Specify a data source, then click OK.

5	Click Insert [image] Text Box.

6	Click Insert Field on the Merge toolbar, select a field, then click Insert.

7	Insert more fields or type additional text. When the information is complete, click Close.

8	Right-click the text box, click Contents, specify a rotation, then click OK.

9	Position and size the text box.

10	Click Merge on the toolbar to complete the merge.

Tips

When you merge into a text box, you must first identify the document as a merge form file as directed in steps 3-5. Otherwise, Merge options are not available when you type in the text box.

Related Topics

About Merging Text Sideways


To turn off the shadow cursor
To turn off the shadow cursor,

1	Click View [image] Shadow Cursor.

Tips

To select where the shadow cursor appears (text or white space), and to change its appearance, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display, then select the Shadow cursor options.

About the Shadow Cursor


When I edit a header, the shadow cursor doesn't show in the document.

The shadow cursor displays only in the active editing area. For example, while you edit a header, a comment, or a footnote, the shadow cursor does not display in the document window.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


Can I adjust all the margins using the guidelines at the same time?

You can't use guidelines to change all the margins at the same time, like sizing a graphics box from a corner. You must adjust each margin guideline individually.

Troubleshooting Margins and Page Orientation


Can I rotate multiple cells of text in a table all at once?

Yes. Select the cells to be rotated before you rotate the text (click Table [image] Format, then select an option from the Rotate pop-up list).

Troubleshooting Tables


Will color text in a document stay colored when published to HTML?

Yes, text color attributes are retained when a document is converted to HTML format.

Troubleshooting Internet Publisher


When I adjust page margins, shouldn't headers and footers adjust too?

Headers and footers will adjust to the top and bottom margins, but not to the left and right margins. The left and right margins for headers and footers are determined by the setting in the default document style. To change this style, click File [image] Document [image] Current Document Style.

Troubleshooting Headers or Footers


Can I select multiple areas in a document by using the Ctrl key?

No. Currently, it is not possible to select multiple, non-contiguous areas of text or graphics.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Can I turn off Auto Code Placement?

Auto Code Placement places certain codes at the top of a paragraph or page in which the insertion point is placed, depending on the feature. Auto Code Placement is on by default.

You can turn off Auto Code Placement for a certain document by creating a macro that uses the AutoCodePlacement(Off!) macro command and running it in that document.

Troubleshooting Formatting Codes


About Viewing the Merge Appendix

Additional information about merge programming commands, variables, and expressions is found in an Envoy file in the Corel WordPerfect Reference Center. (This information is not in the Corel WordPerfect user's guide.) You can view this information on-screen using the Envoy viewer, and you can print it.

Click the gray button below to go to the Reference Center. At the Reference Center, click the "Merge Programming Commands" icon to open the appendix in Envoy.

If you have not installed the Reference Center or its related files, run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup program, select a Custom installation, select the Reference Center option, and make sure you have selected the correct components.

Go to the Reference Center

Related Concepts


To create a to-do list with check box bullets
To create a to-do list with check box bullets,

1	Right-click the toolbar [image] click Shipping Macros [image] click [image].

2	Press Tab or Indent, type text for the first item, then press Enter to start the next item.

3	To end the check box list, press Enter [image] Backspace.

About Bulleted Lists


About Printing Sideways (Landscape/Rotate Text)

If you want all the text on a page to print sideways or print in a different orientation, you can change the page size definition. You can control whether you print in portrait or landscape orientation by specifying the direction of the font and the page orientation.

If you want only sections of text to print sideways, create text in a text box, then rotate the contents. You can also merge information to a text box, which is useful for creating addresses on mailers.

Using TextArt you can shape text, then rotate and stretch it to create different sideways effects.

If you create text in a graphics program, you can then treat the image as a graphic and rotate it using the Image Tools. When you create text graphically, you can add shading and fill patterns to the text and background. Also, on any graphics image, you can create a caption and rotate it around the graphic.

Print entire page sideways (landscape)

Create a text box for sections of text

Rotate text in a text box

Merge text sideways into a text box

Rotate a TextArt Image

Rotate a Graphics Text Image

Rotate a Caption

Related Concepts


About Web Document Graphics Lines

You can create a horizontal line and specify position (right, left, center, or full), length, and thickness. Vertical or colored lines must be created as JPG or GIF files and imported as images.

To create a horizontal line in a web document


To create a horizontal line in a web document
To create a horizontal line in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Insert [image] Horizontal Line.

Tips

You can also click [image] on the Internet Publisher toolbar.

To change length, position, and thickness, right-click the line, then click Edit Horizontal Line.

About Web Document Graphics Lines


Can the Address Book be shared on a network?

Yes. The system administrator can place the Address Book database on the network. The database is typically installed to C:\Corel\Suite8\Shared\Address. If the Address Book is on the network, we recommend making the Address Book read-only or giving read-only rights to users. Once it is installed to the network, open the Corel WordPerfect Address Book at each personal workstation and specify the location of the shared Address Book.

1	In the Address Book, click Edit [image] Preferences.

2	Click Services.

3	Select Corel WordPerfect Address Book, then click Properties.

4	Specify the network file location, then click OK.

5	To have changes take effect, exit the Address Book, exit Corel WordPerfect, then restart your applications.

Tips

You can only specify a location for the current preferred profile. If you select a different profile, you must exit your applications and start them again before you can specify services (database location and repair).

It is possible to give full rights to users in addition to the full rights of the system administrator. However, whoever has write rights must be aware that if you are using the Microsoft client for NetWare, you should disable the write-behind caching option in Control Panel to avoid corrupting the Address Book database.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Address Book


Can I convert the Address Book from an earlier version?

Earlier versions of the Corel Address Book are converted when Corel WordPerfect 8 is installed, provided the earlier version of Corel WordPerfect is still on the computer.

If you are upgrading from Corel WordPerfect 6.1 for Windows, the installation searches for the wpcset.bif file. If it is found, the path of the default template is retrieved from the BIF file.

The installation converts all addresses except Personal Information.

Troubleshooting Address Book


I'm losing data in my network Address Book.

If you are using an Address Book on a network and using the Microsoft client for NetWare, you could be losing data because of a disk caching error in the driver. To avoid this problem, you can disable the write-behind cache option in Control Panel.

1	Click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel [image] System [image] Performance [image] File System [image] Troubleshooting.

2	Click Disable write-behind caching for all drives.

Tips

If you are using a shared network Address Book, we recommend that your system administrator make the shared database read-only or limit users to read-only rights.

Troubleshooting Address Book


I installed something else and my Address Book changed.

If you install another messaging system (such as Microsoft  Exchange) after installing the Corel WordPerfect Address Book, the Windows registry might be pointing to the last installed system. If this has happened, you will have to re-select the Corel WordPerfect Address Book.

1	Click Tools [image] Address Book [image] Edit [image] Settings.

2	Click Corel 8 Settings, then click OK.

3	To have changes take effect, exit the Address Book, exit Corel WordPerfect, then restart your applications.

Troubleshooting Address Book


Why can't I add or edit addresses in the Address Book?

If you are unable to add or edit names and addresses, you are probably using an Address Book on a network where you haven't been given full rights or your network Address Book has been marked read-only. If you need to write to the Address Book (add or edit addresses), contact your system administrator to get full rights or have the read-only status changed. However, we recommend that when using a shared Address Book, users should be given read-only access.

Troubleshooting Address Book


About the Reference Center

The Reference Center contains the full text of the printed manuals available for the Corel WordPerfect Suite in Envoy format. This allows you to search the manuals to quickly find the information you need.

To access the Reference Center from within Corel WordPerfect, click Help [image] Help Topics [image] Contents [image] Reference Center. You can also access it by clicking Start on the Windows Taskbar [image] Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 [image] Setup & Notes [image] Reference Center.

Go to the Reference Center

Related Concepts


To save an image, chart, or TextArt as a WordPerfect graphic file
To save an image, chart, or TextArt as a WordPerfect graphic file,

1	Select the image, chart, or TextArt object.

2	Click File [image] Save As.

3	Click Selected Image, then click OK.

4	Type a name for the file and click Save.

Tips

Be sure the As type list box shows WordPerfect Graphics 2.0 (.WPG) as the file type.

About Saving Graphics Image Files Separately


To list specific kinds of graphics images
To list specific kinds of graphics images,

1	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From File.

2	If necessary, click Tools [image] Enable QuickFinder to select it.

3	Specify the folder to look in, and click Select Subfolder if you want to narrow the search to a subfolder.

4	Make sure the Include Subfolders and Match Any Form of the Words boxes are checked.

5	In the Content box, type the words you want to base your search on, then click Find Now.

Tips

For example, you can have QuickFinder list all the drawings that contain pictures of children, birds, or flags.

Clipart images, photos, and drawings are found in the \Corel\Suite8\Graphics\ClipArt folder on the Applications CD-ROM disk.

About Corel Clipart


To add a border to a graphics box
To add a border to a graphics box,

1	Right-click the graphic [image] click Border/Fill.

2	Select a border from the Border palette.

Tips

Click the Advanced tab to see more border and shading options.

About Changing the Look of a Graphics Box


About Merge Options

From a data file you can use the Merge toolbar to sort and print a data file, hide or display merge codes, and change a merge file into a regular document by removing the Merge toolbar.

From a form document you can hide or display merge codes and remove the toolbar.

To display or hide merge codes

To sort and print a data file

To change a merge file into a regular document


About Publishing a Document

You can publish your document to three different electronic formats: HTML, Envoy, and Corel Barista.

HTML and Barista formats create Internet-ready documents. Corel WordPerfect HTML documents support the HTML 3.2 standard. Corel Barista documents can be viewed by any Java-enabled browser.

Envoy format lets others view a document exactly as you formatted it without using Corel WordPerfect. Envoy documents can also be viewed in a web browser that has the Envoy plug-in installed.

Related Concepts


About Publishing to Corel Barista

Use Corel Barista to publish web documents that use Java to display all the formatting and graphics included in your Corel WordPerfect document.

Corel Barista creates a standard HTML document with an embedded Java applet that recreates your document for Web users. Anything you can publish from Corel WordPerfect, Corel Presentations, or Corel Quattro Pro can be viewed by any Java-enabled web browser when you use Corel Barista. For example, you can view columns, multiple fonts, and text contoured around an object.

You can publish Barista files two ways from within Corel WordPerfect, Corel Presentations, or Corel Quattro Pro: use either the Print feature or the Send feature. The Send feature is quicker, but using the Print feature gives you more Barista options.

Java provides three display fonts for documents--Times New Roman, Arial, and Courier New.  If your document contains fonts other than the three supported by Java, the Times New Roman, Arial, or Courier New fonts will replace the fonts you originally used when your document is displayed on the Web.

Corel Barista documents cannot be printed from the browser.

Important: Corel Barista is not installed as part of the Typical install option when you install the Corel WordPerfect Suite. To create a Barista file, you must choose the Custom install option and install Barista separately.

To send a document to Corel Barista

Related Concepts


Can I put my personal Address Book on a network?

Yes. To do so, place the Address Book database folder on the network. The database is typically installed to c:\Corel\Suite8\Shared\Address. Then open the Corel WordPerfect Address Book at your work station and specify the network location of the Address Book.

1	In the Address Book, click Edit [image] Preferences.

2	Click Services.

3	Select Address Book, then click Properties.

4	Specify the network file location, then click OK.

5	To have changes take effect, exit the Address Book, exit Corel WordPerfect, then restart your applications.

Tips

You can only specify a location for the current preferred profile. If you select a different profile, you must exit your applications and start them again before you can specify services (database location and repair).

If you have your Address Book on a network and you are using the Microsoft client for NetWare, you should disable the write-behind caching option in Control Panel to avoid corrupting the Address Book database.

Related Topics

Troubleshooting Address Book


To get information about a document on disk
To get information about a document on disk,

1	Open the Windows Explorer and click the folder the document is saved in.

2	Right-click the file [image] click Properties [image] Summary.

Related Concepts


Troubleshooting Corel Barista

What do you want help with?

Why can't others see my Corel Barista documents?

Why don't others see the same fonts in Corel Barista documents?

I can't see my Corel Barista documents. Applet Barista.class can't be found.

Why can't I find the folder \Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista?


About Creating Tables and Floating Cells

You can insert a table from the menus or click the Tables toolbar button to quickly create a custom-sized table.

You can also create a table by converting text that already exists in parallel or tabbed columns, or by importing a spreadsheet or database.

Tables and Graphics Boxes

You can also create a table inside a graphics box by dragging a rectangle in a document's white space. The graphics box can be any size and position on the page. When a table is in a graphics box, text can flow around the table, and you can easily move the table by dragging the border of the box.

When you create a table without a graphics box, the table is positioned at the insertion point and spans the width of the page. You can size and move the table after it is created.

The Tables Property Bar

When you click in a table, the Tables Property Bar appears.  The Property Bar lets you quickly add and move columns and rows, join or split tables or cells, or select the table or parts of it.

Floating Cells

You can also create a floating cell, which is a single table cell that exists outside of a table. A floating cell can contain formulas, text, or numbers that can be linked to other parts of the document or other documents to present a snapshot of information such as a sales total.

To create a table

To create a table in a graphics box

To create a floating cell

To convert parallel or tabbed columns to a table

About Importing a Spreadsheet or Database into a Table

About Adding and Moving Parts of a Table

Related Concepts


About Changing the Look of a Table and Its Parts

You can quickly change the way a table looks by applying a style to the whole table (SpeedFormat).  You can also change the look of specific parts of the table, such as a border or certain cells.  For example, add shading to certain rows or cells to make a table easier to read, as in the illustration below.

About Changing the Look of a Whole Table (SpeedFormat)

About Changing the Look of Tables, Cells, Columns, and Rows

About Changing the Lines, Fill, and Border of a Table

Related Concepts


About Linking, Calculating, and Merging Table Data

You can use tables and floating cells to create formulas and to use many spreadsheet functions. For example, if you name a cell and use that cell name in a formula, the data in the named cell is entered into the formula. This is useful if the data in the named cell changes periodically. With automatic calculation turned on, the data in the formula updates whenever you change the data in the named cell.

You can also create a chart that is linked to a table, so that the chart changes as the table changes. You can import spreadsheet data into a table, and you can merge information into a table.

About Using Formulas in Tables

About Naming Tables or Parts of Tables

About Data Table (Merge) Files

About Creating a Chart from a Table

Related Concepts


About Creating a Chart from a Table

You can use the data in a table to create a chart containing the same information.  When you create a chart from a table, the two are associated.  You can specify that charts associated with tables automatically update when you make changes to the data in the tables.

To create a chart from a table

Related Concepts


About Table Style Settings

Use Table Style Settings to choose which styles are displayed in the Available styles list and to specify where the styles you create are saved.

To specify which styles to display in the Table SpeedFormat list

To save a table style to a specific template

Related Concepts


To specify which styles to display in the Table SpeedFormat list
To specify which styles to display in the Table SpeedFormat list,

1	Click in a table.

2	On the Tables Property Bar, click Table [image] SpeedFormat [image] Options [image] Setup.

3	Click an option.

Tips

To get information on an option, click [image], then click the option.

Related Topics

About Table Style Settings


To create a floating cell
To create a floating cell,

1	Click Insert [image] Table [image] Floating Cell [image] Create.

2	Use the Table Formula toolbar to insert a formula in the floating cell, or insert the name of a table cell to reference information in that cell.

Related Topics

About Creating Tables and Floating Cells


Can I fax when I am attached to a network?

If you have no modem but you are connected to a local network, it is possible that you can still send a fax from your computer. Check with your system administrator to find out how to send a fax through your network.

If you have an Internet connection, you can sign up with a Internet fax service provider. Some of these services are free, while others charge a fee but offer service guarantees and software.

To install and select a fax driver

Related Concepts


What happened to the keyboard shortcuts?

You can use keyboard shortcuts with Corel WordPerfect 8. These shortcuts are typically not displayed on the pull-down menus, however. To display the keyboard shortcuts, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment. Then click the Interface tab [image] Display shortcut keys.

Related Concepts


To select which toolbars display
To select which toolbars display,

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Select the toolbars you want to display.

Tips

To hide all toolbars, the scroll bars and the menus, click View [image] Hide Bars. Click Esc to restore the interface.

Click Tools [image] Settings to change a toolbar, Property Bar, Application Bar, or menu.

Right-click the scroll bar [image] click Settings to specify how the scroll bars display.

About Toolbars and Menus


To restore the menus and toolbars
To restore the menus and toolbars,

1	Press Esc.

Tips

You can also press Alt+V [image] Hide Bars to restore the menus.

About Hiding All Toolbars and Menus


To create QuickLinks to commonly used web documents
To create QuickLinks to commonly used web documents,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] QuickLinks.

2	Type the word you want converted to a QuickLink, then specify the associated URL.

Tips

To turn off QuickLinks, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] QuickLinks tab [image] deselect Format words as hyperlinks when you type them.

Related Topics

About QuickLinks


About QuickLinks

Using QuickLinks you can automatically create hyperlinks when you type certain kinds of text. For example, when you type text that begins with "www," "ftp," "http," or "mailto," QuickLinks can automatically convert it to an Internet link. You can even modify QuickLinks to convert the link to  more meaningful terms. For example, you might specify that when you type "www.corel.com," QuickLinks replace the visible text with "Corel" and creates a link it to the Corel home page at URL http://www.corel.com.

To create QuickLinks to commonly used web documents

Related Concepts


About Creating Forms in Internet Publisher

Like most paper forms, a web form is used to gather information and feedback. Perhaps you need to get names and addresses of potential customers. Or you might want to know what the people in your company think about a new corporate policy. You can build a form by inserting form fields into your web document.

Using the Internet Publisher, you can easily add form fields to your web document. You can include the following fields in forms you create with Internet Publisher.

Radio buttons

Check boxes

Selection lists

Text boxes and text lines

Password fields

Submit buttons and submit images

Reset buttons

Hidden fields

You can also import a Web form into a Corel WordPerfect document and see it formatted correctly in your document. When you import the form, the forms dialog boxes in the Internet Publisher contain the correct information for the form you have imported. This makes it easy for you to create a similar form for publication on the Web.

Note: The Internet Publisher does not provide a server-side gateway program to process the information gathered from the form.

To add form fields in a web document

Related Concepts


Reference Center

The Reference Center is not installed on your system or it did not register properly during install.

To view the suite manuals online,

1	Insert the Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 CD-ROM.

2	Click Reference Center on the startup screen.

Tips

You can find the Corel Reference Center (refcntr.exe) in the folder \corel\suite8\shared\refcntr on the CD-ROM.

To install the Reference Center, rerun the Setup program, specify a Custom Install, then click the Reference Center option.


What Is New?

Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 adds an updated, more intuitive user interface to a classic product. The new context-sensitive Property Bar, updated toolbars, and streamlined dialog boxes provide a highly tuned and intuitive working environment.

Property Bar

This innovative and powerful context-sensitive bar changes, depending on the task you are doing. For example, when you are working on a table, the Property Bar displays table tools. When you select a graphic, the Property Bar changes to graphics tools.

Application Bar

The powerful new Application Bar lets you switch between documents, drag and drop information, and easily work with multiple documents.

Corel PerfectExpert

The Corel PerfectExpert combines the best features from QuickTasks, templates, Help, and Coaches to help you accomplish your work more quickly. The Corel PerfectExpert can guide you through a detailed project such as creating a resume (even if you want to use other suite applications to create parts of the document), or it can guide you through a smaller task such as inserting a clipart image. The Corel PerfectExpert provides you with galleries of professionally-designed documents to choose from, and you can change the layout and content in any number of ways to match your needs.

HTML Support

With the addition of HTML forms support, Corel WordPerfect continues to lead the industry in Internet publishing technology. Using the Internet Publisher, you can add form fields to your web document. These fields include radio buttons, check boxes, selection lists, and text boxes, making the gathering of information easier than ever. You can insert sound clips, image maps, and even Java applets to make your page exciting and easy to navigate.

Corel WordPerfect supports HTML specifications 2.0 and 3.2, and includes some additional browser-specific tags recognized by Netscape Navigator 3.0, Netscape Communicator 4.0 and Internet Explorer version 3.0 and higher.

QuickLinks

Corel WordPerfect pioneered the ability to link text to documents and bookmarks with the Hypertext feature. Corel WordPerfect 7 added the ability to link to a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) on the Internet. Corel WordPerfect 8 continuesto improve this capability with the QuickLinks feature. When you type text that begins with "www," "ftp," "http," or "mailto," QuickLinks automatically converts it to an Internet link. You can even modify QuickLinks to convert the link to  more meaningful terms. For example, when you type "www.corel.com," QuickLinks can replace the visible text with "Corel" and create a link to the Corel home page at URL http://www.corel.com.

Intel MMX Support

Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 is the first software suite to support the Intel Pentium with MMX technology. You do not need to have a computer equipped with MMX technology to run Corel WordPerfect 8. However, an MMX-enhanced computer can improve the performance of Corel WordPerfect by reducing the time it takes to redraw bitmap and vector graphics and improving speed in other areas.

Drawing Layer

The new Drawing Layer lets you draw graphics objects directly on top of text, group graphics objects, and set the order of graphics objects. Create lines and shapes with arrowheads, polygons, circles, and more. Add color, gradient fills, and patterns to give extra polish to your documents. You can even draw over the top of clipart or a chart you've inserted into your document.

Enhanced Tables

Tables have always been a hallmark of Corel WordPerfect. You can insert tables that span the full page width, or just a portion of it. When you a click on a table, the table Property Bar appears giving you one-click  access to size rows dynamically within a table and quickly join or split cells with a single click and drag. Formatting is easy using QuickFormat for tables. Simply select the table cell that contains the formatting you like, choose QuickFormat, and apply the format to the cell you want to modify.

Grammar-As-You-Go

Corel WordPerfect 7 added Spell-As-You-Go, a timesaving feature that lets you correct spelling errors as you type. Corel WordPerfect 8 adds Grammar-As-You-Go, another timesaving feature that lets you recognize and fix common grammar problems as you type. For example, a phrase such as "they is home" is marked in the document. Right-click the marked phrase and choose from a list of possible suggestions, or ignore the marked phrase and move on.

Corel Versions

Corel Versions solves the problem of trying to control and track multiple copies of the same file. Instead of trying to keep track of all your updates to a file by saving new versions of it under different file names, Corel Versions lets you save the changes you have made to each successive versionof your file.

With Corel Versions you can:

Archive previous versions of your files

Retrieve any archived version of a file

View any archived version of a file

Compare archived files to see the differences between them

Attach meaningful information to each archived version that can be viewed in the document history window

Track multiple users of a common file

Delete any archived file from the history list

Specify how many versions to keep in the document history list

Protect a specific archived version from being discarded from the history list

SGML Editor

Using the familiar Corel WordPerfect environment, you can create new SGML documents, edit existing SGML documents, mark up text, validate tags, and improve how your SGML documents are printed. You can also use the power of the Corel WordPerfect writing tools to check spelling and correct typing errors automatically with QuickCorrect. You can hide the SGML codes in the document window and use Corel WordPerfect's text formatting to make the document easier for you to read on screen. Corel WordPerfect provides:

A structured view of the document providing the WYSIWYG view of the document on one side and a tree view on the other.

Improved graphics support so that graphics and the markup associated with the graphic can be imported and exported with the SGML document.

Automatic mapping for ISO characters during the DTD compiling process so multi-national characters are mapped to the appropriate characters in the editor. (Characters that do not fall within the ISO character sets can still be mapped by hand.)

Improved importing and exporting to handle white space in SGML documents better.

 	Related Concepts


About Format-As-You-Go

You can use Format-As-You-Go to specify the settings for automatic sentence corrections, end of sentence corrections, and other options such as QuickIndent and QuickLines.

To display a description of Format-As-You-Go options, click the item in the Format-As-You-Go group box and read the description. You can turn options on or off by clicking the check box next to the item.

To change how ordinal numbers look

To change the appearance of quotation marks

To use QuickIndent

To turn QuickCorrect options on or off

To insert a horizontal line

Related Concepts


The gradient fill in my table cells doesn't display right.

When a gradient fill displays in a table on screen, it appears as a solid color (a mixture of the foreground and background colors). When you print the document, however, the gradient fill appears as you defined it.

Troubleshooting Tables


I added a table column, but it's outside the page margins.

You have selected Keep column widths the same. When you insert new columns, you should select this option if you want the existing columns to remain the same width. However, if the table fills the space between the left and right margins, any column you insert must then extend into the margin.

Use Undo (Ctrl+Z) to remove the added column, then resize the existing margins to make room for another. Or, if you don't need the existing margins to stay the same, deselect Keep column widths the same.

Troubleshooting Tables


I changed a template but now I can't save it as a template.

When you open a template file, you are using the template to create a new document; it must then be saved as a Corel WordPerfect document.

To make changes to the original template, you must edit it. Click File [image] New, select the template, then click Options [image] Edit WP Template. This document is then saved as a template file (with a .wpt filename extension).

Troubleshooting Templates


My list of QuickCorrect words is gone. What happened?

You probably have changed the language in part of the document. QuickCorrect lists are specific to the language you use for spell-checking. You have a QuickCorrect list for the main language you use, and if you work with other languages there is a separate QuickCorrect list for each one.

If you want to use a QuickCorrect list for another language, you must have installed the corresponding language module. If you haven't done that, QuickCorrect will not list any words when that language is active.

Troubleshooting Spelling and Grammar Checking


system styles

A style that defines the format of a Corel WordPerfect feature, such as for footnotes, outlines, or indexes. Normally system styles are not displayed in the Style List, but you can display them and copy or edit them.


I typed a quotation mark after a number. Why isn't it curly?

If other quotation marks in the document are curly, QuickCorrect is making this change. Quotation marks after numbers are often for measurements, and the SmartQuotes feature makes them automatically straight.

To turn this off, click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] SmartQuotes, then deselect Use straight quotation marks.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


To view and edit system styles
To view and edit system styles,

1	Click Format [image] Styles [image] Options [image] Setup.

2	Select System, then click OK.

Tips

The styles are listed here together, but you can also edit them as you change the corresponding features. For example, when you define a table of contents, click Styles [image] Edit to open the styles editor with the style you selected.

You can edit system styles, but you cannot delete them.

About Styles


Where Did It Go?

This Help page summarizes changes made in Corel WordPerfect 8. For a list of new features in Corel WordPerfect 8, click What is New? in Related Concepts at the bottom of this page.

QuickSpots

QuickSpots provided direct access to editing features for certain objects in a document, such as paragraphs or tables. Corel WordPerfect 8 improves on this idea by including over 20 different Property Bars that appear when you click on a particular object. Property Bars change to fit your immediate needs. For example, click a table, and the Property Bar displays buttons for table editing tools. Click a graphic, and the Property Bar displays graphics editing tools.

PerfectExpert

Coaches walked you through small tasks, such as creating a header, and demos showed you an overview of a particular feature. But they didn't take into account the work you were trying to do right then. The PerfectExpert combines the best features from QuickTasks, templates, Help, and Coaches to help you accomplish your work more quickly. The PerfectExpert provides you with galleries of professionally designed documents to choose from, and you can change the layout and content in any number of ways to match your needs. Novices will appreciate the way the PerfectExpert provides a task-oriented approach to a sometimes overwhelming and complex application. More advanced users will like the flexibility and immediate help the PerfectExpert provides as they use the various features in Corel WordPerfect to create complex documents.

QuickFinder

QuickFinder is directly available through the Open dialog box. Click File [image]  Open, then specify the drive or folder you want to search. In the Filename text box, specify a file type (such as *.wpd) or the file content (such as "Corel WordPerfect"). Then, click Find. Click About QuickFinder for more information.

Menus

The menus in Corel WordPerfect 8 have undergone significant restructuring to improve access to the most frequently used features. The menus are also standardized across the suite applications to make learning each application easier. Right-click the menu to select a menu similar to one you used in a  previous version of Corel WordPerfect.

The Insert menu has grown to include several types of document objects such as tables, graphics, watermarks, equations, headers and footers.

The Tables and Graphics menus are gone and the editing features for tables and graphics are now available on the Property Bar. Click a table or graphic to display the Tables or Graphics Property Bar.

The File [image] Publish as and File [image] Send menus are consolidated as File [image] Send to.

The Outline and Bullets & Numbering features are  consolidated in Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

The abbreviations feature is renamed to QuickWords and moved to Tools [image] QuickWords.

Help Online, which was used to access additional technical and product information, is renamed to Corel Web Site.

Initial Document Style is renamed and have moved to File [image]  Document [image]  Current Document Style.

Initial Document Font is renamed and moved to File [image]  Document [image]  Default Font.

Related Concepts


About Columns in Web Documents

Use Columns to divide text vertically on a page. The Web Editor converts columns to the Netscape-specific <MULTICOL> element to format text in multiple columns.

Tips

Microsoft Internet Explorer through version 3.01 does not recognized the <MULTICOL> element. You might wish to use a borderless table to separate text vertically if you want Microsoft Internet Explorer users to also see the text formatted in columns.

Publish to Corel Barista to preserve the look of all Corel WordPerfect formatting in a web document.

To start columns

Related Concepts


Why can't I see columns in a Web document?

The Web Editor converts columns to the Netscape-specific <MULTICOL> element to format text in multiple columns.

Microsoft Internet Explorer through version 3.01 does not recognized the <MULTICOL> element. You might wish to use a borderless table to separate text vertically if you want Microsoft Internet Explorer users to also see the text formatted in columns.

You can also publish text formatted in columns to Corel Barista to preserve the look of the document.

Related Concepts


To order and arrange layered graphics
To order and arrange layered graphics,

1	Right-click an image [image] click Order [image] click an option.

2	Repeat this process until the graphics are stacked in the correct order.

Tips

When graphics are overlaid, it is sometimes difficult to select an image behind the stack. Select one of the graphics, then click Next Box or Previous Box on the Property Bar to cycle through the graphics.

You can also select options from the Graphics drop-down list on the property bar. You can place the image behind text (like a watermark) or you can place the image in front of text (like a sticky note).

About Ordering and Grouping Graphics


To add form fields in a web document
To add form fields in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click [image] on the Property Bar.

2	Click a button on the Property Bar to add a form field such as a check box or list box to the web document.

3	Right-click the form field, then click Properties to specify properties information for the field.

Tips

In order for a form to function, you need the proper application on the web server to receive and process the form data. Typically, this is a CGI script. Check with your Internet Service Provider or system administrator for information about enabling a form on your web site.

About Creating Forms in Internet Publisher


To create a table in a graphics box
To create a table in a graphics box,

1	Click Insert [image] Table.

2	Specify the number of columns and rows.

3	Select Drag to create a new table, then click Create.

4	Drag out a rectangle anywhere in your document.

Tips

To move or size the table, drag the border of the box around it.

If the Shadow Cursor is on, you can create a table just by dragging out a rectangle, then clicking Table on the menu that appears.

The Drag to Create option on the Table dialog box remains selected until you change it. The table button on the toolbar also lets you create a table in a graphics box when Drag to Create is selected in the dialog box.

About Creating Tables and Floating Cells


To create an organization chart
To create an organization chart,

1	Click where you want the organization chart to appear.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw Picture.

3	In Corel Presentations, click Insert [image] Organization Chart.

4	Click inside the drawing frame that appears.

5	Select the type of chart structure you want.

6	To replace place holder names, double-click a box and type a name and title.

7	Use options on the menus (or buttons on the Property Bar) to change the structure of your chart.

8	When you finish, click in the document window outside the chart.

Tips

To remove titles from your boxes, select the boxes (use Ctrl to select multiple boxes), then click Format [image] Box Fields. Deselect Title. You can also add other fields, such as Phone Numbers.

To add boxes, click the box above the level where you want to add a box, then click Insert [image] Subordinates.

You can also create an organization chart by playing the Wp_org.wcm macro. Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play, then double-click Wp_org.wcm.

About Creating Charts


About Drawing Shapes in Your Document

You can insert basic shapes such as circles, rectangles, lines, polygons, and polylines in your document. After you insert a shape, you can drag it, size it, and wrap text around it like a graphics box.

The new Drawing Layer lets you draw graphics objects directly on top of text, group graphics objects, and set the order of graphics objects. You can even draw over the top of clipart or a chart you've inserted into your document.

Once a shape is inserted in a document, you can change the color of the border and fill, add a drop shadow, and turn lines into arrows. You can also edit the points to change the shape of polygons, polylines, and lines.If you want to create more complex drawings than these simple shapes, click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw Picture to take advantage of the Corel Presentations tools.

To draw shapes in your document

To group graphics

To edit shapes

Related Concepts


To draw shapes in your document
To draw shapes in your document,

1	Click Insert [image] Shapes [image] click the shape you want to insert.

2	If you are drawing a rectangle, circle, line or arrow, drag across the area where you want the shape to appear. If you are drawing a polygon or polyline, drag and click to build the shape, then double-click to complete the shape.

3	Tips

You can constrain a line or rectangle shape by holding down the Shift key while drawing the object. Holding Shift while you draw a line lets you insert precise horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines; holding Shift while you draw a rectangle object lets you create a square.

You can edit the shape by clicking it and selecting options on the Property Bar.

Related Topics

About Drawing Shapes in Your Document


About Grammar-As-You-Go

Grammar-As-You-Go is like using Grammatik as you type. It marks words or phrases that might indicate incorrect grammar or usage. On the Tools [image] Proofread submenu, you can also select no proofreading or Spell-As-You-Go. Grammar-As-You-Go includes the checking features of Spell-As-You-Go.

To skip or replace writing errors

To turn on or off Grammar-As-You-Go

Related Concepts


To turn on or off Grammar-As-You-Go
To turn on or off Grammar-As-You-Go,

1	Click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Grammar-As-You-Go to turn it on.

2	To turn off Grammar-As-You-Go, click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Off.

Tips

Grammar-As-You-Go is turned on when a check appears beside it on the Proofread submenu. If you turn on Spell-As-You-Go, Grammar-As-You-Go is turned off.

About Grammar-As-You-Go


About Prompt-As-You-Go

The Prompt-As-You-Go feature on the Property Bar displays suggestions while you type. Prompt-As-You-Go can act as a spell-checker, a grammar checker, or a thesaurus, depending on where the insertion point is placed. If the insertion point is placed on a misspelled word or a possible grammar error, clicking the arrow next to Prompt-As-You-Go displays a list of corrections. If the insertion point is placed on a word that is properly spelled and free of grammar errors, Prompt-As-You-Go lists possible synonyms from the thesaurus.

If the color of the text in the Prompt-As-You-Go box is red, the word may be misspelled. If the color is blue, there may be a grammar or usage error. If the color is black, you can select from a list of synonyms to replace the word. If the box is blank, there are no suggestions for the word.

To use Prompt-As-You-Go

Related Concepts


To use Prompt-As-You-Go
To use Prompt-As-You-Go,

1	Click a word or marked phrase in your document.

2	Select the replacement text from the Prompt-As-You-Go drop-down list on the Property Bar.

Tips

Prompt-As-You-Go displays alternates for possible grammar errors in blue, alternates for possible spelling errors in red, and thesaurus terms in black. If the box is blank, there are no suggestions for the word.

To turn off Prompt-As-You-Go, click Tools [image] Proofread [image] Prompt-As-You-Go.

Turning on or off Grammar-As-You-Go or Spell-As-You-Go does not affect Prompt-As-You-Go.

About Prompt-As-You-Go


About Inserting JavaScript into a Web Document

JavaScript is a scripting language developed by Netscape Communications Corporation to run applications in a Web document.  While a Java application is stored in a separate file and referenced by the HTML page, JavaScript is actually stored within the HTML coding and is interpreted by a browser that is JavaScript-aware.

For example, you could use a JavaScript to jump users to another page after a specified interval, or to display different graphics images on the page so someone viewing your web page would see different images at different times.

You can insert JavaScript into a document you are editing in the Web Editor using Custom HTML.

To use JavaScript in a web document

Related Concepts


To edit shapes
To edit shapes,

1	Click the shape to select it.

2	Use the Property Bar to change the attributes of your shape.

3	To change the size or shape of the object, drag the selection handles that appear when you select it.

Tips

You can move the points of a polyline or polygon. Double-click the shape, then drag the individual points.

You can use the Property Bar to add patterns, shadows, and different line thicknesses and colors. You can also change how text wraps around the shape.

If you have drawn several shapes close to each other, you can change their position in the stack by selecting an order option from the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar. You can also hold down Shift and click to select multiple shapes so that you can group them.

About Drawing Shapes in Your Document


About Ordering and Grouping Graphics

If you have two or more overlapping graphics boxes or shapes in your document, you can arrange their order by moving them in front of or behind the other boxes in the stack. You can also place boxes behind text (like a watermark) or in front of text (like a sticky note).

You can group boxes so that they remain together when they are moved, sized, and edited. Grouping is especially useful when you want to keep an image and text together. When you want to edit the boxes individually, you can separate the grouped boxes.

To move a graphic behind or in front of text

To group graphics

To edit a graphic that is over or under another graphic

To order and arrange layered graphics

Related Concepts


To group graphics
To group graphics,

1	Select the graphics boxes you want to group by holding down the Shift key and clicking them.

2	Right-click one of the selected boxes and click Group.

Tips

When you click one of the boxes, one set of sizing handles appears around the grouped boxes. You can size, move, or edit the group of boxes.

To separate the grouped boxes, right-click one of the boxes and click Separate.

About Ordering and Grouping Graphics


To underline spaces between words and tabs
To underline spaces between words and tabs,

1	Click Format [image] Font.

2	Select the Underline options (Spaces or Tabs) to continue underlining between words.

About Fonts


To insert a POSTNET bar code in a merge form document
To insert a POSTNET bar code in a merge form document,

1	With the form document open, click Merge Codes on the toolbar.

2	Select POSTNET(string) and click Insert.

3	To insert the same bar code with each document, type the ZIP code between the parentheses of the POSTNET command.

4	To insert a different bar code for each merge record, click between the parentheses of the POSTNET command. Click Insert Field, select the field containing the ZIP code, then click Insert and Close.

Tips

When you insert the same bar code, the POSTNET command looks like this: POSTNET(65432-9876). When you insert a different bar code for each record, the command looks like this: POSTNET(FIELD(ZIPcode)).

To select a field in the Insert Field dialog box, you must have associated a data source with the form document. If not, you can type the name of the field, making sure that it matches the field name in the data source.

POSTNET bar codes are valid only for mail sent to addresses in the United States.

About Inserting a POSTNET Bar Code in a Document


To create a hyperlink that plays a macro
To create a hyperlink that plays a macro,

1	Select the text or graphic you want to use for the link.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	If you want text to look like a button, select Make text appear as a button.

4	Specify the macro in the Document/Macro text box. Include the full path if it is not in your default macros folder.

5	Click OK to create the link.

Tips

The link appears as blue, underlined text if you do not make it look like a button. If you use a graphic, the appearance does not change; you can click anywhere in the graphics box to play the macro.

When you use a graphic as the link, right-click the graphics box to edit it.

You can change the graphics box style to Button to display the graphic on a button. Right-click the graphic, click Style, then select Button.

About Using Hyperlinks in Corel WordPerfect or Web Documents


To skip or replace writing errors
To skip or replace writing errors,

1	Right-click the marked word or phrase.

2	Select the word or phrase that will correct the problem or click Skip.

Tips

Click Grammatik to use additional grammar checking options.

Related Topics

About Grammar-As-You-Go


To move a graphic behind or in front of text
To move a graphic behind or in front of text,

1	Click a box to select it.

2	Click either In Front of Text or Behind Text from the Graphics drop-down list on the Property Bar.

Tips

Placing the box in front of text hides the text behind the box. Placing the box behind text create a watermark effect.

About Ordering and Grouping Graphics


To create a counter for chapter titles
To create a counter for chapter titles,

Creating the Counter Style

1	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

2	Click Create.

3	Type a name for the counter.

4	If you want to use more than one numbering level (such as Chapter 1.1, Chapter 1.2, and so on) specify the number of levels you want.

5	To change the numbering method for a counter level, click a method from the appropriate Numbering method list.

Setting the Initial Counter Value

1	Click where you want to set the value of the counter, such as the beginning of the document.

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level.

4	Click Value, then specify a new value. If you want to number to being at 1, set the value to 0. When you click Increase and Display later, the counter increases before it is displayed.

5	If you want to change the numbering method, click a method from the Numbering pop-up list.

Displaying Counters in the Document

1	Click where you want to display a counter number (such as after the word "Chapter").

2	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level.

4	Click Increase and Display.

Tips

If you change the order of your chapters, the counters will reflect the changes and display the correct numbers in order.

About Counter Numbering


To create multilevel numbering in captions
To create multilevel numbering in captions,

1	Click Format [image] Graphics Styles, then select Default Template in the List Style From pop-up list.

2	Select the style (such as Image, Table, or Figure) from the Styles list, then click Options [image] Copy. Type a name for the style and click OK.

3	With the new style selected, click Edit [image] Caption, then click the Change button next to Number style.

4	Click Create in the Style List dialog box, type a name for the style, and select Document (open) from the Type pop-up list.

5	Turn on any formatting codes (such as bold or italics), and type the text you want to insert (such as "Figure") followed by a space.

6	Click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter, then click Create and type a name for the counter.

7	Specify the number of levels you want for the counter, then click OK.

8	Select Level 1 of your new definition, then click Display in Document.

9	Type any punctuation separating the level displays (such as a period or a hyphen), then repeat this process for Level 2 and any other level.

10	Turn off any formatting codes (such as bold or italics) that you do not want to apply to the rest of the caption, and add any punctuation after the caption number.

11	Click OK to return to the Style List dialog box, then select the new style and click Apply.

12	Click the Change button for Counter, select the counter definition you created, click Select, then click OK [image] OK [image] Close.

Tips

You can use the graphics box style you created to add the new caption style to your graphics boxes. Right-click the graphics box and select Style. Select the style you created. If you right-click the graphics box and select Create Caption, the correct number of levels should appear.

If you want to change the counter (such as Figure 5.1, Figure 5.2, and so on), place the insertion point before the first box code, then click Insert [image] Other [image] Counter. Select the counter or level and click Value to set it.

About Counter Numbering


About Composing Characters

In the Symbols dialog box, you can find some characters and symbols quickly by typing two characters in the Number text box. This is called composing characters. The two-letter combinations use letters, numbers, or symbols found on every standard keyboard.

The following tables list character combinations and the resulting symbols, characters, or diacritical marks. If you frequently add non-keyboard characters, print this topic for future reference.

Diacritical Marks

The characters for diacritical marks can be combined with different letters. One example is shown below.

Mark	Example	Result
'  Acute	'i
v  Caron	vz
,  Cedilla	,c
:  Centered Dot	:l
^  Circumflex	^a
-  Crossbar	-T
.  Dot Above	.c
`  Grave	`e
_  Macron	_u
;  Ogonek	;a
@  Ring Above	@a
/  Slash	/o
\  Stroke	\l
~  Tilde	~n
"  Umlaut	"u
Digraphs and Symbols

The following character combinations produce a symbol or digraph (two letters merged together). The character set number is also shown for these characters.

Type	Result	Number
AE		1,36
ae		1,37
IJ		1,138
ij		1,139
OE		1,166
oe		1,167
ox		4,24
ss		1,23
L-		4,11
P|		4,5
<<		4,9
>>		4,10
Y=		4,12
Pt		4,13
c/		4,19
+-		6,1
<=		6,2
>=		6,3
~~		6,13
==		6,14
/=		6,99
tm		4,41
sm		4,42
ro		4,22
co		4,23
rx		4,43
/2		4,17
/4		4,18
*.		4,3
**		4,0
*o		4,45
*O		4,1
ao		1,35
f-		4,14
a=		4,15
o=		4,16
??		4,8
!!		4,7
n-		4,33
m-		4,34


To change the default labels file
To change the default labels file,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files.

2	Click the Labels tab and specify a file in the Default label file text box.

3	To include the new default file in your Favorites folder, select Update Favorites with changes.

Tips

You can also select the type of labels to always display: laser (on sheets of paper), tractor fed (on continuous, perforated paper), or both.

About Labels Files


About Joining and Splitting Tables

You can join two tables that have the same number of columns.  Before you can join the tables, you need to delete any codes or text between them. Except for its individually formatted cells, the second table acquires the formatting of the first table.

You can easily split any table horizontally into two tables.

To split a table

To join two tables

Related Concepts


About Inserting Java Applets into Web Documents

Java is a programming language created specifically for the Internet by Sun Microsystems. The Java language is widely used to create dynamic components for web pages such as rotating banner ads or graphics that change when you click on them.

The Java applet itself is stored on the Internet server. The Web page references the Java applet, which is downloaded and runs locally within a Java-enabled web browser, such as Netscape Navigator.

You can use the Web Editor to create documents that link to a Java applet. With the Java components of the Corel WordPerfect Suite installed, you can click View Applets to see the Java applet running in your document in the Web Editor.

Tips

Java applet support is not installed as a part of a Typical Install. Run the Corel WordPerfect Suite Setup and specify a Custom setup. Click the Java components check box in the WordPerfect group.

To insert a Java applet

Related Concepts


To insert a Java applet
To insert a Java applet,

1	Click where you want to insert the applet.

2	Click Insert [image] Java [image] Create Applet.

3	In the Class box, type the name of the class file that loads the applet.

4	If the class file and supporting libraries are not located in the same folder as the web document, specify the path relative to the location of the web document.

 	5	Specify a width and height for the applet bounding box.

6	Specify Alternate Text for those using web browsers that not Java-enabled.

7	Click Parameters and specify any necessary parameters for the applet.

8	To view the applet in the Web Editor, click View [image] Java Applets.

Tips

Check the documentation for the applet or check with the applet's programmer to find out minimum width and height requirements for the applet.  Otherwise, the applet might run without displaying in the browser.

Check the documentation for the applet or check with the applet's programmer to find out required parameters for the applet.

You must publish your document to HTML to see the document with the applet running in the browser. When you click [image] to preview the web document, Corel WordPerfect creates a temporary copy of the document. This temporary document does not include the correct path to the applet, so the applet will not run.

To place a web document that contains Java applets on an Internet server, you must copy the contents of the Java applet folder to the server in addition to the .htm and .gif files associated with your document.

About Inserting Java Applets into Web Documents


To use JavaScript in a web document
To use JavaScript in a web document,

1	In the Web Editor, click Format [image] Custom HTML.

2	Type the <Script> tag with the appropriate attributes such as

<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">

<!-- ...type your JavaScript code here... //-->

</SCRIPT>

3	Press Right-arrow.

About Inserting Java Applets into Web Documents


To send a document to Corel Barista
To send a document to Corel Barista,

1	Click File [image] Send to [image] Corel Barista.

2	If you are publishing your file to a local folder, enter the path on the Send tab.

3	If you are publishing your file to a web server, click Advanced and specify the location of the Barista class files.

4	Click Send.

Tips

The default destination for Barista files is the Barista folder that was created when you installed (for example, C:\Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista).

You can also publish a Barista file as a slide show. To do this, click File [image] Print, select the Barista driver, then click Properties [image] Special Effects.

About Publishing to Corel Barista


About Drag to Create Graphics

You can use the shadow cursor to drag across a blank area of your document. This displays a QuickMenu that lets you insert any type of graphics box, including Clipart images, text boxes, tables, and other custom boxes.

Besides using the shadow cursor, you can also turn on the Drag to Create option in Settings. You can then drag across the area of your document where you want the image to appear before you select an image from file.

To use the shadow cursor to create graphics

Related Concepts


To use the shadow cursor to create graphics
To use the shadow cursor to create graphics,

1	Drag across the area of your document where you want the image to appear. Before you begin dragging, make sure the pointer appears as a blue shadow cursor.

2	Select the item you want from the QuickMenu.

Tips

If you select Clipart from the QuickMenu, the Scrapbook appears. You can then drag any Clipart image into your document.

If you select Image from File, the Insert Image dialog box appears. You can select the type of image you want to insert.

To drag to create other images you insert, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Environment [image] click the Graphics tab [image] select Drag to create new graphics boxes.

About Drag to Create Graphics


About the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor

When you use the Corel WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor, you can insert numbers and letters (also called variables) into the editing window by typing them from the keyboard. You can insert commands, symbols, and mathematical functions by selecting them from the equation palette in the Equation Editor Window.

The equation palette has several groups of commands, symbols, and mathematical functions. You can select a group from the Equation Palette pop-up list.

To create an equation using the 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor

To create an equation inside a line of text

To edit an equation

To select an equation palette

To save an equation as a graphics file

To save an equation as a text file

Related Concepts


To select which equation editor to use
To select which equation editor to use,

1	Click Tools [image] Settings [image] double click Environment.

2	Click the Graphics tab.

3	Select WordPerfect 8 Equation Editor or WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor.

Tips

If you want to decide which equation editor to use when you insert an equation, select the check box next to Show the "Select Equation Editor" dialog whenever I create an equation.

If you want to edit the document using a previous version of Corel WordPerfect, select the WordPerfect 5.1 to 7 Equation Editor.

About Creating Equations


To turn on or off automatic correction
To turn on or off automatic correction,

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect [image] Correct other mis-typed words when possible.

Tips

When this option is turned on, Corel WordPerfect replaces typos that have only one correction without notifying you of the change. It is possible that a proper noun or other word not in the QuickCorrect word lists can be replaced with a different word. Use this option when you are confident that words in your document will be found in the word lists.

QuickCorrect is automatically turned off whenever you edit a macro.

About Correcting Common Typing Mistakes with QuickCorrect


To add your mail client to the Corel Settings Profile
To add your mail client to the Corel Settings Profile,

1	Click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel.

2	Double-click Mail and Fax.

3	Click Show Profiles [image] Corel Settings [image] Properties.

4	Click Add, then select and configure your mail service.

5	Click Add, then click Personal Folder to select or create a personal folder (usually mailbox.pst).

Tips

You do not have to create a Corel Settings Profile if your mail client is Novell GroupWise 4.1.

About Sending Mail


I can't find 3-D options in TextArt

You need to use the Custom install option to install the 3-D TextArt component. Start the Corel WordPerfect suite Setup program, then select the Custom option. When you get to the panel that asks which components you would like to install, select Accessories, then click Components. Select Corel TextArt, then click Components again. Select Corel 3-D TextArt Components. Reinstalling will not replace your settings.

To reinstall or add components to Corel WordPerfect

Related Concepts


Radio buttons

A radio button is a circle with text next to it. Radio buttons give you a single choice from a fixed group of items. When you make a choice, the radio button circle is filled.


Check boxes

A check box is a square box with text next to it. Check boxes give you multiple choices from a fixed group of items. When you make a choice, the check box has an X in it.


Selection lists

A selection list gives you a list of items you can scroll through to make one choice.


Text boxes and text lines

Text boxes and text lines let you type information into a form.  A text line takes up a single line on the form, while a text box takes up a block of space on the web document.  You can adjust the height and width of a text box.


Password fields

A password field lets you type information into a form, but the text is not displayed (or is displayed as asterisks).


Submit buttons and submit images

Clicking a submit button sends all the form information to the server-side gateway program for processing. A submit image field works just like a submit button. However, instead of clicking a button to send form information, you click an image.


Reset buttons

Clicking a reset button clears out all data in the form fields.


Hidden fields

Hidden fields provide form information without any direct user input.


About the Year 2000 and Date Formats

There are two types of numeric formats for dates in Corel WordPerfect 8. Numeric formats that use 2 digits for the year are implicit century dates. In 4/26/99, the "99" implies the year 1999. Numeric formats that use 4-digit years are explicit century dates. In 4/26/1999, the "1999" explicitly states the year 1999.

Corel WordPerfect stores dates entered in a numeric format as a unique date/time serial value. Therefore, Corel WordPerfect 8 provides for date storage which includes the century information.

Year 2000 Transition

To prepare for the transition to the year 2000, we recommend that you do the following:

Set the date display to default to four digits.

For document summaries (click File > Properties >Summary): click Start on the Windows taskbar, then click Settings Control Panel Regional Settings. Click the Date tab, then change the "Short date style" to either M/d/yyyy or MM/dd/yyyy. Exit Regional Settings, then exit and restart WordPerfect.

For Corel WordPerfect 8 tables: whenever you open a new document in Corel WordPerfect 8, dates entered in numeric format will automatically default to a four-digit display. To change the display for individual cells or tables, click Table > Numeric Format, click the Cell, Column, or Table tab, click Date/Time > Custom > Current Format, and choose the format you want. Click OK, then click OK again.

Enter dates using all 4 digits for the year.

We recommend that you enter all dates (in both numeric and text formats) into WordPerfect 8 using four-digit, or "explicit century," format for the year (for example, mm/dd/yyyy).

Importing files to WordPerfect 8 from Quattro Pro 8

If you are importing date information from Quattro Pro 8, please be aware that WordPerfect 8 will recognize dates in all seven of Quattro Pro 8's standard "numeric format" date formats, as well as one four-digit user-defined format -- "TMonth D, YYYY" (for example, June 24, 2000). All other date formats used in Quattro Pro 8 appear in WordPerfect 8 as serial date values (such as 35567). If you reformat this serial date value to a date format in WordPerfect 8, the date will be one day later than the corresponding date in Quattro Pro 8.

Two-digit Year Format

If you choose to enter dates in a two-digit, or "implicitcentury," year format (for example, mm/dd/yy), please be aware of the following points:

Two-digit dates in Corel WordPerfect 8 tables

When you enter dates in table cells that use the Date/Time numeric format, you can type shortcuts (such as 4/26/99) for the date. If you enter 00-50 for the year, Corel WordPerfect 8 will assume you are entering dates for 2000 through 2050. If you enter 51-99 for the year, Corel WordPerfect 8 will assume 1951-1999. You can override the century assumption by entering four digits for the year, such as 4/26/2099.

If you have entered a date using a two-digit numeric format and then decide to reenter the last two digits, Corel WordPerfect 8 will keep the original century designation. For example, if you enter 4/26/99 (4/26/1999) and you reenter 4/26/39, Corel WordPerfect 8 will assume 4/26/1939 rather than 4/26/2039. If you want to change the century designation, you must enter all four digits for the year.

Two-digit dates in file summaries

You can also use a two-digit date entry shortcut in the Corel WordPerfect 8 File Summary feature (click File > Properties > Summary). If you enter 00 to 99, the century will be assumed to be 1900 to 1999. If you want the date to be 2000 or greater, you must enter all four digits (2000).

If you have entered a date using a two-digit numeric format in the File Summary feature and then decide to reenter the last two digits, the original century designation will be kept. If you want to change the century designation, you must enter all four digits for the year, such as 12/18/2047.

Tips

Corel Corporation has a Year 2000 policy Web site. For the latest information, see "What Does the Year 2000 Mean to Corel Users?" at http://www.corel.com/2000.htm.

Related Concepts


To view a document summary
To view a document summary,

1	Click File [image] Properties [image] Summary.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


To insert or link a video clip
To insert or link a video clip,

1	Click Insert [image] Object.

2	Click Create new, then click the Object type (source application) you want to use.

3	Create a new object, then click outside the OLE box to return to the document window.

Tips

To insert or link an existing object, click Create from file, then specify a file.

If you click Create from file, click Link in the Insert Object dialog box to link the object file rather than embed it. When you link the file any changes you make to the source file will appear in the Corel WordPerfect document.

You can also drag a file from the Windows Explorer into a document, or drag an icon that represents a data file from the desktop into a document.

Related Concepts


To display the page count for the current document
To display the page count for the current document,

1	Click File [image] Properties [image] Information.

Tips

You can add the Page Count button [image] to a toolbar to view only the current page count. The button is found under the Format feature category in the Toolbar Editor.

About Document Properties (Summary and Information)


Open Document Management API (ODMA)

ODMA filenames let you open documents stored in a document management system (DMS). Specify an ODMA filename as follows:

::ODMA\\DMSPath

DMSPath is a string identifying the location of the file; this varies depending on the DMS you are using. For example, if you are using SoftSolutions, specify the filename as:

::ODMA\SOFTSOL\311\TEST\10\1


To display or hide guidelines
To display or hide guidelines,

1	Click View [image] Guidelines.

2	Select the features for which you want to view guidelines.

About Guidelines


Sort Order

Ascending order sorts from lowest to highest (A to Z or 0 to 9). Descending order sorts from highest to lowest (Z to A or 9 to 0).


Some symbols or special characters show up as little boxes

The selected character map doesn't include the characters you are using. To select a new character map, install a new language module for the language you want to use, then click Tools [image] Language [image] Character Mapping. Select the character map for the language you are currently using, then click Apply.

Tips

Character maps are listed only for the non-English language modules you have purchased.

Troubleshooting Fonts


To edit a printer command
To edit a printer command,

1	Double-click the printer command code (Ptr Cmnd) in Reveal Codes.

2	Edit the existing printer command or type in a new one.

Related Concepts


To display previously created templates
To display previously created templates,

1	Copy your template files into the \Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates folder.

Tips

If you create a folder in the \Corel\Suite8\Template\Custom WP Templates folder, it appears as a category. Any template files you move to that folder are listed in the category.

To create a document based on the template document, click File [image] New, select [Custom WP Templates] from the drop-down list, then select the template you want to open.

Related Topics

About Templates and Projects


I changed the color of text but can't see the colors on screen.

If you have chosen to display the document window with Windows system colors, you will not see text colors, hyperlink colors, and so on. To deselect this option, click Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Display, then deselect the Windows system colors check box.

Troubleshooting Display Problems


How can I print the European Currency Unit symbol?

The European Currency Unit symbol is available as a character in the Typographic Symbols set. Click Insert [image] Symbol and type 4,72 in the Number box. Click Insert and Close to add the symbol to your document.

Troubleshooting Fonts


I can't save changes to this file.

If the file is stored on a network, another user probably has it open. Wait until the other user closes the file before you work on it and save your changes.

You may not have enough free disk space. Empty the Windows Recycle Bin and move or delete any files or programs you don't need.

The owner of the file may have marked it as a read-only file. You can save your own version of the file with a different filename.

Troubleshooting Opening Files


I can't open this document.

The document may not be in a format supported by Corel WordPerfect. To convert the file to a compatible format, click File [image] Save As, type a new name for the file in the File name text box, select a file format in the File type drop-down list, then click Save.

You may not have enough free disk space. Empty the Windows Recycle Bin and move or delete any files or programs you don't need.

The document may be stored on a floppy disk that is not properly formatted for Windows. If there is another version of the document stored on a hard drive or network, copy that version to a properly-formatted floppy disk.

The document may have become corrupted. If it was created in an application other than Corel WordPerfect, try opening and resaving it in that application. Then see if you can open it in Corel WordPerfect.

Troubleshooting Opening Files


When I click in the margin, text is selected.

Corel WordPerfect is designed to help you select text quickly. When you click in the left margin once, the sentence to the right of the insertion point is selected. If you click twice, the paragraph to the right is selected. If you do not want the text selected, click in the body of the document (outside of the selected text) or in the top, right, or bottom margin.

Troubleshooting Typing and Selecting


Internet

The Internet refers to a global network of computers or servers. The World Wide Web refers to the collection of documents linked through the a common protocol (http). Most people use the terms Internet, World Wide Web, and Web interchangeably.


Why can't I find the folder ?
Why can't I find the folder \Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista?

Corel Barista was not installed. Rerun the Setup program, choose the Custom install option, then click Accessories [image]  Barista.

Related Concepts


I can't see my Barista document. Applet Barista.class can't be found.

The browser cannot find all the files it needs to view the Barista document. Copy the Barista document to the folder \Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista.

To place a Corel Barista document on a web server, you must copy the Corel Barista files to the web server in addition to the .HTM, .BMP, .JPG, .AU, and .GIF files associated with your document.

If the folder \Corel\Suite8\Shared\Barista does not exist, rerun the Setup program, choose the Custom install option, then click Accessories [image]  Barista.

Why can't others see my Corel Barista documents?

Related Concepts


HTML Tags Supported in Internet Publisher

Internet Publisher recognizes the following HTML tags. If you open an HTML document in Internet Publisher, edit it, then publish to HTML, redundant tags may be converted to different tags. For example, <b> and <strong> both use the bold attribute. If your document contains <b>, it will be exported as <strong>.

Common attributes for supported tags are all supported, including some (though not all) new attributes. For example, "size" and "color" for the font tag are supported, though "face" is not.      Unsupported tags, such as Frame and JavaScript, and tags  containing syntax errors, are imported and exported as Custom HTML tags.

 Table Key

 * Only imported

** Imported into head tags . . . exported only if typed in the

   Advanced section of Title.

HTML Tag	Exports As
a	a
address	address
b*	strong
base**	base**
big*	<font size="+1">
blink	blink
blockquote	blockquote
body	body
br	br
center	align = "center" with <p>, <h1>, etc.
cite*	em
code*	tt
dd	dd
dir*	ul
dl	dl
dt	dt
em	em
font	font
h1	h1
h2	h2
h3	h3
h4	h4
h5	h5
h6	h6
head	head
hr	hr
html	html
htmlplus*	html
I*	em
img	img
ins	ins
isindex**	isindex**
kbd*	tt
li	li
link**	link**
listing	listing
menu*	ul
meta**	meta**
nextid**	nextid**
ol	ol
p	p
pre	pre
samp*	tt
small	<font size="-1">
strike	strike
strong	strong
sub	sub
sup	sup
table	table
td	td
th	th
tr	tr
title	title
tt	tt
u	u
ul	ul
var*	em
xmp*	pre
Related Concepts


pane

A window can be divided into two or more parts. These parts are called panes. Run the Windows Explorer to see an example of panes. Press F6 or Sh+F6 to switch between panes without using the mouse.

In Corel WordPerfect, panes are used in the WP 5.1-7 Equation Editor, and used when displaying some Property Bars such as the List Property Bar.


About Using WordPerfect Compound File Format

The Compound file format makes it possible to fully integrate Corel WordPerfect document files with the Windows 95 Shell. The WordPerfect Compound format wraps OLE Compound document information around a typical WordPerfect file.

There are several advantages to saving as a WordPerfect Compound file:

Opening an OLE object is faster.

Windows 95 recognizes the file as a Corel WordPerfect file even when it is not saved with an associated extension such as .wpd. For example, you can double-click a file to start Corel WordPerfect and open the document.

If a an OLE2 browser application is installed, you can browse, modify, and share embedded WordPerfect 8 Compound documents without starting WordPerfect.

Tips

If a document is password-protected, Corel WordPerfect saves the OLE object information in the WordPerfect prefix rather than in the compound document information. This prevents others from looking at embedded objects in a password-protected document using an OLE-enabled application.

WordPerfect 5.x and 6.x cannot open documents saved in WordPerfect Compound format. Save to WordPerfect 6/7/8 instead.

Saving to the Compound file format slightly increases the file size and the time it takes to open or save a file.

Related Concepts


To specify the default WordPerfect file format
To specify the default WordPerfect file format,

1	Tools [image] Settings [image] double-click Files [image] Default save file format.

2	Specify the file format.

Tips

Click File [image]  Save As to save a file to a different format.

WordPerfect 6.x cannot open documents saved in WordPerfect Compound format. Use WordPerfect 6/7/8 instead if you need to share files with users of these products.

Related Topics

About Files Settings


To create an outline or numbered list
To create an outline or numbered list,

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

2	Click the style of numbering you want to use.

3	Type the text for the first item, then press Enter.

4	Type the next item.

5	To move to the next outline level, click [image] on the Property Bar, or press Tab.

6	To move to a higher outline level, click [image] on the Property Bar, or press Shift+Tab.

7	To end the outline or list, press Enter [image] Backspace.

Tips

To type body text between list items, press Enter twice, then type on the line that begins without a number.

To move text to a tab setting, use Indent or press Ctrl+Tab.

To move a list item up and down the list, drag the symbol for the item up or down. Click [image] to display symbols.

Use [image], [image], [image], and [image] buttons to temporarily expand and collapse families and levels of text so you can edit or print only the main items.

You can insert numbers without tabs or levels anywhere in your document by pressing Ctrl+Shift+F5. This is useful, for example, when you want to number items within a paragraph.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


To create a bulleted list
To create a bulleted list,

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image] Bullets.

2	Click a bullet style in the dialog box.

3	Type the text, then press Enter to begin the next list item.

4	Continue to add items by pressing Enter, then typing text.

5	To end the list, press Enter [image] Backspace.

Tips

To type body text between list items, press Enter twice, then type on the line that begins without a bullet.

To move text to a tab setting, use Indent or press Ctrl+Tab.

About Bulleted Lists


About Outlines and Numbered Lists

Outlines and numbered lists help you organize information and show the relationships between ideas.

Outlines and numbered lists begin with a number, followed by a period and an indent. When you press Enter, the next item increments (such as 1, 2, 3 or A, B, C). You can also begin a numbered list by typing one or two specified keystrokes, then pressing Tab or Indent (QuickNumbers).

List items can include several levels of numbering. For example, you can increment first-level items 1, 2, 3, and second-level items a, b, c. You can also use outline or legal styles (1, a, i or 1, 1.1, 1.11).

Especially when you are working with a long outline, it can be helpful to use the following outline viewing options:

Display outline symbols (or icons), which show the levels of items or body text. These symbols display in the left margin on screen, but they do not print.

Hide outline "families," such as all the subordinate items under item A.

Display only certain levels. For example, display only first-level items to quickly check the logical flow of your main ideas.

To organize text with headings

To create an outline or numbered list

To create a numbered list using QuickNumbers

To change the level of an outline item

To create numbered paragraphs

To hide or show outline symbols in the left margin

To start renumbering anywhere in a numbered list or outline

Related Concepts


About Bulleted Lists

Use bullets to mark list items that have no particular order.  You can choose from a number of predefined bullets or create your own.

To create a bulleted list

To create a to-do list with check box bullets

To create a bulleted list using QuickBullets

To use a symbol as a bullet

Related Concepts


To organize text with headings
To organize text with headings,

1	Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering [image] Text.

2	Click the style of text you want to use.

3	Type the text for the first item, then press Enter.

4	Type the next item.

5	To move to the next outline level, click [image] on the Property Bar, or press Tab.

6	To move to a higher outline level, click [image] on the Property Bar, or press Shift+Tab.

Tips

To end a heading, press Enter. You can then type paragraph text.

To end an quotation or definition, press Enter [image] Backspace.

The appearance of the headings, definition or quotation text is defined in the styles for the current template. Click [image] on the Outline Property Bar, or click Format [image]  Styles to change how the text looks in the document.

The Outline Property Bar appears on the screen you click in a heading, quotation or definition. Click [image] to show what levels of text appear. Click [image] or [image] to change levels of text. For example, you can change a second level heading to a first level heading.

About Outlines and Numbered Lists


To replace one outline or list style with another
To replace one outline or list style with another,

1	Select the outline or numbered list.

2	Click Insert [image] Outline/Bullets & Numbering.

3	Click a tab, then click a style.


To copy the format of a table cell
To copy the format of a table cell,

1	Click in the cell that has the formatting you want to copy.

2	Click Format [image] QuickFormat [image] Selected table cells.

3	Drag the QuickFormat paintbrush pointer over the cells you want to format.

4	You can also turn off QuickFormat by clicking Format [image] QuickFormat.

Tips

You can also click [image] to turn QuickFormat on or off.

To copy cell contents as well as formatting, select a cell, click Edit [image] Copy, select another cell, then click Paste.

About Table Cell Format


About MMX Technology

Corel WordPerfect Suite 8 is the first suite to support the Intel Pentium with MMX technology. Running Corel WordPerfect on an MMX-enhanced computer can improve performance in several areas.

Corel WordPerfect opens and inserts files faster.

Bitmap and vector graphics redraw more quickly in the document window (particularly when working in the Internet Publisher).

Macros run faster when executing repetitive routines.

Better memory management boosts overall performance.

Tips

You do not need to have a computer equipped win an Intel Pentium MMX chip to run Corel WordPerfect 8. However, an MMX enhanced computer can improve the performance of WordPerfect.


To create a QuickWord for a graphic or logo
To create a QuickWord for a graphic or logo,

1	Turn on Reveal Codes so you can see where the insertion point is located in reference to the graphics box code.

2	Click just before the graphics box code in Reveal Codes, then press Shift + right arrow key to select the graphics box code.

3	Click Tools [image] QuickWords.

4	Type the word you want to represent the graphic, or graphic plus text.

5	Click Add Entry.

Tips

You can also press the shift key, then drag the mouse to select the graphics box code.

Any text or codes that appear between the Select code and the red insertion point are assigned to the QuickWord.

If the graphic is located on a line by itself, you can click just before the graphics box code, then click Select [image]  Sentence.

Typically, you click an image to select it. But when you select an image in this manner, the box is ready to be edited or moved. The QuickWords option is not available.

In the QuickWords dialog box, select Options [image]  Expand as Text with Formatting or the graphic will not appear in the document.

Specify a word or characters that are not normally typed, such as \companylogo for a graphic representing your company's logo.

About QuickCorrect Abbreviations


Why do the words appear to run together onscreen?

Text can appear differently on-screen than it does when you print it. Typically, a monitor has a lower resolution than the printer you are using. Sometimes this results in display problems such as text appearing to run together or text appearing to be bolded when it is not. These types of problems can appear more frequently when using a 12 points or smaller font size.

You might wish to start Corel WordPerfect using the /DM=90 startup option to avoid this problem. Or, if you have Microsoft Plus! for windows installed, click Start [image]  Settings [image]  Control Panel [image]  Plus! tab, then clear the Smooth Edges of screen fonts.


Why do the words appear to run together on-screen?

Because monitors often display at a lower resolutions than printers, text can appear differently on-screen than it does when you print it. Sometimes this results in display problems on-screen such as text appearing to run together or text appearing to be bolded when it is not. These types of problems appear more frequently when using a font size 12 points or smaller.

You might wish to start Corel WordPerfect using the /DM=90 startup option to avoid this problem. Or, if you have Microsoft Plus! for windows installed, click Start [image]  Settings [image]  Control Panel [image]  Plus!, then clear the Smooth Edges of Screen Fonts check box.


Select a page numbering format from this list. The preview box shows how the format will look in your document.


Create your own format for page numbering.


Inserts the page numbering format you have selected into the text of your document.


Reset the page number value. For example, change page 3 to page 5.


Change the value of a number.  For example, change 1 to 14.


Inserts a number for the total number of pages in the document, as in "page 6 of 10." Select a number style, then click Insert.


Inserts the number of the current chapter, as in "Chapter 4, Page 12." Select a number style and click Insert.


Inserts the number of the current volume, as in "Vol. II, Chapter 4, Page 23." Select a numbering style, then click Insert.


Inserts a number for a second set of page numbers, as in "page 7; previous page 6". Select a number style, then click Insert. Another example of secondary pages is numbering all pages in a multi-volume set of documents and using a second set of numbers to number the pages within each volume.


Type text and insert any numbers to create a custom page numbering format.


Specify the number you want to use.


The page retains the same page number even if previous pages, chapters, or volumes are added or deleted.


The page number you set changes to keep numbering consistent. For example, you can insert unnumbered pages later (such as pages with charts or pictures) and still account for them with page numbering.  For example, if you are on page 4 and set the number to 6, then add and delete text in the document. That new page number you specified will always be two higher than the last numbered page.


Specify the number you want to use for the current chapter.


Specify the number you want to use for the current volume.


Specify the number you want to use for a second set of page numbers.  For example, you can number both consecutive pages in a three-volume document and pages within each volume.


Reset the value of a number (for example, change 1 to 4), or change the numbering type (Arabic or Roman numerals, or letters).


Type this QuickWord to insert the associated text in the document. QuickWords less than three words long can be expanded automatically as you type.


Displays the information represented by the QuickWord.


Inserts the expanded form of the QuickWord in your document.


Remove a QuickWord from the list.


Specify a new QuickWord.


Click an item to copy it to another template. Press Ctrl as you click to select more than one item. Press Shift as you click to select several that are together.


Shows the name of the template and current name of the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Type a one-word name for the QuickWord.


Assign a new name to the selected toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Type the text or codes you want to find.


Type the text you want to replace the text with.


Finds the next occurrence of the text, searching forward from the insertion point.


Selects the text the first time it is found, then replaces the text each time you click Replace.


Finds and replaces each occurrence of the text.


Lists the codes you can search for.


Select the code you want to find in the document.


Lets you limit the number of times to replace the text.


Specify the number of times to replace the search text.


Specify the font style, size, and attributes of the text you are searching for.


Restores the default bar.


Select the information and buttons you want to display on the Application Bar.


Changes the appearance of text on the Application Bar.


Selects the highlighted toolbar, keyboard, or menu and displays it in the document window.


Add a custom toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Change the items on the selected toolbar, keyboard, or menu.


Copy a toolbar, keyboard, or menu from one template to another.


Remove the selected toolbar, keyboard, or menu from the current template.


Lists the template associated with the selected toolbar, Property Bar, keyboard, or menus. WP8xx.wpt is the default Corel WordPerfect template (where xx is the two-character language code).


Change settings that affect the document window.


Specify settings that are in effect each time you start Corel WordPerfect. Right-click an option to get Help information.


Specify backup options and the location of certain types of files.


Specify settings for certain document summary tasks.


Specify how certain file types are imported into Corel WordPerfect.


Change how the toolbar looks or specify a new one.


Change how the toolbar or Property Bar looks, and change its position in the document window.


Change how the Application Bar looks. The Application Bar shows information about the documents open in Corel WordPerfect.


Change the items on the menu or specify a new one.


Change how the keys function or specify a new keyboard layout.


Specify whether line numbers print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.


Specify the number assigned to the first numbered line of text.


Specify the first line number to print.


Specify the interval between printed line numbers.


Specify the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the

center of the space between columns) to the line number.


Specify the distance from the left margin to the line number.


Click to include, or exclude, blank lines in line numbering.


Inserts a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.


Inserts a hyphen in the word.


Keeps text together on either side of a hyphen.


Divides a word with a hyphen only when the word spans the hyphenation zone.


Divide a word without using a hyphen, but only when the word spans the hyphenation zone. Use this for words separated by a slash ("and/or"), an en dash, or an em dash.


Wrap the word to the next line when it spans the hyphenation zone.


Keeps the words on both sides of the space together on the same line.  Use this when you do not want a phrase divided between lines.


If you used Center Line, this code stops centering from the insertion point position to the end of the line. If you used a right tab, this code discontinues right-aligning from the insertion point to the end of the line.


Lets you change the character used to separate hundreds from thousands (as in 1,000).


This type of hyphen appears and prints only when the word spans the hyphenation zone.


Divides the word by adding a space.


Turns off Hyphenation during spell-checking or a scrolling command.

You must type text or change formatting in some way to turn on Hyphenation again.


Wrap the entire word to the next line. The word will not be hyphenated again in the current document.


Inserts the last deleted item at the insertion point.


Displays the deletion after the currently displayed deletion.


Displays the deletion before the currently displayed deletion.


Compares documents word by word. A word is text that ends with a space, period, comma, colon, semicolon, question mark, or exclamation point. A word is also delimited by a hard return, hard page break, footnote or endnote number, or the end of the document.


Compares documents phrase by phrase. A phrase is text that ends with a period, comma, colon, semicolon, question mark, exclamation point, hard return, or hard page break, or the end of the document.


Compares documents sentence by sentence. A sentence is text that ends with a period, question mark, exclamation point, hard return, or hard page break, or the end of the document.


Compares documents paragraph by paragraph. A paragraph is text that ends with a hard return or hard page break, or the end of the document.


Specify the file to compare with the current document.


Uses the redlining method specific to your printer (usually a shaded background).


Uses the redline character to mark redlined text in the left margin.


Marks redlined text in the left margin for even-numbered pages and in the right margin for odd-numbered pages.


Type the character you want to mark redlined text. Not available for Printer dependent method. Use Ctrl+W to insert a special character.


Sets the selected method as the redline method that will be in effect every time you compare documents.


Returns the document to its appearance before you compared it.


Keep the redline markings for added and moved text but remove strikeout (deleted) text.


Hyphenate words that extend beyond the right margin instead of wrapping the words to the next line.


Hyphenation divides words that start before the left boundary of the hyphenation zone and extend past the right boundary of the zone.  To move the boundaries of the hyphenation zone, increase or decrease the percent left and percent right.


Changes the width of the hyphenation zone's left boundary. Increase the percentage to hyphenate fewer words; Decrease it to hyphenate more words. The number is a percentage of the line length between the current left and right margins.


Changes the width of the hyphenation zone's right boundary. Increase the percentage to hyphenate fewer words; Decrease it to hyphenate more words. The number is a percentage of the line length between the current left and right margins.


Set the minimum and maximum distance allowed between words in fully justified text. Applies to the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Inserts a number for every line of text after the insertion point.


Specify whether line numbers will print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.


Specify the number that is assigned to the first line.


Specify the first line number that prints. For example, specify 5 to start printing line numbers on line 5.


Specify the interval between printed line numbers. For example, specify 3 to print a line number on every third line.


Specify the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the center of the space between columns) to the line number.


Displays the document at 50% of actual size.


Displays the document at 75% of actual size.


Displays the document at actual size.


Displays the document at 150% of actual size.


Displays the document at 200% of actual size.


Specify whether line numbers will begin again with the starting line number at the top of each page.


Displays a complete line or block of text within a window, with minimal white space to the right and left.


Displays the width of the page, including margins, within a window.


Displays all page margins in the document window.


Specify the size ratio of the document. The number can be between 25% and 400%.


Number the lines in each column in the document.


Give the style a short name to help you identify it in the list of styles.


Type a brief description to help you identify the style.


Finds the first previous occurrence of the search text, searching backward from the insertion point.


Select a style type. A character style applies to selected text or text you type within the style codes. Paragraph styles apply to paragraphs; use a paired-auto style to update all paragraphs when the style is changed in one paragraph. An open style applies to all text in your document from that point forward.


For Character and Paragraph styles, deselect this box to have the Enter key function as it usually does. To change the Enter key function, select this box, then select a style from the drop-down list. Then when you press Enter, the current style turns off and the new style is applied.


<Same Style>: Press Enter to move the insertion point past the style and turn it on again, such as with bulleted lists.  <None>: Press Enter to move the insertion point past the style, such as with headings and titles.


In the Contents box, insert the codes and text you want to use in the style. You can choose items from the Styles Editor menu, press keystrokes, and type text.


Select this box to display codes in the Contents box.  To display only text, deselect this box.


Select this option to insert codes after a paired style ends. Add the codes in the Contents text box after the ON/OFF comment.


Deletes the code you have specified.


Displays the root word form that replaces the word in the Find text box.


Specify the values for the code you want to find and replace.


Specify the code you want to find.


Specify the code you want to replace the existing code with.


Specify the font typeface you want to find.


Specify the font typeface you want to replace the existing font with.


Specify the style of font (bold, italic, etc.) you want to find and replace.


Select the horizontal advance measurement you want to find.


Select the horizontal advance measurement you want to replace the existing code with.


Specify the distance of the advance code you want to find or replace.


Specify the justification type you want to find or replace.


Specify the justification type you want to find.


Specify the type of justification you want to replace the existing code with.


Press Ctrl+W to specify the overstrike character you want to find.


Press Ctrl+W to specify the overstrike character you want to replace the existing character with.


Select the style you want to find.


Finds the text in any font.


Specify a font typeface to limit the search. Find looks for the text only when it appears in the specified font.


Specify a font style (bold, italics, etc.). Find limits the search to text that appears in the specified font and style.


Specify a font point size to limit the search. Find limits the search to text in the specified font and size.


Select one or more attributes to limit the search. Find limits the search to text that appears in the specified font and attributes.


Lists all bookmarks in the current document.


Places a QuickMark at the insertion point in the current document.


Moves the insertion point to the QuickMark in the current document.


Moves the insertion point to the selected bookmark.


Moves the insertion point to the bookmark and selects the associated text. This option is only available for bookmarks with selected text.


Names and inserts a new bookmark at the insertion point.


Moves the selected bookmark from its previous location to the insertion point.


Limits the search to text with a bold attribute.


Renames the selected bookmark.


Limits the search to text with an italic attribute.


Deletes the selected bookmark.


Limits the search to text with an underline attribute.


Limits the search to text with a double underline attribute.


Limits the search to text with an outline attribute


Limits the search to text with a shadow attribute.


Limits the search to text with a small caps attribute.


Limits the search to text with a redline attribute.


Limits the search to text with a strikeout attribute.


Limits the search to text with a superscript attribute.


Limits the search to text with a subscript attribute.


Limits the search to text with a fine attribute.


Limits the search to text with a small attribute.


Limits the search to text with a large attribute.


Limits the search to text with a very large attribute.


Limits the search to text with an extra large attribute.


Select the codes you want to find or replace.


Inserts the selected code in the Find or Replace With text box.


Set a bookmark or QuickMark in a document.


Specify a name that helps you identify the bookmark.


Lists the character maps available for the language modules or versions of Corel WordPerfect you have installed.


Displays the name of the character map currently in use.


Displays the size of the current document.


Activates the selected character map for the current document.


Display the new OLE object in the document as an icon rather than as data, text, or graphics.


Select a new icon or change the text of the current icon.


Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point.


Inserts the contents of the Clipboard in the document as an OLE or DDE link. If Paste Link is dimmed, the information in the Clipboard cannot be linked. The information must be copied from an application that supports linking. Click Paste instead.


Indicates the origin of the information on the Clipboard.


Select the format in which the Clipboard information will be pasted.


Inserts the contents of the Clipboard into your document so you can activate it using the application it was created in.


Use the default line height for the current font. Line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.


Specify the line height as a fixed distance regardless of the font being used. The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.


Select a font for button text.


Select the font size you want to use for button text.


Select whether you want buttons to display text, pictures, or both.


Specify the number of pages to be used.


Click to select or deselect formatting options to adjust.


Select the subdocuments you want to open.


Mark or unmark all the documents in the list.


Select the subdocuments you want to close (condense) and save.


Mark or unmark all the listed documents.


Type the characters that you want combined and printed as a single overstrike character. Do not insert a space between the characters.


Print the summary information, delete it from the document, fill in some of the summary fields by extracting information from the document, or save the summary as a separate file.


Provides varied information about the current document. Type or edit  information in any of the text boxes.


Customize the fields of the document summary.


Lists the fields currently included in the summary.


Click fields to include in the Selected fields list or to remove from the list.


Specifies that all new documents use this summary configuration as the default.


Remove all items from the Selected fields list.


Displays only text on the buttons.


Displays only the icon on the buttons.


Displays both the icon  and the text on the buttons.


Select the items you want to turn off on the current page or, select All to suppress all the items.


Prints the page number at the bottom center of the page instead of suppressing it.


Select a default location for the toolbar or Power Bar.


Display the toolbar or Property Bar on the left side of the document window.


Displays the toolbar or Property Bar on the right side of the document window.


Display the toolbar or Property Bar at the top of the document window.


Display the toolbar or Property Bar at the bottom of the document window.


Display the toolbar or Property Bar as a palette in the document window.


Displays as many as the last 300 editing actions.


Displays as many as 300 of your last Redo actions.


Reverses the selected editing action.


Restores the selected editing action. An action is listed under Redo only if you used Undo on it first.


Specify the number of undo/redo items you have available, and specify whether undo/redo items are saved with the document.


Select the number of undo/redo items you want to have available.


Select to save the undo/redo history with all documents you create and edit.


Specify a zoom option for viewing the document. The default view is 100%.


Specify a name for a new bookmark.


Specify a new name for a bookmark.


Create or edit a hyperlink and specify the link type and appearance.


Specify a bookmark in the current document as the hyperlink.


Specify a document as the hyperlink.


Specify a bookmark in another document as the hyperlink.


Specify a macro as the hyperlink. The macro plays when the link is clicked.


Launch your registered browser, such as Netscape Navigator, then browse to the desired document. The URL address of the document is inserted into the Document text box when you close the browser.


Specifies that hyperlinks display as text. The hypertext style determines how the text displays; the default style is a green underline font.


Specifies that hyperlinks display as buttons.


Create or change a hyperlink.


Determines how hyperlinks display in the current document.


Turns on Reveal Codes every time you open Corel WordPerfect or open a new document.


Prevents codes from running off the display window by dividing codes at the edge of the window.


Displays a diamond bullet for each space character.


Displays formatting information with codes in the Reveal Codes window.


Makes codes appear three dimensional.


Changes the size of the Reveal Codes window as a percentage of the document window.


Changes the font or size Reveal Codes is displayed in.


Changes the text or background color of the Reveal Codes window.


Lets you verify the format the current file is being converted from.


Lists the format of the file you are opening or inserting.


Select code pages for importing and exporting files in different languages.


Lists available code page options.


Select a code page for DOS files.


Select a code page for Windows files.


Select a code page for input files (files you convert to Corel WordPerfect).


Select a code page for output files (files you save with a different code page).


Select the default settings for converting text and word processing files to Corel WordPerfect.


Displays the current default language of documents you convert.


Select a default unit of measure for files you convert.


Specify a default alignment character for decimal alignment.


Select a default for displaying underlined text.


Select a default page width and height for converted documents.


Specify default page margins for documents you convert to Corel WordPerfect.


Select a default language for documents you convert to Corel WordPerfect.


Select the language for the document.


Displays the two-character abbreviation for the current selected language.


Select a language for file conversions.


Displays the new language selected in the Language list box.


Specify how page numbers will look in the index.


Select a style to display numbers without dot leaders, in parentheses, or after a comma or space; or hide page numbers.


Customize index page numbers. For example, add chapter or volume numbers or total page count to the page numbers.


Group consecutive page numbers instead of listing them separately.  For example, 4-6 instead of 4, 5, 6.


These are the names of the current heading and subheading styles. Click Change to select different styles or create your own.


This is the name of the current heading style. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


This is the name of the current subheading style. Click Change to select a different style or create your own.


Select a different style or create your own.


To create a concordance or include concordance entries in the index, specify the concordance file you want to use.


Select a style for headings and subheadings, or create your own styles.


Modify the selected style.


Specify which Corel WordPerfect 4.2 fonts are used for converting to or from a WordPerfect 4.2 document. Select a font and click Edit to change the font.


Lists font names and pitch (characters per inch) for Corel WordPerfect 4.2 fonts.


Change the typeface and pitch for a Corel WordPerfect 4.2 font.


Change the typeface and pitch of a Corel WordPerfect 4.2 font.


Displays the number assigned to the WordPerfect 4.2 font you are editing. The number represents the order of the font in the Font Settings list.


Select the WordPerfect 4.2 typeface you want to use in file conversion.


Specify the pitch (characters per inch) for the font you are editing.


Select the DCA or DisplayWrite fonts available for file conversion.


Lists fonts names, point, and pitch for DCA or DisplayWrite fonts.


Specify the number assignment for the DCA or DisplayWrite font you are editing.


Displays the DCA or DisplayWrite font being edited.


Select a new DCA or DisplayWrite typeface for the font you are editing.


Specify the point size for the font you are editing.


Specify how you want to convert graphics and files from another format to Corel WordPerfect format.


Specify the character or code that separates fields and records in an ASCII delimited text file.


Specify the characters that enclose each field of data, and specify which characters to strip from an ASCII file during conversion.


Select a graphic format option for converting graphics in Windows Metafile format (.wmf).


Specify how you want certain files imported into Corel WordPerfect. You can change the code page, the characters recognized as delimiters in ASCII text files, how some graphics files are imported, and how fonts are converted from some file types.


Divide text in vertical blocks on a page and specify how they look.


Displays the number of columns on the page.


Select a column type.


Wraps text from the bottom of one column to the top of the next, like text in a newspaper article.


Wraps text from the bottom of one column to the top of the next, like text in a newspaper article. Each column is adjusted on the page so the columns are of equal length.


Text wraps from one column to the next across the page in rows.  New rows start below the longest paragraph in the previous row.


Text wraps from one column to the next across the page in rows. Prevents text in each row from being divided across page breaks.


Specify the space between columns, and between rows in parallel columns.


Set the amount of white space you want between columns.


Specify the width of specific columns and of the white space between them.


Specify the width of a specific column. Columns are counted from left to right.


Specify the amount of white space between specific columns.


Preserves the width of the specified column regardless of changes to other columns, and preserves the space between columns regardless of changes to other columns.


Set the amount of white space between rows in parallel columns.


Specify the number of columns you want on the page.


Type the incorrect spelling of a commonly misspelled or mistyped word, or type an abbreviated form of a word to be expanded.


Type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped word, or type the expanded form of an abbreviation.


Adds the incorrect word (or abbreviation) and its replacement to the QuickCorrect list.


Removes the selected entry from the QuickCorrect list.


Inserts the correct spelling, or the expanded form of an abbreviation, as you type. This happens after you press the Spacebar, Enter, or Tab.


Correct common capitalization and spacing errors.


Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence.


Converts two initial capital letters in a word to an initial capital letter and lowercase second letter. For example, replace "PAris" with "Paris".


Eliminates double spaces between words in a sentence.


Convert single quotes to open and close single quotes.


Convert double quotes to open and close double quotes.


Select the character you want to use for open quotes. Press Ctrl+W to view additional characters.


Select the character you want to use for close quotes. Press Ctrl+W to view additional characters.


Correct spacing at the end of sentences.


Makes no corrections at the end of sentences.


Automatically converts a single space at the end of a sentence to two spaces.


Automatically converts two spaces at the end of a sentence to one space.


Specify when you want Corel WordPerfect to prompt you for hyphenation. Select Always to see a prompt every time a word is hyphenated; Select When Required to see a prompt when a word must be hyphenated but is not found in the main word list (which contains hyphenation rules). Select Never to let the hyphenation rules place hyphens every time.


Select to delete codes only when Reveal Codes is turned on and to note the position of hidden codes.


Automates frequently used formatting techniques so you can insert graphics lines, hanging indents, bulleted or numbered lists, em dashes, and other formatting using a few common keystrokes.


Select to avoid accidentally typing text over the formulas in tables or floating cells.


Specify new settings for left, right, top, or bottom margins. You can type a fraction (such as 1 1/3) and Corel WordPerfect converts it to a decimal.


Name a cell, column, row, or range of cells.


Edit the name of a table, floating cell, row, column, cell, or range of cells.


Deletes the name of a table cell, range, row, or column. You cannot delete the names of tables or floating cells.


Moves the insertion point to the table, floating cell, or table component you have selected in the list.


Insert a table component name into a formula.


Type a name for a cell, range, row, or column.


Applies the name to the cell or range of cells you selected.


Applies the name to the column where the insertion point is located.


Applies the name to the row where the insertion point is located.


Uses the text in the current cell to name a row, column, the cell to the right, or the cell below. If you select multiple cells, you can give adjacent columns, rows, or cells the same name.


Uses text from the current cell(s) to name the cell(s) to the right.


Uses text from the current cell(s) to name the cell(s) below.


Specify how many levels you want in the table of contents.


Specify a position for the page numbers at each level of the table of contents. You can display no page numbers, or you can display page numbers after the entries (separated by a space), in parentheses after the entries (separated by a space), flush right, or flush right with dot leaders.


Change the current table of contents style.


Customize the way page numbers appear in the table of contents. This is useful when you use special numbering like volume, chapter, and secondary page numbers in a document.


Indents the last level of your table of contents evenly.


Click to display the names of the most recently edited files on the File menu.


Click to display keyboard shortcuts for menu options.


Click to display QuickTips (Help prompts) in the document window.


Displays the same documents and window arrangement the next time you start Corel WordPerfect.


Starts with a clean document every time.


Prompts you to save the current window arrangement each time you exit Corel WordPerfect.


Specify the position of the tab setting you want to add or clear. The position is measured from the left margin or left edge of the paper.


Clears all tab settings.


Select how to position tab settings. If you specify Left Margin and later change the left margin, tab settings stay the same distance from the new left margin. If you specify Left Edge and later change the left margin, tab settings do not change.


Specify the type of tab setting you want to add.


Clear all tab settings, specify a  new left-most tab setting in the Position box, then click this to specify the distance you want between tab settings.


Specify the character used for dot leaders. Press Ctrl+W to specify a Corel Symbol.


Specify the number of spaces you want between dot leader characters.


Specify the character used for alignment on decimal tab settings. Press Ctrl+W to specify a Corel Symbol.


Adds the tab setting you have specified under Settings.


Clears the tab setting you have specified under Settings.


Resets the tab settings to the Corel WordPerfect default.


Show all table lines as dashed lines and turn off the display of any table fill.


Use the Windows system colors to display text and the document background.


Display Comments in every document.


Display graphics and graphics boxes in every document.


Display hidden text in the document window. You must enable Hidden Text to create Hidden Text in the document window.


Display [image] in your document.  You can then use the QuickSpots to quickly change the format of graphics, paragraphs and tables.


Display the vertical scroll bar in the document window.


Display the horizontal scroll bar in the document window.


Changes the units of measure used in dialog boxes and Reveal Codes.


Changes the units of measure displayed or used on the Application Bar or ruler.


Makes tabs line up exactly (snap) to invisible grid lines in the document. Lines are spaced every millimeter or 1/16 of an inch.


When you move a tab or margin marker, shows a dotted vertical line that extends from the marker to the bottom of the document window.


Displays the Ruler Bar so that it looks three dimensional.


Select the symbols (special characters) you want to display in the document window.


Displays merge codes as text in the document window.


Displays merge codes as markers in the document window.


Displays text without merge codes in the document window.


Apply the current table style to all new tables as they are created.


Select the header you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two headers on a page.


Select the footer you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two footers on a page.


Positions the insertion point in the Header or Footer and opens the Header/Footer Property Bar so you can create the text and format of the header or footer.


Positions the insertion point in the Header or Footer and opens the Header/Footer Property Bar  so you can change the text and format of the header or footer.


Turns off the header or footer from this point in the document on.


Prints the header, footer, or watermark on even, odd, or all pages. Use Even and Odd for two-sided documents.


Specify which footnote you want to change.


Increments the current footnote number up or down.


Restarts footnote numbering at the number you specify.


Uses numbers, letters, or characters for footnote numbering.


Specify a format for all footnote numbers in the document text.


Specify a format for footnote numbers in the footnote text at the bottom of the page.


Specify the amount of white space between the footnotes at the bottom of the page.


Specify whether footnotes print immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page. This placement is used when the text does not fill the entire page.


Specify the minimum vertical space to allow for footnotes. If this much space is not available for a footnote near the bottom of a page, the footnote moves to the next page.


When a footnote is divided between two pages, prints "(continued...)" on the last footnote line of the first page and on the first footnote line of the next page.


Sets the format of the line separating footnotes from text.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the footnote text below it.


Places the line at the left or right margin (Left or Right), between margins (Full), centered between margins (Center), or at a position you specify (Set).


Specify the length of the footnote separator line. If you select Full for the Line position, this option is dimmed.


Specify the line style for the footnote separator line.


Specify which endnote you want to change.


Restarts endnote numbering at the numbering you specify.


Select numbers, letters, or characters for endnote numbering.


Specify a format for endnote numbers in the endnotes section of the document.


Specify a format for all endnote numbers in the document text.


Specify the amount of space between the endnotes at the end of the document.


Specify the minimum amount of space that must be available for an endnote at the bottom of a page. If this much space is not available for an endnote near the bottom margin of a page, the endnote moves to the next page.


Places the endnotes at the insertion point, if you do not want endnotes to print at the end of the document.


Lists all the sound clips that have been inserted in the document.


Lets you play, rewind, stop, or fast-forward the sound clip. If the options are dimmed, no sound clips appear in the list or Windows does not detect your sound device.


Displays the total time length of the sound clip.


Adds a sound clip to your document.


Specify the name of the sound clip.


Displays the Sound Clip Property Bar. If the option is dimmed, no sound clips are listed in the document or Windows does not detect your sound device.


Automatically inserts a new row when you press Tab in the last cell of a table.


Displays numbers in the Currency format but aligns the currency symbol at one edge of the column and the numbers at the other edge.


Displays numbers using the Fixed format, but uses commas to separate thousands and displays negative numbers in parentheses.


Displays numbers with a currency symbol, thousands separators, a decimal align character, and to as many as 15 decimal places.


Converts numbers into the current date and time format.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator to as many as fifteen decimal places. If a number has fewer decimal places than you set, the empty decimal places are filled with zeros.


Displays numbers with no thousands separator and no trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.


Displays whole numbers only. Fractions are rounded to the nearest whole number.


Displays numbers as percent values with a percent symbol (%) to the number of decimal places you set, and without a thousands separator.


Displays numbers in scientific (exponential) notation to the number of decimal places you set.


Treats the contents of a cell as text. The cell then cannot be used for calculations.


Shows the selected cells contain more than one numeric format. If only one numeric format is selected, this radio button is dimmed.


Display negative numbers using a minus sign (-), parentheses, or the CR or DR symbol.


Include a currency symbol for all numeric types.


Align the currency symbol at the left or right edge of the cell. Only available when Use Currency Symbol is selected.


Select a different currency symbol. To return to the default currency symbol, click Default.


Change the number of digits displayed after the decimal point.


Rounds cell values after the decimal when they are calculated.


Allows commas in the numbers you type in cells. Does not affect the Scientific numeric type.


Displays the custom settings you make for the number type.


Type the name you want to use in comments or document summaries


Type the initials you want to use for comments and document summaries.


Click to select the color you want to use for your comments.


Select the language you want to use for Corel WordPerfect. This setting changes all on-screen text (dialog boxes, messages, etc.) and determines which language tools are used.


Corel WordPerfect beeps if an error occurs as you work.


Corel WordPerfect beeps if a word must be hyphenated.


Corel WordPerfect beeps if the text or codes you want to find are not found in the document.


Selects text word by word instead of character by character when you drag to select text.


Places a bookmark at the insertion point whenever you save a document so you can return to that location quickly.


Turns on all hyperlinks in your documents.


Adjusts opened documents to match the currently selected printer.


Defines which character sets are used for importing and exporting files in different languages.


Turn Line Numbering on or off, or change the appearance and position of line numbers.


Uses the redline character to mark redlined text in the right margin.


Select a style for numbered paragraphs, or for bulleted or numbered lists.


Select the value of the first number you insert. For example, if you use uppercase letters and choose 2 for the starting value, then B is the first letter inserted.


For paragraph numbers only, select a starting level for the paragraph number you insert. For example, if you set the Paragraph Level to 2, then the paragraph numbering starts with "a".


Inserts a new bullet or number every time you press Enter.


Customize any of the bullet or number styles.


Specify the number of times to repeat a keystroke or command.


Sets the number you specify as the default whenever you use Repeat.


Copies the format of text at the insertion point so you can apply the format to other text.


Copies the format of the heading at the insertion point so you can apply the format to other headings.


Stops automatically updating headings that use the same QuickFormat style.


Stops automatically updating the heading at the insertion point.


Stops automatically updating all other headings that use the same QuickFormat style.


Lists the types of counters available. The list includes five predefined system counters that number boxes used in the Graphics and Equations features.


Specify how many characters to include in the Drop Cap, starting with the first letter of the current word. More than one word can be used, but spaces are not counted.


Includes the current word in the Drop Cap.


Places text around the drop cap. Deselect this option to place text through the drop cap area.


Allows paragraph text to wrap around drop cap characters that extend below the text baseline, such as ornate characters or the letters g, j, p, q, or y.


Moves a drop cap down slightly for those letters using diacritical elements, such as the acute accent (for example, ).


Applies features and inserts codes a specific number of pages after the current page.


Specify which watermark you want to create, edit, or discontinue.  You can have two watermarks on a page.


Moves the insertion point to the Watermark layer and opens the Watermark Property Bar so you can insert a graphic or type text for the watermark. If Create is dimmed, you have already created that watermark.


Opens the Watermark feature bar so you can change the graphic or text and the format of the watermark.


Turns off the watermark from this point in the document on.


Make the watermark darker or lighter. A higher number creates a darker watermark image.


Change the current color by clicking a color in the color wheel and an area in the vertical luminosity bar.


Specify a name for the current color.


Displays all the colors in your palette in a vertical list, ordered by name.


Shows the color model which you can use as the basis for mixing and creating colors.


Opens an existing color palette.


Saves the color printing palette.


Resets colors to the original settings.


Changes the number of colors in the color palette.


Copies the current color so you can paste the color to another color square.


After you use Copy to copy a color, Paste inserts the color in the color square you select.


Evenly mixes two colors in a range of shades, with an equal mix in the middle of the range and the two original colors at each end.


Inserts a spectrum of colors into a selected block of color squares. The rainbow uses basic colors between the first and last colors in the block.


Type the actual printer command to be inserted in the document.


Specify a file that contains several printer commands that you want to insert in the document.


Inserts a code that pauses the printer at the current insertion point location.


Sets the number of columns and rows for a subdivided page. The physical page (printable area of a piece of paper) is divided into logical pages (a defined area in a physical page), such as for a folded booklet.


Turns off Subdivide so the next page will print on the entire piece of paper.


Select a return address from the Address Book or type an address.


Changes the font and point size for the address text.


Deselect the box if you don't want the return address to print on the envelope.


Select a mailing address from the Address Book or type an address.


Creates an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing addresses you specify. To create multiple envelopes with the same return addresses but different mailing addresses, use Merge.


Select an envelope paper size.


Create an envelope definition if none of the definitions meet your needs.


Prints the envelope without inserting it into the document.


Inserts the envelope on a new page at the end of the document.


Change the return and mailing address positions, and turn the bar code option on and off.


Changes the address position for the selected envelope paper definition.


Do not insert a bar code on the envelope.


Specifies the location of the label files. A label file contains a group of label definitions (which define the format of the labels).


Adds a new label file (containing a group of label definitions).


Edits the name and description of the label file.


Deletes the currently selected label file.


Selects the label file from which you can choose label definitions.


Type the name of the label file.


Type a description for the label file.


Sorts the list of labels by type (Laser or Tractor-Fed) or displays all the label definitions in the label file (Both).


Select a label definition from this list to format labels correctly.


Contains information about the selected label definition.


Stops using the label definition. If you turn labels off before filling an entire sheet of labels, blank labels are inserted to fill the entire sheet.


Creates a new label definition that is saved with the current label file.


Click to change the selected label definition.


Removes the label definition from the selected label file.


Lets you choose another label file, which contains other label definitions.


Describes the label. The label list is sorted by this description.


Specifies a paper size, paper location, paper orientation, and text adjustments.


Specify the width and height of individual labels.


Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).


Specify how labels are arranged in columns (up and down) and rows (left to right).


Specifies the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows. If there is no space between labels, specify 0" and 0".


Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.


Creates a line that extends left to right.


Creates a line that extends top to bottom.


Specify a horizontal or vertical line.


Select a line style for the border. To use a style not on the palette or list, click Line Styles.


Select a color from the palette to change the color of the line.


Change the thickness of the line.


Specify the amount of white space between the line and the text above it.


Specify the amount of space between the line and the text below it.


Specify the length of the line.


Change the color, appearance, and spacing of the graphics line.


Determines where the line is placed in relation to the left, right, top, and bottom margins.


Select a position, or select Set and specify a distance from the left edge of the page. To extend the line from the left to right margin, select Full.


Select Baseline to place the bottom edge of the line on the text baseline, or select Set and specify the distance between the line and the top of the page.


Create, edit, or retrieve a line style.


Displays the box styles associated with the template, both predefined styles and any you have created.


Applies the selected graphics style.


Copy, delete, reset, rename, retrieve, or save styles.


Select a location for the displayed styles. Styles are associated with the default template unless you specify a different location.


Return to the default paragraph format settings.


Move the insertion point to a specific location on the page.


Move the insertion point horizontally on the page.


Move the insertion point vertically on the page.


Leave the insertion point at its current horizontal position.


Move the insertion point a specific distance to the left of its current position.


Move the insertion point a specific distance to the right of its current position.


Move the insertion point to an exact distance from the left edge of the page.


After you select a horizontal positioning option, specify the distance to move the insertion point.


Leave the insertion point at its current vertical position.


Move the insertion point a specific distance above its current position.


Move the insertion point a specific distance down from its current position.


Move the insertion point to an exact distance down from the top of the page.


Specify whether you want text inserted above or below the position you set.


After you select a vertical positioning option, specify the distance to move the insertion point.


Change the distance between words, letters, and lines of text, and set the baseline at the top margin.


WordPerfect optimal is the default distance between words. Specify a number than 100 to increase (or less than 100 to decrease) the distance between words in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Normal uses the font manufacturer's settings for the distance between words.


WordPerfect optimal is the default distance between words.


Specify a number greater than 100 to increase the distance (or less than 100 to decrease the distance) between words in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Specify a number greater than 100 to increase the distance (or less than 100 to decrease the distance) between letters in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Specify the number of characters per inch. The percent of optimal number changes to match this setting.


WordPerfect optimal is the default distance between letters. Specify a number greater than 100 to increase (or less than 100 to decrease) the distance between all letters in the current selection or from the insertion point forward.


Normal uses the font manufacturer's settings for the distance between letters.


WordPerfect optimal is the default distance between letters.


Specify the number of characters per inch. The percent of optimal number changes to match this setting.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be reduced. If the words are too close together, increase the compression number.


For fully justified text, specify the maximum percent the distance between words can be increased. If the words are too close together, increase the expansion number.


Change the distance between lines of text in the current selection or  from the insertion point forward.


To change the distance between lines of text or from the insertion point forward, click Adjust leading, then specify an amount to increase (positive number) or decrease (negative number) the current setting.


Automatic kerning adjusts the distance between predefined pairs of letters. The font determines which letter pairs are kerned.


The baseline is the invisible line letters sit on. Baseline placement sets the baseline at the top margin instead of at the first line of text. This makes the first baseline occur at the same position on every page. If this option is not selected the first baseline varies depending on the font size of the first line of text.


Specifies settings for tabs, such as type and position.


Specify the type and position of tabs in the document.


Specify whether tabs are positioned from the left margin or edge of paper.


Specify the dot leader character and the number of spaces between characters.


Specify the character that is aligned to the tab stop when you use a decimal tab.


Number paragraphs, or create a bulleted or numbered list. Bulleted and numbered lists begin with a bullet or number, followed by a period and an indent. Numbers increment automatically. Numbered paragraphs do not add an indent. To end a list, press Enter, Backspace.


Lists counter definitions. You can create and modify counters and control how and when the number changes.


Select the type of counter you want to use and when to insert and display it.


Select a counter type to insert. You can change but not delete the five predefined WordPerfect counters for boxes.


Edit or delete the selected counter, or create a new one.


Define your own style of counter.


Change the counter selected in the list.


Select a counter in the list, then delete it. You cannot delete the five WordPerfect box counters.


Change the value of the selected counter. For example, you can change a counter value from 1 to 7 or from A to D.


Increases the value of the selected counter by 1.


Decreases the value of the selected counter by 1.


Displays the current value of the selected counter at the insertion point.


Increases the value of the selected counter by 1, then displays that value at the insertion point.


Decreases the value of the selected counter by 1, then displays that value at the insertion point.


Define your own style of counter.


The name you type name appears in the list of counters so you can identify and use it.


Type the name you want to identify the counter. You cannot edit the name of system counters.


Sets the type of numbering to use for a counter that has only one level of numbering.


Select the type of numbering you want for a single-level counter.


Set the number of levels for numbering a counter (as in a four-level counter with the format I.A.i.a.).


Define the type of numbers used for the first counter level.


Edit the name used to identify the first level.


Define the type of numbers used for the third counter level.


Define the type of numbers used for the fourth counter level.


Define the type of numbers used for the fifth counter level.


Define the type of numbers used for the second level.


Edit the name used to identify the third level.


Edit the name used to identify the fifth level.


Change the value of a counter or its numbering method.


The name of the counter.


Choose the kind of numbers for the counter.


Click to view the current tab settings.


Specify the value you want for this counter. For example, you can change 1 to 6 or A to C.


Specify the margins on the printed document.


Specify the width of the left margin.


Specify the width of the right margin.


Specify the length of the top margin.


Specify the length of the bottom margin.


Create a new document using Corel WordPerfect-equivalents for HTML coding. You can publish the finished document to the HTML file format without having to know how to code HTML documents yourself.


Open the current document in the Web Editor. Corel WordPerfect formatting that has no HTML equivalent is deleted.


Launch Netscape Navigator or your registered browser to view HTML documents on an Internet server or a  local server.


Quickly move the insertion point to a specific position in the document.


Create and edit web documents, publish to HTML, and launch Netscape Navigator or your registered browser to browse the Internet or local Intranet servers.


Moves the insertion point to the position you select in the list box.


Select where you want to move the insertion point.


Moves the insertion point to the top of the specified page.


Set the number of the page where you want to move the insertion point.


Moves the insertion point to the bookmark you select from the drop-down list.


Moves the insertion point to table you specify.


Select a heading level, paragraph style, or list style.


Select the table, and the cell or range in that table, to which you want to move the insertion point.


Determine the look and size of horizontal and vertical lines.


Create or edit a line style.


Exit the dialog box and save any changes.


Exit the dialog box without saving any changes.


Display information about the dialog box.


Close the dialog box and save all changes.


Uses the thickness specified in the current line style.


Create a new document using the standard template or another template that you select.


Select the template group from which you want to use a template.


Select the template group from which you want to use a template.


Displays the name of the default template for creating new documents, unless you select a different template.


Select the template you want to use to create a new document.


Previews the selected template in the list.


Click to create, edit, or delete a new template or a group.


Select the Personal Information set that will be used to insert information about you into the documents you create.


Save a template that you have created.


Type descriptive text to identify the template.


Type descriptive text to identify the template.


Type a brief name for the template. This name appears in the list of templates.


Select the group that you want to list the new template in.


Copy styles, macros, toolbars, menus, and keyboards from one template to another. Also, remove these objects from a template.


Select the template you want to copy objects from.


Select the types of objects (menus, macros, etc.) that you want to copy.


Identifies the template that objects will be copied from.


Lists the objects found in the template that will be copied to the new template.


Identifies the template that objects will be copied from.


Identifies the template that the objects will be copied to.


Copies the selected object in the Source list box to the destination template.


Copies all objects listed in the Source list box to the destination template.


Removes the object selected in the Source list box from the destination template.


Removes all objects in the Source list box from the destination template.


Lists the objects that will be copied to the template you are creating.


Specify how you want a table of contents to look.


Displays the name of the style level.


Displays the style level.


Specify the position and format of page numbering for each table of contents level, and specify a different style for each level.


Identifies which toolbars, menus, and keyboards are displayed when you use a certain feature in a template.


Click to turn Monospaced on or off. In monospaced text each character is the same width. The browser selects the font that actually represents monospaced text.


Lists the named tables and table components in the current document.


Lists the names of the tables and floating cells.


Identifies whether the item is a table or floating cell.


Lists the names in the selected table.


Lists the location of the named table or table component.


Uses text from the current cells to name the column.


Uses text from the current cells to name the row.


Names a table or table component. You can use existing cell text for the name.


Select to associate features with the toolbars, menus, or keyboards in the new template.


Select a feature from this list to associate it with a toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Or select a trigger from this list to associate it with a template macro.


Lists the features you can associate with toolbars, menus, or keyboards, or lists the triggers you can associate with template macros.


Select to associate macro triggers with macros in the template. A trigger specifies when a macro will play in the template (for example, before you close the document).


Displays the template macro that is associated with the selected trigger.


Lists the template macros that you have created in that template or copied to it. Select the template macro to which you want to associate the selected trigger.


Changes the name and reference of the table or table component.


Type the name of the table component.


Select the toolbar to which you want to associate with the selected feature.


Edit the type and reference for the named table component.


Select the menu to which you want to associate the selected feature.


Select the keyboard to which you want to associate the selected feature.


Specify the location of the table component name.


Select the type of table component you want named.


Create or edit a brief description to help you identify the template.


Type the description you want to use to identify the template.


Select lines, fill, and border options for tables and table cells.


Select line and fill options for the current cell or selected cells.


Select the line style and color for the cell or selected cells. Select None to turn off lines.


Select the line style for the left line of the cell or selected cells.


Select the line style for the right line of the cell or selected cells.


Select the line style for the top line of the cell or selected cells.


Select the line style for the bottom line of the cell or selected cells.


Select the line style for the inside lines in a selection of cells. This is dimmed if no cells are selected.


Select the line style for the outside lines of a selection of cells.


Select a color.


Select the fill style and color for the cell or selected cells.


Select the fill style for the cell or selected cells.


Select the foreground color for the fill style.


Select the background color for the fill style.


Illustrates the result of the options you have selected.


Create or edit border, line, and fill styles.


Applies the current selections without closing the dialog box. You can then see how the table looks before you finish making changes.


Select border, line, and fill options for the current table.


Select the border style and color for the current table or customize a border style for the current table.


Select the border style for the current table.


Select the border color for the current table.


Customize the border style for the current table.


Select the primary fill style and color for the current table.


Select the primary fill pattern for the current table.


Select the foreground color for the primary fill style in the current table.


Select the background color for the primary fill style in the current table.


Specify the number of rows or columns you want the fill style applied to.


Select the line style and color for all lines of the table.


Select the line style for all lines in the current table.


Select the color for all lines in the current table.


Select the alternating fill style and color for the current table.


Select to have alternating fill in rows, columns, or both.


Select the alternating fill style for the current table.


Select the foreground color for the alternating fill style in the current table.


Select the background color for the alternating fill style in the current table.


Illustrates the result of the options you have selected.


Apply the current settings to all new tables when they are created.


Select predefined styles to apply to the current table.


Select the style you want to apply to the current table.


Illustrates the selected table style.


Applies the table style to the current cells of the table. If you add more rows or columns to the table, the style will not apply to those rows or columns.


Clears any existing table settings before applying the table style.


Creates a table style based on the format of the current table.


Allows you to delete, rename, retrieve, or save a table style.  You can also specify the location of the table styles that are listed in the Table SpeedFormat dialog box.


Names the table style you have created with the format of the current table.


Type the name of the table style.


Select the location of the table styles that are listed in the Table SpeedFormat dialog box.


List the styles associated with the current document.


List the styles associated with the additional objects template, if you have one. Specify the location of the additional objects template in Files Settings.


Specifies the type of counter you want to cross reference.


Select the type of counter you want to cross reference.


Generate any items defined with links or references within the document.


Resaves condensed subdocuments with the generated changes. Only applies if your document has condensed subdocuments.


Creates and generates any hyperlinks to any marked text.


Adjust paragraph margins, the spacing between paragraphs, and the distance that the first line of a paragraph is indented.


Set the distance to indent the first line of the paragraph.


Set the amount of white space you want between paragraphs.


Set the distance you want to increase the left margin past the regular page margin. This applies only to the paragraphs using this format.


Set the distance you want to increase the right margin past the regular page margin. This applies only to the paragraphs using this format.


Create a style based on the formatting in effect at the insertion point.


Type a name for the new style.


Type a brief description to help you identify the style.


Applies the style to the paragraph at the insertion point. This is useful for headings.


Applies the style to selected text or text you are about to type.


Select a font.


Change the appearance of the graphics image.


Rotate the image within the image box.


Move the image within the image box.


Flip or reverse the image on its vertical axis.


Flip or reverse the image on its horizontal axis.


Zoom in or out on the image, or display the image at its actual size.


Convert a color image to black and white and set the blackness threshold for the image. Gray values darker than the threshold are converted to black; lighter values are converted to white.


Adjust the contrast between the colors in the image.


Adjust the brightness of the image colors.


Keep the image fill colors, make the image transparent so the background shows through the image, or convert the image to an outline with a white fill.


Change the colors in the image to their complementary colors.


Launch the OLE server for the image to use more extensive image editing and drawing capabilities.


Provides access to all attributes settings in one dialog box.


Restore the image to its original appearance.


Change how the graphic images look in your document.


Restore an image to its original appearance.


Select halftone options, or a dither method or source.


Move the image in the graphics box.


Specify a value to move the image. A positive number moves the image right; a negative numbers moves the image left.


Specify a value to move the image. A positive number moves the image up; a negative number moves the image down.


Change the size of the image.


Specify a scale height in multiples of the original height. If scale height and width are not the same, the image will be distorted.


Specify a scale width in multiples of the original width. If scale width and height are not the same, the image will be distorted.


Specify a scale size in a multiple of the original size.


Rotate the image.


Specify the number of degrees you want to rotate the image. To rotate so the top is at the left side, specify 90 degrees. To flip the image so it is upside down, specify 180 degrees. To rotate so the top is at the right side, specify 270 degrees.


Flip or reverse the image.


Flip or reverse the image on its horizontal axis.


Flip or reverse the image on its vertical axis.


Change the brightness or contrast, or invert the colors.


Change the colors in an image to their complementary colors.


Click a button representing the contrast or specify a value from -1 (no contrast) to 1 (highest contrast).


Click a button representing the brightness or specify a value between -1 (black) and 1 (white).


Convert a color image to black and white and set the blackness threshold for the image.


Select to change the image to black and white.


Set the blackness threshold. Any color that is darker than the threshold is displayed as solid black.


Make an image transparent so that the background shows through the image, or convert an image to an outline with a white fill.


Show the normal fill color for the graphics image.


Convert the image to an outline so the document background shows through.


Convert the image to an outline and fill with white.


Use the page color for the image background.


Change how the image will print. Select halftone options, which define the clearness of the image, or select dither methods or sources, which define how images blend colors or shades of gray.


Use a random pattern of dots to create smoother transitions in color and gray-scale images. This method provides good image detail with bitmap images.


Use ordered patterns of pixels to simulate colors or shades of gray.  This method is for use with bitmap or vector images.


Use evenly spaced dots of variable diameter to simulate colors or shades of gray. With bitmap or vector images, this method provides good image detail, produces good photocopies, and prints the most rapidly.


Have WordPerfect enhance image colors.


Have the Windows printer driver or the printer enhance the image colors.


Specify in degrees (0 - 360) the pattern orientation of a printed halftone image.


Use a lower value to increase the number of shades in a halftone image. Use a higher value to decrease the size of the dots in a halftone image, which improves image sharpness.


Add to the document any text, charts, graphics, spreadsheets, sound clips, video clips, or other file type created by an OLE-compliant application.


Create a new OLE object to insert into the document.


Display the object as an icon rather than showing it in the document.


Link or embed information in another existing file.


Specify the filename for the information you want to include in your document.


Click to link to the information rather than embed it in the current document.


Update, cancel, or change a link.


Shows the links inserted in your WordPerfect document.


Update the information in your WordPerfect document.


Change the name of the file an OLE object in your document is linked to.


Remove a link without deleting the information from your WordPerfect document.


Specify that you want to update links automatically when the information in the source document changes.


Specify that you always want to update the links manually. Update links using Update Now.


Show the scroll bars every time you open the document window.


Show the scroll bars only when the text runs beyond the edge of the document window.


Shows the document without special formatting. For example, labels appear one per page, and headers and footers are not displayed.


Shows the full page of the document as it would print.


Shows two full facing pages of the document as it would print.


Change how the Ruler Bar appears in the document window.


Change how merge codes appear in the document window.


Specify what symbols display in the document window.


Change the default document view or the size of document display.


Change how Reveal Codes displays in the document window.


Specify a view percentage (with 100 percent as the size of the printed page).


Specify your personal information in Address Book before opening a template.


Specify which header or footer you want to create, edit, or discontinue. You can have two headers or footers on a page.


The name of the personal information set that is being used to insert information such as a name and address into the template.


Click to open the template you have selected for a new document.


Adjusts the space between the text and the header or footer. You can also drag the dotted gray guideline.


Indicates the type of objects being copied from the source template.


Indicates the type of objects being copied to the destination template.


Specify backup options and where to store document files.


Specify the folder where document files are always saved, unless you choose another folder for a specific document.


Specify a default file extension for documents you save. When you save a document for the first time, or when you use Save As to save with a different filename or format, this extension is automatically added to the filename. File extensions identify the file type and are identified with a specific application.


Specify the folder where timed backup files are stored.


Guards against losing work because of power or equipment failure by backing up files regularly.


Specify an interval (in minutes) at which backup files are saved.


Guards against accidentally replacing a file that you did not intend to replace. Saves the edited version of the document with the original filename and the original version with a .BK! extension.


Automatically update Favorites with the folders you select in File Settings.


View a complete listing of folders and files for all File Settings options.


Specify template options and where to find template files.


Specify the folder that contains template files.


Specify the name of the default template file.


Specify an additional folder that contains template files (such as a network folder).


Specify the filename for the additional objects template file.


Replaces the standard template with the additional objects template.


Specify the default location for spreadsheet and database files.


Specify the folder that contains spreadsheet files.


Specify an additional folder that contains spreadsheet files (such as a network folder).


Specify the folder that contains database files.


Specify an additional folder that contains database files (such as a network folder).


Specify merge options and where to find macros files.


Specify a default extension for all merge form filenames.


Specify a default extension for all merge data filenames.


Specify the folder that contains macros files.


Specify an additional folder that contains macro files (such as on a network).


Specify labels options and where to find labels files.


Specify the folder that contains labels files.


Specify the default file for label definitions. The label definitions in this file are available when you select labels.


Specify the file containing the label definitions you want to use.


Select the type of labels you want to display when you list available label definitions.


Display labels designed for laser printers.


Display labels designed for tractor-fed printers.


Display labels designed for both printer types.


Specify where to find graphics, fancy borders, and hyphenation files.


Specify the folder that contains graphics files.


Specify an additional folder that contains graphics files (such as a network folder).


Specify the folder that contains fancy borders files.


Specify how a list or a table of authorities section looks.


Displays the numbering format selected for the definition.


Create a list or table of authorities section definition.


Edit a list or table of authorities section definition.


Deletes the selected definition.


Retrieves a list or table of authorities section definition from another document.


Create a new list definition or edit an existing one.


Specify the name of the list definition.


Determines how page numbers appear in the list.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Customize the page numbering of the list definition.


Shows the currently selected style.


Specify where certain types of files are stored, and set backup options for your files.


Change the currently selected style.


Select the type of box captions you want to include in the list. Box captions do not have to be marked individually to be listed.


Choose the style to use for list or table of authorities entries.


Create a new kind of outline definition or modify one of the existing outline definitions.


Displays the names of the outline definitions that are available.


Displays the outline styles that you can apply, edit, or copy.


Describes briefly what the outline contains.


Identifies the source of the outline styles in the list, as determined in Options, Setup. You can display outlines from the current document, default template, or additional objects template.


Restarts the outline numbering at the first level in the outline style.


Create a new outline style.


Modify the outline definition you selected in the list.


Copy, delete, save, or reset the selected outline style, retrieve an outline style from another source, or change the source of outline styles that are displayed in the list.


Create a new style of outline or edit an existing style.


Specify a brief name for the outline.


Create a brief description to identify the outline contents (numbers, letters, bullets, etc.).


Customize Corel WordPerfect by setting options that are in effect each time you start WordPerfect.


Create or edit the style and numbering of the outline levels.


Select a new style for the list definition or table of authorities section definition.


Click to use the selected style.


Select a level, then select the numbering style you want to use for that level.


Select the type of page numbers you want and where you want them placed on the page.


Select the position on the page for page numbers. The Sample Facing Pages illustrate where the page numbers will appear.


The text and codes contained in the selected format.


Select a font for page numbers.


Inserts a page number format into the text of a document. If you want the page number to appear only in text, select No Page Numbering from the Position drop-down list.


Change options for all spreadsheet and database links in the document.


Update the information in the all the spreadsheet and database links each time you open the document in Corel WordPerfect.


Display icons to indicate where the link begins and ends.


Displays the filename of the object linked to this document.


Displays the type of object linked to this document.


Open the linked object in the source application to edit it.


Automate certain document summary tasks.


Specify the text that identifies a document subject. This text must appear in the document for Document Summary to find the subject.


Specify a default Descriptive Type for document summaries, such as memo, letter, or invoice.


Use a detailed name for the document that is longer than or different from the document's filename.


Create a document summary when you save or exit a document. Displays the Document Summary dialog box when saving or exiting.


Specify the fields to import from the source database file.


Select Spreadsheet or a type of database for the imported object.


Specify the name of the file to import.


Import the information as text, or into a table structure or merge data file.


Log on to the database server to import or link to an SQL database.


Specify the name of a range to import or link to.


Specify the information you want to import by providing an SQL statement such as SELECT ALL.


Uses field names as headings in the imported text.


If you select Characters for the Numbering Method, type a character or press Ctrl+W to select a non-keyboard symbol.


Insert a copy of spreadsheet or database information from another source into this document.


Specifies the format for the footnote number in text and in the footnote at the bottom of the page.


Select this option to have every page start over with the first footnote number.


Don't update the spreadsheet and database links in the document.


Update all spreadsheet and database links in the document.


Specify the distance from the left edge of page. This is only available if you chose Set for the Line position.


List the styles available in the current document, and create, edit, and apply styles.


Lists available styles in the current document.


Select a style from the list that you want to apply, change, or save to a file.


A brief description of the selected style.


Character styles affect the text between the style codes. Paragraph styles apply to entire paragraphs. Paragraph (auto) styles apply to paragraphs and are updated when you edit text within the style (rather than use Styles Editor). Open styles apply to all text after the insertion point.


Specify how much white space is above and below the separator line, and set the position and length of the line.


Applies the selected style to text in the document. If you select text first, this applies the style only to that text.


Create a style based on the format of text at the insertion point.


Use Styles Editor to create a style and add it to this list.


Customizes the format of footnotes. For example, you can change the numbering method, position on the page, or the spacing between text and a separator line.


Use Styles Editor to edit the selected style.


Specify the source of styles for the list. Copy, delete, or reset a style, or save and retrieve styles.


Create a new style using the Styles Editor.


Edit an existing style using the Styles Editor.


Retrieve a list or table of authorities section definition from another document.


Specify the source of the styles in the styles list, and specify where the styles you create are saved to.


Select the source for styles you want to display in the Styles list.


Displays the styles found in the current document.


Displays the styles found in your default template file, as specified in File Settings.


Displays the styles found in the template file that is listed as your Additional Objects Template in File Settings.


Displays the styles for many Corel WordPerfect features such as footnotes, hypertext, and tables of contents. If you deselect this box, only the standard document styles (headings and initial style) and the styles you have created are displayed.


Specify where to save the styles you create.


Saves the styles you create to the current document.


Saves the styles you create to the default template file, as specified in File Settings.


Saves the styles you create to the template file that is listed as your Additional Objects Template in File Settings.


Select appearance attributes.


Darken the font face.


Select a font size. Sizes are in points, 72 per inch. The larger the number, the larger the font.


Select a color to use.


Select a font style (bold, italic, etc.).


Specify the format for the endnote number in text and in the endnote section of the document.


Customizes the format of the endnote. For example, you can change the spacing between endnotes and select a numbering method (for example, you can use characters instead of numbers).


Deletes the sound clip from the list and the document.


Displays the elapsed time as the sound clip is played.


Normal text sits on the baseline, superscript above it, and subscript below. Superscript and subscript use small font sizes.


Displays the name and path of the file to convert.


Adjust text size in proportion to the Normal font size. Normal size is specified in the Font size list.


Move the paragraph margin in from the current left and right margin.


A dot next to a counter in the list indicates that it is a system counter. You cannot edit system counters.


Change the value of a counter (for example, increase it from 2 to 4) and choose whether to display the counter in the document.


Add a QuickWord to the list. You must select the expanded form in the document before you can add the QuickWord to the list.


Create and manage QuickWords, words that can substitute for longer phrases. QuickWords can be inserted as formatted or unformatted text.


Save a list of styles or outline styles as a separate file and retrieve it into other documents to use the styles.


The name of the file you want to save styles to or retrieve them from.


Select whether to include only styles you have created, only styles for Corel WordPerfect features, or both.


Include both styles you have created and styles for Corel WordPerfect features.


Include only the styles you have created.


Include only styles for Corel WordPerfect features.


Specify the name of the file containing the definitions, then click OK to display the definition names.


Lists the names of the definitions contained in the file you specified.


Create a table of authorities full form reference the first time you mark an authority.


Specify the section name in which the authority will appear. An example of a section name is Cases.


Manually adjust the space between the two letters on either side of the insertion point.


Set the space you want to remove from or add to the current space between the two characters at each side of insertion point. To remove space, set a negative number.


Select the unit of measure (inches, centimeters, points, etc.) you want to use for adjusting kerning.


Center the text vertically on a page.


Center the text on this page and all subsequent pages in the document.


Insert text as you type it from the top margin down, without centering it vertically.


Specify whether you want to compare words, phrases, sentences, or paragraphs.


Specify which document compare markings you want to remove.


Select a date and time format, or create a new format.


An example of the current date and time format.


Select a date and time format.


Create a new date and time format, and add it to the list.


Keep text together on a page rather than let the text be divided across separate pages.


Keeps the first and last line of a paragraph from being separated from the rest of the paragraph by a page break.


Select a block (contiguous section) of text in your document, then select this option to keep that text from being divided on two pages.


In a paragraph, set the number of lines you want to keep together, counting from the insertion point forward. For example, click in a heading and specify 4 lines to keep the heading and at least four lines of the following text together.


Adjust the amount of space between lines of text. The line height is the distance between the top of one line of text and the top of the next line of text.


Saves the sound clip as a separate file, if the sound clip is stored in the document.


Enhances a document with digital (.WAV) and MIDI sound files.


Specify the shortened form of the authority.


Select a short form, then click OK to edit the full form of the authority.


Lists the short forms of the authorities for the document.


Displays a descriptive name for the sound clip. You can edit the name.


Doesn't store the sound file as part of the document. This helps keep the document size small.


Specify the filename of the sound clip you want to insert.


Stores the file as part of the document. This increases the file size of the document.


Add a sound clip to the document by specifying a filename. You can also change the descriptive name of the sound file.


Lists the section under which the authority will appear.


Specify the proportion of black in the color with a value between 0 and 255.


Specify the proportion of blue in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of cyan in the color with a value between 0 and 255.


Specify the proportion of magenta in the color with a value between 0 and 255.


Specify the proportion of yellow in the color with a value between 0 and 255.


Using the selected color model, you can change the value for each color.


Specify a color on the color wheel with a value between 0 and 360 (0=red, 120=green, 240=blue, 360=red).


Changes the selected color to the color found at the opposite end of the color wheel. For example, invert a blue color square and it will change to yellow.


Specify the amount of white and black in the color definition with a value between 0 (black) and 100 (white).


Displays the name of the current color palette. To name the palette, click Save As.


Number the lines in a document and print each line number at a specified place.


Specify the intensity of the hue in the color with a value between 0 (no color) and 100 (full color).


Select the numbering method (Roman or Arabic numerals, or letters), the number to start with, the first number to print, and the interval between numbers.


Click to select a rectangular block from the palette. You can then blend, copy, invert, or create a rainbow blend of the colors in the rectangle.


Select, create, or edit the colors used with fonts, graphics, lines, and highlighting.


List of available color palettes that you can use to create, edit, and select colors.


Type a descriptive name and filename for the color palette. The default extension is WPP.


Inserts the commands that let you take advantage of the special functions of your printer. For information about those commands, see your printer documentation.


Set the distance between the line number and the left edge of the page or the left margin.


Select the number of text lines you want indented at the right side of the drop cap.


Specify how much of the drop cap you want moved into the left margin. For example, specify 50% to place the drop cap half in the margin and half in the text.


Specify how many lines of text to move down (leave blank) at the right side of the drop cap, measured from the top of the drop cap. For example, if the drop cap is five lines high, you can move four lines down so the text is on the same line as the drop cap.


Specify how much of the drop cap should be in the left margin and how far down the text should be from the top of the drop cap.


Set the amount of white space between lines of text, measured as a multiple of the line height. For example, specify 1.5 to space lines one and a half times the usual line height.


Places two lines under the text. The lines are continuous between letters.


Click to change the document to fill the desired number of pages.


Insert specific kinds of tab codes, hyphenation codes, hard space codes, and end centering/alignment codes. Also, set the character used to separate thousands in numeric displays.


Inserts a hard tab code that aligns text on a decimal (.). This is commonly used to line up numeric figures, such as currency.


Specify whether to hyphenate the word at the insertion point, and specify what characters mark the hyphenation.


Insert hard space codes, end centering codes, and change the character used to mark thousands in numbers.


Insert the code you selected at the insertion point.


Create a new character by combining existing characters from the keyboard or from Corel Symbols (Ctrl+W).


Display the last overstrike in the document in the Overstrike Characters box so you can edit it.


Display the next overstrike in the document in the Overstrike Characters box so you can edit it.


Select a color. Or click the button, then click Palette to create new colors.


If the watermark contains text, change the shading. The higher the percentage, the darker the watermark text.


Adjusts the lightness of the watermark image or text. The higher the percentage the darker the watermark.


Font settings change the appearance of text. Your changes are displayed in the Preview box.


Copies formatting from one area of text to another. Headings that are formatted with QuickFormat are "linked" together so that you can update them automatically.


Keep page elements from printing on the current page only.


Put a continuous line underneath text.


Underline text with two continuous lines.


Slant the font face.


Use outlined rather than solid letters.


Put a shadow behind each letter.


Use small capitals for lowercase letters.


Use red. Often used for editing documents.


Use a horizontal line through text.


Hide selected text. To display or hide hidden text, click Hidden Text on the View menu.


Displays the current label file. The definitions listed in the Labels box above are contained in this file. Label files have a .LAB extension.


Tractor-fed labels are made on sheets with holes along the sides to guide the labels through the printer. Laser labels are usually sheets of paper that are fed through a laser printer.


Displays the width and height of the label sheet.


Specifies an exact label definition. The label definition formats your document so that you can print on label sheets or rolls.


Specifies a page size, paper location (bins, trays, and so on), printing orientation, and printing adjustments.


Displays all available label files and descriptions. WP_WP_xx.LAB is the default Corel WordPerfect label file (where xx represents the two-character language code).


Displays all the envelope definitions (paper size and printing orientation) that you can choose from. You can also create your own definition.


Displays the width and height of the envelope.


Removes a saved address or address with merge fields from the list of available addresses.


Specify the name and numbering format of the table of authorities section definition.


Specify the name for the table of authorities section definition.


Inserts a field in the mailing address for merging envelopes.


Select a return address or an address with fields.


Edit the address or type in a new one.


Type the information needed to send the envelope.


Edit the ZIP code for the bar code you added.


Defines the line that surrounds paragraphs, columns, pages, graphics, or drop caps.


Determines how page numbers appear in the table of authorities.


Defines the caption, position, size, border/fill, and settings used for a graphic image.


Specify how the text and numbering will look.


Create a new style and add it to the list of styles for the selected template location.


Change the selected graphics style. The change applies to all occurrences of the style in the current and future documents. To update existing documents, you must copy the style into the template of each document.


Defines the background shading, color, and pattern for a fill style that can be used for paragraphs, columns, pages, tables, and graphics.


Customize the page numbering style for the table of authorities section definition.


Defines the line color, pattern, thickness, and spacing, for lines used in borders, tables, and graphics lines.


Lists the Box styles that will appear on the Graphics pull-down menu.


When you select this option, underlining in the authorities you mark will appear in the table of authorities.


Groups page numbers instead of printing them individually. For example, page numbers would be 4-6 instead of 4, 5, 6.


Shows the currently selected style.


Click to use numbering, underlining, and dash selections for all new table of authorities sections.


Arrange data in alphabetical or numerical order.


Specify the location of the data to be sorted.


Specify the location to display the sorted data in.


Select a system or user-defined sorting rule.


Define a new sort definition.


Change an existing sort definition. If you want to change an existing definition but also keep the original definition, use Copy.


Deletes the selected sort definition.


Performs the selected sort.


Select Allow Undo to return sorted text to its original order after you have sorted it. Select Uppercase First to sort uppercase letters before lowercase letters.


Create, edit, or copy a sort definition.


Specify the name of the sort definition.


Select the record type you want to sort by.


Sorts by line. Each line ends with a hard return.


Create a graphics box with any available box style. You can define or change the box style.


Lists the available box styles.


When you select a box style, the window next to the list illustrates what that box looks like.


Shows how the box is placed in the document: at a specific location on the page, at a location within the paragraph, or as a character.


Shows what the default content is for the box: Empty, Image, Text, or  Equation. You can add any content type when you create and edit the box.


Shows the height of the box according to the selected box style.


Shows the width of the box according to the selected box style.


Shows where the box will be placed according to the selected box style. This position is in relation to the page or paragraph, or to the baseline for boxes placed as characters.


Sorts by paragraph. Each paragraph ends with two or more hard returns.


Sorts by merge record. Each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD code.


Sorts by table row. Each row of table cells is a record.


Sorts by table column or by parallel column. Each table row is a record. Each "cell" of a parallel column is treated as a record.


Defines keys, or rules, for the sort definition.


Add a caption to a graphics box to describe its contents.


Select the type of style you want to use or create.


Rotates the caption 180 degrees, which turns the letters upside down.


Lists the defined keys, or rules, in the sort definition. The keys are applied in numeric order (1, 2, 3, and so on).


Rotates the box caption 270 degrees, which makes the letters read vertically instead of horizontally.


Rotates the caption 90 degrees, which makes the letters read vertically instead of horizontally.


Click to begin defining the key.


Shifts the caption from the position you have currently selected.  A positive number moves the caption forward. A negative number moves the caption backward. For example, if the caption position is Left, 0.5" moves the caption one-half inch from the left margin.


Sort the key alphanumerically or numerically. An alphanumeric key sorts by letters, then digits. A numeric key sorts by numbers only, and sorts by the number value. In an alphanumeric sort, 837 is sorted before 93; in a numeric sort, 93 is sorted before 837.


Place the caption at the left, right, or center of the side it is on.


Graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fill come with a predefined style (look). You can customize a style for use one time, or you can create a style for use with other graphics.


Adjusts the width of a caption based on the caption length and the width or height of the box.


Display the caption inside or outside the box border.


Specify the numbering method and style for the caption. For example, you can number illustrations Figure 1, Figure 2, and so on.


Specify where the caption text is placed in relation to the graphics box.


Adjust the caption width to place the caption precisely around the box.


Select different numbering styles for captions.


The current box numbering style. For example, the Figure numbering style is Figure 1, Figure 2, an so on.


Saves the styles as a separate file. You can retrieve them into new documents. The styles are also stored with the document template.


Retrieves a style file or the styles from another document into the current document. When you do this, all styles in the style file or document are saved with the current document.


The current caption numbering style.


Places the insertion point in the caption so you can edit the text of the caption.


Specify a width measurement for the caption. This cannot be larger than the width or height of the box.


The caption runs parallel with the bottom of the box.


Specify a caption width using a percentage of the width or height of the box. For example, specify 50% to make the caption half as long as the box.


Shift the caption text from its current position. Specify a percentage of the width or height of the box. For example, specify 25% to move the caption one-fourth of the length of the box.


Choose the side of the box to place the caption on (left, right, top, or bottom).


Specifies the order of the sort. Ascending order sorts from first to last (A-Z or 1-9) and Descending order sorts from last to first (Z-A or 9-1).


Specify which part of the record to sort. For example, sort by field 1 or by field 8. To sort by the last field in the record, specify -1.


Specify which part of the record to sort. For example, sort by line 1 or line 4. To sort by the last line in the record, specify -1.


Specify which part of the record to sort. For example, sort by word 1 or word 9. To sort by the last word in the record, specify -1.


Adds a key after the last key.


Inserts a key below the key with the pointer next to it.


Deletes the key with the pointer next to it.


Type the selection statement with criteria for the records to extract. The operators you can use in the selection statement display on the status line at the bottom of the document window.


Selects records but does not sort them. They are listed in the order they appear in the file.


Creates a table or floating cell.


Select to create a table or floating cell.


Select to create a table. Tables are structured with rows and columns.


Select to create a floating cell. A floating cell is a code in the text of a document that acts like a table cell and can be linked to a table.


Specify the size of the table in columns and rows.


Specify the number of vertical columns for the table.


Specify the number of horizontal rows for the table.


Shows the current table style. You can click SpeedFormat to see the available table styles.


Select a predefined table style.


Converts tabular or parallel columns to a table.


Select which type of column you want converted to a table.


Creates a table from columns of data separated by tabs.


Creates a table from data in parallel columns.


Insert columns or rows in the current table.


Underline spaces between words.


Underline tab spaces.


Rotate a caption 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees.


The text in a text box runs parallel with the top of the page.


Rotates the text in a text box 180 degrees (upside down).


Rotates the text in a text box 270 degrees.


Rotates the text in a text box 90 degrees.


Select the contents type for the box. You can create an empty box, a box for text, an image, an equation, or for an image on disk or an OLE object. You then must place the contents in the box.


Select the box sides you want to change. The Separator option is available only for paragraph and column borders. It inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.


Select this option to use standard spacing between the border and the inside contents and between the border and the surrounding contents. Select Show Spacing to see the results.


Select a color from the palette. Select Use line style color if you want the line to be the color of the current line style.


Change the color, spacing, corners, and shadow of a border.


Illustrates how the border will look as you change the style.


Select the color for the shadow behind the border.


Specify the type, color, and width for the shadow underneath the border.


Specify the distance between the border and the inside contents. Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Select where the contents are placed in the box.


Specify the distance between the border and the surrounding contents.  Select Show spacing to preview the distance.


Specify a radius for rounded border corners. The higher the number the more rounded the corner.


Edit the contents of the box.


View the inside and outside spacing width in the Preview box above.


Deletes a part of the current table.


Specify whether to show the separator line in the Preview box above. This option is available only for paragraph and column borders.


Select the corner of the box where the drop shadow should appear.


Specify how thick the shadow behind the border should be.


Specify the filename of the image in this box.


Displays the number of columns and rows in the current table.


Place the contents at the left, right, or center of the box.


Displays the number of columns in the current table.


Displays the number of rows in the current table.


Adds another line (the same style as the current line) next to the current line.


Adjusts dash and space lengths for a line style.


Rotate the text in a text box 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees.


Removes the line that has an arrow pointing to it in the box above.


Place the contents at the top, center, or bottom of the box.


After you add another line, you can move the arrow to select the line you want to edit or delete.


Click to customize colors or select colors from another palette.


Select a predefined line pattern or create a customized line pattern by adjusting dash and space lengths.


Specify the width of the line.


Adds the measurements for another dash so you can make that dash different from the first dash. The two dash sizes will alternate in the line.


Displays the measurements for the dashes and the spaces between the dashes.


Removes a dash from the list. You need to have at least two dashes to use this option.


Specify the length of the dash.


Specify the amount of space between each dash.


Specify the columns across which you want to put the box. You must select a column position from the Horizontal pop-up list to put the box across columns.


Specify automatic font changes, display and print font mapping, and non-English alphabet code pages.


Specify a default font for a the current document only, or for all new documents created with the current printer.


Place the bottom of the box on the baseline.


Shows the size of the current table.


You can attach a box to a page, paragraph, or character. The position is then measured in relation to the page, paragraph, or the current line of text.


Adjusts the line height to match the height of the box. This ensures that lines of text do not overwrite the graphic.


Keeps the graphics box where you put it on the page. Text will flow around it as you edit the document, but the box will not move.


Centers the box so half is above the baseline and half below.


Aligns the box contents with the baseline. For example, if an image is in the box, the bottom of the image lines up with the baseline.


Select the page location from which you want to measure the box position.


Shows the number of columns in the current table.


Select an item (right margin, left margin, etc.), then set the horizontal distance between that item and the left side of the box.


Select an item (bottom margin, top of page, etc.), then set the vertical distance between that item and the top of the box.


Set the vertical distance you want between the box and the top of the paragraph.


Put the top of the box even with the top of the text.


Shows the number of rows in the current table.


You can attach a box to a page (the box stays where you put it on the page), paragraph (the box moves with the paragraph), or character (the box is positioned like a letter in the line of text).


Use measurements to size a graphics box.


Set the size of the box width and/or height. If you set only width or height, click Maintain proportions to keep the original proportions of the image.


Sizes the graphics box to the full page height, from the top to bottom margin.


Sizes the graphics box to the full page width, from the left to right margin. In a column, the box fills the width of a column.


Set the size of the box height, or keep the height proportional to the width.


Set a measurement for the box height.


Set a measurement for the box width.


Adjust the height of the box to keep the original proportions of the image.


Adjust the width of the box to keep the original proportions of the image.


Set the size of the box width, or keep the width proportional to the height.


Automatically calculates the number of steps for a given gradient type.


Select a gradient pattern.


Choose a foreground color, a background color, and a gradient pattern (linear, circular, or rectangular), then specify any gradient options below.


Specify the horizontal center of a circular or rectangular gradient, or a rotated linear gradient.


Specify the colors and pattern (or gradient type) for the fill style.


Select one of the predefined patterns.


Select a foreground color, a background color, and a pattern.


Rotates a linear or rectangular gradient counter-clockwise inside the border.


Specify how smoothly the foreground and background colors are blended. A higher number of steps produces more smoothly blended colors.


Specify the vertical center of a circular or rectangular gradient, or the top of a linear gradient.


Attach an image to a page (stays where you put it on the page until you move it), paragraph (moves with the paragraph), or character (moves with a line of text like any other character).


Choose or change the border for the graphics box.


Edit existing borders and create new borders and fills.


Add a caption to a graphic box, or edit the current caption.


Choose a background to fill in a graphics box.


Edit the existing background and create new backgrounds and borders.


Save the look of this paragraph as a style that you can apply to other paragraphs in the document.


Quickly change the look of the graphics box. For example, add borders, backgrounds, or captions, change how text wraps around the box, or position the box.


Select the next graphics box in your document to change its look using this dialog box.


Use measurements to place the graphics box precisely on the page.


Select the previous graphics box in your document to change its look using this dialog box.


Save the look of this graphics box as a style that you can apply to other graphics boxes.


Use measurements to size the graphics box precisely.


Select an available graphics box style and apply it to this graphics box. This list includes eleven predefined styles and any styles you have saved to the current template.


Use graphics editing tools to change the image in the graphics box.


Change how text is positioned around the graphics box or image.


Type a ZIP code to convert to a bar code. Click OK to insert the bar code in the document.


Choose how to position (wrap) text around the graphics box.


Text flows on both sides of the graphics box.


Opens the Address Book so you can add or delete entries there instead of creating a data file. You do not select entries to merge at this time.


Create a data file to use as a data source, or use the Address Book. The data source provides names, addresses, or other information for the merge.


Create a data file with the names, addresses, or other information to merge with a form file.


Create a data file and arrange the records in a table.


Create a form file to control the merged output. For example, create a letter, insert field codes, then merge it with an associated data source.


Perform the merge. You can specify what files you want to merge, the location of the merged output, select specific records from the data source, and choose other merge options.


Base the data or form file you are creating on the document in the active window.


Open a new document window for the data or form file you are creating.


Quickly change the look of the paragraph. For example, change the way it is indented and aligned, or add a border or background to it.


Text follows the contour of an image, which removes white space. Standard border lines are removed. If the box has rounded corners, text is contoured to the box. If the box has top and bottom lines, those lines stay intact.


Text flows on the side of the graphics box that has the most white space.


Text flows on the left side of the graphics box.


Specify how many columns or rows to insert in the table.


Inserts columns in the table.


Inserts rows in the table.


Specify where to insert the rows or columns.


Inserts rows or columns before the insertion point.


Inserts rows or columns after the insertion point.


Inserts columns without changing the widths of any existing table columns.


Text does not flow around the graphics box. Space on both sides of the box is left blank.


Text flows through the graphics box. This can print text over the image, as with a watermark.


Text flows on the right side of the graphics box.


Text lines up straight against the left and right edges of the box.


Choose how to place text in relation to the graphics box and the image within it.


Choose the sides of the graphics box around which text is wrapped.


Choose a border for the paragraph.


Indent the paragraph and insert bullets or numbering at the beginning of the first line.


Put a background (or fill) behind the paragraph.


Change the font.


Change the way the paragraph is indented.


Align text to the left, right, center, both sides, and both sides (including a short last line).


List the available paragraph styles in the current document. Select one to apply it to the current paragraph.


Use the default dither method for the printer you are using, and apply the method to all graphics.


Let Corel WordPerfect choose where the image is converted for final printing. Apply the dither source to all graphics.


Type a name for a field. For example, type last name, first name, street address, or city.


The fields that have been named are displayed in this list.


Type a field name and add it after the current selection.


Replace the currently selected field name with the name you type.


Delete the currently selected field name.


Moves the selected field down in the Field Name List.


Moves the selected field up in the Field Name List.


Applies formatting to tables and table components.


Formats the current table column.


Formats the current table row.


Formats the current table.


Aligns cell text horizontally.


Aligns cell data horizontally. Decimal Align lines up data according to decimal point placement.


Applies the current column's justification settings to a cell.


Align and rotate data within a cell.


Select how you want to vertically align cell data.


Select to rotate cell data. Data is rotated counterclockwise.


Type a field name, then add it before the currently selected field in the Field Name List.


Use the color specified in the current line style.


Shows how data will appear in the cell with the current alignment selections.


Fill in the fields for each record you want to create in the data file. Type in a field, then press Enter to move to the next field.


Moves the insertion point to the next field.


Moves the insertion point to the previous field.


Moves the insertion point to the first field in the next record.


Deletes all information in each field of the current record.


Specify the application you want to link to.


Locate a record by the information in a specific field. Place the insertion point in the field you want to search, then click Find and type what you are looking for.


Specify the filename to link to.


Specify which cell or range you want to change when working with a spreadsheet or database.


Specify a new name for the link.


Change existing field names. If you delete a field containing data, the data will be lost.


Display the first record in the data file.


Locks or ignores cell contents.


Display the previous record in the data file.


Display the next record in the data file.


Display the last record in the data file.


Makes it possible to edit fields containing functions. However, if you edit fields with functions, the functions will be lost.


Locks cell data. The insertion point cannot be placed in a locked cell, and no changes can be made to the cell.


Change how the buttons look and where they appear in the Corel WordPerfect window.


Edit a DCA or DisplayWrite Font.


Specifies that the cell data be ignored during calculations.


Specify a topic or filename to link to.


Change the number, typeface, point size, and pitch of a DCA or DisplayWrite font.


Draws diagonal lines in a cell. The line style depends on the currently selected line style. Diagonal lines cannot be drawn in some lines styles, such as double lines.


Change the file a DDE object is linked to, or change the name, application server, filename, or item for an existing link.


Specifies no diagonal lines to be drawn in the cell.


Press Ctrl+Enter to add a line to a field. Pressing Enter alone moves the insertion point to the next field or record.


Draws a line in the cell from the upper right corner to the lower left corner.


Draws a line in the cell from the upper left corner to the lower right corner.


Type a name for the toolbar, menu, or keyboard.


Draws two lines in a cell to create an X.


Aligns cell data horizontally for the current column or table.


Specify the number of digits to allow after a decimal point in a cell. Use this option when Justification is set to Decimal Align.


Specify where the decimal point will be placed in a cell. Use this option when Justification is set to Decimal Align.


Specify the width of white space on the right and left side inside the column cells.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the left side.


Specify the width of white space inside the column cells on the right side.


Specifies the width of the column cells.


Specify the column width.


Keeps the column width the same regardless of changes to adjacent column widths or column margin settings.


Specify one or more lines to be allowed in the cells of the row.


Allows only one line of data in each cell of the row.


Allows more than one line of data in each cell of the row.


Specifies the height of data allowed in each cell of the table.


Allows the height of the data to determine the height of the cells in the row.


Specify a fixed height for each cell in the row. The cell remains that height no matter how much data is added.


Specifies the width of white space on the top and bottom inside the row's cells.


Specify the width of white space inside the row's cells on the top.


Specify the width of white space inside the row's cells on the bottom.


Specifies that the current row appears at the top of each new page when the table spans a page break.


Allows the current row to span across a page break. You can continue the row on the next page instead of bumping the entire row to the next page.


Disables all cell locks in the current table.


Specify the horizontal position of the current table relative to side margins or the left edge of the page.


Specifies the number of columns and rows in the current table.


Specify the number of columns in the table.


Specify the number of rows in the table.


Specify whether to use a currency symbol, whether to align it, and what symbol is used.


Change the numeric format for the cell, column, or current table.


Change the numeric format for the current cell.


Change the numeric format for the current column.


Change the numeric format for the current table.


Apply the column numeric format to the current cell.


Choose a numeric format.


View the numeric format you have selected.


Edits the selected numeric format.


Apply the selected numeric format to all new tables as they are created.


Associate either a data file or an address book with the form file you are creating. When you associate a data source, the form file is able to reference that source for the rest of the merge.


This dialog appears when you have information in the active document window. Select Use File in Active Window if this is part of the merge file you are creating. If it is not, select New Document Window.


To create a data file, you must first name the fields (the smallest units) in the data file. For example, you might name the fields Last Name, First Name, Street Address, and so forth.


Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, memos, or other documents. Create a form file, and then merge it with a data source such as a data file, address book, or keyboard input.


No associated file exists. You can select a data file, address book, or form file to associate at this time, or you can create a data or form file to associate.


Select a data file to associate with the current form file. Or select a form file to associate with the current data file.


Create a data file and associate it to the current form file. Or create a form file and associate it to the current data file.


Opens the Address Book and lets you select an address book to associate with the current form file.


Insert merge codes in a form document or data file. Merge codes are used to control the output of the merge. For example, you can insert a KEYBOARD command in a form document to prompt you to enter text in the document, and you can insert a BEEP command to sound a beep when the merge encounters a KEYBOARD command.


Insert the selected merge code at the insertion point.


Click the merge code you want, then click Insert. If needed, you will be prompted to provide variables, expressions, parameters, or text.


Type text associated with the current code or provide additional merge code information. For example, type a message for a prompt, or specify a field name, merge expression, variable, or string.


Adds a row above the current row. The current row is where the insertion point is located in the table.


Adds a row below the current row. The current row is the row where the insertion point is located.


Adds a row to the end of the table no matter where the insertion point is located.


Adds a row to a merge data table so that you can add another record. Each row contains a record. Before you click Row > Insert, place the insertion point in the table where you want to add a row.


Use the Quick Data Entry dialog box to quickly enter records into the existing fields of the data file.


Copy the formula in the current cell to another cell or range of cells.


Displays the address of the current cell. The current cell's formula will be copied.


Specify where you want the formula copied.


Automatically calculate the formulas in the current table or in all tables and floating cells in the document. Update any charts associated with tables when the tables are calculated.


Select to automatically calculate the formulas in the current table or in all tables and floating cells in the document.


Specifies that no automatic calculation will be made to table and floating cell formulas. Associated charts will not be automatically updated.


When selected, Tables automatically calculates formulas in the current table or floating cell. This happens when you move the insertion point out of a cell or insert a formula using the Table Formula toolbar.


When selected, Tables automatically calculate formulas in all tables or floating cells in the document. This happens when you move the insertion point out of a cell or insert a formula using the Table Formula toolbar.


Select this option to update any charts associated with tables each time the tables are calculated. An Automatic Calculation Mode must be selected.


Calculates all formulas in the current table or floating cell.


Calculates all formulas in all tables and floating cells in the current document.


Insert a table function in the current cell.


Select the type of table functions you want listed in the list box.


Select the table function you want to insert.


Gives a short description of the selected table function.


Insert the selected table function in the current cell.


View the margin widths you have selected.


Mark cross-references in your document.


Generate a defined table of contents in your document.


Define the style, numbering format, and other options for the table of contents.


Mark text as a level 1 table of contents entry.


Mark text as a level 2 table of contents entry.


Mark text as a level 3 table of contents entry.


Mark text as a level 4 table of contents entry.


Mark text as a level 5 table of contents entry.


Mark the table of contents level you want.


Mark items in your document to be included in the table of contents.


View lines that you can drag to change the widths of margins, columns, headers, footers, and table columns.


View dotted lines in tables where lines are turned off. You can drag table guidelines to change the width of table columns.


View dotted lines that you can drag to change the width of document margins.


View dotted lines that you can drag to change column width.


View dotted lines that you can drag to change the distance between the body text and the header or footer.


Lists the address of the table component you are naming.


Type or select a list definition name.


Mark, define, and generate a list of items in your document.


Mark items to be included in the list.


Define the style, numbering format, and other options for the list.


Generate any defined lists in your document.


Specify the appearance of a generated index and whether to include concordance entries.


Specify a character map to use for the current document.


Shows the types of toolbars you can display in the document window.


The toolbar provides quick access to commonly used features. To change which toolbar displays or add or delete buttons from the current toolbar, right-click the bar [image] click Settings.


Deletes table columns, rows, cell contents, or formulas.


Specify the number of columns to delete.


Specify the number of rows to delete.


Deletes the contents of the current cell.


Deletes formulas, but leaves formula results.


Type or select a short form name.


If a full form for an authority has already been created, marks the selected authority with the current short form to include in the table of authorities.


Create a full form for and mark an authority the first time you mark the authority.


Edit an authority's full form.


Define the style, numbering format, and other options for the table of authorities.


Generate a marked and defined table of authorities in your document.


Mark authorities in your document to be included in the table of authorities.


Edit an authority's full form for a table of authorities.


Edit the section name.


Edit the short form name.


Splits the current cell into multiple columns or rows.


Splits the current cell into columns.


Specify a number of columns.


Splits the current cell into rows.


Specify a number of rows.


Type the name of the new field. For example, type City to create a column for the names of cities.


Adds a column to a merge data table so that you can add a field. Each column represents a field. Before you click Column > Insert, place the insertion point in the table where you want to add a column.


Adds a column before the current column (field). The current field is  the column where the insertion point is located.


Adds a column after the current column (field). The current field is the column where the insertion point is located.


Adds a column after the last column on the right no matter where the insertion point is located.


A list of commonly misspelled words and the correct words that will be used.


QuickCorrect automatically corrects common spelling and typing errors. You can add your own common typing errors (such as "teh" for "the") so they are fixed as you type.


Encloses the field data between characters. Information between these characters is protected during the conversion.


Save changes you have made to your conversion settings.


Gets the information you specified from the database.


Gets the specified record from the database.


Identifies unnecessary characters that can be stripped from the data file.


Use these settings as the default for all documents created with the current printer.


Use Document Default Font to specify a default font face, style, and size for the current document. To use the font settings for all new documents created for the current printer, select Use as printer default font. Your font selection is displayed in the preview box.


Cuts or copies specified table elements.


Select a table element to cut or copy.


Cuts or copies the current table selection.


Cuts or copies the selected row.


Cuts or copies the selected column.


Cuts or copies the selected cell.


Copies the contents of the selected cell to the clipboard.


Specify how many cells down to copy the selected cell.


Specify how many cells to the right to copy the selected cell.


Delete all or part of a table.


Deletes the entire table structure and contents.


Specify a table element to delete.


Deletes table contents, but leaves the table structure.


Add, delete, move, or resize items on the Application Bar.


Customize the number type you have selected.


Select the size for the text on the Application Bar.


Deletes the table structure, but leaves the table text.


Restore one of your last three deletions.


Converts the table to a merge data file with each row converting to a record and each cell converting to a field within a record.


Customize the way the date and time are written.


Select a date or time format.


View the date or time format you have selected.


Converts the table to a merge data file with the first row converting to field names and the subsequent rows converting to records. Choose this option if the first row contains headings.


Specify the password for the spreadsheet or database file.


Reverses or restores as many as the last 300 editing actions.


Shows which file you are linking to or importing.


Select which toolbar, Property Bar, or menu displays in the document window, or select the keystrokes you want to use.


Specify a data file to associate with the form file you are creating. Click Associate a Data File, then click the folder icon to select the file.


Click this option once you have specified the address book you want to associate with the form file you are creating. Then select an available book from the drop-down list that appears.


Choose No Association if you are creating a keyboard merge, or if you do not wish to associate a data file at this time.


Specify options for the merged file. Include a page break between documents, specify the number of copies, and choose what to do when a field in the data file is empty.


Check this option if you want the document produced for each record in the data file to be separated by a page break.


Specify how many copies you want for each merged record.


Remove or leave a line in the merged document when the corresponding field in the data file is empty.


Show merge codes, hide merge codes, or show them as markers during a keyboard merge.


Specify how you want the merged file or keyboard merge to appear.


Perform the merge now.


Reset all envelope settings, output options, and selected records selections.


Cancels changes made to the formula and turns off the Formula Edit mode.


Accepts the formula, inserts it in the current cell, and turns off the Formula Edit mode.


Click in the text box to turn on the Formula Edit mode. Type a formula.


Calculates the sum of the values in table cells above or to the left of the insertion point, or the sum of a selected range of cells.


Lists table functions you can insert in a formula.


Displays named table components you can insert in a formula.


Gives a brief description of ?? or ERR formula errors.


Calculates all the formulas in all the tables in the document.


Fills in incrementing patterns such as numbers, days, or months.


Copies the formula in the current cell to a cell you specify.


Turns row and column indicators on and off.


Specify the location of the files you want to merge and the location for the merged (output) file. You can also specify which records from the data source you want to merge, and you can select envelope and output options.


Specify the location of the form file. If you select File on Disk, specify the folder and filename.


Shows what options have been selected for the merge: selected records, envelopes, and output options.


Specify the location of the data source. If you select File on Disk, specify the folder and filename. If you select Address Book, specify the address book from the drop-down list.


Select the records you want to merge. You can select records from either a data file or an address book.


Select the location of the merged file. If you select File on Disk, specify a folder and filename. If you select E-mail, specify the field for the E-mail address and the subject line for the merged messages.


Create formulas to insert in table cells.


Select a border style for the left border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the right border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the top border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a border style for the bottom border of the current cell or selected cells.


Send the merged output to your active e-mail system.


Select a border style for the inside borders of two or more selected cells.


Select the field name from the drop-down list that contains the e-mail address. The list displays field names from the associated data source.


Type the subject line that you want to appear in each merged e-mail message.


Select a border style for the outside border of the current cell or selected cells.


Select a fill style for the current cell or selected cells.


Select a numeric format for the current cell or selected cells.


Displays the Properties for Table Format dialog box in which you can make formatting changes for a cell, column, row, or entire table.


Displays either the Insert Columns/Rows dialog box or the Delete dialog box in which you can make changes to table size and content.


Select whether to size table columns to accommodate text or to make all column widths equal.


Joins selected cells.


Splits the current cell or selected cells into multiple rows or columns.


Select a field name from the list and insert it into the form file you are creating.


Select an available field name. Displayed field names come from the associated data source.


Click Insert to add the selected field name at the insertion point.


Click Insert and Close to add the selected field name at the insertion point and close the dialog box.


Change the associated data source. Specify a data file, or select the address book you want.


Displays the filename of the associated data file.


Type a field name or number, even though no data source is currently associated with this form file. You can create the association to a data source now or later. However, the field names or numbers you type now must correspond to the fields in the data source you associate later.


Type information as requested by the prompt. If a character is requested, type a single character. If a longer response is requested, type the information, then press Enter or click OK. What you type replaces the associated variable for that merged document.


Type the requested information, then choose an option on the Merge toolbar: Continue, Skip Record, Quit, and Stop.


Cancel the specified envelopes.


Define new envelopes. You can specify a new envelope definition as well as other envelope settings.


Edit the current envelope definition and settings.


Cancel the current envelope definition and settings, edit existing ones, or define new ones.


The specified file is not being recognized as a data file. If the file contains data in a table, click Yes. If it is in text format, click No. Click OK to make the specified file into a data file.


Click Yes if the specified file contains data in a table. Click OK to change the file into a data table file.


Click No if the data file is not in a table, then click OK to turn the specified file into a data text file.


Change the equation font color.


Sets the equation font options to their default settings.


Change the equation font face.


Change the equation font style.


Change the equation font size.


Click a format to select it, then click OK to make that format active. You can also delete formats you have created.


Select an address format for addresses you insert into documents. You can select a format from the list or create your own.


Deletes an address format from the list. You can only delete formats you have created.


Create a custom address format. For example, place the street address on the same line as the person's name to create a list of addresses.


Select an available field to insert into the address format you are creating. These fields are the ones defined in the Address Book. They are the smallest units in an address.


Click Insert to place a selected field in the Format box at the insertion point.


Displays the arrangement of fields for the customized address. Each field is the smallest unit in an address. In the Format box, arrange the fields to get the address format you want.


Type a name for the custom address, then click OK. The new address format is added to the Format list so you can use it in the future.


Displays the Define Color Palette dialog box to design a custom color for the equation font.


Change equation font options.


Displays the Macro Codes dialog box to insert document codes in the current macro.


Displays the PerfectScript Command Inserter to insert programming commands, product commands, and system variables.


Displays the Macro Dialogs dialog box for creating custom dialog boxes.


Save the currently displayed macro as a macro or template macro, close the macro, or remove the Macro toolbar.


Pauses a macro you are recording or playing. (This button is dimmed unless a macro is being played or recorded.)


Plays the currently displayed macro. (This button is dimmed until the currently displayed macro is saved and compiled.)


Records macro commands to the current document. When you click this button, a new document opens and macro record mode is started. Recorded commands are inserted at the insertion point in the document.


Saves and compiles the currently displayed macro. Error messages are displayed if the macro cannot be compiled.


Stops a macro you are playing or recording.


This box lists the different graphics box counter types. Each type of box has a unique counter type. For example, to search only for text boxes, select the Text counter type.


Use the options to convert the file format of a Corel WPWin 5.2 macro file to WPWin 8 format.


Converts the file format of the Corel WordPerfect 5.2 macro to WordPerfect 8 format and overwrites the existing file.


Specify a filename to use to save the existing Corel WordPerfect 5.2 macro in WordPerfect 8 file format.


Use the options on the Macro toolbar to create, edit, play, save, and compile macros and to insert macro commands.


Specify the current template to record a template macro to or play a template macro from.


Find a word, phrase, or code and specify the replacement (if any) word, phrase, or code.


Inserts the selected code in the Find and Replace With text box and closes the Codes dialog box.


Displays merge codes in the Find Codes list.


Specify the default template to record a template macro to or play a template macro from.


Use the options to specify the location of the template macro you want to play or record.


Specify whether to use the current or default template as the default location to play template macros from or record template macros to.


If you are recording a template macro, this button starts template macro record mode to record commands to the specified template macro. If you are playing a template macro, this button plays the specified template macro. If you are editing a template macro, this button retrieves the specified template macro and activates the Template Macro toolbar. If you are saving a template macro, this button saves the template macro.


Deletes the specified template macro.


Specify the current or default template as the location of the template macros to play, record, edit, or save.


Lists the template macros contained in the template specified in Location.


Shows which template contains the macros listed below.


Use the options to record, play, edit, or save template macros.


Specify the name of the template macro to play, record, edit, or save.


Increases or decreases the display magnification of an equation so that the equation width fills the display window.


Displays the equation at half its printed size.


Increases or decreases the display magnification of an equation so that it fills the display window.


Displays the equation at one-and-a-half times its printed size.


Displays the equation at its printed size.


Specify a zoom percentage.


Displays the equation at three-fourths its printed size.


Displays the equation at twice its printed size.


Use the options to specify a display zoom setting.


Use the options to specify a display zoom setting.


Increases or decreases the display magnification of an equation so that the equation height fills the display window.


Shows what line style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one line style is selected. Default means the default line style is selected.


Shows what fill style is selected for the current cell or selected cells. Mixed means more than one fill style is selected. Default means the default fill style is selected.


Shows what border style is selected for the current table.


Shows what fill style is selected.


Shows what table line style is selected.


Save the changes you have made without exiting the dialog box. You can then select other options.


Select the type of numbers you want to use.


Shows the graphics box position from a margin or edge of page for a box attached to a paragraph or page.


Shows the graphics box position from the top of a paragraph if the box is attached to a paragraph or shows the position from the margins if the box is attached to a page.


A drop cap decorates the text at the beginning of a line or paragraph.


Define a color palette.


Choose and customize the borders and fill (shading) you use.


Edit the style that is currently used to create the text boxes that you insert.


Lists the name of the style that is currently being used to define the text boxes you create.


Choose another box style to change the format of the graphics box.


Maintains the image's original proportions. When you select this the image does not become distorted, but it might not fill the entire box.


Set the number of the graphics box you want to edit. The boxes in the document are ordered in the number they appear.


To move an outline level up or down, click where you want to change the level, click change level, then specify the level number of the level you want to move to.


Copies the template to the group you have selected in the Copy To Group list.


Indicates the group where the template is now found.


Select the type of date you want to insert in the format you are creating, then click Insert to place it at the insertion point.


The sample shows how the new format will look.


Select the Year, Month, Day, and Time codes you want to use and insert them into the Edit Date/Time box. You can type text as part of the new format.


Use the same page number style in the index as you are using in the document.


Insert the different available number types (page, chapter, volume,  etc.) into the page numbering style you are creating for your index.


Use an index page number style that is different from the document page numbers. You can type text for the new style in the edit box and use Insert to insert numbers into the style.


Create the page numbering style used for your index. Use the same style as in your document or select User-defined Page Number Format and create your own style.


Select Number with level styles, Numbers only, or Level styles only.


Edit a level style you have selected.


Select or type in a new number (or bullet) for the selected level.


Create a new level style.


Select one of the outlines available in this drop-down list, then use it as a basis for your new outline definition.


Select a new style for the selected level.


Insert the filename of the document you want to include.


Inserts a number type into the document at the insertion point. Corel WordPerfect inserts the number in its current format and updates it to keep it accurate.


Select the type of number you want (page, chapter, volume, secondary page, or total page), then click Insert.


Select the counter that has the numbering style you want to use for this graphics box, then click Select.


Start renumbering an outline at any level. This lets you turn Outline on and off throughout a document.


Lists the styles found in the template location selected below.


The template where the styles are found. To change the location, click Options > Setup.


Specify where you want to copy the style.


Copies the styles to the document you currently have open.


Copies the styles to the template listed as the default template file in File Settings.


Copies styles to the template file listed as the Additional Objects Template in File Settings.


You can copy styles to the current document, the default template, or the additional objects template. The default template and additional objects template are specified in File Settings.


Deletes the style and any codes that are part of the style.


Deletes the style, but leaves the codes that are part of the style to preserve the format created by the style.  For example, leaves any bolded items bolded.


Delete a style and choose whether to leave the codes that retain the formatting created by the style.


Create a bulleted list. Browser settings specify the actual bullet size and shape. The Web Editor can only approximate how the bulleted list will appear.


Create a numbered list. Browser settings specify the actual number type used (Roman, Arabic, etc.). The Web Editor can only approximate how the list will appear.


Create a definition list.


When the style you copy has the same name as another, you must rename the new style.


Type a new name for the style. Type a name that doesn't duplicate the name of an existing style.


Add the codes and text you want in the style. You can choose features from the Styles Editor menu, press keystrokes, and type text.


This message appears each time you open the Web Editor unless you click Disable to turn off this message.


Click the check box to skip this message the next time you open the Web Editor.


Specify line thickness.


Select a line thickness.


Use the thickness of the current line style.


Specify line alignment. Full extends line from left margin to right margin.


Specify line length and alignment.


Specify line length.


Specify horizontal line length, alignment, and thickness.


Specify a QuickWord for the selected text.


Finds and replaces words based on the root form of the word. For example, you can search for the word forms of "go" to find "go", "goes", "going", "gone", and "went".


Close the dialog box.


Shows the default and supplemental folders specified by File Settings.


Log on to the specified SQL server.


Specify the database password.


Specify the database server.


Specify the userid for the database.


Specify the dictionary file to use.


Specify the database file.


Type a unique name for the style you are creating.


Opens the Address Book so you can select a name. The information about that person is inserted into the document you are creating.


You can use each information field to include a unique type of information in the document you are creating.


Choose the person whose personal information is inserted into the document.


Choose a recipient. The recipient's personal information is then inserted into the recipient fields of the document.


Add important information such as your name and address into a personal information set. Corel WordPerfect then puts that information in new documents for you.


Select a list style to use in your document. Browser settings specify the actual bullet size and style, and number type (Roman, Arabic, etc.). The Web Editor only approximates how the list will look.


Click the Active hyperlink palette button to select a color for hyperlinks while the destination is being loaded. Not all browsers support Active link color.


Click the Background color palette button to select a background color for your web document.


Specify the filename of the image to display as the background.


Click Default to restore system colors.


Click the Regular text palette button to select a body text color.


Click the Visited link palette to change the color of links that have been followed. Browser settings determine how long the visited color persists after the destination has been displayed.


Select a background color or specify a wallpaper image.


Click the Hypertext link palette button to select a color for hypertext links that have not been followed (visited).


Click Custom title and type the title you want the browser to display when viewing the document. If you do not specify a title, the text of the first heading is used.


Click First heading to use the first occurrence of Heading 1 as the title. If there is no Heading 1, the first occurrence of Heading 2 is used, and so forth.


Type the original path (Base URL) and literal HTML tags (Meta info). Browsers use Base URLs to locate images, Java applets, or sound clips inserted in the document with a relative path. This allows you move the HTML document without moving the folders containing the associated files. Use Meta info to specify heading information that is not associated with a particular head element or not directly supported by HTML 2.0 or 3.2.


Drag a field to a different place in the list. Drag it out of the list to remove it.


To scroll text across the screen, click the arrows or drag the scroll box on the scroll bar.


Move forward one page in the document.


Move back one page in the document.


To move text up and down in your document, click the arrows or drag the scroll box on the scroll bar.


Select a character map that reduces the document size when you type in non-Roman alphabets.


Reports the number of items that were inserted, deleted, or moved from the original document.


Reports character, word, line, sentence, paragraph, and page count information about the current document.


Specify the folder that contains hyphenation files.


Displays the OLE object as the currently selected icon.


Displays an OLE object using the default icon from the object's program.


Specify the file that contains the icon you want to use.


Specify the icon you want to represent OLE objects in documents.


Type the name you want to display beneath the icon.


Define the style, numbering format, and other options for the index.


Displays the type of the selected file.


Shows the icon associated with the selected file type.


Shows the types of objects available on your system.


Describes how the object will be inserted into your document.


Type new heading text or select an existing entry. You can also select text in the document, then click the Heading text box.


Type new subheading text or select an existing entry. You can also select text in the document, then click the Subheading text box.


Generate a marked and defined index in your document.


Mark text to be included in the index.


Define, mark, and generate an index.


Hide all document window elements (Menu Bar, Application Bar, scroll bars, etc.) and type in a blank document window.


Disables this dialog box for all subsequent sessions of Corel WordPerfect.


Displays the word you specified in the Find text box. This word may be a different form of the word you want to find.


Displays author, color, and creation date information about a comment.


Lists the suggested word forms.


Displays the suggested replacement for the word that was found. Click another word in the Word forms text box to change it.


The date you created the document.


The author of the comment.


Replace all occurrences of the selected word with the word form you specify.


Displays the author's initials.


Skip the selected word.


The latest date you made changes to the document summary.


Displays the author's annotation color.


Displays the day and time the comment was created.


The name of the person who wrote the document.


The date you last edited the document.


A brief summary of the contents of the current document. You can type a subject or use Options to extract any subject following the RE: heading in your document.


The person who typed the document.


A brief phrase to help you classify the document, such as Article, Report, etc.


Browsers use Base URLs to locate images, Java applets, or sound clips inserted in the document with a relative path. For example, you might specify the base URL as http://myserver/mydocument for graphics files located in http://myserver/mydocument/graphics. This allows you move the HTML document itself without moving the folders containing the associated files.


Type Meta tags to specify heading information that is not associated with a particular head element. The Meta tag is supported by Netscape Navigator, but is not supported by all browsers.


Specify what portions of a document to print.


Specify a document saved on disk that you want to print. Include the filename and full path.


Specify a page or label range to print.


Specify secondary pages to print.


Specify chapters to print.


Specify volumes to print.


Prints the specified portions of a document.


Merge a range of records by specifying the first and last record.


Delete the backup file and run Corel WordPerfect.


Open the backup file in Corel WordPerfect.


Rename the backup document then open Corel WordPerfect.


You can open the backup document and continue working on it, rename it so you can work on it later, or delete the backup document.


Specify the folder and filename for the new web document. The default filename uses an .HTM extension.


Images and sound clips are saved in a folder you specify. In most cases, you should specify a path on your local machine similar to the one where the graphics will be located on the server. For example, if the HTML document will be located at http://myserver/myweb, and the graphics will be located in http://myserver/myweb/graphics, specify a local path such as c:\myweb\graphics and the web server path as graphics. You can specify a base URL in HTML Properties if you must move the HTML document to a new location on the server and you do not wish to move the associated folders.


To display other summary items, click the arrows or drag the scroll box on scroll bar.


When justification is full, specify the maximum percent of optimal that the distance between words can be reduced (compressed) and increased (expanded).


Displays the location and name of the current data file. You are selecting records from this file.


Lets you specify a range of record numbers, or lets you specify numeric values in order to select the records you want to merge.


Lets you mark each record that you want to merge.


Deletes all the conditions you have specified.


Identify the name or number of the fields where you want to specify conditions. If you specify more than one field, records on that horizontal line must meet each condition in each field.


Show the selected symbols in the document window.


Specify a single value, list, or range. You can also exclude values and use wildcard characters. If you specify more than one condition vertically, records that meet any of the conditions will be used.


Specify conditions (math values) or mark the records you want to merge.


Type a wildcard character when you want to indicate multiple character values. For example, "?" is a placeholder for one character of any value.


See more examples of conditions you can specify.


Display a range of records by specifying the first and last record of that range. Click Update Record List to make the Record List reflect your choices.


Specify the first field that you want displayed in the Record List. For example, do you want entries listed by last name, first name, or city? Click Update Record List to make the Record List reflect your display choices.


Click the data entries you want to merge.


If you want, specify a selected number of entries to display in the Record List. Specify which field you want to list by, click Update Record List, then click the entries you want.


Click this option when you have specified a range of records that you want to display, or when you have changed the field you want the Record List to sort by.


Shows examples of values you can type. The math values you type determine which records to include.


Specify the first record number of the range.


Specify the last record number of the range.


Places a mark by each record in the list so that it will merge.


Unmarks all records in the list so it will not merge.


Click where you want to insert a hyphen, then click Insert Hyphen.


Include all records which match the specified field value. For example, type "Smith" in a Last Name field to include only records with the last name of Smith.


Include all records which match one of the specified field values. For example, type "Utah;Hawaii" in a State field to include only records from Utah or Hawaii.


Include all records which fall within the range of specified field values. For example, type "Ohio-Tennessee" in a State field to include all entries which fall alphabetically between and including Ohio and Tennessee.


Include all records except the ones specified. For example, type "!Alaska;Hawaii" to include all states except Alaska and Hawaii.


Type "*" as a placeholder in a text string when you want to represent  zero or more characters.


Type "?" as a placeholder in any text string when you want that character to represent any single character.


Use Upgrade Help to learn about new Corel WordPerfect features and make a transition from a previous word processor.


Deletes the currently selected style. You cannot delete system styles.


Renames the currently selected style. You cannot rename a system style.


Retrieves a style from another file.


Saves the currently selected style to a file.


Saves the displayed address to the list of available addresses. You can also save addresses containing merge address fields.


Scroll to see additional fields.


Contains headings for pull-down menu items. To access a menu option without the mouse, press Alt and the underlined letter. To select a different menu layout, right-click the menu bar and select the menu. To create a custom menu, right-click the menu bar and click Settings.


Change the character that marks redlined text and specify where it appears.


Returns the document window to its previous size.


Click an option to specify where redline markings appear. Printer dependent uses settings specified by the printer.


Display the most recently edited or played macros on the Tools>Macro menu.


Specify a document title or use the first heading in your web document as the title.


Specify text, link, and background colors. Specify a wallpaper image (also called a watermark).


Displays the title of the dialog box. You can drag the title bar to move the dialog.


Use the Scroll Bar to slide the box to move through the text.


Start a new document based on a web template. You can also view, create, edit, or delete a web template.


Save a copy of the current document in HTML format with an .HTM extension.


Specify the template location.


Change the structure of columns, margins, tables, headers, and footers by dragging a guideline where you want it to be.


Displays the style selected for the definition.


Type the text and apply features in this document window.


Delete Box deletes the graphics box. Edit Caption lets you create or edit a caption. Group lets you join multiple boxes selected with Ctrl. Use Separate to ungroup grouped boxes. Order lets you arrange multiple boxes within a stack. Image Tools lets you alter the image in the graphics box.  Use other options to change the caption, content, position on the page, size, border or fill (shading), to change how text flows (wraps) around the image, or to change to a different box style.


Type text in table cells to organize information.


Click to display the number of changes made in the current document when compared with an earlier version.


Click the icon to display the filename of the subdocument.


Displays the application name and filename of the document.


Slide the bar up and down to size the Reveal Codes window.


Click the sound icon to play the sound file included in this document.


Drag the triangles to change the tabs. Drag the margin markers to adjust the margins.


The Property Bar provides quick access to commonly used features. To change which items display, right-click the bar [image] click Edit.


Displays information about the documents open in Corel WordPerfect. To change the items that appear on the Application Bar, right-click the bar [image] click Settings.


Click to move the insertion point to the top of the previous page.


Click to move the insertion point to the top of the next page.


Displays two pages at the same time.  To view one page, click View, Page.


After you have selected text, you can move or change it. For example, you can make it bold, delete it, or mark it for an index.


Specify font settings to automatically substitute when you change font attributes, sizes, etc. in a document.


Current font settings. To display size and style settings, click Map individual styles.


Name of the current printer font.


Select a font face to change to.


Select a style to change to.


Select a size to change to.


Select a size to change.


Name of the current printer.


A comment icon represents comment text when you view a document in Page or Two Page mode. You can click the icon to see comment text, double-click to edit the comment, or right-click to use other options.


Use this QuickMenu to select a sentence, paragraph, page, or document, change margins, create an outline, or insert a comment, sound clip, or subdocument. Click the Property Bar to change the paragraph format.


Displays the comment text represented by the comment icon.


Make table format, numeric format, and line/fill changes to affect all selected cells.


Decrease margins to increase the text area on the page. To change margins, drag the dotted gray margin guidelines or use the Margins dialog box.


Displays the codes that you inserted as you used Corel WordPerfect features. The codes determine how the document will look when you print it.


Shows the progress.


Using a modem or network connection to the Internet, you can view Technical Support documents, demos, product information, and tips on the Corel Web site.


Let Corel WordPerfect configure your Internet connection to access the Corel Web site using a modem or network connection and Netscape Navigator or your registered browser.


Open Netscape Navigator or your registered browser and jump to the Corel Web site.


Select a border.  The currently selected border is displayed in the preview box.


Select a background.  The currently selected background is displayed in the Preview box.


Select a background color for the fill you have chosen.  The background color is then displayed in the preview box.


Select a border color.  The border is then displayed in that color in the preview box.


Check this box to give the border rounded corners.  When you wrap text around a border with rounded corners, text is contoured to the box border and not to the image in the box.


The name of the currently selected border.


Removes the border.


Displays the selected border as it will appear in the document.


Determines how rounded the corners are for a border with rounded corners.  The higher the number you set, the rounder the curve.


Change to another folder where fancy borders are stored. The fancy borders provided with Corel WordPerfect are stored in the default graphics folder as specified in File Settings.


Displays the currently selected background as it will appear in the document.


Select a color for the foreground you have chosen.


Select a gradient pattern for the background you have chosen.


Rotate the gradient pattern you have selected, or offset it horizontally or vertically.  The preview displays how the gradient will appear in the document.


Offset the gradient design horizontally.  The Preview displays how the design will appear in the document.


Set the space between the image and the edge of the box.


Set the space between the edge of the box and the text in the document.


Choose the type of line used in the box border.


Choose a pattern for the background.


Rotation the gradient pattern in the background.  The preview displays the current pattern.


Choose a color for the box shadow.


Set the shadow width and color.


Select a shadow and place it around the box.


Set the width of the shadow you have placed around the box.


Offset the gradient design vertically.  The preview displays how the design will appear in the document.


Customize a border or background.


Turn on or off the color display of the changes that have been made in the document.


Select the next annotation.


Select the previous annotation.


Insert the currently-selected annotation into the text of the document.


Inserts all annotations into the document text.


Deletes the currently selected annotation.


Deletes all annotations from the document text.


Save any changes you have made.  On a network, returns you to WorkFlow so you can continue routing the document.


Save a copy of the document to your own computer.  You can then keep saving your own copy of your work as you continue editing the document.


Blink text is displayed as shadow text in the Web Editor. The text blinks when the document is converted to HTML and viewed in Netscape Navigator. Not all browsers support blinking text.


Lists the names of people reviewing the document and the color being used to mark their comments.


Choose the color used to mark your changes.


Lets you examine the changes that others have made to a document.  Each person's changes are marked in a different color.  You can move from change to change and accept or reject each one, or you can accept or reject all changes.


Insert a blank page when necessary to make sure the current page always has an even page number.


Insert a blank page when necessary to make sure the current page always has an odd page number.


Shows how the text looks using the current settings.


Force a page to always have an odd or even number, or start a new page at the insertion point.


Start a new page at the insertion point.


Number the page sequentially in the document.


List the styles associated with the default template.


The total number of pages in the document.


Font options change the appearance of text. Sample text is displayed in the Preview box using the current settings. Blinking text is displayed with the shadow attribute until the document is published to HTML and viewed in a browser that supports blinking text such as Netscape Navigator.


The name of the group.


Type the name you want to use for this group.


Give a group a new name.


Type the name you want to use for this look.  The look is saved as a style that you can apply to other text in the document.


Applies the current selections without closing the dialog box.


If you wrote the document, lets you see the document with all the changes that others have made and accept or reject the changes.


If someone has asked you to edit the document, lets you choose a color to mark your changes and then marks the changes you make.


Click Reviewer or Author to use the Document Review toolbar.


Select a highlight color.


Specify a highlight shading percentage.


Select a highlight color and specify a shading percentage.


Displays a menu with options for moving, sizing, and closing the application window. Double-clicking the icon closes the application.


Use the Table Tools palette to quickly access the features used most frequently for editing tables. You can drag the palette so it does not cover your table and can you leave it displayed while editing.


Creates an envelope for each merged record. Lets you specify an envelope size, return address, and fields for the mailing addresses.


Lets you specify how many fields you want to create in the data file. When you do not name fields, the fields are numbered for you.


Type the new name for the object you are creating.


The name of the template the object is being copied to.


The object that is being copied and the template it is being copied from.


The object that is being copied.


The template where the object is found.


The new name for the object and the template it is being copied to.


Copy and rename an object.


No printer has been selected.


Specify font settings for displaying a document. The fonts are different than the fonts used for printing.


Select font settings to change to. Automatic selection restores default settings.


Displays your serial number and PIN, the version number of Corel WordPerfect, and information about the memory in your computer.


Specify how many pages you want to spell check.


Enter the value you want to find.


Select the direction of the search.


Find the next occurrence of the item.


Find the previous occurrence of the item.


A subdocument cannot be found to generate in the master document. Correct the filename and click OK, or click Skip.


The subdocument named cannot be found. Correct the filename or specify another document to generate.


The name of the currently selected fill or background.


Displays the current fill as it will appear in the document.


Select a fill foreground color.


Click the template you want to use as a base for your web document, then click Select.


Type the text you want displayed when graphics are turned off in the browser, select a low-resolution graphic for faster display, and specify how you want the graphics published to the web server. You can also use the graphic as an image map, a hyperlink, or as a button to submit a web form to the server.


Type the text you want displayed when graphics are turned off in the browser.


Specify the script you want to run to create a server-side map image.


Specify a client-side image map to create multiple hypertext links on one graphic. For example, you might use a graphic as a toolbar to jump someone to different areas on your site. You must create the image map itself in an application such as Corel Presentations or Corel Web.Designer.


Type custom HTML properties not directly supported in Internet Publisher.


Use Corel WordPerfect 5.1 line height settings.


Shows the name of the file you are assigning the password to.


Type the password.


Set spacing around the box border, set the drop shadow color and width, and select a gradient.  Your selections are displayed in the preview window.


Reduces the document window to an icon.


Enlarges the document window to fill the entire document area.


Closes Corel WordPerfect.


Displays the name of the current document.  If "unmodified" is displayed, the file hasn't been changed and doesn't need to be saved.  You can drag the title bar to move the window.


Drag the border to enlarge or reduce the document window.


Closes the document window.


Reset the page or chapter number value.  For example, change 3 to 8.


Select the foreground and background color for the selected fill style.


Restore [image] returns the window to its previous size. Minimize [image] reduces the window to an icon. Maximize [image] enlarges the window to the fullest size. Close [image] closes the document window and if the document hasn't been saved, prompts you to save the document.


Close the template and save your changes.


Create or edit a brief description that helps you identify the template.


Copy menus, macros, toolbars, styles, and keyboards to the template.  You can copy these objects from other templates or other locations.


Create the prompts that ask you for information as you are using the template.


Insert a file into the template.  You can then use the file as a basis for the new template you are creating.


Click to display a palette of table tools that are used most frequently to edit tables.


Set the current row as a header row, or allow the current row to continue to another page.


Shows how the index will look when you generate it with the current settings.


Shows how the list will display with the position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of contents will display with the number of levels and position setting you have selected.


Shows how the table of authorities will display with the position setting you have selected.


Select Is map for server-side image maps or Use map for client-side maps. Select both if the image can be processed as either.


Saves the entire file rather than only the selected text or graphic.


Specify whether to save the entire document or only the selected text or graphic.


Identifies the name of the document that has text or a graphic selected.


Saves the currently selected text or graphic, rather than the entire document.


This dialog displays when the file you are saving contains selected text or graphics. You can specify whether to save the entire file or only the selected text or graphic.


Close the Caption editor and insert the edited caption.


Check this box so that the Initial Codes style will be copied to the standard template and used with all new documents.


Shrink or expand a document to make it fit a certain number of pages.


Change the spacing around a border, adjust the gradient pattern in a fill, the corner radius, and the color and width of a drop shadow.


Check this box to apply the border to the current paragraph, column, or page.  Otherwise, the border is applied to all subsequent paragraphs, columns, or pages.


Determine how to format long footnotes.


Start numbering subsequent footnotes with a new number.


Start numbering subsequent endnotes with a new number.


Places the endnotes at the insertion point and restarts the numbering of subsequent endnotes.


Specify which fonts are available when you convert to or from a Corel WordPerfect 4.2 document.


Specify a default left page margin.


Specify a default right page margin.


Specify a default top page margin.


Specify a default bottom page margin.


Underlines spaces between words for underlined text.


Underlines the spaces between tabs when text is underlined.


Specify a default page width for documents you convert to Corel WordPerfect.


Specify the default page height for converted documents.


Rename the file when you open a document. Uses the descriptive name from the document summary as the new filename.


Use the same name for filename and the Document Summary descriptive name. Inserts the filename as the descriptive name when the document is saved.


Inserts today's date.


Select the date you want to insert.


Lists the common symbols in the selected equation palette.


Lists the available equation palettes.


Lets you add the keyword or string for the selected symbol.


Lets you add the symbol or character for the selected symbol. You can also double-click a symbol to add the symbol to your equation.


Select the graphics box style you want to apply to the current box.


Specify the amount of spacing between the border and the contents inside or outside of the box.


Customize the appearance, length, and position of a graphics line.


Click OK to close the message box.


Edit your serial number and/or PIN (personal identification number).


Specify your serial number and/or PIN (personal identification number).


Specify your serial number.


Specify your PIN (personal identification number).


Change how dots in an image are patterned and how small or large the dots are when the image is printed.


Change how pixels in an image are blended to produce the right mix of colors in the image.


Specify whether Corel WordPerfect or the selected printer dithers colors for printed images.


Use the default angle for the printer you are using, and apply it to all graphics.


Use the default lines per inch for the printer you are using, and apply this setting to all graphics.


Lists macro codes for date and time. Select a code, then click Insert to put the code into your document.


Lists macro codes for creating merges. Select a code, then click Insert to put the code into your macro.


Lists macro codes for other features such as page or chapter numbers. Select a code, then click Insert to put the code into your macro.


Lists macro codes which you can search for. Select a code, then click Insert to put the code into your macro.


Click to put a selected macro code into your macro.


Lists macro codes for Search, Merge, Date, and Other.


Shows what Reveal Codes will look like in the document window.


Use the default system colors for Reveal Codes.


Type your name. This name is saved in Environment Settings. It identifies you in the Review Document feature. If you are on a network, your user name and initials must be the same as those you use on the network.


Type your initials.  These initials are saved in Environment Settings. They are used to identify you as you use the Document Review feature. If you are on a network, your initials must be the same as those you use on the network.


Type your name and initials.  They are saved in Environment Settings. They identify you when you use the Document Review feature. If you are on a network, your name and initials must be the same as those you use on the network.


Changes the border of the current table to the default color.


Changes the lines of the current table to the default color.


Changes the lines of the current cell or selected cells to the default color.


For more information, click the Help button on any Writing Tools dialog box.


Lets you protect the current file with a password.


Specify the darkness of text color.


Type the password you want to assign to the current document. You will be asked to type it a second time to verify accuracy.


Select the type of password protection you want.


Specify how you want the links updated: whenever the information changes, or only when you choose to update the information.


Updates the number of total pages in your document.


Inserts the selected number format into your custom format.


Inserts the current page number from the document. Select a number style and click Insert.


Select a number type. Page, Chapter, and Volume insert a number for the current page, chapter, or volume. Secondary Page inserts a number for a second set of page numbers (for example, "Current page 6; previous page 5"). Total Pages inserts the number of total pages in the document (as in "page 5 of 17").


Displays the type of number that will be inserted. To change to a different number type, click Value/Adjust.


Shows the number value that will be inserted. To start with a value other than the current number, click Value/Adjust.


Enter the date you want to use for this item or use the Calendar to select a date.


Provides varied information about the current document.  Type or edit the information for each option.  Press Enter each time you want to create a new line of information.


The date you last revised the document. Corel WordPerfect inserts this date. You can also type a date or select one from the Calendar.


Retains only the original Windows metafile (.wmf) format and attributes. Use this if you will not use the document with Corel WordPerfect for DOS or other platforms. The resulting Windows metafile  image will not display if the document is edited using Corel WordPerfect on non- Windows platforms.


Converts the graphic to Corel WordPerfect graphics (.wpg) format. You can view and edit the graphic if you open the document in Corel WordPerfect for DOS or other platforms. If you must convert the document to a non-WordPerfect format, check to see that .wpg graphics are supported by the new application.


Creates one graphic file that contains both Corel WordPerfect graphic (.wpg) and Windows metafile (.wmf) formats. You can then edit the document in Corel WordPerfect for DOS or other non-Windows platforms, or convert the document to another non-WordPerfect format. The resulting graphic image uses more disk space than the .wmf-only or .wpg-only formats.


Specify the proportion of red in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Specify the proportion of green in the color with a value between 0 and 255. All colors at 0 make black, and all colors at 255 make white.


Moves the insertion point to the next edit box.


Specify a code page that correspondents to non-Roman alphabet fonts.


Change the fonts that are automatically substituted when you change font attributes, size, and character maps.


Compare the current document with another version to see what changes have been made.


Type the location of your document when it is published to HTML in Base URL. Type other HTML head tags in Meta info.


The current online service. If empty, click Configure.


Click to restore WordPerfect on your desktop.


Displays the scroll bar if the toolbar extends beyond the screen.


Determines how many rows of buttons displays at the top of the document window.


Specifies the text color used to represent a hypertext link.


The red marks under text indicate misspelled words. Click a suggestion if it is the correct word. If the word is spelled correctly, click Add to add it to the supplemental dictionary or click Skip in Document so the word won't be flagged again in this document. To turn off the red marks, click Tools > Proofread > Off.


Define a counter with more than one numbering level.


Name the levels in your counter definition. They are listed in order of how the numbers will appear.


Select a numbering method for each level of the counter you define.


Click Yes to perform the action and No to cancel.


Replace the word that was found with the word form in the Replace with text box.


Displays the root word Find is searching for.


Specify a display font. To change style and size, select Map individual styles, then specify changes.


Restore default settings.


Specify different font settings to display a document than are used to print it. A sample of the current settings is displayed in the preview box.


To change the current printer font, select a font from the Face drop-down list.


To change the current printer font, select a font from the Face drop-down list. To change the font style or size, click Map individual styles, then specify changes.


To change the style and size settings of the current printer font, select Map individual styles, then specify changes.


Select a size to change.


Select a style to change.


Select a display font face.


Select a display font style.


Select a display font size.


Name of the current display font.


Change the default replacement fonts when a font used in the document is not available on the current printer.


Name of the current font.


Name of the current Code Page.


Replacement font size used when the current document font is not available on the current printer.


Select a code page to print with a non-English alphabet font.


Name of the current font.


Replacement font name.


Select Box lets you move and size the box. Delete Box deletes the text box. Create Caption lets you create or edit a caption. Group lets you join multiple boxes selected with Ctrl so they can be moved and sized together. Use Separate to ungroup grouped boxes. Order lets you arrange multiple boxes within a stack. Use the other options to alter the caption, content, position on the page, size, border or fill (shading), to change how text flows (wraps) around the box, or to change to a different box style.


Edit Equation lets you edit the equation in the Equation Editor. Edit Box displays a palette of editing tools. Edit Caption lets you create or edit a caption. Use the other options to alter the caption, content, position on the page, size, border or fill (shading), to change how text flows (wraps) around the box, or to change to a different box style.


Edit Box displays a palette of editing tools. Delete Box deletes the box. Create Caption lets you create or edit a caption. Use the other options to alter the caption, content, position on the page, size, border or fill (shading), to change how text flows (wraps) around the box, or to change to a different box style.


Lets you cut, copy, or delete the line and display a dialog box of advanced line options.


Lets you cut, copy or delete the line and display a dialog box of advanced line options.


Lets you place a character box in a precise vertical position on the line. This is useful in aligning the figures in an equation. Set a number that represents the percentage of the box that you want to move above the baseline. For example, 0.50 centers the box, while 0.60 puts 60 percent of the box above the baseline.


Shows you where the graphics box or its contents will be placed in relation to the baseline for that line of text.


Turns on and off the shadow cursor, which moves through the text and shows where the insertion point will go when you click the mouse.


Display the [image] in the far left margin. This icon appears every time a tab setting is changed.


Specify display font settings.


Records a sound clip using Microsoft Sound Recorder.


Click this hyperlink to jump from this place in the document to another place within this document, to another document, or to a web document.


Retain all formatting codes in the expanded QuickWord.


Remove formatting codes such as font attributes, columns, boxes, etc. in the expanded QuickWord. Tabs, hard returns, and tables are retained.


Enlarges the program window to fill the entire screen.


Move the insertion point directly to the QuickMark each time you open this file.


Reduces the program window to an icon on the task bar.


Use the version 8 graphical equation editor to insert equations into your Corel WordPerfect documents.


When you create or edit equations, use the Corel WordPerfect equation editor that is used in previous versions.


Shows how the columns will appear in your HTML document.


Specify what language Corel WordPerfect runs in, whether or not you want to save the work space or the names of the last documents you edited,  and what kind of help appears for menu items.


Specify when you want visual or audible prompts to alert you about specific actions in Corel WordPerfect.


Specify how you want to create new graphics and equations in your document.


Select this option if you want to drag a box to specify the size of each new graphic. Clear it to insert standard-sized graphics. (You can change the size and position of a graphic after it is inserted.)


Specify which equation editor you want to use when you create new equations.


Each time you create a new equation, Corel WordPerfect prompts you to specify which equation editor to use. When you clear this check box the editor you select above always opens.


Specify the format you want to save most of your documents in. Choose WordPerfect 6/7/8 to share files with users of Corel WordPerfect 6.x for DOS or Windows up to Corel WordPerfect 8.

The Compound format fully integrates with the Windows 95 shell. Users running DOS or Windows 3.1 versions of Corel WordPerfect cannot open files saved in the Compound format.


Restore the selected toolbar, Property Bar, menu, or keyboard to its original state.


Automatically create hyperlinks when you type certain kinds of text such as "www," "ftp," "http," or "mailto." You can also define words that are changed to hyperlinks when you type them in a document.


Specify a word you want to use as a hyperlink each time you type it. An at sign (@) is automatically added to the word. You must type the word with the at sign to create a hyperlink.


Specify the location of the hyperlink. You can specify a URL to an Internet document or a document on your hard disk or local network.


Adds the word to the QuickLinks list.


Deletes the selected word from the QuickLinks list.


Inserts the selected QuickLink word into the document.


Inserts the QuickLink after you type the link word and press the Spacebar, Enter, or Tab.


Specify the type of quotes you want to use in the document.


Specify the words you do not want recognized as the end of a sentence to avoid capitalizing the following word. For example, list frequently used abbreviations such as Corp. or Inc.


Specify the characters you want to use for quotation marks. You can automatically turn straight quotes into curly quotes.


Use straight quotes rather than curly quotes when the quote character follows a number.


Check the options you want to use when typing a document.


Shows the words that are automatically converted to hyperlinks when you type them.


Shows what the QuickWord will look like when it is expanded in the document. Right-click the preview window to change the view: you can display the contents only, see a page view, or view the contents in different text formats.


Specify whether you want the QuickWords expanded with or without formatting; rename an entry; or replace a QuickWord entry with different expanded text.


Create a numbered list in the document using the specified the numbering style.


Change the toolbar, Property Bar or menus you see in the Corel WordPerfect window, or change how keystrokes behave when running Corel WordPerfect.


Lists the available fonts you can choose from.


Corel Versions lists all your archived files in a history list,  allowing you to retrieve any archived file if you need a previous version.


Formats the data in a table; each row is a record, each column is a field. The top row contains the field names or numbers.


Inserts a POSTNET bar code above the first line of the address.


Inserts a POSTNET bar code under the last line of the address.


Select an ODBC data source to associate with the form file you are creating. Click this option, then click Select ODBC Data Source to select the data source.


Identify yourself when you create a comment or document summary.


Change how menus display filenames and help prompts.


Specify whether the current documents and document window arrangements are saved when you exit Corel WordPerfect. When you save the work space, it opens automatically next time you open Corel WordPerfect.


Shows the structure of the SGML document. Double-click a tag to edit tag attributes.


Specify when Corel WordPerfect prompts you for hyphenation, and choose whether you are prompted when you delete codes or table formulas.


Specify when Corel WordPerfect beeps to notify you of certain conditions.


Specify the frame of an HTML document as the destination for a hyperlink.


Describes the item you select in the list above.


Displays the name of the selected numbering or outline type.


Increases the current note number by 1.


Decreases the current note number by 1.


Lets you specify a new number for the current note.


When you format an existing Corel WordPerfect document for the Web, codes that have no HTML equivalents are deleted or changed to an HTML equivalent. If you save the document to the same .wpd filename, you lose the original formatting. Save the web document to a new filename to preserve your original document and formatting.


Lets you specify the note you want to create or edit.


Lets you change the location of your endnotes in your document.


Create a footnote or endnote.


Edit the footnote or endnote you have specified.


Close the dialog and save any changes.


Start new numbering at the current footnote or endnote, change the separator line between document text and footnotes, and change advanced footnote/endnote options.


Select a new color to add to the color palette. Click on the color wheel to select a color. Drag the small square on the light-to-dark sliding scale to lighten or darken the color. To make precise adjustments, select a color model and change the associated number values. Click OK to add the color to the color palette.


Use a numbering or outlining style to organize text in your document.


Use bullets to organize text in your document.


Use Heading, Quotation, or Definition styles to organize text in your document.


This is the name of the selected numbering or outlining type.


Describes the selected numbering or outlining type.


Describes the selected outline or numbering type.


Click the numbering or outline type you want to use to organize text in your document.


Resume a list or outline you started earlier in your document or start a new one.


Resumes a list or outline you started earlier in your document.


Starts a new outline or list at the insertion point.


Specify the footnote number you want to edit or create.


Specify the endnote you want to edit or create.


Tells you where the current list or outline style is stored. You can store styles in a document or in a template.


Tells you where the current list or outline style is stored. You can store styles in a document or in a template.


Display information about the dialog box.


Displays the name of the selected bulleted list type.


Describes the selected bulleted list type.


Describes the selected bulleted list type.


Resume a bulleted list you started earlier in your document or create a new one.


Resume the bulleted list you started earlier in your document.


Start a new bulleted list at the insertion point.


Click the type of bulleted list you want to use.


Displays the name of the current selection.


This is the name of the current selection.


Describes the current selection.


Click the style you want to use to organize text in your document,


The blue marks under text indicate a possible grammatical error. You can click a suggestion to automatically replace the text, click Skip to ignore the phrase, or click Grammatik for more detailed assistance. To turn off proof reading, click Tools > Proofread > Grammar-As-You-Go.


Select this option to create tables within graphics boxes. You can drag to create a table of any size wherever you click the shadow cursor, and text can flow around the table box. Clear this option to create tables at the insertion point that span the page width. All tables can be moved and resized after you create them.


Size table columns to fit the imported data when it is inserted in the document.


Check to use the Corel Open dialog rather than the standard MS Windows Open dialog. The Corel Open dialog provides quick access to your Favorites folder, the Internet, and QuickFinder. You can customize the look of the Corel Open dialog to suit your needs.


Specify the color for the shadow cursor (the pointer that shows exactly where the insertion point will go when you click the mouse).


Change the shape of the shadow cursor (the pointer that shows exactly where the insertion point will go when you click the mouse).


Insert a name for the hidden field you are creating.


Insert the value for the hidden field you are creating.


Hidden fields provide form information without any direct user input.


If this option is selected, mis-typed words that have only one possible correction will be automatically replaced. Use this option only if you are confident that your document uses words found in the standard word list. Unusual spellings and proper nouns might be changed automatically when you select this option.


Copies the format of table cells you have selected so you can apply the format to other table cells.


Copies the format of the current table so you can apply the format to other tables.


Insert a date code that automatically updates when you open or print the document (Ctrl+Shift+D).


Click an item to the right of the check box to view a description.


Click to use the body text, hypertext link, and background colors specified by the browser, rather than the custom colors you specify above.


Type a name for the text area you are creating.


Type any default text that will appear in the text box.


Specify how wide you want the text area to be.


Specify how high you want the text area to be.


Specify the maximum number of characters that can be typed into the text area.


Specify the size of the text area and how text looks when it is typed into it.


Click if you do not want text to wrap within the text area.


Click if you want text to appear wrapped within the text area as the user types. When the information from the form is sent back to you, it will not be wrapped.


Click if you want text to appear wrapped within the text area as the user types, and also sent to you wrapped. This option inserts hard break codes as the user types.


Type a name for the radio button or check box you are creating.


Enter the value for the form field you are creating.


Check this box if you want the radio button or check box you are creating to be selected by default. The radio button or check box can be deselected when the form is filled out.


Specify a name, value, and default setting for the radio button or check box.


Use the graphic as a form button. A user will click the graphic to submit a completed web form to the server.


Type a name for the list box or combo box you are creating.


To add items to your list box or combo box, click the Add button. Select an existing item in this list box to modify or delete it.


Click to move the selected item in the list box up one place.


Click to move the selected item in the list box down one place.


Check this box to allow the user to select more than one option in your list box or combo box.


Specify how many lines will be visible in your list box at one time.


Click to add an item to your list box or combo box.


Click to change the properties for the selected item in the list box.


Click to delete the selected item in the list box.


Add, edit, move, or delete items in the list box or combo box. Specify the height of the list box and whether the user can check multiple items.


This column shows the names of any options you have created with the Add button.


This column shows the default state of each option you have created (initially selected or unselected).


This column shows the value you have assigned to each option you have created with the Add button.


Type a shortened version of your paper (usually a descriptive paragraph) in the text box.


Identifies the root and folder path to your document.


Select the type of password protection you want.


Click to make any text typed into the text area become password text. The text is not displayed on the form.


Click to make any text typed into this text area remain regular text.  It is visible on the form.


You can associate a bookmark with selected text. You can then go to that bookmark and the text is automatically selected for you. To do this, select the text before you create the bookmark and make sure this check box is selected.


The shadow cursor snaps to the left or right margin, or to the center between margins. When you click in white space the insertion point can only go to one of these positions.


The shadow cursor snaps to current tab settings. When you click in white space the insertion point is placed at the nearest tab. Text continues from that position to the end of the line and then continues at the beginning of the next line.


The shadow cursor snaps to the current tab settings. When you click in white space, the insertion point is placed at the nearest tab, and text is indented at that position until you press Enter.


The shadow cursor snaps to the nearest space. When you click in white space the insertion point is placed where you click. Tabs and spaces are added on the line before this position. The text you type continues to the end of the line, then starts again at the beginning of the next line.


Select a different bullet character for a bulleted list. You can then select that type of bulleted list from this dialog box.


Select the font style you want applied to text in a heading level, paragraph style, or list style.


Select the point size you want applied to text in a heading level, paragraph style, or list style.


Select the color you want applied to text in a heading level, paragraph style, or list style.


The shadow cursor displays only in areas on the page where there is text. In text it points between letters, at tabs between words, and at blank lines.


The shadow cursor displays in the white space on the page, not in areas where you have added text or graphics. It snaps to (lines up with) the item you select (margins, tabs, indents, or spaces).


The shadow cursor displays in all areas of the page. The pointer shape changes depending on whether it is in a text area or in white space.


Specify the web server path that contains all the graphics images you are using in your document when you place it out on the World Wide Web.


Specify whether the list is a single level list or a multi level list (such as a traditional outline).


Type a name for the button you are creating. This name does not appear on the form itself.


Type a label for the button you are creating. This label will appear on the form.


Create a button that will reset (clear) or submit the information the user has typed.


Select to create a button that resets the form (returns all fields to the default state).


Select to create a button that sends back the information the user has entered in the web form.


Enter the location of the program that will process the form (such as a CGI script).


If the method you select below is Post, enter the MIME type that specifies the format of the posted data.


Enter the information for your forms processing program (such as a CGI script). Check the documentation of the forms processing program if you do not have all the information you need for this dialog box.


Select a method of submission for the data entered into your form on the web. If you select Post, you must fill in the MIME script information above.


Specify whether the list is a single level list or a multi level list (such as a traditional outline).


Select or type text you want to appear before the number or bullet on the selected level.


Select or type the number or bullet you want to appear on the selected level.


Select the number of zeros you want to appear before the number on the selected level.


Specify the name of the class file that loads the applet.


If the class file and supporting libraries are not located in the same folder as the web document, specify the path relative to the location of the web document.


Specify a width for the applet bounding box.


Specify a height for the applet bounding box.


Specify alternate text for those using web browsers that are not Java-enabled.


Click to specify any necessary parameters for the applet.


Specify the class, location, size, name, and alternate text for the Java applet you are inserting in your web document.


Edit the selected list or outline style.


Create a list or outline style.


Specify a number to represent a multiple of the current line spacing. For example, if line spacing is set at 1.5, specifying 2 for paragraph spacing will insert three lines between each paragraph.


Specify the number of points you want between paragraphs. There are 72 points in one inch.


Specify where you want to save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard. Save it with the current template (the one used by the active document) or the default template (the one you use for all new documents). If you have selected an additional objects template, you can save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with that template.


Displays the name of the default template.


Displays the name of the current template.


Save the toolbar, keyboard, or menu with the current template (the template the active document uses).


Save the toolbar, menu, or keyboard with the default template (the one used for all new documents).


Select the relative size of text for buttons on the toolbar or Property Bar.


This column shows the names of any parameters you have added.


This column shows the value you have assigned to the parameter named in the left column.


To add parameters to this list, click the Add button. Select an existing parameter in this list box to delete or modify it.


Click to change the parameter selected in the list box.


Click to add a parameter for the Java applet you are inserting.


Type a name for the parameter you are adding, or change the name of the selected parameter.


Enter the value for the parameter you are adding, or change the value for the selected parameter.


Add or modify a parameter for the Java applet you are inserting.


Specify a setting for Table borders, Cell spacing, Inside cell margins, or Background Color, and see the results displayed here.


Specify the table appearance options you want. The results are displayed in the preview box.


Specify a pixel width (0-200) for the outside table border. The result is displayed in the preview box.


Specify a pixel width (0-200) for the space that surrounds each table cell. The result is displayed in the preview box.


Specify a pixel width (0-200) for the inside margins of each cell in the table. The result is displayed in the preview box.


Select a table background color from the palette. The result is displayed in the preview box.


Select a left or right position for the table.


Select a top, center, or bottom position for the contents of each cell in the table. The result is displayed in the preview box.


Automatically inserts a new row when you press Tab in the last cell of the table.


Select to disable all cell locks in the table.


Specify the number of columns and rows you want for the table.


Specify the number of columns (1-64) you want for the table.


Specify the number of rows you want for the table.


Select Table width to specify the width of your table using pixels or a percentage.


Select Table height to specify the height of your table using pixels or a percentage.


Specify the width of the top and bottom borders around the applet bounding box.


Specify the width (in pixels) of the left and right borders around the applet bounding box.


Specify the alignment of the applet within the bounding box. You can preview the result of your selection in the Web Editor.


Click to preview the results of the selections you have made in this dialog box.


Type a name for the Java applet you are inserting in your web document.


Type a name for an option you want to add to your list box or combo box, or change the name for the selected option.


Enter the value for the option you are adding to your list box or combo box, or change the value for the selected option.


Check this box if you want the option you are creating or modifying to be selected by default. The option can be deselected when the form is filled out.


Add or modify an option you are including in your list box or combo box.


Click to download the graphics or sound files associated with the HTML document to your computer. The graphics and sound files are saved to the Graphics folder specified in File Settings by default.

If deselected, the graphics appear in the document when you open it in Corel WordPerfect, but remain on the Internet server.


Specify the folder to save the graphics in. Corel WordPerfect uses the Graphics folder specified in File Settings by default.


Specify the format you want any non-GIF or non-JPEG images converted to.


Use the graphic as an image map, a hyperlink, or as a button to submit a web form to the server.


Specify the width and spacing of the border around the graphics image.


Shows where the graphic is located on your computer or local network.


Specify the name of an alternate, lower-resolution graphic. Users connected to the Internet via a modem rather than a direct network connection will be able to gain quicker access to your web document.


Type the correct spelling of the word in the Replace column. If that word is an abbreviation, type the expanded form of the word.


Lists the QuickWords you can type in the document. You can click a QuickWord in this list and click Insert in text to insert the expanded form at the insertion point.


Inserts the expanded QuickWord when you type it and press the Spacebar, Enter, or Tab. If a QuickWord is longer than two words it cannot be expanded as you type. If you do not select this option, you can expand a QuickWord in the document by selecting the QuickWord and pressing Ctrl+Shift+A.


Change the abbreviated form of the QuickWord.


Type the new abbreviated form of the QuickWord.


Choose a background color for the table row. You can create reversed text by choosing a black background, then changing the text color to white.


Change the background color for the current column. By changing the color of a column you can make the table easier to read.


Change how the text is aligned in the column.


Change how the text is aligned in this cell or in the group of selected cells.


Change the background color for the current cell or for the set of selected cells.


Change the formatting for the cell or for the selected set of cells.


Lock the cell so the contents cannot be changed accidently.


Ignore the contents of this cell or of the selected range of cells when performing calculations on a table.


Apply the same formatting to the cell or to the selected range of cells as the table header.


Do not wrap the text in the cell.


Close this text box editing window and return to the document. To open this window again, click inside the text box.


Click this button to switch between Typeover and Insert modes. When Typeover is active, the text you type replaces the existing text at the insertion point. Clicking this button is the same as pressing the Insert key on your keyboard.


Click this button to restore any of your last three deletions. When you use Undo, deleted information is restored in its original location. When you use this Undelete button you restore the information at the insertion point. This means you can restore the deleted information in another location or restore it multiple times in the document.


Specify the location of the data you want to use in your merge.


Select the location of the ODBC database that contains the data you want to use in your merge.


Select the location of the table within the database that contains the  merge data.


Click this button to close the active editing window or toolbar.


In an outline or list ordered with letters, use AA, AB, AC, and so on after you have used A through Z. (If this option is not selected the letters are ordered AA, BB, CC, and so on.)


Images typically appear top-to-bottom as they download. Click to download graphics so that a rough image appears first, with details  appearing as it downloads. It takes the same amount of time to download the image, but the image can actually be usable before all the details are downloaded.


Click to change the white space that appears around an image, such as a company logo, so it matches the page background.


Click to choose a color that matches the page background color.


Type a name for the list/outline format you are creating.


Type a description for the list/outline format you are creating.


Click a number set for your new list/outline style on the drop down list.  Or click User Defined, then define the number set below.


Select a new style for the selected level.


Displays the number you have defined for each level of your outline style.


Define the number style and levels for your new list or outline format. Click the Help button for more information.


Move any guideline by dragging the arrow pointer [image]. When this option is not selected, you can make changes only by using menus or toolbar buttons.


Publish the current file to Barista and save it to your computer or to a local network location.


Publish the current file to Barista.


Click to browse for the folder and filename you want.


Click the Send tab to publish locally.  Click the Advanced tab if you are publishing to a web server.


If you are publishing your Barista file to a web server, you can point to the Barista class files instead of copying them into the folder with your Barista documents.


Enter the folder and filename where you want to save your Corel Barista document. The folder should be on your computer or on a local network, not on a web server.


Check Launch browser if you want your Barista file to open immediately in your web browser.


Check this if you want to point to a folder that contains your Barista program files instead of copying them into the folder that contains your Barista documents.


Enter the path to the web folder that contains the Barista class files.


In a document's white space, the shadow cursor aligns with (snaps to) different positions. You can have the shadow cursor snap to the left and right margins and center of the line, or snap to tabs. If you snap to spaces the shadow cursor can line up at almost any point on a line. These options are unavailable if you select Active in Text.


Specify where on the page you want the Shadow Cursor to appear.


Click Numbers to select a numbering style for lists or outlines.  Click Bullets to select a bullet style.  Click Text to create headings, quotations, or definitions. Use this dialog box to create lists, outlines, and text that will look the same when your document is converted to HTML.


Use the options on the Text tab to create formatted text that will look the same when you convert your document to HTML.